QWT OIF
Prof. G. R. Noyes
PRACTICAL
RUSSIAN GRAMMAR
PART I
BY
R. T. CURRALL, MA.
I
SENIOR MODERN LANGUAGE MASTER
GEORGE Watson's college
EDINBURGH
D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS
BOSTON NEW YORK CHICAGO
^<:^^ ^'
/^.... ^'< 2t^>^
PREFACE
Personal experience in commencing the study of Russian, con-
firmed by more recent experience in teaching classes supplied with
one of the best of existing manuals, has convinced the compiler of
this book that Russian grammar, if presented from the same end
as that at which the study of Latin or French or German is usually
begun, will always appear to be more formidable than it is. This
book, the manuscript of which was practically complete before the
end of December 1916, is an attempt to deal with the subject
starting from a rather unusual point. The plan, however, once it is
explained, may commend itself to teachers working with classes
of younger pupils and to adult private students, and it is hoped
that it will justify the book's claim to the title of a ' practical '
grammar.
In Russian, though it is possible to express many a simple
thought or command without actually using a verb at all, the verb
is still, as in our own speech, the " soul of the sentence," and
is the part of speech which offers the greatest difficulty to strangers.
The distinctive feature of the Russian verb is the system of
' Aspects,' the theory of which can be made clear to a serious
student in half an hour (see Lesson LI of this book). But the
appHcation of this theory to the practical purposes of reading and
writing depends upon a thorough knowledge of the forms of the
present tense. Unfortunately the present tense of the Russian
6
__...._ KAi^Qnrrr^^ _
6 PKEFACE
verb, while it is beyond question the most frequently employed of all
the forms, is for a beginner something Hke a maze in its apparent
confusion of consonantal and accentual changes. More real and, in
the final result, more rapid progress may be made if we take what
may seem at first sight to be a longer way round.
It happens that the past tense of Eussian verbs is remarkably
regular and simple, having only four endings ^mascuHne, feminine,
and neuter singular and one plural identical in form with those of
nouns of corresponding gender and number. Upon that fact this
method is based. We begin with the past tense.
From the first lesson sentences are constructed and read, but
while the student is learning the common forms of nouns, pronouns,
and adjectives his attention is not simultaneously being distracted
by the vagaries of the verb, for the past tense requires hardly any
special study. When a considerable number of verbs have by
mere iteration become famihar, the present is taken up, the student
having the advantage of learning the forms without at the same
time having to acquire a completely new set of words. Not until
a useful store of material has been accumulated and is at command
is the presentation of the Aspects attempted.
Participles are of very frequent occurrence in Russian texts :
their forms must therefore be known. These have been indicated
in the grammatical summary at page 35 and illustrated in
notes to the paragraphs referred to on page 35, but otherwise
participles have been systematically ignored. There is much to
be done by the beginner before he need concern himself seriously
with the study of participles in composition. Indeed the foreigner
who does not enjoy complete mastery of the language, provided he
PEEFACE 7
can recognize participles in his reading, may get along very well
by tlie use of adverbial and relative clauses.
Numerous summaries in tbe form of Lists bave been given as an
aid to clearness.
For those who hesitate to adopt uncompromisingly the plan
of the book, some suggestions as to its use have been given on
page 36.
Much attention has been devoted to the important matters of
Script and Pronunciation. For those who value such things a
phonetic transcript of every word used in the exercises and of the
Kussian exercises themselves is given . As for the system of phonetics
adopted, it will be found to be approximately exact, though,
especially with regard to the representation of certain unaccented
vowels, there may be occasional and considerable divergence
of opinion.
The Vocabularies at the end of the book are, it is hoped, complete.
Users of the book will welcome the arrangement of the general
Russian-EngHsh vocabulary of verbs.
The total number of words employed is considerable, but as
the main purpose of this volume is to impress on the memory the
essential forms of the language, the forms that must be mastered
by the learner, there is a good deal of deliberate iteration in the
exercises.
For illustrations of many kinds indebtedness is acknowledged first
of all to Tolstoi's AsSyKa and KHHrn njifl HxeniH , which
* Primer ' and * Readers ' have exercised a very marked influence
on the substance and arrangement of many a Russian school-book
pubhshed since Tolstoi gave up his experiments as a dominie.
8 PEEFACE
Secondly, reference has been made to many admirable books issued
in Russia with tbe approval of the Eussian Government for the
teacbing of Eussian to foreign children in Eussian schools. Three
series of this kind that deserve to become widely known among
those interested in the teaching of Eussian are :
MnxeeB'B, KHHrH hjih HTeHifl, pubhshed by the
LJeHTpajibHafl Tnnorpa^ia in Kazan ;
flaBHCb, Poji;hoh Mip-L)), pubhshed by K. F. SnxMaH'b
in Eiga ;
BoJibnept, PyccKafl P-h^b)), pubhshed by the author in
Petrograd.
While he is alone responsible for the plan of the book and
whatever faults it may still contain, the compiler gratefully
expresses his sense of obhgation to his friend Mr James Melville,
of George Heriot's School, in whose company he began the study of
Eussian, and who has kindly read the proofs of this book. Finally,
for the care he has taken with the printing more than a word of
thanks is due to Messrs. E. & E. Clark's reader.
E. T. C.
Edinburgh, September 1917
CONTENTS
PREFACE
INTRODUCTION 13
Pars. I and II. The Alphabet 13
Par. III. Phonetic Symbols used . . . . .15
Par. IV. Hard and Soft Vowels 16
Par. V. Voiced and Voiceless Consonants . . . .16
Par. VI. Pronunciation ...... 16
Par. VII. Contents of Pars. VIII-XX .... 17
Pars. VIII-XX. Examples and Phonetic Values of the Letters 17-31
Par. XXI. Importance of learning Accent . . .31
Par. XXII. Summary of Regular Forms . . . 32-35
PAGE
5
SUGGESTIONS for the Use of this Book
36
LESSONS I-LVI
As Pronouns are used in every Lesson, beginning with the first, they
are not often separately mentioned in headings of Lessons.
I. PAST TENSE OF VERB
1. Masculine and Neuter Nouns in Singular
LESSON
I. Typical Masculine Nominative Singular Noun (hard form) and
Adjective. " Is," " is not " .
II. Masculine Singular Past Tense. Nominative Singular of Pronouns,
Personal, Possessive, Interrogative .....
III. Genitive, Dative, and Accusative of Nouns in "b. Pronouns
IV. Use of y with Genitive to translate " to have " .
V. Masculine Noun Soft Forms in h and ii. Genitive after flsa,
TpH, HeTTiipe . . . . .
VI. Genitive in Negative and Partitive Forms. Infinitive
VII. Neuter Nouns in o, e Four Cases. Neuter Adjectives. Certain
General Rules of Orthography .....
9
37
38
41
44
45
47
49
10 CONTENTS
VIII. Neuter Past Tense. Reflexive Verb Hp^BHTbCfl. Dative
with Kt .
IX. XOHHJI-L and meji-b. Idioms with Infinitive. Complete Declen
sion of Masculine and Neuter Nouns. Instrumental Case
X. Prepositional Case. Forms in ;y^
XI. Revision of Pronouns .....
Paes. 48-50. ^Accentuation of Masculine and Neuter Nouns that have
occurred. Lists ......
Pab. 51. Prepositions that have occurred ...
2. Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter Nouns in Singular
XII. Feminine Nouns in a and h. Rules of Orthography
XIII. Feminine Adjectives, oiiiih'b, OHHa, ojiiHO .
XIV. Feminine Form of Past Tense. Pronouns
XV. Prepositions Bt and Ha. Compounds of meji'B
XVI. Same subjects as last Lesson : Accusative and Prepositional
51
53
56
59
61
61
62
63
65
66
68
70
71
73
XVII. Feminine Nouns in b .
XVIII. Idiomatic Uses of Instrumental Case
XIX. Prepositions with Genitive ....
3. Complete Declension of Noun and Adjective
Pars. 72-79. Nouns that have occurred classified according to Form
and Accentuation of Plural. Lists . . . .76
XX. Plural of Past Tense. Pronouns. Adjectives. Suggestions
for the learning of the Plurals of Nouns and incidentally for
the impressing of the Vocabulary in Lessons I-XIX . 81
XXI. Plurals and Pronouns . . . . . .84
XXII. MaTb and aoqb. Preposition no with Dative . . 85
XXIII. Complete Declension of the Adjective. Forms in Liii, an, oe,
and 6tt, an, 6e . . . . . . . 87
XXIV. Declension of Adjective in ifi, hh, ee . . . .89
XXV. Declension of Adjective in nift, Kan, Koe . . .90
XXVI. Declension of Adjective in hIh, qafl, qee . . .91
XXVII. A few very common Irregular Past Tenses. lueji'b and
"fexaJi-B. Translation of ' from ' . . . .92
XXVIII. Prepositions ao and npo. Indefinite 3rd Plural. Passive
Voice. Reflexive Pronoun . . . . .95
XXIX. Pronouns : CBOfi and forms similarly declined . . 98
XXX. Dative, Instrumental, and Prepositional Plurals of Nouns and
Adjectives ....... 101
XXXI. Some Useful Idioms 102
CONTENTS 11
LESSON PAGE
Pars. 117-119. List of Nouns occurring for the first time in Lessons
XX-XXXI, classified according to Form and Accentua-
tion ........ 104
Par. 120. Prepositions that have occurred .... 106
Note. Genitive Plurals are discussed in Lessons XXXVI, XL, XLV.
II. FUTURE AND PRESENT TENSES
Pars. 121, 122. Lists of Verbs that have occurred classified (1) according
to Aspect A Imperfective, B Perfective ; (2) under A,
according to form of Present Tense . . . 106
1. Future Tense
XXXII. Future of 6biTb. Future of any A Verb . . .108
XXXIII. Complete Plurals of Personal Pronouns . . . 109
XXXIV. Time Phrases . . . . . . .110
2. Present Tense of I A Verbs
XXXV. Endings of Present Tense ; Two Main Types. Present Tense
of jt^jiaTb Type . . . . . .112
XXXVI. Genitive Plural of Masculine Nouns. Numerals 5-10, 20 . 116
3. Present Tense of II A Verbs
XXXVII. Type CTOib, CTOiinib. Distinction between cujifkih and
caHHTbCfl. Sequence of Tenses . . . .117
XXXVIII. Type ctok), CTonnib. Numerals 11-19 . . .120
XXXIX. Type CMOxpib, CMOTpninb. Numerals 30-100 . . 122
XL. Genitive Plural of Feminine Nouns. Numerals 100-1000.
Adverbs of Quantity ...... 124
XLI. Revision Past, Present, Future . . . .127
4. Present Tense of I A Verbs with Consonantal
Stem, or Stem in 'h
XLII. Type JKHB^, >KHBemb. VariousForms of Infinitive. xoA^Tb
and HTTii. Compounds of htth, their Future Tense . 129
XLIII. Monosyllabic Verbs : nnxb ; H^axb. Ordinal Numerals
lst-19th 133
XLIV. Type nnm;^, nHineuib. Regular Consonantal Changes.
Ordinal Numerals 20th-100th . . . .136
XLV. Genitive Plural of Neuter Nomis . . . .139
XL VI. Exercises on the Verbs of all Types discussed in Lessons
XXXII-XLV 140
12 CONTENTS
Lessons ivhich may be read at any time after Lesson XX, though the
exercises cannot he worked with any satisfaction till after Lesson XL VI.
LESSON PAGE
XL VII. On Numerals Declension, etc. Ordinal Numerals from 100th
upwards ........ 142
XL VIII. Verbs governing Instrumental Case . . . .146
XLIX. Predicative Adjective ...... 149
L. Comparison of Adjectives . . . . . .152
in. THE ASPECTS OF THE VERB
LI. Explanation of this feature of the Russian Verb. Illustrative
Passages with Translation . . . . .155
LII. The Imperative. Salutations. Distinction between Imper-
fective and Perfective Imperative. Verbs in Vocabulary
grouped in Classes according to formation of Aspects . 164
LIII. Declension of Bp^MH. Verbs ifecTb, "fexaTb, xot'^tb.
Conditional. Verbs in Vocabulary grouped as in Lesson LII 168
LIV. Verbs in OBaxb and BieaTb. Mixture of Tenses. ' Whether.'
Verbs grouped as in Lesson LII . . . .172
LV. Declension of ^hth and peGcHOK-b. Nouns in anHH-b. Verb
AaeaTb. Verbs grouped as in Lesson LII . . . 176
LVI. Long and Short. Construction with Verbs of Wishing and
Fearing. Distinction between caMTb and c^Mbiii . .180
List of Prepositions . . . . . . .185
List of Adjectives showing Form and Accentuation of Predicative . 186
Examples of Predicative Comparative in e . . . .188
A FEW Irregular Verbs . . . . . . .189
Examples of Russian Script . . . . . .190
Phonetic Transcript of the Exercises . . . .194
VOCABULARIES :
Verbs Russian-English . . . . . .210
General Vocabulary : Russian-English (no Verbs) . . 217
General Vocabulary: English-Russian .... 229
INDEX . . . 246
INTRODUCTION
I. The Kussian alphabet is called the Cyrillic, as its creation is
rightly or wrongly ascribed to St. Cyril, a Greek missionary, of the
ninth century who carried Christianity to the Slavs of Macedonia.
This alphabet is based on the Greek capitals. It includes a few
letters corresponding to Latin characters of similar form, a few
more that have the form but not the value of Latin sjnubols, and
several entirely new symbols that must have been invented.
As applied to modem Russian the alphabet is, for various
historical reasons, by no means perfect in its approximation to
the phonetic ideal. It is, however, for the purpose of representing
a Slav tongue far better adapted than the Latin character, for,
once the Cyrillic alphabet is mastered, it is seen that the words are
neither so long nor so barbarous in appearance in their native dress
as when transliterated for EngUsh readers. The Czechs, Poles,
and other Northern Slavs (exclusive of the Russians) use the
Latin character, while the Russians, Bulgars, Serbs, and most other
Southern Slavs use the Cyrillic.
II. THE ALPHABET
Printed
ItaKc
Phonetic
Characters
Characters
Symbols
A, a (viii) 1
A,
a
[a] [a]
B, 6 (XI v)
E,
6
[b] [b]
B, B (xiv)
B,
e
[v] [v]
r, r (XV)
r,
8
[g] [g] [g]
;.ln^^^^ fl a (xvi)
a.
d
[d] [d]
-Z/ ' E, e(ix)
E,
e
[J8] [je] [j9]
^ Paragraph in which illustrations of the phonetic value of each letter will be
found. Specimens of script are given at pages 190-193.
13
14
INTRODUCTION
Printed
ItaUo
Phonetic
Characters
Characters
Symbols
E, e (xi)
E,
e
[jo]
}K, m (xviii)
m.
MC
[3]
3, 3 (xvii)
3,
3
[2] [i]
H, H(X)
a.
U
P]
I>i i(x)
I,
i
[i]
IT, fi(x)
a.
a
P]
K, K (xv)
K,
K
[k] [k]
JI, JI (xx)
JI,
JI
[t] [i]
M, M (xix)
M,
M
[m] [m]
H, H (xix)
H,
H
W [A]
0, (xi)
0,
[0] [a]
n, n (xiv)
n.
n
[P] [p]
P, p (xx)
p.
P
[r] [r]
C, c (xviii)
c.
c
[s] M
T, T (xvi)
T,
m
[t] [t]
y, y(xii)
y.
y
[u]
<D, $ (xiv)
o.
[i] m
X, X (xv)
X,
X
M
l\, ^ (xvi)
^,
^
[ts] [ts]
H, H (xviii)
1,
H
[tn
in, m (xvm)
in,
Ul
[S]
lU,, m (xviii)
m,
m
[StJ]
"L, T> (xiii)
rb.
b
None
bl, Bl (x)
hi.
u
p]
h, h (xiii)
h.
b
[^] [J]
% ^(ix)
B,
Tb
[is] [je] [j9] [jo]
a, 3 (ix)
9,
3
[s] [e]
K), K) (xii)
10,
10
[ju]
H, fl (vm)
H,
a
[ja] [JA] [J9]
9, e (xiv)
e.
e
[f] [i]
Y, V this letter is another
'i';
it is no longer in use.
There is no h, no w, no x; these are usually represented by r,
B, KG respectively. Certain symbols are redundant, e.g. i, ^, and
others have to stand for more than one distinct sound.
INTRODUCTION 15
III. The phonetic symbols employed in the transcript are as
follows : ^
Vowels
[a] as in * father.'
[a] as in * another.'
[e] as in * them.'
[e] as in * the^/.'
[a] as in * mother.'
[i] as in *b*t' (but see Par. X, note 1).
[i] as in * been.'
[i] second half of diphthong in words like * boi/,' * mi/,' * tr?/.'
[o] as in * yon.'
[u] as in * too.'
[j] to represent sound of EngHsh y before any vowel.
[ ] The dot placed over any consonant indicates that the consonant is to be
pronounced ' soft,' i.e. to be palataUzed (French mouilU).
[( Y] added to a vowel indicates that a very faint i is audible just before the
succeeding consonant.
Consonants
Labials (6, n, b, 4>> )
[b] as in *6ooty,' [b] as in *6eauty.' [p] as in *^at,' [p] as in *pure.'
[v] as in * van,' [v] as in * t;iew.' [f] as in */ar,' [f J as in */ew.'
GUTTUBALS (r, K, X).
[g] as in * gfood,' [g] as in * %urative.'
[g] voiced form of ch which is sometimes written in EngUsh gh (North
German ' wegren ' with the g aspirated),
[k] as in * Aick,' [k] as in * Z^ew.'
[x] as in ' ic^ ' (German), softer than ch in * loch.'
Dentals (h, t, i^).
[d] as in *c?one,' [d] as in * due.' [t] as in *<ool,' [t] as in *<une.'
Sibilants (1) (3, c).
[z] as in * ma^e ' ; [z] as in * (he) sees you ' spoken as one word,
[s] as in * I055 ' ; [s] as in * disunion.'
(2) (JK, m, q, m).
[j] as in * hush ' ; [5] as in * azure.' (Of. Par. XVIII.)
Nasals (m, h).
[m] as in * wan ' ; [m] as in * muse.' [n] as in * wone ' f [n] as in * news.*
Liquids (ji, p).
[t] as in * cattZe ' ; [1] as in * mi^^on.' [r] as in *JRussia ' ; [r] as in * Hamet."
16 INTRODUCTION
IV. Russian Vowels fall into two exactly corresponding series
called hard vowels and soft vowels. This distinction is most im-
portant, as it meets one at every turn in Russian orthography,
and the observation of the exact correspondence will reduce by one
half the labour of memorizing conjugations and declensions.
The hard vowels are :
a [a] 3[s]or[e] H [i] o [o] y [u]
The soft or palatal vowels corresponding are :
H [ja] e, 'fe [j8] or [je] h, 1, Vl [i] [i] e [jo] lo [ju]
There are, further, two signs that occupy much space in Russian
printing, viz. !> and b : !> is called the ' hard ' sign, and indicates
merely the absence of h, the ^ soft ' sign. (See Par. XIII.)
No Russian word is written with a consonant as the last letter :
a word must end in a vowel or in Tb or b. These two signs were
themselves originally vowels.
V. It is often convenient to distinguish voiceless consonants
(n, $, K, X, T, c, m) from voiced consonants (6, b, r, r [g], n, 3, m),
while certain consonants {m, m, H, m), are by nature soft, in the
sense that they tend to palatalize even the hard vowels.
VI. PRONUNCIATION
The articulation of the individual sounds in Russian is not so
difficult for an English-speaking person as is the correct production
of French sounds. The one serious difficulty in Russian pronuncia-
tion lies in the fact that Russian more than other European tongues
resembles English in two important respects : the accent is variable,
and only the accented vowels have their full normal value. That
is to say, in order to pronounce a Russian word with a semblance
of correctness, one must know on which syllable the accent falls,
and bear in mind that unaccented vowels are for the most part
short and relatively obscure, though long compound words often
have what may be called a secondary accent.
INTRODUCTION
17
Voiced consonants standing before final !> or B tend to become
voiceless (see preceding paragraph), but this tendency should not
be exaggerated, especially in monosyllables.
In Paragraphs VIII to XX numerous examples illustrating
all ordinary combinations of letters are given.
VII. The following pages. Par. VIII to Par. XX, show for every
letter of the alphabet :
(1) Printed Character
(2) Italic
(3) Russian Nanfie
(4) Phonetic Value
Examples. Explanatory notes.
The letters of the Alphabet are arranged in the following order :
Vowels :
a, H (Par. VIII) ; 3, e, ife (Par. IX) ; bi, h, i, ft (Par. X) ; o, e (Par.
XI) ; y, 10 (Par. XII) ; -b, b (Par. XIII).
Cotisonants :
Labials (Par. XIV).
Gutturals (Par. XV).
Dentals (Par. XVI).
Sibilants (1) (Par. XVII) ; (2) (Par. XVIII).
Nasals (Par. XIX).
Liquids (Par. XX).
VIII. (1)
A
a, A a.
Name : a. Value :
[a] (acceni
[a] (unaccented)
).
AnrjilH
AmjiiR
[dngiiJA(ijA)]i
England
noKaaajl'b
noKasajih
[pAkAzat]2,i
he showed
KapaHflami.
KapaHdaiuh
[kArAnddJ]2,i
pencil
HaCOBOH
Hacoeou
[tJASAv6i]3
sentry
jKapa
oicapa
[3Ard]3
heat
^ ' a' when accented has the sound of a in 'father,' =[a].
2 ' a ' when not accented has the sound of a or o in * another,' = [a].
3 ' a ' when unaccented after the consonants -m, 'i, m, m retains so little
of the original open [a] sound that it might often be rendered by the
symbol [a]; i.e. it becomes almost as obscure as the last vowel of 'another.*
But it has been thought advisable not to insist on this refinement in the
phonetic transcript.
18
INTRODUCTION
Soft vowel corresponding to * a ' :
(2) H. H, H H. Name : h. Value : [ja] (accented), [ja, jo]
(iinaccented).
(This vowel never follows r, k, x, m, h, m, m.)
Hn6HiH
jiroaa
fl3lilK'B
eA C
3anpiiri>
;^qHTCH
1
Hnoma
Rzoda
HdblKh
ea.
aanpRZh
ynumcR
[J9p6niJA (nJA)] 2. 8
Japan
[jagAdA]!
berry
[jaztk]2
tongue
[i9j6,j9jd]4
of her, Tier
[zAprok] *
he yoked
[<itJitSA]5
learns
when accented has the sound of ya as in '2/^k,' = [ja, a],
when unaccented has the sound of ye in ' lawyer,' =[J9, a].
in the unaccented terminations -h, -ifl in nouns =[ja].
in a very few words has the value of yo in ' yon,^ =[jo o].
in the syllable -CH of reflexive verbs =[a].
(1) dd,99. Name : 9 odopoTHoe (e reversed). Value: [s, e].
dcrruiRudiH [estiandiJA (dJA)] ^ Esthonia
dmonih [stAt] ^ tUsy that
dmu [6ti]2 these, those
SMUZpaHmb [emigrant] * emigrant
^ ' 3 ' before a consonant or a group of consonants followed by the hard
sign or any hard vowel has the open sound of the vowel in ' them,' = [s].
2 ' 3 ' before a consonant or a group of consonants followed by the soft sign
or by any soft vowel has the close sound of the vowel in ' they,' ' hate,' = [e].*
Soft vowels corresponding to * 3 ' :
e. Value: [js, je] (accented), [jo, 9]
IX.
BCTJIHHAifl
^TOT-B
SMHrpdHTt
(2) Ee, E
e. Name
(unaccented).
EBp6na
Eepona
M^jioqb
MCJlOHb
BCCb
eecb
CKaM^HKa
cKaMeuna
Mope
Mope
[J9vr6pA] 8
[ril^tAtJ]!
[ves] or [ves] ^
[skAm6ikA] 2
[more] ^
Europe
trifle
all, whole
bench, seat
sea
^ ' e ' when accented and preceding a consonantal group followed by the
hard sign or a hard vowel has the open sound of ye in ' yet,' = [J6, s].
2 ' e ' when accented and preceding a consonantal group followed by the
soft sign or any soft vowel has the close sound of the vowel in ' yea,' = [je, e].
^ ' e ' when unaccented has the value oi ^ye' in * lawyer ' = [ja, a].
For the value of * e ' see Par. XI (2).
* Care must be taken not to pronounce this sound like the Southern English
1 or ei. Russian vowels are pure vowels, not diphthongs.
INTKODUCTION 19
(3) 'h %, "B 7b. Name : htb. Value : same as that of ' e.'
-fesAHTb
Tbadumh
[j^zdit]
to ride, drive, travel
i^ymift
Tbdyu^iu
[jsdujtji]
travelling, traveller
'feji'b
TbAh
[jst]
he ate
*CTb
Tbcmh
[jest]
to eat
TflJKCJI^e
mROfcejivbe
[t839l6J9]
heavier
-hsjidK-b
TbSdOKh
[jazdok]
traveller, passenger
BlkjlfbTh
eudrhTYih
[vfd9t]
to see
3B^3JS,U
aemadbi
[zvozdi]!
stars
^BifeJI'b
v^erbjib
[tSVot]!
was blooming
TH'feana
8H7b3da
[gnosdA] ^
nests
npio6p';fejn>
npio6prbJih
[priAbrot] 1
he obtained
ci^Jia
CTbdjia
[s6dtA]i
saddles
This letter is superfluous, as it has no sound which is not also represented
by * e.'
It has the sounds [js, je, J9] according to the same rules as *e.'
1 In a few words ' -h ' has the sound of * e,' =[jo, o], for which see Par.
XI (2).
X. (1)
LI
H, hi bi. Name : epH.
Value: [i].
(This vowel
is never initial and never follows
r, K, X, m, H, m, m.
TBI
mbi [ti] 1
thm
MblTb
Mbimb [mit] 1
to wash
Mbm^Tb
Mbmamb [mitja^t] ^
to low, bellow
6bITb
dumb [bit] 1
to be
6bITOB6H
dbimoeou [biUvoi] ^
taken from real life
BlijIHTb
emjiumb [vilit] ^
to pour out
CTapbift
cmapbiii [stari] ^
old
KdMCHHblfi
KaMeHHbiu [kdm9ni]2
made of stone
^ ' bi,' accented or unaccented, is a vowel not difficult to imitate from
the living voice, but not so easily described. We have it as an unaccented
vowel in the second syllable of ' pretty/.' As an accented vowel it is very
nearly equivalent to the vowel of the first syllable of ' pretty,' as pronounced
in the south of England, or more exactly, it is almost identical with the thick,
slovenly utterance of the vowel i heard in some parts of Scotland in ' hit '
and 'f^t,' =[i].
2 In the termination of the masculine singular of the adjective this sound
is theoretically prolonged by the half -vowel ii, but the practical effect is so
sUght that it has been ignored in the transcript.
20
INTRODUCTION
Soft vowels corresponding to ' li ' :
(2) H H, Jf w. Name : i ^BofiHoe {i double). Value : [i].
Ht^jiIh
HmcuiiH
[italiJA(lJA)]i
Italy
liea
uea
[ivA]l
willow
CMOTpHTt
CMompumh
[sm6trit]i
he looks {at)
H{H3Hb
;>tCU3Hb
[3izn]2
life
ni6pMa
uiupMa
[JirmA] 2
screen
HX-L
UXh
[ix,jix]3
them, of them
HM-B
UMh
[im,jim]3
to them
laMH
IIMU
[imi,jiriii]3
{with) them
^ ' H ' has the sound of ee in ' deem,' = [i], the d being pronounced as
in * c^uty.' Like all other vowels it is short when unaccented.
2 'h' after i^, jk, m is pronounced like bi [i]. After n and in this
modification is not quite so noticeable and ' i ' has been kept in the transcript.
3 Only in the last three words has initial ' h ' the sound [ji].
(3) I i, / I. Name : i Cb tohkoh (i with a dot).
(This letter never stands before consonants.)
Value: [ij.
iHC^Ct
lucycb
[iisiis]!
Jesus
iibnt
ilOHb
[ijiiin,]Vn]i
June
iiojib
iWJlb
[ijdiijuii]!
July
Poccifl
PocciR
[rAsiJA] 1
Russia
3HaHie
3HaHie
[znanja] 2
knowledge
Mip-b
Miph
[mir]3
world, peasant vilkige
MHp-B
MUph
[riiir]3
peace [community
1 ' i ' has the same value as h ; it replaces h before vowels ; =[i].
2 The termination ' -ie ' might also have been rendered by [-ija], but in
natural rapid speech the [i] is so short that the dotted consonant +[ja]
seems adequate to represent this combination.
^ ' i ' stands before a consonant in the one word Mipi), ' world,' to dis-
tinguish it from MHpTj, ' peace.'
(4) Vi Vl, H ii. Name : h ct> KpaxKoii (i with a short mark).
Value: [i].
(This letter is never initial; it always stands after a vowel, forming su
diphthong with it.)
Matt MaU [mai]i jj^^iy
capafi capau [sArai]^ cart-shed
jlOMoft doMoU [dAmoi]! homeward
Bofina eouHa [vAina]i war
INTRODUCTION
21
yfiaeTt
qeii?
cxapbift
flftL[6
nocjiymaftxe !
yudemh [uid6t] i
HeuF [tJ6l]i
cmapuii [stdri]^
HUi^o [jitso, jatso] 3
nocjiyuiaiime ! [pAsMJata] ^
^ m;*7Z go away
whose ?
old
egg
listen I
1 * ii ' added to a vowel turns it into a diphthong [al, oi, ui, etc.] ; com-
pare English ' huy,^ ' boy.'
^ ' ii ' added to bi and 1 makes in natural discourse so slight a change
that it has been ignored in the transcript.
^ ' ii ' added to unaccented a, h, e, gives an indistinct sound which can
be rendered by [a] or [i].
XI. (1) 0, 0.
(unaccented).
Name : o. Value : [o] (accented), [a]
(When unaccented, ' o ' is replaced by ' e ' after jk, h, m, m, n.)
Cjitra
OAhza
TBOft
meoU
repdft
zepoU
^Toro
dmozo
nji6xo
njioxo
njioxdii
njioxoii
xopom6
xopouio
[6ilgA] 1
[tvoi] 1
[garoi]!
[stAVA] 2
[ptoXA] 2
[ptAXOi] 2,
[xArAjo] 2,
Olga
thy
hero
of that
badly
bad
well
1 ' o *" accented has the sound of o in ' yon,' = [o].
2 ' o ' unaccented has the sound of o in ' other,' = [a]. Russian * o ' is
always open as in ' yon ' or ' other ' ; it never has the value of the
rounded o in ' home,' ' bone.'
Soft vowel corresponding to ' o ' :
(2)
Ee,
E e. Name :
e. Value :
[jo,
^0].
eJKHTCH
eotcumcR
[j63itsA]
it shrivels up
JKCJITMH
Mcejimuu
[56tti]
yellow
jier-b
Ji'ezh
[log]
he lay down
c^eT-B
CHenvb
[stjot]
account
mejiT.
m'ejib
[Jot]
he went
BeST.
e'eah
[voz, vos]
he conveyed {in a vehicle)
8031.
eo3h
[voz, vos]
cart-had
' e ' is always accented, i.e. * e ' when accented often = [jo, o]. The
occurrence of this sound should be carefully noted, as it is only in books for
beginners that accents and diacritics are used ; in ordinary Russian printing
they do not appear, and there is nothing to distinguish * e ' from ' e.'
22
INTRODUCTION
XII. (1)
yy,yy.
Name : y. Value : [u].
VKpaftna
ynpaUHa
[uki'uinA]
Ukraine
^xo
yxo
[tixA]
ear
y^xaTb
ymxamh
[ujSXAt]
to drive away
ye^HH^Hie
yeduHenie
[uj8din6nja]
loneliness
yiiTH
yiimu
[uitf]
to go away
6^fly
6ydy
[btidu]
I shall be
TyA^
myda
[tuda]
thither
'y' always
has the sound of oo in ' too,'
= [u]. The only difference
between the accented and the unaccented vowel is one of quantity, the
unaccented vowel being very short.
Soft vowel corresponding to ' y ' :
(2) K) K), iO /o. Name: k). Value: [ju,-^u].
(In native Russian words this vowel never follows r, K, x, jk, q, m, m.)
lOpbCBT.
lOpbeeh
[jiirj9f]i
Dorpat {city)
lor'b
lOZh
[jug,juk]
south
cioaa
cioda
[suda]
hither
ibHoma
lOHoma
[jtinAjA]
a youth
jiioSjiib
/iiodjiio
[lublli]
I love
lOCTiiuifl
iocmui\iR
[justitsJA]
justice^ law
HibxaTb
Hioxamb
[liiixAt]
to smell {trans.)
Fiord
Fiozo
[gugo] ^
Hugo
1 '10'
always has the sound of u in ' use'
= [ju, ul. As with 'y,' the
corresponding hard vowel, the
difference between ' K) ' accented and un-
accented is one of quantity only.
2 '10'
is used to transUterate French u and German u.
XIII. (1) Id -h,!) z>. Name : ept, or TBepnBifi snaK'b (Jiard
sign). Value: [none].
(This sign is never initial ; it never follows a vowel.)
[brat] hrotlier
[sad, sat] garden
[Abjom] extent i size
[jut] buffoon^ joker
[isJ9vl6nJ8] testimony
Examples will be given with each of the consonants showing the use of
this hard sign, which was originally a vowel, but is really a superfluous char-
acter in the modem tongue, for it merely indicates that the b, or soft sign,
is not present.
The distinction between zvh and Jib is particularly important (see
Par. XX).
SpaxT,
caai,
6pamh
cadh
odheMh
myx-b
HStHBJieHie
luymh
\ ushHe/ieuie
INTEODUCTION
23
qyxb
Hymh
rOBOpHTb
zoeopumh
CHAbl
CRdb!
Becb
eecb
MajieHbKift
McuieubKiii
JIIOGOBb
jiio6oeb
ji;eHb
deub
pyjKbe
pyoiCb'e
jibBa
jibea
pOJKb
pOMCb
(2) B b, L 6. Name : epb or MarKiii anaKi* {soft sign).
Value: [ , j, or nil].
(This sign is never initial ; it never follows a vowel, or r, K, x.)
[tju^t] 1 hardly
[gAVAiit] ^ ix) speak
[sa^t] 1 sit dovm !
[ves] 2 ally whole
[mdldnki] ^ small
[iub6if]3 love
[de^n] ^ 6iai/
[ru3J6] * arm, rifle
[iva]^ of the lion
[roj] ^ ri/e
' b,' the soft sign, is very important, as it may not only alter the value of
the consonant preceding, but very often, especially with H, Ji and x, may affect
the preceding vowel.
1 The consonant preceding the b is softened by the suggestion of a very
slight [ja], which however must not be made into an extra syllable. The
consonants which show most clearly the difference between the effects of the
hard and soft signs are Ji, H, T. Examples are given with the various consonants
to illustrate this point, the effect of the soft sign being indicated by [ ].
2 After some final consonants and when occurring between two consonants
its effect is very slight, except in as far as it may modify the preceding vowel.
^ In many cases its effect is noticeable on the preceding vowel to which
it adds a very short [I]. (Cf. French * Espagrwe.') When this effect is
decided, it is marked in the transcript by [a^] [o^], etc.
* When the b serves to separate clearly a vowel from the preceding
consonant, it has been indicated by the use of [j].
5 The absence of b in JibBa would indicate the hard [t] (see Par. XIII (1)).
* After the consonants -m, q, m, m, the b has no effect.
XIV. B 6
Bojirapifl
6^jiKa
6epi;e
ayS-b
3bl6b
2 '6
B 6. Name: 6e. Value
[b, b].
Eojizapin [bAtgariJA(rJA)]i Bulgaria
6y/iKa [butkA] ^ roll {of bread)
depute [bortsa]^ shin, tibia
6eU! [bei]2 beat/
3y6h [zup]^ tooth
3bi6b [zip]^ swell, ripple
before any hard vowel sounds as 6 in ' &ooty,' = [b].
before any soft vowel sounds as 6 in ' 6eauty,' = [bj.
^ ' 6 ' final resembles p rather than b, = [p]. The distinction between
6t> and 6b is not perceptible.
24
INTEODUCTION
B B, B e.
Name: Be.
Value : [v, v].
Beu^nm
BeHei\iH
'v9ii6tsiJA (sja)] 2
Venice
BijaaTb
eudamb
VidAt] 1
to betray
BHTb
eumb
Vit]2
to wind
BnacTb
enacmb
^fpast] 3. 5
to fall in
BT* KOMHaX-fe
eh KOMHamm
fkomiiAto] 3- 6
in the room
POMaHOBT,
PoMauoeh
rAmanAf] *
Rorrmnof
JIIoGOBb
jiiodoeb
luboif ] 4
love
BHyK-b
enuKb
ynuk]S
grandson
1 ' b' before any hard vowel sounds as t; in ' t;an,' = [v].
2 ' B ' before any soft vowel sounds as ?; in ' tdew,' = [v].
3 ' B ' is sounded [f] before any voiceless consonant, i.e. before p, t, k, etc.
There is no difficulty in making this distinction ; English-speaking people
make it instinctively.
* ' B ' when final = [f ]. The distinction between Bt and Bb when final
is negligible, except in so far as the preceding vowel may be affected.
^ ' B ' is often initial before consonants.
n n, il n. Name : ne. Value : [p, p].
nexp-b
Ilemph
[potr] 2
Peter
nana
nana
[pdpA]i
papa
noji-b
no/ih
[poqi
floor
npiiiraxb
npbizamb
[prigAt] 1
to jump about
nflTb
nnmb
[pait] 2
five
nefi!
neu!
[pei] 2
drink !
nnxb
numb
[pit] 2
to drink
cHon^
cHonrb
[AsnApg] 2
about the sheaf
nannpoca
nannpoca
[pApirosA] 1' 2
cigarette
1 ' n ' before consonants, "b, and hard vowels sounds as ^ in ' _pat,' = [p].
2 ' n ' before b and soft vowels sounds as ^ in 'pure,' =[p]. The soften-
ing before h is not so noticeable as before h, e, % e, K).
O $, CD g6. Name : 3(|)T>. Value : [f, {\.
Opannifl
4)aHTa3ifl
$6pMa
^ap^dp-b
^ypajKKa
^liipKaTb
$HJl6C0$'b
<X>paHi^m
0aHma3iH
0opMa
0ap0oph
0ypa:HCKa
0bipKamb
0UJlOCO0h
[frantsiJA (sja)]
[fAntaziJA(4JA)]
[formA]
[fArfor]
[furdJkA]
[firkAt]
[fitoSAf]
France
fancy, imagination
form
porcelain
uniform cap
to snort
philosopher
$' has the value of English /in */ar,' =[f], or of /in 'few,' =[f].
INTRODUCTION
9 e, 9 e. Name: enxa. Value: [f, f].
25
0e;i;opT>
Q'edoph
[fodAr]
Theodore
eoMa
GoMa
[fAma]
Thomas
KaecApa
Kaeedpa
[kdfedrA]
pulpity teacher's desk
Geccajiifl
OeccajiiR
[f9sdiiJA (ijA)]
Thessaly
GeocJ)!!:!^
Oeo0ujih
[fAfit]
Theophilus
GHXa
euma
[fitd]
nume of this letter
This consonant appears only in a few words of Greek origin, and in many
of these even
it is often replaced by $, which has exactly the same phonetic
value.
XV. r
r, r 2. Name : re. Value : [g, g
rf.*
(This letter is never
followed by H, H, ]
EG, b.)
ToJiJiaHAiH
FojiJiaHdiR
[gAtandiJA (dJA)]
^'^ Holland
rOBOpHTb
eoeopumb
[gAVAfit] 1
to speak
Apyroii
dpyeou
[drugol] ^
other
MHoro
MH020
mnogA] ^
much, many
Bpar-L
epazh
vrak] 2
enemy
ffpyr-L
dpyzh
druk] 2
friend
Bora
Eoza
bogA] 3
of God
MflrKitt
MRBKiU
liiaxki] 4
soft
6oraTaro
dozamaeo
bAgdtAVA] s
of rich
6ojibm6ro
dojibmozo
;bAiij6vA] 6
large
HOMamHflro
dOMaiUHHZO
dAmaJiiAVA] 5
domestic, tame
caMoro
caMozo
"sAmAvol 5
self
BliKTop'L Tiot6 Bunmoph Fweo [viktAr gugo]
Victor Hugo
rHHJIOH
eHUjioii
[gnitoi] 7
decayed
1 * r ' usu
ally has the sound of
grin 'grood,' =[g].
2 * r ' when final has the sound of k, = [k].
3 * r ' in a few words is a deep aspirated voiced guttural sometimes trans-
literated by gh (the same as the initial g in Dutch or the aspirated German
g in 'Segren'), =[g].
* Preceding a voiceless consonant (t, p, k, etc.), the sound described
under (3) becomes voiceless like ch in ' loc^ ' or more exactly like ch in
German *ic^,' =[x].
^ In the genitive singular termination of masculine and neuter adjectives
'r'=[v].
There is no h in Russian, and although the consonant x is much nearer
than r to h, this letter in foreign words has been generally transliterated
by r, = [g]. The lo transliterates French u.
' ' r ' must always be pronounced, even when immediately preceding H.
* In a very few words the dotted [g] has been used in the transcript, but the dis-
tinction is not important.
26
INTRODUCTION
K K, JT K. Name : Ka. Value : [k, k].
(This letter is never followed by H, H), bi, b.)
[kitai] 1
[komnAtA] ^
[kvoHl 1
KhtM
KdMHaxa
Rumail
KOMHama
KBaCT,
Keach
KTb HCM^
KTb 66pery
K'feM'B
KHHra
Kb HCMy
Kb 6epezy
KThMb
KHuaa
KpOTKitt
Kpommii
China
room
kvass
toward him
toward the shore
with whom
book
gentle
[knemu] ^
[gb6rogu] 2
[ksm] 3
[knigA] *
[krotki] 5
^ ' K ' usually has the sound of A; in ' A;ick,' = [k].
2 There are in Russian several prepositions which consist of a single con-
sonant prefixed to the noun, and pronounced as one word with the noun.
Kt is such a preposition. In some cases, as before voiced consonants
(b, d, V, etc.), where the clear sharp value of k is almost impossible, the
pronunciation is faciUtated by taking [g] instead of [k].
3 ' K ' before 'fe is pronounced as in ' iCew,' = [k].
* ' K ' must always be pronounced, even before H.
^ The termination iii is pronounced after gutturals with a slight rounding
of the lips, but as this is not sufficient to warrant the use of [i] in the
transcript, [i] has been used throughout.
X X, Z X. Name : xa. Value : [x].
(This letter is never followed by fl, K), H, l.)
XpHCT0(J)6p'b Xpucmo0oph [xristAfor] Christopher
xfme xy^Mce [XU39] worse
XHipbift xiimpbiii [xitri] cunning
xpa6pi>ift xpaCpbiii [xrabri] brave
oxoTHHKi) oxomuuKb [Axotnik] sportsman
AByx-b deyxb [dvux] of two
' X ' has the sound of c^ in ' loc^,' or of softer ch in German * icA,' = [x].
XVI. J\n, a d. Name : He. Value : [d, d].
JlMlR
JJamH
[ddniJA (nJA)] ^
Denmark
Ba
dea
[dva]i
two
H>iflH
dndR
[dadA] 2
uncle
ntA-b
dmdb
[dst, dsd] 2. 3
grandfather
6yb!
6ydh!
[biiit] 3
be!
^ ' 3; ' before a hard vowel has the sound of d! in ' t^one,' = [d].
2 ' a ' before a soft vowel has the sound of c? in ' cZue,' = [d],
3 ' ' when final, before either the hard or the soft sign, approximates to
the sound of i, = [t, t].
INTKODUCTION
27
T T, T m.
Name: xe.
Value : [t, t].
T^P^iH
TypqiH
ttirtsiJA (sJA)] 1
Turkey
TaKt
maKh
^tak] 1
so
TBOii
meoR
tvAJa] 1
thy (Jem. sing.)
Spaxt
6pamh
^rat] 1
brother
dpaxb
6pamb
'hTO^i] 2
to take
xpH
mpu
tri] 1
three
xedii
me6a.
tabd] 2
thee, of thee
MBIT-b
Mhimb
[mit]!
washed
MHTb
Mbimb
[mit]2
to wash
=[t].
=[t].
before the hard sign or a hard vowel has the value of i in ' tool,'
before the soft sign or a soft vowel has the value of < in ' fane,'
Hn, IJ i^. Name : ne. Value : [ts, ts].
(This letter is
never followed
by K), fl, or by
unaccented o, which is
replaced by * e.')
Uapbrpaai.
Uaphzpadh
[tsAifgrdt] 1
Constantinople
^apH^a
i^apui^a
[tSAi-itSA] 1
czarina
^BifeTB
t^emmb
[tSVSt]!
colour, flower
mino^KH
t^binOHKU
[tsipAtJki] 1
tip-toes
miHHKT.
V^UHUKh
[tstnik] 1
cynic
i;6pK0Bb
i^epnoeb
[tserkAf ] 2
church
i^'fejibiii
i\rhAbiii
[tSSti]2
whole, entire
^ ' It ' has the sound of fs in ' hits,' = [ts].
2 or the sound of ts in " it's useless," pronounced as one word, =[ts].
XVII.
3 3,
3 3. Name :
36. Value :
[z, z].
SanaA-b
3anadh
[zapAt] ^
West
3a6iiiTb
3a6bimb
[zAbtt] 1
to forget
BHaji-b
anajib
r *.n 1
znaij ^
he knew
SB-fepb
serbpb
'zv6ir]i
wild beast
3flTb
3Hmb
tdit] 2
son-in-law, or sister's
BflSTb
eR3h
>as] 3
elm [husband
BH3b
en3b
>ais] 3
binding
^ ' 3 ' normally has the sound of z in ' maze,' = [z].
2 ' 3 ' before soft vowels has the value of 5 in " he sees you," =[i].
3 ' 3 ' when final before hard sign = [s], before soft sign [s] or [s].
28
INTRODUCTION
C c, C c.
Name : act.
Value : [s, s].
CeBacTonojib
Ceeacmonojib
[savAstopA^i] 2 Sebastopc
COJIb
COJlb
[so^i] 1 salt
CTyjiT.
cmyjih
[stut] 1 chair
CT. HHMt
Cb HUMh
[snim] 1 w;*7^ him
cejia
ceJia
[soIa] 2 villages
rdjiocb
eo/ioch
[g6}As] 3 ^;o^ce
OCb
OCb
[os, os]3 aa;Ze
1 ' c ' normally has the value of
ss in ' lo55,' = [s].
2 ' c ' before soft vowels has the sound of 5 in * disunion,' = [s].
3 Final 01. = [s] ; final Cb = [s] or [s].
XVIII.^ mm, m ui. Name : ma. Value : [J].
(This letter is never followed by fl, K), Li, or unaccented o.)
[Jv6tsiJA (sja)] Sweden
[jak]
niB^mfl
Uleei^iR
mar-b
uiazh
mecTb
luecmb
6amMaKii
daiuManu
mi^pe
luupe
Ham-b
HOmh
^fembl
ThlUb!
mocc6
uiocce
lUoTJiaHAlH
UIomjiaHdiR
SIX
shoes
broader
our
eat !
road
[jest]
[bAjmAki]
[Jlre]
[naj]
[jej]
[JAS6]\. ,
[jAttdndiJA (dJA)] ^ Scotland
* m ' has the sound of sh in ' swi5^,' = [J]. Compared mth the correspond-
ing EngUsh sound ' m ' is more mouth-filling, and before the vowel following
this consonant there is just the suggestion of a [j]. It is, along with jk, q, m,
regarded as by nature a soft consonant.
^ m may precede unaccented o in foreign words.
UK m, }K a^. Name : me. Value : [3].
(This letter is never followed by H, 10, bi, or unaccented o.]
JKyKdBCKlti TKymecKiu
;5uk6fski] 1 Zhukofsky
wajK^a (Hca^Hcda
5a5dA] 1 thirst
mUSlTy MCUAh
^5itp he lived
nojiojKiiTb nojio^icumb
pAtAgit] 1 to put, lay
ji6}KKa Jiootcna
'tojkA] 2 spoon
MyjK-b My^ncb
"muj] 3 husband
pojKb po:mb
roJ] 3 rye
1 ' JK ' usually has the sound of
s in ' measure,' =[^].
2 ' JK ' before voiceless consonants (p, t, k, etc.) has the sound of sh in
* swis^,' = [J].
3 Final jkt. or jKb=[n.
* The French name for the consonants dealt with in this paragraph, chuintants,
best describes them.
INTKODUCTION
H q, I/. Name : ne. Value : [tS].
(This letter is never followed by a, K), li, or unaccented o.)
29
HexoBt
Hexoeh
[tjSXAf]
Tchechof
Hdft
nail
tjai]
tea
qepeai.
uepeah
;tJ6r9s]
through
Mor^qifl
Moeyuiil
mAgtitJi]
powerful
cypr^qt
cypzyHh
Wgutj]
sealing-wax
JI CHb
JlBHh
letj]
to lie down
HTO
umo
Jto, tjto] 1
what
HOpTT.
Hopmh
;t|ort]
devil
qepHbiii
HepHhiii
[tjorni]
black
' q ' is pronounced like ch in ' c^at,' = [t J]. Like jk, m, m, this letter is
regarded as by nature a soft consonant.
^ Occasionally the ' h ' is heard without the [t] element.
m m, ZZ( u/. Name : ma. Value : [StS].
(This letter is never followed by fl, K), bi, or unaccented o.)
m^nKHH-b
meriKUHh
[JtJ6pkin]
Shtshepkin
ll^li
mu
[Jtji].
cabbage soup
mejib
li{eAh
[jtjeil]
crevice
JKCHmnna
diceninuHa
[S^njtjin..]
woman
SpojKamia
dpooicau^iii
[drAsaJtJi]
trembling
Sopm-b
6opiJHh
[borjtj]
beetroot soup
Momb
MOlL^b
[mojtj]
power
m^Ka
iL^yna
[jtjukA]
pike {fish)
mcKa
mena
[Jtj9ka]
cheek
'm' is the equivalent of m + q, i.e.
foolish chatter,' or * As^c^urch ' = [Jtj].
it has the sound of shch in
XIX.
M M, M M. Name :
: SMT,. Value:
[m, lii].
MocKBa
Mocnea
'mAskvd] ^
Moscow
MblTTTb
MbllUb
mij] 1
mouse
Mosr-b
M03Zh
mosk] ^
brain, marrotv
cojioMa
cojioMa
SAtonLAJ ^
straw
MHJIO
MUJIO
IhitA] 2
dear, nice
MeflTb
Medh
mot] 2
honey
M'fecflU'b
Mrbcm^h
^m6s9ts] 2
month, moon
MOMCHT-b
MOMeHnVb
^moihsnt] ^' 2
moment
^ ' M ' before hard vowels has the soxmd of English m in ' mass,' = [m].
2 ' M ' before soft vowels has the sound of EngUsh m in * muse,' = [m].
30
INTKODUCTION
H H, if H.
Name: bht*.
Value : [n, n].
KHKOJiaii
HuKOAau
[nikAtai] 2
Nicholas
HyjKa
HMH-fe
Hy^Hcda
HblHTb
nu5da] i
nin9]i.2
need
nowadays
bohtjI
eoHh!
von] 1
away I
Hibxaxb
Hjoxamh
[ni'ixAt] 2
to smell {trans.)
HHTb
Humb
[nit] 2
thread
ncHb
MOHT^Hb
HaKaH^H-fe
mapMaHKa
deHb
MoHmdHb
HanaHyHTh
UiapMaHKa
^dein] 2
montd^n] 2
nAkAnuna] ^'2
jarmdnkA] ^
day
Montaigne
eve, day before
barrel-organ
^ ' H ' before -l and hard vowels has the sound of n in ' none,' = [n].
2 ' H ' before b and soft vowels has the value of ?i in ' Tiew,' = [n].
^ ' H ' before k and r does not take the value of English ng, but retains
the sound [n].
XX. Jl Ji
:, Jl Jl. JName :
: 3Jn>, 3Jib. Value
: Lt, 1].
JlanjiaHAlH
JlaiuiaHdia.
[taptdndiJA(dJA)]i
Lapland
Jiana
jiana
[tdpA]l
paw
ji^naTb
jinnamb
[idpAt] 2
to smack
Ji^quie
jiynuie
[tut jo] 1
better
jirbSHUib
jiio6mub
[iubij] 2
thou lovest
3JI0H
3J10U.
[ztoi]i
spiteful, wicked
sejieHbitt
se/ieHbiii >
[zoiom] 2
green
njiaMfi
WiaMR
[ptdriiA] 1
flame
6ojibm6ft
60JIUIOU
[bAiij6i]2
big
A-fejiajiocb
drbjiajiocb
[dstAtAS] 1
it was done
yHHTCJIb
ynumejib
[ut jitai] 2
teacher
CTOJIt
cmo/ib
[stot] 1
table
CTOJIb
cmoAb
[St0il]2
so
^roji-L
yzojih
[ugAt]i
corner
:y^rojib
y 20 Jib
[ugAii]2
coal
' JI ' has two sounds which are so distinct that they require the use of
different symbols.
^ Hard ' Ji ' has a sound akin to that of I in English ' battte,' ' peopfe.'
In Russian it occurs in any position, and may be produced by pronouncing
I with the tip of the tongue drawn back so as to touch the upper palate
just behind the teeth; =[t]. Tliis sound never precedes b or any soft
vowel.
2 Soft * JI ' is sounded like I in EngUsh ' mi^^ion ' ; = [1]. This sound
never precedes "b or any hard vowel.
INTEODUCTION
31
p p. -P p.
Name : ap-L.
Value : [r, f].
Poccffl
Poccia
[rAsiJA] 1
Russia
pa^'b
padh
[rad, rat] i
glad
pflflt
padh
[rad, rat] ^
roWy rank
pyKa
pyna
[ruka] 1
hand, arm
pibMKa
pwMKa
[ri-imkA] 2
wine-glass
K6pKa
Kopna
[korkA] 1
shell, rind
p^aaxb
pvbsamh
[rszAt] 2
to cut
Benpo
eedpo
[V9dr6] 1
pail
r6pbKift
zophKiu
[g6irki]2
hitter
nopT)
noph
[por]i
of times
Ten^pb
meuepb
[tep^ir] 2
now
^ ' p ' is never silent and never uvular. It is distinctly trilled, as in
Northern English ' were,' ' JSussia,' = [r].
2 Preceding b or any soft vowel, ' p ' is pronounced as in English ' Harnet,'
but rather more softly, =[r].
XXI. In ordinary Kussian books accents are not used.
It is in Russian, as in Englisli, important to learn with every
word the tonic accent. A difference in accentuation sometimes
distinguishes to the ear words that in print are identical in appear-
ance, e.g. :
6ijiKa
[bstk.v]
squirrel
SifejiKa
[betkd]
of the white (of
the eye, or egg)
BCApo
[v6drA]
fine weather
Bejipo
[vadro]
pail
BOpOTT.
[vorAt]
collar
BOpOTT,
[vArot]
of a gate
op6roH
[dArogAl]
on the way
AoporoH
[dArAgoi]
dear
jKapKoe
[SarkAJa]
hot
H^apKoe
[3Ark6J9]
roast meat
saMOK-b
[zdmAk]
castle
BaMOKT.
[zAm6k]
lock-
Kanejib
[kapai]
of drops
Kanejib
[kAp^^i]
chapel
KpOK)
[kroju]
I cover
KpOK)
[kTAJli]
I cut
MOID
[moju]
I wash
MOlb
[mAJii]
my {fern, ace.)
M^Ka
[mukA]
torture
MyKa
[muka]
flour
Haqajio
[UAtJatA]
beginning
Hanajio
[UAtjAto]
it began
njiaqy
[ptatju]
I weep
njiaqy
[ptAtJti]
I pay
nojibi
[poll]
sexes
nojibi
[pAtl]
floors
copoKa
[sArokA]
magpie
copoKa
[sArAka]
of forty
CTdviT-b
[stoit]
it costs
CTOHT'b
FstAit]
it stands
^me
[U39]
narrower
yme
[U3S]
already
^xa
[tiXA]
of the ear
yxa
[uxa]
flsh soup
32 INTEODUCTION
XXII. Kussian is richly endowed with prepositions and particles,
but it is a highly inflected language, i.e, the relations between words
are indicated by modifications in the form of termination and stem.
For this reason, no doubt, the word-order, though by no means a
matter of absolute indifference, is not so rigid as in English. The
total number of diflerent inflections is, however, small ; the principal
ones are given in the following summary of regular forms.
SUMMARY OF REGULAR FORMS
NOUNS
Masculines
Hard Form
8oft Forms
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
nom.
Ty
BI
Vl
H
b
H
gen.
a
0BT>
fl
est
H
ett
dat.
y
SLWb
H)
flM-b
K)
flM-L
ace.
L or a
bi or OB-b
H or fl
H or CBT,
b or H
H or en
instr.
OMt
aMH
CM-L
flMH
CM-L
flMH
prep.
'fe
axTb
-fe
flX'L
h
flX'L
(See Lessons IX,
LV.)
Femtnines
Hard Form
Soft Forms
Sing.
a
Plur.
LI
Sing.
Plur.
H
Sing.
b
Pll
H
ir.
nom.
H iH
gen.
M
Ty
H in
L(H)1
H
CH
[
dat.
*
aMTi
* in
flMT.
H
flM-B
ace.
y
LI or -b 1
lO iK)
HOTL
(fi)l b
H
or eft
instr.
OK),
OH
aMH
eK),eH ieio(eH) hmh
bK)
flMH (LMH)
prep.
-h
axi)
^ in 2
flXT,
H
flX'L
(L
essons
XII, XVII, XXII,
Voc. XXXIV.)
Neuters
Hard Form
,
Soft Forms
Sing.
Plur.
Sing. Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
nom.
a
e H
Mfl
MCHa
gen.
a
-b
H CH (fl) 1
MCHH
MCH'L
dat.
y
aMt
K) HMT)
MeUH
McnaM'L
ace.
a
e H
Mfl
Mcna
instr.
OWb
aMH
CM-L aMH
MCHeMTj
McnaMH
prep.
-h
axTb
fe (h) 2 flX-L
MCHH
Mcnax'L
(Se
BLe
ssons IX and LIII.)
^ ift is the gen. pi. termination of nouns in -Ih and -ie.
2 in is the prep. sing, termination of nouns in -Ih and -ie.
INTRODUCTION
33
ATTRIBUTIVE
ADJECTIVES
Singular
Plural
M.
F.
N.
M. F. N.
nom.
aro
afl
oe
aro
He biH bifl
gen.
bix-b
dat.
OMy
oft
OMy
blMT.
aco.
Hii or aro yio
oe
nom. or gen.
instr.
JblM-B
oVl (ok))
hlWh
bIMH
prep.
OM-L
oft
OM^
MXT,
(Lesson
XXIII.)
Variants :
6tt, ^fl,
6e
(Lesson
XXIII).
ia, HH, ee ( XXIV).
Kitt, KaH, Koe ( XXV).
mift, man, mee ( XXVI).
PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVES
Nom. Case "b, a, o, bi (Lesson XLIX and Lists, Par. 237).
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
Comparative in --fee. Lists of comparatives in -e at Par. 238.
Most useful form of attributive comparative : doji'fee + positive degree.
Most useful form of superlative : caMbifi + positive degree.
(See Lesson L.)
ADVERBS
Typical form derived from the adjective ends in -o or -e. (See Par. 189 (1)
and lists of predicative adjectives and comparatives.)
PRONOUNS
Personal (Pars. 47 A, 69, 125, 126). Emphatic (Pars. 107 c, 235).
Possessive (Pars. 104, 105, 108, 109). Reflexive (Pars. 38, 103, 132).
Relative and interrogative (Pars. 47 D, 106).
Demonstrative (Pars. 47 C, 106, 107).
Indefinite (Pars. 47 E, 106).
NUMERALS
Cardinals (Par. 27, Voc. XXXVI, Pars. 148, 160, 166).
Ordinals (Pars. 166, 171, 184).
Declension (Lesson XLVII).
34 INTEODUCTION
VERBS
6litl1 = To be
Past Tense
Sing. 1st, 2nd, 3rd persons, CwJit, A, (see Pars. 9, 58).
Plur. 1st, 2nd, 3rd persons, 6biJlH.
Present Tense
Srd Sing. ecTB.
3rd Plur. cyxb (very little used).
Future Tense
Sing. 6^Hy, enib, ex-B.
Plur. Ofj^ewbf CTe, yxTb.
Imperative (Lesson LII)
Sing. 6y3b, nycxb OH-b (oh^, oh6) 6fjieTT>.
Plur. C^ACM-b, S^AbTe, nycxb ohh (oH-fe) dyAyxi..
Participles
Adjectival ' Adverbial
Pres. cy^mift, being, that is. 6fjiy^u, being, while being.
Past SbiBiniii, having been, that once Gi^iemH, having been, after having
was. been.
Fut. Cyaymitt, about to be, that is to
be, future.
REGULAR VERB
First Conjugation
Type H'fejiaTb (Stem a-fejia-) or naxaxb (Stem nam-, nax-)
IMPEBFECTIVE ASPECT PERFECTIVE ASPECT (See Pars. 202-208.)
Past Tense ^
Sing, jitj, Jia, Jio ; Plur. jih. Similar endings.
Present Tense
Sing. K) or y, eiiib, ex'b. No present.
Plur. eMTj, exe, lox-b or yxx,.
(Lessons XXXV, XLII-XLIV.) ^*
Future Tense
Future of Gbixb + infinitive. Endings as for the endings of the
(Lesson XXXII.) imperfective present tense.^
^ 6BiB^Tb, to be usually the case, is a regular verb of the 1st conjugation.
2 This tense corresponds to the Imperfect, Perfect, and Pluperfect in other
languages, and has to be rendered accordiag to the context by any one of these
forms.
' The perfective aspect may belong to the First or Second Conjugation.
INTRODUCTION 35
IMPERFEOTIVE ASPECT PERFECTIVE ASPECT
Imperative Mood
2nd Sing, ft, H, b (one of these). Similar endings.
2nd Plur. ftTe, htc, hie.
(Lesson LII.)
Participles have been indicated but not thoroughly discussed
in this book (see Preface). (Notes to Pars. 80, 96, 131, 139, 167).
Adjectival Participles
Pres, (active) -lomift, -ymift, formed No present participle,
from 3rd plur. pres. tense,
' one who is doing. ^
(passive) -CMLifi, from 1st plur. No present participle,
pres., ' one that is suffering
the action.^
Past (active) -Bmiii, from sing, of past -Binifi. r,.
tense, ' one who has done.'
(passive) -hhlih, sometimes -HHbiii or -tuPl.
-Tbiii, from sing, of past
tense, ' one that has suffered
the action.'
Adverbial Participles
Pres. -H, -a, from 3rd plur. pres., No present.
* doing,' * while doing.'
Past -BTb or -(B)mH, from sing, of past -b-b or -buih.
tense, ' having done.'
Second Conjugation
Type roBopiiTb (Stem roBopn-)
Has endings like those of the First Conjugation except in the
present tense, which has
Sing. K) or y, Hinb, ht-b.
Plur. HM-b, HTC, HT-b or SLTh (see Lessons XXXVII-XXXIX).
The present participle active has
-Hmifi or -amitt.
The present participle passive has
-HMblft.
The p:^fective aspect may be of the First or Second Conjugation.
Passive Voice
Apart from the Passive Participles indicated above there is no
Passive Voice (Par. 102).
SUGGESTIONS FOR THE USE OF THIS BOOK
Naturally tlie first one is that the book should be used as it stands.
But many may not care to spend so long as is required by this method
before extending their knowledge of the verb beyond the infinitive
and past tense. For them the following suggestions will be useful.
(1) As far as the end of Lesson VIII nothing outside the scheme
of Lessons I-VIII should be taken up.
(2) Attention is drawn to the summary of regular forms, pp. 3235.
(3) After Lesson VIII, Pars. 123, 124 of Lesson XXXII may
be learned and the future tense be practised with any verb marked A.
(4) After Lesson XIV, Par. 131 of Lesson XXXV may be
learned and the present tense of any verb marked (131) be practised.
(5) After Lesson XXI, Par. 211 (gen. rule) of Lesson LII
may be learned and the imperative of any verb marked (131) be
practised. But the exact value of the imperative will be appreciated
only after reading Lesson LI.
(6) It will tend to clearness and ultimate progress if the present
tense of any other t3rpe than stjiaxb be left severely alone till after
Lesson XXXI.
(7) Certain Lessons, namely XL VII, XL VIII, XLIX, L, may
be read at any time after Lesson XX, and the principles applied,
though, of course, the exercises in these lessons cannot be done satis-
factorily until everything that precedes them has been learned, for
all that is assumed in them.
(8) The predicative form of every adjective that occurs in the
lessons and is used in that form (see Lesson XLIX) will be found in
the lists in Par. 237.
(9) The lesson on the Aspects (LI) may be read at any time, but
its principles cannot be profitably applied till the present tense of
all the main types has been mastered.
(10) Illustrations of the script and phonetic transcript of
the Eussian exercises will be found at pp. 190, 194. The student
working without a teacher might find it profitable, after studying
each lesson, to write out the transcript in ordinary Eussian script,
and compare his version with the original exercise.
LESSON 1 1
1. There is no article in Kussian.
2. There are two numbers, Singular and Plural.
3. Gender is not determined by natural sex, but names of males
are generally Masculine and names of females are generally Feminine.
Names of things or abstractions may be Masculine, Feminine, or
Neuter.
As a rule the form of a noun determines its gender.
4. The typical masculine noun ends in the Nominative Singular
in -T>, e.g.
CBiH'B [sin], a son, the son, son.
5. The nominative singular masculine of the attributive adjective
ends in -bih or -oii, e.g.
CTapuft MyjKHK'L [stari mu3ik], the {an) old peasant.
MOJiojiioii OT^u'L [roAtAdoI Atsts], the (a) young father.
6. If the adjective ends in -oh, the termination is always accented.
The termination -Lift is not accented.
7. In the phrase He is an old man, the present tense of the verb
" to be " is not used in Eussian, so that
Oh-l CTapBiH My^KHK-B [on stari mu5ik] means He is an old peasant.
Ohx rji;^nHfi qejiOB'feK'b [on gtiipi tJatAvek] means He is a stupid man.
8. The negative form of these phrases is :
Ohi. He cxapLift MyjKHKT* [on no stari mu5ik]. He is not an old peasant.
OhT) He rji^HLift HCJiOB'feK'B [on n9 gMpi tJotAvek], He is not a stupid
man.
The dash is often used to replace the present tense of " to be "
understood.
^ A word enclosed in round brackets ( ) need not be translated. The vocab-
ulary of nouns and verbs in the first eight lessons has been deliberately restricted
to a small number of words.
37
38 LESSON II 9-11
Vocabulary
Jl'hj^'h [dsd (t)], grandfather cjiaSbitt [stabi], weak
CbiHi) [sin], son ciiJibRbiii [siini], strcmg, powerful
noM'b [dom], house rjiynbifi [gtiipi], stupid
Ji-fecb [ies], wood, forest ^y^MHbiii [dmiuj, intelligent
XJi-feS-b [xisp], bread, corn S-fejibiti [bsti], white
M^Jib^HK-b [maiitjik], boy HepHbift [tjorm], black
qejiOB'feK'b [tJetAvsk], man HoSpbiH [dobri], good (kind)
OTCi^'b [Atsts'], father njioxofi [ptAxoi], bad
Ham-b [naj], our cxapbifi [stari], old
BauiTj [vaj], your MOJionoH [mAtAdoi], young
H [i], and He [ns, ne, na], not
a^ [a], but, and
Exercise
Translate :
(1) GTapbiH A'feH'L. (2) Hami) 0x61^11. (3) On-b cjiaSbiii cxapbiH
HCjioB'feK'b. (4) B'fejibiH xji-fed-b H qepHbiii xji-feS-b. (5) Bam-b cbm-b
clijibHbiii MOJio^dft MajibHHK-b. (6) HepHbifi Ji-fecb. (7) Oht, njioxoft
M^jib^HK-b. (8) Haui-b cbiH-b rji^nbiii, a eam-b cbiH-b ^mhhh M^jib-
HVLKTy, (9) Gxapbltt KOMT). (10) HSiUYb JSfkjS.'h HerjI^Hblii ^ qejIOB'feK'b.
BaUVb CblHh yMHblii Ma/lbHUKh.
LESSON II
9. The past tense of Kussian verbs is peculiar in this respect,
that it agrees with the subject in gender and number, while it does
not vary with the person, i.e. there is one form of the past tense
which is always found with a masculine singular subject, whether
that subject be of the first, second or third person, e.g.
H jli'fejiaji'b [ja dstAt], / used to do, I did do, I was doin^.
Tbi ^ K'fejiaji'b [ti dgtAt], thou didst use to do, thou didst, thou wast doing.
Owh jii'fejiaji'b [on dstAt], he used to do, etc.
Ham-b Cbm-b A'fejiaji'b [naj sin dstAt], Our son used, etc.
10. This verb corresponds either to did do or made. It will be
observed that this masculine past tense ends like the noun in -t.
11. The negative form is :
H He rfjiajiX) [ja na dstAt], / did not do, or make.
1 This word may often be translated by and, but it always has adversative force.
2 Instead of making the verb negative the Russian often makes the adjective
or adverb negative.
* Familiar second personal pronoun used only among intimates and children.
12-13 LESSON II 39
12. In interrogative sentences the particle jih is used, e.g.
JX^JiasiTj JIH ohtj? [detAt ii on ?], Did he do, or make ? Was he doing f
Tbi jih n^Jiajit? [ti ii dstAt ?], Didst thou do, etc. ?
13. This particle is not required if there is in the sentence an
interrogative word like who ? what ? how ? when ? e.g.
Hto OHt n-fejiajit? [Jto on detAt ?], What did he do?
Kto a-fejiaji-L 5to? [xto detAt stA ^\Who used to do this (or that) ? or
Kto 5to A'fejiaJi'b? [xto stA detA-t T\]who was doing this (or that) ?
Kyna Tbi X0HHjn>? [kudd ti xAdit ?], Whither did you use to go ?
KaKOBt 6bijn> qejiOB'feK'b? [kAkof bil tJetAvsk ?], What like was the man f
i.e. What sort of a man was he ? What manner of man was he ?
Vocabulary
As the adverbs and pronouns given in this Vocabulary will recur again and
again in succeeding lessons, it is not necessary to commit them all to memory
before attempting Exercise II.
For explanation of figure or letter A with verbs iji this and following
vocabularies see Suggestions 3-6, p. 36.
Gujii* [bil], was, used to he toti> [tot], that (to, neuter form)
jKHJit A [sit], lived, was living, used kto? [xto], wTw ?
to live HTO? [tjto, Jto], whit ?
^zvh A [jet], ate, etc. KaKOB-B? [kAkof], of what sort ?
cnajn> A [spat], slejpt, etc. KaK'L? [kak], how ?
H'fejiaji'L 131 A [detAt], did, made, etc. TaKt [tak], so
BHajiT. 131 A [znat], knew, etc. TaKon [tAkoi], such, such a
XOAHJI'B A [xAdit], used to go bot-b [vot], there is ! there are ! see 1
nrpajiT) 131 A [igrdt], played FA'S [gds, gds], where (with verbs of
upBiraJiT. 131 A [prigAt], jumped rest)
about KyAa [kudd], where, whither (with
paSoTaji'B 131 A [rAbotAt], worked verbs of motion)
fl [ja], / Korna [kAgdd], when
mdVi [mol], my, mine wh [v, f], into
TBI [ti], thou, you (this pronoun is b^ Ji'fec'B [vlss], into the wood
used only in familiar discourse) xopouio [xArAJo], well
TBoft [tvoi], thy, thine njioxo [ploxA], badly
OKI, [on], he, it ho [no, ua], but
ero [J8v6], him, it (direct object) MHoro [mnogA], much
ero [J9v6], of him, his, its HeMH6ro [nomnogA], {a) little
^TOTT* [stAt] (m.), this, that, that one Ji-fexoM-B [IstAm], in summer
(^TO, neuter form) SHMOtt [zimoi], in winter
40 LESSON II 13
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) Bam-L Ji-hjiii Gbijitj cxapLitt qejioB-feKt. (2) SumoVi owb
paCoxaji-b HeMH6ro; oh-b cnaji-b. (3) H xopom6 snajit qepntitt
HOMT, (see Par. 16 (2)), r^-fe oht, jkhjii> 3HM6i4. (4) Hamt OT^iXb
Smji-l He TaKoft cjiaGbm qejioB'feK'b. (5) Jl-feTOM-L oh-l xoahji-l b-b
Jiifecb, rjifb owb MH6ro paGoxajit. (6) Ero cbiH-b Oliji'l ;^MHbii!
MajibHHK-b. (7) JlibTOMTj OH-b HrpajiB H npi^iraji-b. (8) Ho oht.
ObiJi-b Herji^nbifti MajibHHK-b. (9) TA-fe OH-b nrpaji-b 3hm6h? (10) Tbi
HeMHoro padoxajiB bhmoh; xh He xoahjib B-b Ji-fecb. (11) ^xoxx)
Majib^HKB -feji-b 6ijibiH xjiifeSB. (12) Tbi xopouio BHajiB Ham-b aomb.
(13) Tbi er6 snaji-b. (14) Mofi mojio6h cbin-b anajiB XBOii aomtj.
(15) BOXX, MOtt CblHX,. (16) B0XT> OH-b.
Mou. MOJiodou cbiHh ana/ih meoii doMh.
B. Bonpocbi {= questions). This rather mechanical exercise
serves a twofold purpose : it affords practice in the interrogative
forms and repeats the vocabulary and phrases of Exercise A.
(1) Kxo 6bijn> cxapbiii qejioB'feKB? (2) Hxo ohx> a^Jiajix. 3HM6fi?
(3) K^Kx> H anaji-b somi>, r^-fe >khjix> Bamx, n-fea-b? (4) Kxo h6 6bijn>
xaKOH cjia6biH? (5) Kyjia ohb xonHjn>? (6) Kor^^ OH-b xojiiijib
B-b Ji-fecx)? (7) KaKOBB SbiJiB er6 CbiHx.? (8) Hxo ohx> ^'fejiaji'b?
(9) Hxo ifeji-b MajibqHK-b? (10) 3Hajix> jih h xBott aoMT>? [say,
*you knew it').
C. Translate into Russian :
(1) Our father was a strong young man. (2) He did not sleep much.
(3) In winter my old grandfather slept but my father worked a great deal.
(4) He worked and {use conj. a) his young son plaj'-ed. (5) In summer the boy
used to go into the wood, where your grandfather lived. (6) Whither did the
boy go ? (Whither the boy went ?) (7) Your intelhgent son well knew my old
house. (8) He was a young boy ; summer and winter he played and jumped
about. (9) Was he a stupid and bad man ? (10) What did you eat ? {say
here, ' thou didst eat, i.e. atest '). (11) I ate the white bread. (12) What
did the boy do in winter ? (13) What was the man like ? (14) He was a
kind intelligent man.
^ Form described in Par. 69 is also common.
14-18 LESSON III 41
LESSON III
14. The genitive case of nouns in -T* ends in -a, e.g.
npyr-B, Hp;^ra [druk] [driigA], /newd
CTapiiK-L, CTapHKa [stArlk] [stArikd], old man.
(a) Some words preserve througliout the singular the accent of
the nominative singular, like apyrij. To this class belong
all the nouns in Vocabulary I except oxeu'b.
(6) Some words do not have the accent in the oblique cases on
the same syllable as in the nominative. To this class
belongs the word oxei^t, OTuia [Atsts] Utsa], father.
Note. This word, like many other masculine nouns with e or
o in the final syllable of the nominative singular, drops that vowel
in all the other cases.
15. The dative case of nouns in -t> ends in -y, e.g.
Apyr-L, p:^ry [druk] [drdgu], /ne?wi.
CTapHKT>, CTapHK^ [stAiik] [stAriku], old man.
OT^U'b, OTU^ [Atets] [KiB<i], father.
16. (1) The accusative case (direct object of transitive verbs) of
masculine names of animate beings has the same form
as the genitive.
(2) The accusative case (direct object of transitive verbs) of
masculine names of inanimate things has the same
form as the nominative.
17. So there are these two forms of declension :
Animate Inanimate
nom. pyn> [druk] Jiowb [dom]
gen. Ap:y^ra [drugA] a^Ma [domA]
dat. Apyry [drdgu] AOMy [domu]
ace. spyra [drtigA] ji,owb [dom]
18. In the phrase B'b Jii^CL, into the wood, Jii^cb is the accusa
tive case after the preposition bt>.
42
LESSON III
19-21
19. Tlie genitive means * of a thing or person.' It corresponds
to our possessive case, e.g.
cani, MyjKHK^ [sad (sat) musikd], the garden of the peasant, the peasant's
garden.
20. The dative means ' to a thing or person.' It is used after
verbs oi giving, saying, etc. to indicate the indirect object, e.g.
Ont ABJiTb MajibHHKy xji-feS-b [on dat mailtjiku xisp], He gave the boy
the bread.
21. The genitive and dative of pronouns used in this lesson are :
from fl
TM
OHt
OHiS
KTO
( ^TOTt
\ 5to
TOTt
HTO
(a) meiiA^ [rhana], of me (6) uwh [mns], to me,
Te6ii 1 [t8bd], of thee Te6i [tabe], to thee,
ero 1 [J9v6], o/ Mm, his euf [jamii], ?o Mm,
HXT, 1 [jix], o/ ^m, their hmt. [jim], to ^^m,
K6r6? ^ [kAvo], o/ ii?^m ? whose ? kom^? [kAmu], to whom ?
^Toro 1 [stAVA], of this ^TOMy [stAmu], to this,
Tor6 1 [tAv6], of thil Touf [tAmti], to that,
Her6? [tj9v6], of what ? qcM^? [t/amu], to w;;ia ?
VOCABULAEY
6p^Ti>, a 2 [brat], brother
BufKTi, a [vnuk], grandson
apyrij, a [druk], /nerifi
oropoAt, a [AgAr6t], kitchen-
garden, orchard
caaij, a [sad, sat], garden
CTapi^Kt, a [stArik], art oZ^i maw
MywHK-L, a [mu5ik], a peasant
Ciipi), a [sir], cheese
juajit [dot], gave
CKaaajTb [skAzdt], said; told
noKasaJii. [pAk.\zat], showed
roBopi^[jn> A [gAVAfft], spoke
Ten6pb [tap6*r], now
HHKorfla [iiikAgda], nsver
Tor^a [tAgda], then
TaMt [tarn], there
BjlfloCh [zdes (s)], here
OHeuh [otjen], very
^T0 [tjto, Jto], that (conjunction)
no-p^ccKH [pArtiski], Russian, in
Russian
no-aHrjiificKH [pAongifski or pAon-
giiski], {in) English
Owh HHKorAa hc^ roBopHjn> no-p;^ccKH [on nikAgdd n9 gAVAflt
pATuski], He never spoke Russian.
1 Are also accusatives. Sxoro and Tor6 are used as the accusative only of
animate beings.
2 When, in the Vocabulary, the genitive termination is not accented, the accent
falls throughout as in the nominative singular.
^ Notice the double negative used in the Russian form for he never, etc. So
with all negative adverbs and indefinite pronouns.
21 LESSON III 43
Exercises
A. Give tlie genitive, dative, and accusative of
CBIH'B, XJI'feC'b, M^JIbHHKt, CTapi^KT., OT^lXby H, OH'b, KTO.
B. Translate :
(1) M^jibqHK'b aajiT* exapHK^ tot-b qepHHft xjiifeGt. (2) TboK
HoSpMft OT^JXb noKaa^jit Mwh TBoii cani. h oropoA-L. (3) Bairnb
BHyK-L uhi'h CKas^ji-B 5to. (4) Ohtj MeH>i hc simsi-b. (5) H Te6it
He SHajiTj. (6) Ero ^mhhh chht> noKaaajit ie6'k Mott CTapLitt aomt*.
(7) H noKasaji-B cilHy 6'^jiuVl aom-l Spaxa. (8) 5to He S-fejibift, a
HepHbia xji-feS-b. ^(19) H najiT) cm^ Bami* Cbip-b. (10) OH'b ero "fejii*.
(11) Hx-b Spax-b YoBopHJi-b xopomo no-pyccKH, ho OH'b roBopiijiXi
xoraa oqeHb hjioxo no-anrjiiiieKH. (12) Tn'fe Bam-b ox^n-b?
(13) Ohx> xenepb a^'fecb. (14) JI'fexoMT. CHJibHbift MyjKHK'b xoA^Ji'b
Bx. Ji-fecX); OHx> xaMx> pa66xajix>. (15) TBoft BHyKX> noKa3ajix> MH-fe
orop6ax> oxna. (16) Hami. npyrx> 6biJii> xor^a MOJioffoii, a oht,
xen6pb cx^pbiii HejiOB'feKx>. (17) H xopom6 sHajix. cx^pbitt flOMX>,
rji'h JKHjix> cxapiiKX>. (18) Tbi HHKoraa ne paCoxajn*.
C. BonpocBi:
(1) KoM^ MajibqHKx> najix> Hepnbiii xji^6i)? (2) ^xo ohx> cm^
a^jn>? (3) Hxo MH-fe noKa3ajn> XBoii ox6nx>? (4) Hxo MH-fe cnaaaji'b
Bann> bh^k-b? (5) Hxo xeS-fe noKa3^jn> er6 cbiHX>? (6) Kom;^ h
noKa3ajix> ^omx. 6paxa? (7) Hxo ohx> 'fejix>? (8) Kxo roBopiijix>
xopomo no-pyccKH? (9) KaKX> oht. roBopiiJix> xorj];a no-aHrjiificKH?
(10) Kyjia xoAiijn> ji'fexoMx> cxapbiii My>KHKx>? (11) Hxo ohi. Tawb
n-fejiajii.? (12) Hxo MU'h noKa3ajix> XBoii BnyKX.?
Hyda xodu/ih jirbmoMh cmapbiii My^cuKb?
D. Translate into Russian :
(1) The brother's garden ; the peasant's kitchen-garden ; the father's
house ; to the old man's son ; he is an intelligent boy ; that is his white house ;
your black bread ; did he know that ? what did he do in summer ? he used
to go into the wood ; I said to the boy's friend ; I spoke English badly then.
(2) To him, to me, of thee, of them, to whom, of that, I showed him that.
(3) There he is ; there is the old man ; he was never there.
(4) He showed me your garden. Who was speaking ? I did not know
where he (was). Their son gave them your old house. To whom did he
give it ? He said that you (were) there.
[Xm
44 LESSON IV 22-26
LESSON IV
22. The genitive is also used after many prepositions, e.g. y [u], at.
23. y OTUia. [u Atsa] means at the father' Sy i.e. at his house, at his place
of business, in his possession, near him.
y MCHii [u riiand] means in my possession, at my house, etc.
24. (a) The form most frequently used to express our verb
to have is a combination of the phrase in Par. 23 with the requisite
tense of the verb " to be," e.g.
(1) y oxna Shjii. MOJioaoii chh-l [u Atsa bit mAtAdoI sin], The father
had a young son.
(2) y MyjKHKa 6i>ijn> cxapbifi hom'B [u mu5ika bit stari dom], The
peasant had an old house. ,
(3) y Hero Shjite. ;^MHHfi Spax-L [u navo bit timni brat], He had an
intelligent brother.
(4) y HHXt dbiJi-B xopomitt xji-fedi. [u nfx bit xAr6Ji xisp], They had
the good bread, ^t^
(h) To s^HRe present tense of the phrases in (a) the verb is
simply omjWa, e.g.
y OT^j^pMOJiOAoft CLIH-L [u Atso niAtAd6i sin], The father has a young son.
(c) The usual interrogative form is :
BBun. Ji^ y Hero? etc. [bil ii u navo]. Was there to him ? i.e. Had he ?
EcTb JiH y Hero xji'feO'L? etc. [jest ii u n8v6 xisp ?], Is there to him, i.e.
Has he the bread ?
25. In examples (3) and (4) of the last paragraph notice y Hero
and y hhx'B. The obUque cases of the third personal pronoun when
governed by any preposition always have this H prefixed. We
say y Hero [u ngvo], in his 'possession, etc., but y ero OTi^a [u jovo
Atsa], in his father^ s possession, because it is oma, not ero, that is
governed by the preposition.
VOCABULAKY
xopomiii [xAroJi], good (the most oanamAbi [Adnasdi], once
general equivalent) pasT. [raz, ras], once
3ji;op6Bbiii [zdArovi], healthy ji;jih [dia, diA], /or ") govern the
SojibHott [bA^inoi], ill, sick Sea-b [bss, bos], without Y^ . .
q^CTO [tJastA], often y [u], at i ^
eCTb [jest], there is, there are, there exist
26 LESSON V 45
^ ^ , EXEECISES
A. Translate :
(1) ]J,Jifi Majib^HKa. (2) Besi, cxapHK^. (3) Y ap^ra. (4) V
Hero. (5) JXsin Menn; y HHXTb; hjih tcSh. (6) J^jih Kor6? (7) y
Kor6? (8) BesT, tcSh. (9) y oma. (10) J^jih OTua. (11) r*
atHjn> 66pBm cx^pbifi Jipyrt OT^a? (12) Hto cm^ aajii. TBOtt
ot^htj? (13) OnHa>Kbi OH-b Aajii nejioB'feKy xopomiii d-fejitm aomt..
(14) KoM^ OH-b CKaa^ji-b 6to? (15) JI-fexoM-b ^tott, MajibHHK'b dbiji-b
qacTo y MyjKHKa. (16) Tor^a Bami. ;^MHbiii npyr-b jKHJi-b s^ifecb.
(17) 3hm6h[ CMH'b TaM-b padoxaji-b Sea-b OTita. (18) Tbi xopomo anajii.
5to. (19) Bpax-b oxua CKasaji-b hmi. 5xo. (20) Kyjta MajibHHK'b
qacxo xo^HJiTb ji-fexoMX.? (21) Mo^ MOJioAott BHyK-b xen6pb y Mena.
(22) Kxo SbiJi-b xorAa y Te6A'> (23) y uenA aa-fecb noSpbiii Apyr-b.
(24) y ^xoro My>KHKa SbiJi-b qepHbiii xji-fedx.. (26) Gbip-b h6 sjih
xe6ii, a sjih hhxx.. (26) OhX) nHKor^d ne nrpdji-b y mchh.
Ee3h dpyea HHunozda He xodujvb eh jivbch.
B. Translate into Eussian :
(1) The peasant's friend was a kind intelligent man. (2) To whom did
he give [he gave] the good white bread ? (3) That is for the father. (4) He
lived then at the son's. (5) He is now without a friend. (6) The black
bread is for their grandson. (7) In summer he hved at his father's. (8) The
peasant's kind friend is not a powerful [strong] man. (9) Who gave him that ?
(10) To whom did he show your old house ? (11) They have a sick son.
(12) At their friend's. (13) At whose house ? (14) Who is here ? (15) When
did he live with him ? (16) He lived with me then. (17) He never lived with
me. (18) There is his friend. (19) Have you a father ? (20) Had he an
old house ?
LESSON V
26. -T> is the hard termination for masculine nouns. But there
are many masculine nouns ending in the nominative case in -b or -ft
with corresponding soft terminations in the other cases, e.g.
Hard Endings Soft Endings
nom. oxeu'b [Atsts] napb [tsa^r], czar repofi [g9r6i], hero
gen. oxna [Atsd] napii [tsAra] repofl [garoJAJ
dat. OXH^ [Atsy] napib [tsAru] rep6K) [garoju]
ace. oxna [Atsa] napii [tsAra] repofl [goroJA]
(a) b is always preceded by a consonant, Vi always by a vowel.
(6) As stated in Par. 16, names of inanimate things have the
same form for accusative and nominative.
46 LESSON V 27
27. Instead of the nom. plur. and the ace. 2>^ur., the genitive
singular ^ is used after the forms HE a [dva], two, xpn [tfi], three,
HCTbipe [tSstirg], four, e.g.
SB a cajxa [dva sadA], two gardens.
qcTiipe CTapHKa [tjatirg stArika ],/o2*r old men,
TpH i^ap;i [tri tsAra], three czars.
Vocabulary
paSoTHHK'b, a [rAb6tnik], workman MaJiCHbKifi [maianki], small
OJi^Hb, fl [Ai6^n], stag SojibmoH [bA^ijoi], big
Uapb, H [tsa^r], czar xp^6pbiH [xrabri], brave
cap^ii, H [sAiai], cart-shed p66KiH [ropki], timid
repoii, h [garol], hero SpyroH [drugoi], other
aBopeit'bj^-piia [dvArsts, dvArtsa], TOJibKO [to^ikA], only
palace OHli [aiu], they (m. and n.)
ojUliH'b [Adi'n], 07ie, certain no - ^pann^acKH [pAfrAntsuski],
SoraxHii [bAgati], rich French, in French
S-feAHbiii [bsdni], poor
. rri IX Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) Bea-b rep6H. (2) ^jih cxapHKa.' (3) JXbq. cxapHKa. (4) V
Ltapa. (5) Bea-b oji6hh. (6) Tpn rep6fl. (7) Bojibm6ft capaii.
(8) XpaSpbift rep6ii. (9) GnjibHbifi i^apb. (10) 3op6Bbiii Majib-
qHR-b. (11) MojioA^ti cbiH-b i^apii. (12) y tqQA Gor^xbiti Apyri..
B. Translate :
(1) BibflHbift MyjKHK'b SHajiT. rep6fl. (2) XpaSpbifi rep6tt n6-
6pbiii qejioB'feK'b. (3) 3hm6h cxapbiii paSoxHUK-b ne qacxo xoAiiji-b
B-b CSLKb. (4) Jl'fexOM'b Bam-b dOJIbHOH CblH-b JKHJI-b sjxifecb. (5) Tflife
OH-b xen6pb? (6) Y oxita xpn ciAim; BOTit ohpiI (7) V MyjKHKa
xenepb oneuh MajicHbKiii oropoji'b Sea-b capdn; ohx. hc dor^xbiii, ho
OHSHb S-fenHbiii qejiOB'feK'b. (8) Paa-b c^JibHbifi i^apb aaji-b repoio
Gojibuioii AOM-b. (9) y cxapnK^ qexiiipe BH^Ka. (10) y Her6
dojibHoii cbiH-b. (11) OjtHHTb cbiH-b napfl roBopHJi-b xoponi6 no-
$paHny^3CKH H no-p^ccKH, a npyrofi roBopIiJi'b x6jibK0 no-p;^ccKH.
(12) H ero HHKorAa ne anaji-b. (13) Fjifb mun-b 6ojibm6ii ojienb?
ffpysoU cbiHh eoeopujih mojibKO no-pyccKu.
C. Translate into Kussian :
(1) At the father's. (2) The czar's friend. (3) Without the hero. (4)
For the stag. (5) Two cart-sheds. (6) Three peasants. (7) Four boys.
1 See Pars. 179, 180. 2 Dechned hke ot^u-b.
28-32 LESSON VI 47
(8) Three palaces. (9) Without whom ? (10) For me. (11) At his house.
(12) Without him. (13) Without it. (14) The czar had a great palace.
(15) He was never a timid boy. (16) Your friend spoke French, but very
badly. (17) The stupid man did not often work ; he slept. (18) Where did
the peasant's son use to go in winter ? (19) For that. (20) Without them.
LESSON VI
28. In negative phrases the genitive of the object is used instead
of the accusative, e.g.
fl aHajn) homT) [ja znat dom], / knew the house.
fl He SHajii. AOMa [ja na znat domA], / did not know the house.
29. The genitive is used also instead of the nominative in the
negative forms corresponding to the examples given in Par. 24, e.g,
y meuA H-hTb xji-feSa, H-feT-B capan [u mana nst xiebA, net SArdJAJ, 1
have no bread, no cart-shed.
This word H'^T'l represents
He ecTb [lie jest], not is.
He cyTb [ns sii^t], not are.
30. The genitive is used after adverbs of quantity,^ e.g.
MHoro xji'feSa [mnogA xiebA], much bread (or com).
Majio Ji'feca [matA Issa], little forest.
31. The forms given in Pars. 29-30 are really all examples of the
partitive genitive (cf. the French forms je n'ai pas de maison,
heaucowp de pain). This partitive genitive appears also in
simple affirmative phrases without any adverb or measure of
quantity, e.g.
Owh \i.wh flajii* xji'feSa [on jim dat xisbA], He gave them bread, i.e. some
bread.
Out HMT. Aajn> XJi-feSi. [on jim dot xlsp]. He gave them the bread.
Cf. French il leur donna du pain, il leur donna le pain.
32. The great majority of Russian verbs have the infinitive in
-Tb, e.g. 6hiTh [bit], pa66TaTL [lAbotAt]. From this infinitive is
formed the masculine past tense by changing Tb into Jit, e.g.
jKHTb, >KHjn> [3it, ^li], to live, lived.
cnaxb, cnajit [spa^t, spat], to skep, slept.
1 See Voc, XL.
48 LESSON VI 33
33. The infinitive is used in many common idioms corresponding
to om: English forms, e.g,
Oht. xoT'feji'L Hrp^Tb [on xAtst igrd^t], He wished to play.
H He Mor-B cnaTb [ja ne mog spa^t], / could not sleep.
VOCABULAEY
OBecb,^ BCd [avos, Afsa], oats cfeflTb A [s6jot], to sow kiX^aaa^
HqM^Hb, A [J9tjm6^n, d], barley roHiiTb 131 A [gAnd^t], to^unt)
ocejii)/ cji^ [Asot, Astd], ass noHHMaTb 131 A [pAnimd^t], to
H^TTo [nst], no, there is not understand
aa, yes KyoHTb [kupit], to buy
noqeMy? [pAtJemti], why ? xoT^Tb A [xAt6^t], to wish
M^Jio (adv.) [mdtA], little tcTb (irreg.) A [Jest], to eat
CKOJibKO [sko^kA], how mwihy how 6biTb [bit], to be
many jKHTb A [sit], to live etc., see Par.
HHqer6 {gen. of HHqxd) [iLitj9v6], 32 and Vocab. II
nothing n Mdnb [ja m6g], / could
KaK6ii [kAk6I], what ? what sort of?
Exercises
A. Give the genitive, dative and accusative of
oceji-b, HHM^Hb, uymikKh, capM.
B. Translate :
He has much bread, he has no oats, ^p garden, no father, no friend, little
barley, no ass, how much bread ? had he the oats ? have I any bread ?
C. Translate :
1 did not buy bread, oats, barley, an ass, a house.
D. Translate :
(ni TT ' y, A \ / hve here, sleep, eat, hunt the stag, buy a garden.
E. Translate: ^jj^^
(1) HcTiipe ocji^. (2) Bes-b nqMCHji. (3) JXzvr ocjia. (4) Ocji^.
(6) BbijiT. TorA^ 6HeHb CEfJibHHfi H CoraTbiH napb; y nerd Gbuii.
GoJibmoH ABop^U'b. (6) Y napH dbiji-b jtpyr-b-repott.^ (7) L^apb
naji-b rep6io Ba n6Ma h 6ojibm6ft Ji-fecb. (8) JI-feTOM'b gh-b xoT'feji'b
roHATb oji^HH. (9) Brb^Hbifi MyjKHK'b noKaaajiT. ^Mf xpn ojichh.
^ Declined like ox^ut, note to Par. 14.
2 Treat these two nouns as one compound noun or as a noun plus an adjective
clause.
iaWI
r^ '<r
34 LESSON VII 49
(10) MajieHbKift cbiH-L xoT-fejit qacxo nrpaTb, a er6 OT^ixb He xoT-feji-L.
(11) Oh-l 6bijn> He6oraTi>iH HejiOBfeK-B; y Hero Majio xji-feSa, ho ohi.
cfenSib'^Horo HHMeHH H OBca. (12) 3HM6ii ohi ne Mon> padoTaxb.
(13) GnjibHbift napb xot^jit. Kynnxb ero MajieHbKift aomt.. (14) V
MyjKHKa TOJibKO flBa ciina; ojtHH'b chhi. mhofo padoxaji-b, Apyroli
HHKorjia HHHero ne A^jiaji-b, ho ohb -feji-b xop6mifi[ xji-feS-b y oxna.
(15) Oxeii-b HHKoraa ne xox'fejn> aaxb ei^^ xji'fe6a. (16) CxapHK'b
flaji-b ocjiy MHoro OBca. (17) y Her6 H-fex-b H^ivieHH. (18) H Morx.
xojibKo Majio noHHMaxb.
Omei^h HUKOzda He xommjih damb eMy xjimda.
F. Bonpocbi:
(1) KaKdii apyrx. 6bijix. y ^apfl? (2) Hxo eivi;^ najix, uapb?
(3) CK6jibK0 0HX> eM^ Aajix.? (4) Koraa repott xox'fejix> roHHXb
oji6hh? (5) Hxo eM^ noKaaaJix. MyrnHKij? (6) Hxo xox'fejix nacxo
A'fejiaxb CbiH-b MyjKHKa? (7) Mnoro jih obc^ y MymnKa? (8) Kora
MyjKELKx. Majio pa66xajix>? (9) KaK6BX> 6bijiX) oaHHx> cbiHx>? (10) A
jtpyrofi? (11) IIoqeM;^ oxenx. ne xox-fejiX) aaxb 5xoMy CHHy xji-feSa?
(12) Hxo cxapHKX> Aajix> ocjiy?
G. Translate :
(1) I did not wish to buy it. (2) The czar's young friend was hunting
the stag. (3) Did he see the stag ? (4) No. I do not know why he did
not understand it. (5) What sort of a house did the man give him ?
LESSON VII
34. Neuter nouns end in -o or -e (-e if accented) and are declined
thus :
Habd Form Soft Forms
nom. ceji6 [s9t6], village ^ Mope [more], sea nnxbe [pitjo], drinh
gen. cejia [seta] Mopn [m6rA] HHXbfl [pitjd]
dat. cejiy^ [satii] M6pio [mofu] nnxbib [pitju]
ace. cejio [seto] Mope [mora] HHXbe [pitjo]
(a) Nominative singular ends in -o or -e, -e (always accented).
(6) Genitive and dative have the same endings as the mas-
culine nouns.
' (c) Accusative has the same form as nominative.
This is true of all i^euter substantives and adjectives.
^ With a church.
D
50 LESSON VII 36
35. Adjectives like nouns have
_ , rmasc. 6'fejii.itt [bsti], white
Haed EroiNGS 1 {^^^^ 64jioe [bAjl]
^ rmasc. SojibHott [bA^in6t], sicjfc, ill
I Ineut. SojibHoe [bA^in6J9]
cs ^ , o fjoiasc. ciiHift [sfrd], blue
or Soft Endings 3 -^ , , r-.. -,
' Ineut. CHHce [sineja]
(a) If tlie stem ends in K, r, x, m, h, m, ii|, itt not tifi must
be written, e.g. MajieHbKifi [maienki], small.
Similarly we must write ee, not oe, when the o is not accented,
after jk, h, m, m, i^, e.g.
xopomifi, xopomee [xAr6Ji, xArojaja], good.
, Vocabulary
ceji6, a [s9t6, a], village BK^CHbift [fkusni], mce {to taste)
M6pe, H [mora, a], sea Kiicjibiii [kisti], sour
h66o, a [nsbA, a], shy, heaven diAt^iiHiH [siiii], blue
iiSjiOKO, a [jab^AkA, a], apple Moii, Moe [moi, mAJo], my, mine
3ji;aHie, h [zdanjg, a], building TBOii, TBoe [tvoi, tvAJ6], thy, thine
riHTbe, H [pitjo, a], drink KOTopbift, oe [kAt6ri, Aja], which
K^maHbc, fl [kiiJAnja, A\,food namt, name [naj, naja], our, ours
i;B'feT'b, a [tsvet, a], colour BauiTb^ ^W^ ['^^J' ^^\^\ your, yours
noTOMT) [pAtom], then, thereupon ^TOXb^'i^Td fstAt, stA], this, that
BOTT) noHCMy [vot pAtJamu], that is TOT-b, to [tot, to], that
why OflHO {neuter of o^HH'b) [Adno], one,
cn-fejibiH [spsti], ripe a certain
yneHbe^ CB'feT'b, a neyq^Hbe^ TbMa [utJ6nJ9 svet, a nautj^nja -
tma], Learning is light, but ignorance is darkness.
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) BK^CHoe iiSjiOKO. (2) CnHlii nB-fex-b H^Sa, (3) Cihiee Mope.
(4) B-fejioe h66o. (5) Gn'fejioe h6jioko. (6) MajiCHbKoe saanie.
(7) Xopomiii CHpi) h xopomee nHTbe. (8) Box-b XBoe cnibjioe
A6JI0K0. (9) Hame xopomee Kymanbe. (10) Kncjioe nnxbe. (11)
B^me dojibmoe cejio. (12) 9xo SAanie Sojibmofi ABop^n-b, koxo-
pbifi Aaji'b repoio ciijibHbiii napb. (13) MajieHbKiii cbmT> p^ra
ObiJiT. SAopoBbiH Majib^HK-b; OUT. ifeji-b 5x0 6ojibm6e h6jioko, Koxopoe
TH MH-fe naJIX*. (14) riOXOMTj OWh XOX-fejII) HrpdXb. (15) MaJIbHHK-b
HrpaJiTj H npbiraji'b; BOx-b hohcm^ h HHKorjta ne Morx. cnaxb.
JJomoMb OHh xomrbjih uzpamh.
^ Also spelt -ie.
36-38 LESSON VIII 51
B. Translate into Russian :
(1) A ripe apple. (2) Tasty food and drink. (3) Blue sky. (4) For the
village. (5) Without food and without drink. (6) Our little village. (7) My
good food. (8) His sour drink. (9) My old village. (10) Your timid
old father. (11) The colour of the apple. (12) What was the peasant's
son eating ? A nice ripe apple. (13) At his father's. (14) At their house.
(15) The blue sea. (16) That large building is not his house. (17) That is
the czar's palace ; his son used to live there in winter. (18) When did the
man use to go [when the man went] to work ? (19) When did the Uttle boy
eat the good food ? (20) He never had food and drink [ne 6biJio].^ (21) The
great palace that used to be there. (22) That is why he worked little and
played a great deal. (23) The poor man who did not Imow the friend's house.
(24) Four villages. Two apples. Three heroes. Two colours.
C. Give the genitive, dative, and accusative of
KymaHbc, bh^kt., caAi., AQsioko, nBopen-L, OBecb, h66o.
LESSON VIII
36. The neuter singular of the past tense ends in -o, e.g.
masc. OH-L dbiJi'B [on bil], he (it) was.
neut. OHO ^ 6hjio [Ano bitA], it was.
37. Reflexive verbs are very numerous in Russian. Sometimes
they may be rendered hterally ; sometimes they are employed
where we should use the passive voice ; sometimes they correspond
to Enghsh neuter verbs ; sometimes they do not admit of a hteral
translation at all.
38. HpaBHTLCfl [nravitsA], to he pleasing ^ is a common reflexive
verb ; the syllable -ch is a contraction for ce5fl meaning self. The
past tense is
masc. HpaBHJiCH [nrdvitsA], was pleasing,
neut. HpaBHJiocb [nravitAs], was pleasing.
Note :
(a) The t after the Ji is absent from the mascuUne form, (b) -CH
is written -Cb after the vowel in the neuter.
The word is used thus :
^TOT'B noMt CMy HpaBHJiCH [stAt dom jamii nravitsA], This {that) house
was pleasing to him, i.e. he liked this house.
^ Note the accentuation in He Gbijio.
2 oh6 is not so frequently used as oh-b ; its place is often taken by dxo, to, thisy
that.
52 LESSON VIII 39
And so ' / did not like the village ' is ' The village did not please me,' i.e.
Ceji6 MH-fe HeiipaBHJiocb [ssto miis nanravitAs], the thing or person liked
being the subject of the Russian verb, while the name of the person who
is pleased is in the dative case :
5to hm-l H6Hp^BHJiocb [stA jim nanravltAs], They did not like that.
39. The dative is governed by certain prepositions, e.g. KTb
(ko) [k, ko, kA], towards :
K'B OTn^ [kAtsii], towards the father.
Ki. HHM'b [kiiim], towards them, to them.
KG MH'fe [kA mns], towards me, to me.
Note. KG is used instead of Kt before words beginning with a combination
of consonants difficult to pronounce ; k, m and H together would be rather
awkward ; the G is inserted after k.
Vocabulary
KHiisB, H [knas], prince HpaBHTbCfl A [nravitsA], to he pleas-
MCflB'fenb, H [ihadv^^t], bear ing
ceroAHH [savodnA], to-day, lit. of this coJKaji'feHie [sA5Ai6riJ9], regret
day K'B CGJKaji'feHiK) [ksA5Alenju], to one's
AOMa [d6mA], at home (with verbs of regret, unfortunately
rest) BTb Ji-fecB [viss], into the forest (ace.)
nGTGMy- qxo [pAtAmiijtA], because bt. Ji-fecy [vlesu], in the forest (Par. 46)
BH^-fexB A [yidot], to see b-b ca^-B [fsat (d)], into the garden
HHrfl'fe [nigde], nowhere bT) ca^y [fsAdd], in the garden
Exercises
A. Add the necessary terminations where they are lacking in the
following phrases :
(1) Mg- gt^ii- Ten6pB ohchb cxap- qe^iOB-feK-. (2) Ham-
n66p- jJipyri). (3) Bam- xopom- K^manB-. (4) 5t- d-feji- xji^S-b.
(5) Ero cn-feji- hSjigk-. (6) Mg- khcji- nnxBe. (7) Oh-b xg^hji-b
B-B 6ojiBm- ji-fecB. (8) Oho Sjbiji- b-b ca^y. (9) H xoahji'b K'B Mop-
(10) OH'B XGAHJI-B K- MH'fe. (11) 5x- HJIGX- HHXBe. (12) HcpH-
xji'feS'B. (13) Xopom- GBecB. (14) MajiCHBK- hSjigkg. (15) Ma-
jieHBK- Gceji-B. (16) K'B oxLt-. (17) y Gxi^-. (18) fljifl 6pax-.
(19) y exapHK-. (20) Tpn ceji-, (21) Hexi;ip- capa-. (22) y
repo-. (23) Ham- rji^n- MaJie:^BK- cbih'b. (24) H xojimji'b K'B
MyjKHK-. (25) 5x0 MH'fe HpaBHJi-. (26) H^me chh- h66o cm;^
HpaBHJi-. (27) Bea-B hhxb-.
40 LESSON IX 53
B. Translate :
(1) CHHifi UB'feT'L MOpH H H66a MH^ 6qeHb HpdBHJICH; QosihuidVL
jii^cb MH-fe HpaBHJicfl, HO Baiue MajieHbKoe cejio MH'fe oqeHb Majio
HpaBHJIOCb. (2) CerOAHH OAHHI, HCJIOB-feK-b XOT^JIT. BBfl-feTb MeflB^Afl
B-b Ji'fec^^ (3) KHH3b, jipyr-b napn, roHHJi-b Me^B^jiifl. (4) 5to eMy
CKaaaji-b MyjKHKTb. (5) noTOMi. h BH^-feji-b ^Toro qejiOB^Ka bi. can;^
MymHKa. (6) K-b caJKaji-feniio y MyjKHKa SojibHoft MaJieHbKifi chh^;
cerojiHfl OHT, SbiJiTb y ^Toro cxapHK^, KOTopbift bt. caa^ paSoTaji-b.
(7) Bk^choc K^y^maHbe eM^ HpaBHJiocb, hotom^ ^to oh^ xoT'feji'b -fecTb.
(8) Bojibinoe sAanie, KOTopoe Tbi Taan. BHa-fejiT., SBop^Lt-b KHjisH. (9)
MoPl jipfr-b He AOMa xenepb . (10) K-b cojKaji'feHiio a er6 OTi;a HHrs'fe He
Mor-b BHjt'feTb; OH-b HHKorna h6 dbijii. ^ A6Ma. (11) Bott* OH-b xenepb.
Eojibiuoe Bdame, Komopoe mui maMh eudmjih, deopei^h i^apn.
C. BonpocBi :
(1) Hto TeS-fe HpaBHJIOCb? (2) Hto TeS-fe HenpaBHJiocb? (3) Hto
XOT^JI'b BHA'feTb HejIOB-feK-b? (4) KOF^a OH-b er6 XOT-fejIl) BlIa'feTb?
(6) r^i^ Gbiji-b MejiB'feAb? (6) KaKOBi, y MyjKHKa chhti? (7) J^OMa
JIH oht. cerojUHH? (8) rio^eM^ Tbi ne Mon. BH^i^Tb ero oxi^d?
(9) Koro Tbi He Mor-b Bii^ifeTb?
D. Translate into Kussian :
(1) I wished to see my friend to-day, but unfortunately he was not at
home ; that is why I could not see him. (2) In summer he often used to go
towards the sea, because he liked the blue sea. (3) The little village that I
saw there, I did not like. (4) The intelUgent boy gave the old man tasty
food and drink. (5) Did he wish to see the little building that you [thou]
showed me ? (6) There is the great palace where the czar's friend lived !
(7) Why was the poor man sowing oats ? (8) He gave a lot of oats to this
ass. (9) Had he not a kind friend ? *
* Pars. 123, 124 may be studied at this point and the future tense be
practised with any A verb.
LESSON IX
40. The word xgahji'L, past tense of xohhtb, lias been frequently-
used. It means ' one was in the way of going, ^ ' one was in the habit
of going, ^ as when we say in English, * When he was young, not every
hoy went to school.^ If we wish to say that * one was actually going, ^
as when we say in EngHsh, ' He was going along the street when that
happened,' we must use the Russian verb
masc. OH'L luejit [on Sot], neut. oho iiijio [aho Jto].
^ Note the accentuation in h6 Ghji-b.
54
LESSON IX
41-43
41. Notice the following idioms illustrating tlie use of the in-
finitive :
Hto ^-fejiaib? [Jfco dstAt], What is to be done ?
Hto MHife (CMA^) fl-fejiaTh? [Jto miis (jamli) dstAt], What am I {is he) to do ?
Bo3m6}kho jih paSoxaxb Ji-fexoMt bI) Ji-fecy? [vAzm65iiA ii rAb6tAt
IstAm vlasii]. Is it possible to work in the forest in summer ?
HejibBH pa66TaTb 3hm6io (-oh) b-b Ji-fec^ [naiza rAb6Ut zimoju (61)
vl9Sli], It is impossible to work in the forest in winter.
42. Four cases of the noun have been given. But there are
altogether six cases in Russian. (Only one or two nouns have
a special form for the Vocative.) The remaining two are the
Instrumental and Prepositional.
Their endings are identical for masculine and neuter nouns, viz.
Haed Form Soft Form
instr. OM-B ewb (ewh if accented)
prep, ib 'fe
43. The complete declension in the singular of the five types of
nouns is, therefore, as follows :
(The plurals are printed here, but as no plural forms wiU be used before
Lesson XX., they need not be learned at this point.)
Hard Forms
Masc.
Neut.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
nom. ot6ut>
OTUbl
ceji6
cejia
gen. OTua
OTUOBT,
ceji^
ceJiT.
dat. OTu:^
OTUaMT,
ceji:^
cejiaMT*
ace. OTi^a
OTUbBT.
ceji6
cejia
instr. OTudM-b 1 [Ats6m]
OTUaMH
cejiOMTb [88t6m]
cejiaMH
prep. OTLt'fe [Atss]
OTixaxi.
ceji'fe [sale]
cejiaxT.
Soft Forms
Masculines
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
nom. uapb
uapH
repofi
repoH
gen. uapfl
^apeH
repofl
repocBt
dat. uapib
^apflM'b
repoK)
repoHM-b
ace. ixscpA
uapett
repoH
repocBTb
instr. uapeMT> [tsArom]
uapflMH
repocMT) [g8r6jam]
rep6HMH
prep, uap^ [tsArs]
uapflX-B
repo-fe [garoje]
repoHX-b
1 After w, H, ni, m, n.
unaccented o
never appears; its place
is taken by
e.g. c-b TOBkpvnafiwh [stAvdfiJtJem], with the companion
44 LESSON IX 55
Neuter
Sing. Plur.
nom. Mope Mopii
gen. Mopfl Mopefii
dat. M6pio MopiiMTb
ace. M6pe Mopii
instr. MopeM-B [morain] MopHMH
prep. Mop-fe 1 [mora] MOpHXT* ^
{a) It must be remembered that masculine names of inanimate things
have the same form in the accusative as in the nominative.
44. The instrumental case is used after certain prepositions, e.g.
CL MaJib^HKOMt [smd^itJikAm], with the boy
CO 2 MHOK) (mhoK) [sAmnoju (mnoi)], with me
nepcAt cejiOMT) [p^rat satom], before the village
3a CTOJiOMt 3 [zAstAtom], behind the table
Vocabulary
TOBapniut, a [tAvdriJtJ], companion Mor^qiii [mAgiitJi], powerful
aoMHK'b, a [dorhik], little house aepeBHHHBiii [daravdni], wooden
MHRHCxpt [rhinistr], minister KaMCHHbitt [kdiiiani], of stone
CTOJi-L, a [stot, stAtd], table co mhok) [sAmnoju], with me
Kop6jib, H \kAx6A'\, king CB to66k) (oft) [stAboju (boi)], with
pySjib, A [rup, rubld], rouble thee
Macjio, a [mdstA], butter CL HHM'b [snim], with him, with it
OKHO, a [Akn6, d], window Cb hhmh [snfihi], with them
Kpecjio, a [ki-EstA, a], arm-chair Ch ^THM-b [s6tim], with this (adj. or
CTOiixb A [stAJd^t], to stand pron.)
CTOHTb A [stoit], to cost, be worth Cb T'feM'b[stsm],m^A^^<(adj.orpron.)
KpacHBbiH [krAsivi], beautiful Cb K'feM'b? [sksm], with whom ?
HCKpacHBbiH [nakrAsivi], not pretty, wiaWhl [tjem], with what ?
u^ly o6biKHOB6HHO [AbiknAvsnA], usually
Exercises
A. Give the dative, accusative, and instrumental of
repoii, ABopei^-b, pyGjib, MacJio, cojKaji'feHie.
B. Translate into Russian :
(1) Towards me, thee, him, that, whom, the table, the boy. (2) Into
[requires the accusative'] the garden, house, forest, village. (3) Behind me, thee,
him (it), that, whom, the building. (4) With the father, czar, hero, sea, man,
stag. (5) For me, them, thee, him (it), that, whom, the little house \(me wcyrd],
\ * Nouns in -ie like ananie have prep. sing, in -in and gen. pi. in -iii.
* See note to kg in Par. 39.
' This is the Russian phrase for at table. With verbs of motion aa and n^pea-t
require the accusative.
56 LESSON X 45
C. Translate :
(1) Mor;^qiii khhsb Cb mhhhctpom'b. (2) BK^CHbitt xji-feSt Qea-h
Macjia. (3) Cn-fejioe ;i6jiOKO eny HenpaEHJiocb. (4) Ero aoSpLiii
jipyrt jKHjn> 3d Ji-fecoMt.^ (5) Oaho Kpecjio ctohjio n^pej^-L okhom'l,
a apyroe ctohjio y CTOJia (n^pen-L ctojiom-b). (6) ^tottj ctoji-b hc
ctohjitj qexLipe pySjiii. (7) MajieHbKiii MajibHHKt nrpaJi'B ct
TOBapnmcM'b'^B'L ca^f. (8) B-fenHbrn cbin-b cTOHJi-b cb oTixoM-b
nepe^-b ^THM-b OKHOM-b. (9) C-b Ki^M-b OH-b meji-b ktj Mopio? (10) V
MeHH ebiji-b Torna KaMennbitt soMnKT. cb capaeMi.. (11) CKOJibKO
CTOHJIO 5to nepeBHHHoe Kpecjio? (12) y Kopojin 6bijn> KpacHBbm
caa-b.
CKOAbKo cmoujio dmo depeemiHoe npecAO?
D. Translate into Russian :
(1) Why was the boy's companion standing [why stood, etc.] behind the
arm-chair ? (2) I saw him when he was going towards the house. (3) When
did you see [thou sawest] the father with his son ? (4) I told you [thee] that.
(5) Was he going towards the window ? (6) In summer I used often to go
into that wood. (7) The boy's father is there now with (his) companion. (8)
He was going towards him. (9) The peasant's son was never with me at table.
(10) How much was that Uttle house worth ? (11) The wooden table, that
used to stand before the window, was worth only three roubles. (12) To-day
I saw the boy's companion. (13) Why was he there to-day ? (14) Did you
[thou] see the Uttle stone house behind the garden ? (15) No, I was never in
the garden. . (16) He used often to go towards the sea. (17) The great stone
building that you saw there was not their palace. (18) Once he was going
home with them. (19) (With) what did he usually do that ? (20) Before
whom was he standing ? (21) What is he to do ? (22) He never saw the
man ; that is why he could not tell you where he (was). (23) It is
impossible to speak with his friend. (24) Is it possible to work in the forest
in winter ? ,
LESSON X
45. The Prepositional case is never found without a preposition :
hence its name. Prepositions requiring this case are : o (written
also oCt and 66o), na, bt>, npn, e.g.
OhTj roBopHJii. o flOM-fe [on gAVArit a d6m9], He was speaking of the
house.
* Note the accentuation.
46 LESSON X 57
660 1 MHife, o TeS-fe, o HeMt, oSt ^ ^tomt,, TOMt [AbAmn^, Atebe, An6m,
AbstAm, Atom], 0/, about, concerning me, thee, him, this, that.
Ha CTOJi'fe [na stAis], on the table.
BT. oropoa'fe [vAgArode], in the kitchen-garden.
BO 1 MH'fe, btj TeS-fej^B-b HeMt, BT) ^TOM-L, BT) TOMt [vAmns, ftabs, vnom,
vetAm, ftom], in me, in thee, in him, in this, in that.
npH HeMT) [pri nom], in his entourage, in his presence.
46. A number of very common masculine nouns, nearly all
monosyllabic, bave a form in -^ following tbe prepositions Bi. and .
Ha. BT> Jiifecy 3 and Bt cajty bave already been given in tbe
Vocabulary to Lesson VIII. Sucb are
Ha noji^ [nApAtu], on th. floor.
Ha 6eper;^ [nAboregu], on the shore.
Ha Bcpxy [nAvarxii], on top.
Ha Jiyry [nAtugii], on the meadow.
Ha moct;;^ [nAmAstii], on the bridge.
Bi. roji;^ [vgAdu], in the year.
Bii UB'fex^ [ftsvatti], in bloom.
(a) The y is always accented in tbese pkcases.
Vocabulary
B'b'fesA'L, a [vjsst, zdA], entrance ryjiHTB 131 A [guid^t], to go walking
no JIT), a [pot], floor {for pleasure)
expert, a [b^rek, gA], bank, shore K^maxb 131 A [kiijAt], to eat
BepxTb, a [vsrx], top part nocjiaxb [pAsta^t], to send
TbKb, a [god (t), dA], year cxpoHTb A [stroit], to build
Jifrii, a [tuk], meadow OH-b nomejiT* [on pAjot], he went
MOCTi*, a [most], bridge {once)
nepo, a [paro], pen jiOKaxb A [i83a^t], to lie, recline
o, oST), 660 [o. A, Ab (Ap), 6bA], HaKOH^ix-b [lukAnsts], at last, in the
about, of, concerning end
B'b (bo) [v, f, VA, vo], in qxoSbi [Jtobi], in order that
Ha [ela, na], on xome [t659], also
npH [pri], near, at, in the time of xaKJKC [tdg39], also
o Hnx-b [Anix], about them npn caMOM-b B-b-ksjifk [pri sdmAm
o KOMTb? [Akom], about whom ? vj6zd9], near, at the very entrance
o no-Wht [Atjom], about what ? saH'^M'b? [zAtjsm], with what object?
A^Maxb 131 A [dumAt], to think why ?
^ See note to kg in Par. 39. ^ Used before vowels.
^ Cf. BT. a-fec-B in Vocabulary to Lesson II.
58 LESSON X 46
Exercises
A. Translate into Kussian :
(1) He was speaking of you [thee], him, me, that, this, the floor, the bridge,
the shore, the garden, the forest, the window, the companion, the sea, the
regret. (2) The pen was lying on the table, on the bridge, on the floor.
(3) I was walking on the shore, in the garden, in the kitchen-garden, in the
forest ; he was with me [in my presence].
B. Translate :
(1) Ojukn-b CHJibHHfi i^apb CTpoHJit 6ojibm6ii KaMCHHLifi ABop^nt.
(2) n^peat ^THM-L sh^hIcmt. 6bijn> ohchb KpacHBBiH cajx-b. (3) Ho
npH CaMOMT. B-b^aa-fe BT. Ca^-b CTOHJI-b MaJICHbKifi nepeBHHHblH AOMHK'b.
(4) 5to HenpaBHJiocb i;apib. (5) B^b ^TOM-b jtoMHK'fe musi-b dlaHuuA
MymHK-b, a ch HHM-b er6 OT^i^-b. (6) JI-feTOMi. itapb ^acxo ryjiHjn.
Cb MKHHCTpoM-b B^b ca^y^. (7) Pas-b ohtj roBopHJi-b cb TOBapnmeM'b
O TOM-b MyjKHK^. (8) HaKOHCIl'b USL^h HOCJiaJIT, MHHHCTpa K'b
MyjKHKy^, HT66bi OH-b KynHji-b cxapHii noMnK-b. (9) Korna MnHficTp-b
nomeji-b B-b oropo^'b, nejioBi^K'b ne Sbiji-b noMa; OH-b paSoTajii.
Tor^a B-b Ji-fec^. (10) GxapHK-b TaKJKe He Shjit. aoMa, a T6jibK0
OHCHb MaJicHbKlH cbiH-b MyjKHKa 6biji'b 3a CTOJiOM-b. (11) Ky'inaJi'b
qepHbifi xjiifedi) cb MacjiOM-b, a K'b cojKaji'feHiio Tox-b MaJibHHK'b ne
Mor-b CKasaTb MHHiicTpy, rflib Tor^a Sbui-b OT^i^-b. (12) Hto a-fejiaxb?
Hejib3>i KynHTb A6MHKa.
C. BonpocH:
(1) Hto cTpdHJiT. i^apb? (2) Hto ctohjio nepea-b SAanieM-b?
(3) Kto jKHJi-b BTb ^TOM-b AOMHR-fe? (4) OjtiiH'b [alone, by himself]
jiH OH-b TaiM-b H^HJi-b? (5) FA'fe ryjiHJi-b i^apb? (6) G-b K-feM-b OH-b
ryjiiiji'b? (7) O KOM-b OH-b roBopnji-b oanaJKabi? (8) KyAa i^apb
nocjiaji-b MHHHCTpa? (9) Saq-^MX.? (10) Koro MHHHCxp-b Bik]s,1asn>
y MyatHKa? (11) rioHCMy' MyrnHK-b h6 dbiJi-b flOMa?
D. Translate into Russian :
(1) The old man's wooden house used to stand at the very entrance to [bt.
with ace.] the king's beautiful stone palace. (2) The powerful king wished to
buy that little house. (3) One day the king was walking with the minister and
saw the peasant at work [saw how the peasant worked] in the garden. (4) The
peasant saw the minister and sent his son to him. (5) When the king's
minister was on the bridge, the peasant's son, who was not a stupid boy and
spoke Russian very well, went towards him and said to him, "The little house
was grandfather's [use y with genit.}. He never wished to give it to the king."
47
LESSON XI
59
are
LESSON XI
47. The pronouns that have been introduced in Lessons I to X
A. Personal Pronouns
First
Second
Third
nom.
H,/
TBI, tJlOU
OHi,, OHO, he, it
OHiky they'^
gen.
MCHH, of me
Te6fl, etc.
(H)er6, etc.
(h)hx'i>, of themy their
dat.
MH-fe, etc.
leQ'h
(H)eM:^
(H)HM'b, to them
ace.
MeHfl
TCdH
(H)er6
(h)hx'I>, etc.
instr.
MHOK) (6ti)
to66k) (6ft) (h)hm'i>
(h)hmh
prep.
MHt
TCO'fe
HeM-L
HHX-B
B. POSSESSIVES
Moii, Moe, my, mine HaniTb, name, our, ours
TBOH, TBOe, thy, thine Bami), B^me, your, yours
For the third person there is no possessive : ero,^ the genitive of OH-b, is
used as the equivalent of his or its; HXt, genitive plural of ohh, stands
for their.
C. Demonstrative Pronouns and Adjectives
Masc. Neut. Masc. Neut.
nom. TOTi> TO, that ^tot-b ^to, this
gen.
dat.
instr.
prep.
nom.
ace.
nom.
gen.
dat.
ace.
instr.
prep.
Toro
TOMy
TOT'b TO
or Toro
T-feMT.
TOM-B
^Toro
^TOMy
^TOT-L 5t0
or ^Toro
^THMt
^TOMT.
D. Interrogatives and Relatives
Masc. Neut.
K0T6pbitt KOTdpoe, which, that; which?
K0T6pbiii {inanimate) KOTopoe
Singular and Plural
KTO? ^ who ? HTO? ^ what ? which ?
Koro qero
kom;^ hcm;^
K0r6 HTO
K-feM-L q-feMT.
KOMT) HCM'B
* Fern, form is oh+..
^ See Lesson XXIX for use of CB6tt.
^ This word is also used as a relative.
60 LESSON XI 47
LESSON XI
Masc.
Neut.
nom. KaKdET,?
ace. KaK6Bi) {inanimate)
nom. KaKoii? (attrib. adj.)
ace. KaKdfi (inanimate)
KaK0B6? of what sort ?
KaKOBO
KaKoe? of what sort ? which ?
KaK6e
E. Indefinite
hhkt6 [iiixt6], no one, and hh^to [fiijto], nothing, are declined like kto
and HTO, e.g. in the genitive case they have the form HHK0r6, HHHer6
[nikAvo, riitJ9v6]. When compounded with prepositions the negative particle
is separated from the pronoun by the preposition, e.g. hh cb KifeMt
[riisksm], hh o newb [riiAtJom], with no one, about nothing.
The forms kt6-to [xto-tAJ, kt6-jih6o [xto-libA], kto-hhS^AB [xto-
nibd^t], and qxo-TO [Jto-tA], ht6-jih6o [Jto-iibA], qxo-HHS^Ab [Jto-nibuit],
standing for some one, any one and something, anything, are in very
frequent use, but in this book the forms given in this paragraph (E) will be
little used except hhkto and HHqer6.
Exercises
A. Supply tlie proper forms of
H, TBI, GH-b, 5tO, kto, ^TO, TOTT,
after each of the prepositions
AJIH, n^pcAi*, K-b, Ha, o, CTb.
B. Translate :
y Menn; Sea-b Koro?; o hcmT)?; sa mhoio; y tcSh; GesTb Her6;
cb K'feM'b?; o HCM-b; B-b Te6^; ch to66k); na ^eM-b?; o komT) oht* roBO-
pi^ji-b?; o HCM-b?; KOM^ OH-b 5to roBopHJi-b?; c-b ^thmi,; K-b aroMy;
KaKOBO 6biJio ^To 3ji;^Hie?; nepo, KOTopoe jiejKaJio Taivi-b; MajiCHbKift
aoMii, K0T6pbiH CTOiiji'b HpH B'b'hsji'h; KaKOB-b Slijit. er6 cbiH-b?; tm
nomeji'bK'b hcm^; qi^M-b?; K-bcomaji-feniio; h HHKorAaHC CKaaaJi-b ^Toro.
^ HUKoeda He cKoaajib dmozo,
C. Translate into Russian :
(1) The great bridge that you saw yesterday. (2) That black arm-chair
that used to stand before the window. (3) Where was his palace ? (4) What
was on the floor ? (5) Who had a friend ? (6) Your oats. (7) His corn.
(8) At their house. (9) Who told him that ? (10) What did he tell you
[thee]? (11) Forme, (12) Without him. (13) With you [thee]. (14) For
him. (15) About me. (16) With what ? \no preposition required : use in-
strumental]. (17) What was I speaking about ? (18) I did not know that.
(19) He did not know you [thee]. (20) Our building ; your companion ;
ids table ; that butter ; my food ; his drink. (21) Behind it. (22) I liked
it. (23) You liked it. (24) He Uked it. (25) He never saw it.
48-61
ACCENTUATION
61
Nouns that have occurked in Lessons I-XI
48. Nouns that preserve throughout the singular the accent of
the nominative, e.g. H'fen'L, riji;a ; oropofl'L, oropojta.
H^^Kh
Jl'feC'b
OJl^Hb
CblHt
xji-feSt
MejcB^flb
BuyK-b
CHpi.
h66o
Spaxt
orop6m>
A6ziOKO
HCJIOB'feK'B
C2LKh
Kp6cjio
MaJIbHHK'L
UBifeTT.
Macjio
TOBapHIU'L
MOCTI.
Mope
flpyr-B
BCpX-b 1
sflanie
MHrnicTpt
rem,
coKaji-feHie
paSdTHHKT.
BT.'feaH'B
ceji6
HOMt
Ceper'b
OKHO
noji'L
capaii
HHTbe
AOMHKT,
repdii
K^maHbe
Jiyr-L
KHfl3b
The forms in -y after
B-L or Ha (see
Par. 46) are exceptional.
49. Nouns which have the accent
on the termination, e.g.
cTapHKi*, ciapHKa.
cTapiiKT)
K0p6jlb
MymJiKi.
napb
CTOJIt
HHM^Hb
0T6^'b
py6jib
ji;Bop6ui>
OBeCL
ocejiT.
50. Observe that no neuter nouns occur in the second Hst : in
neuter nouns the accent does not change in the singular.
51. The Peepositions that have akeady occurred are :
with the genitive : 6e3'b, y, n^JiH
dative-, ktj (kg)
accusative'. B'b,^ Ha,^ sa^
instrumental: sa,^ c-h (co), nepe^-b^ (n^pcAo)
prepositional: o, bt.^ (bo), Ha,^ npn
^ Bepx6Mi. [v9rx6m] with the verb fexaxi, means as the top, astride a horse,
mounted. ^ ^ See Lesson XV.
' With verbs of motion governs the accusative.
62 LESSON XII 52-54
LESSON XII
52. Feminine nouns end in
-a, e.g. nana [tapAJ, jpaw
-fl, e.g. HHHfl [nanA], nurse
-h, e.g. HOHb [notj], night
53. Nouns in -a and -a are declined thus :
Haed Form Soft Form
Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur,
nom. Jiana [tapA] JianLi hhhh [nariA] uAuu
gen. jianbi [tdpi] Jian-L hhhh [nani] HjiHb
dat. Jianib [Wpa] Ji^naMt HHH-fe [nana] HflnHM-L
ace. Jiany [tapu] JianM hhhk) [nanu] hhhb
. rjianoH [tapAi] jianaMH fHHHefi [nanal] hhhhmh
"^^ ^* \jianoK) [tdpAJu] (HHHeio [nanoju]
prep. Jian'fe [tdpa] Jianax-b nAw^ [nana] uAhhxtj
Note. The plurals need not be learned at this point, as no plural forms
will be used before Lesson XX.
(a) After K, r, x, m, h, m, ui, the vowels h, h, io never appear ;
they are replaced by H, a, y, e.g.
co6aKa [sAbakA], a dog
gen. co6aKH [sAbaki]
(b) After jk, h, hi, m, u unaccented o never appears ; it is
replaced by e, e.g.
K6jKa [k63A], leather, hide
instr. KdmePL (eio) [k639i (oju)]
HTHua [ptitsA], bird
instr. UTiknem (eio) [ptitsai (aju)]
(c) For the declension of nouns in -in see PocciH in
Voc. XXXIV. Dat. and prep. sing, in -in ; gen. pi. in -iii.
54. Some nouns accented on the termination draw back the
accent in the accusative, e.g.
BORSi [vAdd], water
ace. BOAy [v6du]
55-66
LESSON XIII
63
Vocabulary
JlSLMSLf bi [damA, i], lady
co6aKa, h [sAbdkA, i], dog
KoniKa, H [koJkA, i], cat
jK^Hmnna, li [s^nJtJiiiA, i], woman
cjiyjKaHKa, h [stu5diikA, i], servant
cecxpa, ii [sastrd, i], sister
6a6ymKa, h [babuJkA, i], grandmother
fl-feBOiiKa, H [devAtJkA, i], little girl
hAhr, h [ndnA, i], child's nurse
Ji^na, LI [tdpA, i], paw
K6jKa, H [k63A, i], skin, leather
m6fl, H [J^JA, J6i], neck
Bona, IJ [vAdd, i], water
nTHixa, H [ptitsA, i], bird
OHa [And], she
MOH (fern.) [niAJd], my, mine
TBOfl (/em.) [tvAJd], thy, thine
eA {not an adjective: genitive ofouA)
[J9J6 j^. of her, her, hers
Hama ^ [ndjA], our, ours
Bama [vdJA], your, yours
^xa; Ta [stA, ta], this; that
Exercise
Translate into Kussian :
Without water, at the grandmother's, for the nurse, towards the lady,
into the water, behind the servant, with the cat, in front of the dog, about the
lady, in the water, on the neck, your dog, our cat, her servant, her father, she
is our servant, the boy's nurse, the servant's son, his dog's neck, that lady, the
colour of the bird, the grandmother's house, the girl's bread, for the woman,
with the woman, she is my nurse, she is not his sister.
The Uttle boy lived in that house with his grandmother. He was
speaking of his sister. The nurse has two [rbIo, femJ] cats and a dog.
What did he tell the lady \datJ] about her servant ? I did not know the
woman.
LESSON XIII
55. Feminine adjectives end in -aa or -nn. The full form of the
nominative singular of the adjective is therefore :
Hard Form
M. 6oraTHH [bA^dti] F. Gordxan [bAgdtAJa] N. 6oraxoe [bAgdtAJa], rich
M. SojibHoii [bA^inoi] F. SojibHafl [bA^indJA] N. SojibHoe [bA^noja], ill
Soft Form
M. CHHiii [sini] F. chhah [sfnaja] N. e^nee [sineja], blue
56. The complete nominative singular of OflHH'b is :
ojUHH'b, onHa, oaH6 [Adfn, Adnd, Adno], ons, a certain, alone.
^ The complete declension of Hami. and the other possessives will be found in
Pars. 104, 105.
64 LESSON XIII 56
Vocabulary
KycoKT),^ Ka [kus6k, kuska], piece anrjiiiiCKitt [angliski or angliski],
Beapo, a [vedro], pail English
MHCO, a [liiasA], meat ^panityscKiH [frAntsiiski], French
qHCTbiii [tjisti], clean ecTb [jest], there is, there are
rpflSHbift [grdzni], dirty ecTB jih? [jest ii], is there ? are
p^ccKiii [ruski], Russian there ?
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) ycoSaKHKycoK'LMjica. (2) B^jiaflJianaKouiKH. (3) Gxapaa
h>Ihh H^bBOHKH. (4) y Hero SoraxaH 6a6ymKa. (5) JHoOpan
py^ccKaH naMa cb fl-feBO^Kott bt> ca^. (6) San-feM-B Hepnan KOUiKa
Ha CTOJi-fe? (7) Ona xenept na noji>\ (8) H . BHA-feji-B aany ci.
coSaKOH B-L ji-fecy. (9) MajieHbKiii pyccKm MajibHHK'b nrpaji-b ct>
Hiineio Ha Mocxy-. (10) Y kohikh KpacHBaa men. (11) CeroHHH
MOH MOJioAaH cecxpa na Jiyry^. (12) Hxo OH-b cerosHH j^aji-b coSaK-fe?
(13) H He roBopHJi-b o coOaK-fe. (14) Xopomift xjifeO-b dea-b Macjia
H Mflca He^paBHJicfl cjiyjKaHK-fe. (15) FpHSHan Boaa bt. Beap'fe;
^HCxaH Boa'i^ B-b caff^.
Fpsiauasi eoda eh eedpm; Hucman eoda eh cady.
B. Translate :
(1) There is another dog behind the arm-chair. (2) The Russian peasant
was eating a piece of bread and [say with] butter. (3) His son used to live in
summer at his grandmother's. (4) I never knew her grandmother. (5) The
young man went towards the lady ; he was Russian but he spoke French and
Enghsh very well. (6) I have one servant ; she is my old nurse. (7) The
woman's dirty house did not please him. (8) Did you see the dog's paw ?
(9) I did not see his dog anywhere [I nowhere not saw]. (10) There it is.
(11) Why was your Httle sister standing in front of the house ? (12) She
was playing with the cat, that is why she was in the garden. (13) It is
possible to work in the house without a servant. (14) What is the woman
to do ? (15) It was impossible to sleep, because the boy was playing with
(his) brother and sister in the garden. (16) Has the boy two sisters ? [ecxb
JIH y etc.].
^ Declined hke oT^qi : the o disappears in every case except the nominative
singular.
57-59 LESSON XIV 65
LESSON XIV
57. The feminine form of the past tense ends in -Jia, e.g.
Ona jxyMajia, roHiijia, cnaji^, Swjia [Ana dumAtA, gAnatA, spAtd
bita]. She was thinking {thought), hunted, slept, was.
58. The complete singular of the past tense is therefore
cnaJi'B, cnajia, cnajio [spat, spAtd, spatA]
n^Majit, a^Majia, a;^Majio [ddmAt, diimAtA, diimAtA]
The accent does not always remain on the same syllable in all
three genders. Wherever the termination is accented, the feminine
form, and if necessary the neuter form, will be indicated.
59. The feminine form of OHt is ona [ahq], she. The singular is
declined thus : , r / t
gen. (H)eH [J8J6, ]M\
dat. (h)6h [j6i] ^
ace. (H)ee [J9J6]
instr. (h)6io [j6ju]
prep, (o) h6h [An6i]
As with the masculineCand neuter forms, the oblique cases, when
governed by prepositions, must have the H prefixed.
Vocabulary
6^6a, LI [babA], peasant-woman crapyxa, h [stAiuxA], old woman
repoHHH, H [gerAiriiV], heroine BH^qna, h [vnutJkA], granddaughter
napiana, bi [tsAritsA], czarina ^xy [stu] is the accusative of ^xa, this
caMKa, H (oji^Hfl) [samkA (aU^ha)], Ty [tu] is the accusative o/xa, that
hind, doe {female of stag) Maxb [ma^t], mother
noapyra, H [pAdrug a], female friend Mon>, Morjia, Morjio [mog, lUAgta,
no^Ka, H [dotJkA], Utile daughter mAgto], could
Hi;x'L xaKoro apyjKKa, Kan-b poanaH Maxymna [nst tAk6vA dru3ka,
kak lAdnaJA matuJkA], There is no such good friend as one's own dear mother.
Exercise
(1) Rewrite Exercises B and D of Lesson VIII, substituting
feminine for masculine forms wherever that is possible.
(2) Rewrite Exercises B and D of Lesson X, treating them
in the same fashion. Substitute noflpyra for MHHHCxp'b.i
^ Par. 131 may be learned at this point and the present tense be practised
with any verb marked 131.
E
66 LESSON XV 60-62
LESSON XV
60. btj and Ha are used with either accusative or prepositional
(cf. Vocab. VIII). In the simplest instances, the rule that decides
which case is to be used, is that with either of these two words the
accusative suggests motion towards ; the prepositional does not.
In less obvious idioms this principle is of doubtful utility.
Compare :
Ona Jierjia Ha nojit^ [Ana iogta nd pAt], She lay doum on the floor {i,e.
she performed an act involving motion),
with
Ona JiejKaJia na nojiy' [ahq i93atA nA paM], She was lying on the floor
{i.e. she was occupying a certain position, no suggestion of motion being
present).
Similarly :
(1) Ona cksiSi na cxyji'b (ace.) [Ana s^tA nA stut], She sat down on the chair.
Ona CHA'fejia na CT^Jiife (prep.) [Ana sidstA nA stiiie], She was sitting on
the chair.
(2) Oht> nomeJiTj {or Bomejn>, entered) b-l caa-L [on pAjot (vaJoI)
fsat], He went into the garden.
Oh-l ryjiHjn> bij cajny [on guidt fsAdu], He was walking in the garden
(the motion was not from somewhere else into the garden).
In Oh'B CMOTp'feji'L Ha nrpy {ace. feminine) [on smAtrgt nA igrii], He
was looking at the game, the application of the principle can stUl be felt ; the
gaze was directed on to the game.
61. Some phrases :
HacoJiHuife [nA sontsa] {prep, neut.), in the sun.
Ha ;^JiHH'fe [nA uiitsa] {prep, fem.), in {on) the street.
Ha i^TOMTb M'fecTife [nA stAm meste] {prep, neut.), in that place.
Ha HpMapKy [nA jdrm^vrku] {ace. fem.), to the fair.
BT) ^TOMTb cjiynaife [vstAm stiitjAJo], in that case.
B-L Ji-fec^ [viesu], in the wood (cf. Par. 46).
62. The verb uicjiTj has been employed already : its meaning
was explained in Par. 40.
Note the following compounds of this verb :
Oh-L BOmejI-b [on VAJot], \ ... . ^ j - t ^^ - a x. i.x.
, ' r ' li ' n ^^^^ *^^o> ie- entered, is followed by the
Ona BoniJia [Ana vAjTa], y . ' .^u ^u ^-
^ , ' r ' ci-'-t preposition BT) with the accusative, e. or.
Oho bouijio [Ano vaJTo], )^ ^ '
Ona Bomjia Bt ^omT) [And vAjtd vdom].
^ Notice the accentuation ia this phrase.
63 LESSON XV 67
Ont npHmejn> [on pri|6t], went, but in the direction of the speaker,
i.e. came ; generally followed by preposition Kt, e.g.
Ona npHHiJia ko MH-fe [Ana prijtd kA mns].
Oht. npomejn> [on prAj6t], went through, i.e. traversed.
OhT) name JIT} [on nAj6t], came upon, i.e. found.
OhT) nomejit [on pAjot], went once (generally to some definite place).
Ohi uiejit MHMO [on jot mfni.v], was going past.
63. Compare with me Jit and npHUieJiTj in Par. 62 :
Hect, Hecjia, necjio [nos, nasta, nasto], carried, was carrying, and
npHHecB, npHHCCJia, etc. [prinos, prinasta], brought.
{a) Observe that Hect, like Mor-B, has no Jl in the masculine. See also
Jier'b and enact in the following Vocabulary.
In Par. 239 is given a list of irregular verbs many of which
show this feature.
VOCABULAKY
cfejit [sst], he sat down (inf. cfeCTb) ynajit [updt], he fell
Jiert, Jierjia, Jierjio [log, iagta, enact, cjia, cjio [spas, spAsld,
iegto], he lay down, i.e. he laid spAsto], he etc. saved
himself down P'feKa, H (Par. 54) [rakd], river
enrfjit A [sidst], he was in a seat, nocTejib {nx)m. or ace.) (Par. 64)
he was sitting [pAste^i], bed
JieJKajit A [i85dt], he was in a re- M^fecxo, a [liisstA], place
dining position, i.e. he was lying HeyjKCJiH [ii9U36ii], can it he that ?
CMOipi^Tb A [smAtr^^t], to look [at) surely not ?
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) Ona npniujia na HpMapKy. (2) GoSaKa exapHKa jiemajia
Ha cojinn-fe. (3) Hepnaa KOUiKa ynajia Bt p-feny [or p'^Ky]. (4) H
CH HPira-fe He BHA-fejit, HO axoTt MajiLqHKt ee enact. (5) Ona
CMOxp-fejia na caMKy Bt Ji-fec^. (6) Ont nect Bcapo ct boji;6io.
(7) Heyn^^JiH ona enajia na 5xoMt M'fecx'fe? (8) Bt 5xoMt cjiyqa-fe
ona CH He Morjia BHa-fexB. (9) Mojioaan noapyra jKeHn5HHbi npouijia
caat H Bomjia Bt Ji-fect. (10) Hcjibsh cKaaaxt, r^-fe ona xen^pb.
(11) HeyjKejiH ona ynajia Bt Bo^y? (12) Boxt onal
Heyjfce/iu ona yna/ia eh eody?
68 LESSON XVI 63
B. Translate into Kussian :
(1) The poor peasant woman went into the house. (2) She never saw
her in the house. (3) The czarina's daughter came to him. (4) The woman's
friend went home with her. (5) The old man's granddaughter was going past
the house [genit. after mhmo, which may be either an adverb or a preposition].
(6) The poor old woman lay down on the bed. (7) She was lying on the
floor. (8) The peasant woman's friend was at the fair {j^ep.). (9) Surely she
did not bring it here [hither] ? (10) It is not possible to sit on that chair.
C. Write sentences 4 and 6 of Ex. A in the feminine, and sentences
1, 7, 8, 9, 11 in the masculine.
LESSON XVI Y
Same subjects as in Lesson XV. >
Vocabulary
lidcb, a [nos], nose 6p6cHTB [brosit], to throw
Xbocttj, a [xvost], tail y6'fe>KaTb [yb95a^t], to run away
rJiasTb, a [gtas], eye jihtl (jiiijia) A [lit (iiW)], to pour
MOJIOKO, a [mAtAko], milk hhtb (nnjia) A [pit (pila)], to drink
c6jiHii;e, a [sontsa], sun cxaTb [std^t], to begin, to set about,
rojiOBa, LI (Par. 64, ace. roJiOBy) to become
[gAtAva], head cIhtb 131 A [sijd^t], to shine
jipaKa [drakA], quarrel, fight Kai^t paaii [kak ras], just then, as it
Kpy^i'Jibift [krugti], round happened
p630Bbift [rozAvi], pink cioji;a [sudd], hither
seJiCHbift [zoioni], green xyaa [tudd], thither
piijKlH [ri3i], brown, reddish CHOBa [snovA], anew, again
HJiHHribiH [diini], long Bqepa [ftjord], yesterday
cfepbiii [seri], grey MeiKfly {instr.) [m63du], between
CJiyHHJiocb [stutjltAs], happened to, hto [to jto], that which
OTornaTb [AtAgnd^t], to drive away eme [J9|tj6], still, yet
nocTynHTb [pAstupit], to behave, to btj 5to BpcMH (neut.) [vstA vr6mA],
act at that time, then
Ona JiHJia na Komny BOfloii [And iitd nAkoJku vAdoi], ^S'^e poured
with water on to the cat, i.e. she poured water on the cat.
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) Bqepa noSpbifi CTapliK'b cuA'feji'b sjvhch na ^xoM-b cxyjiife,
K0T6pbiH ero BHyn-b npHHecb na Sepen,. (2) Cojihuc eme ciajio.
(3) On-b BliA'feji'b, KaK-b Tarn. JieiKajia cfepan Kdmna. (4) noxoM-b
63 LESSON XVI 69
OH^ CT^Jia HHTb MOJIOKO, KOTOpOC Cfi npHHCCJld aHFJliiiCKafl
jI'feBoqKa. (5) KaK-L pasi, boiiiji^ b-b caa-b pi^LJKan co6aKa.
(6) npHuiJia K-b KoiuK-fe, xoT-fejia oTornaTb ee. (7) He Morjia.
(8) BbiJia apana MCJKjiy co6aKoii h koiukoh. (9) CTapHKi.
CMOTp'feji'b Ha HpaKy. (10) B-b ^to BpeMfl cxapaa 6a6a lujia mhmo.
(11) Biiflifejia H^ OHa to, ^to cjiyHMJiocb. (12) Hecjia naK-b paa-b
6ojibin6e Bej^po c-b Boa6tt h cxajia JiHTb Bondfi na KoniKy u co6aKy .
(13) Go6aKa yS-fejKaJia. (14) KouiKa Jierjia h cnbBa cxajia cnaxb na
cojiim'fe.
Komna nezjia u cHoea cmojia cnamb Ha cojiHi^m.
B. Bonpocbi :
(1) Kto CHfl-feji-b Ha 6eper^ p-feK^? (2) Kyaa npHHecb er6
BHyK-b cT^^ji-b? (3) KaKaH Sbijia nordaa?^ (4) KaKOBa 6hisik
KouiKa, KOTopan TaMb jie>KaJia? (5) KaKofi SbiJi-b y nefi Hocb? [pink]
XBOCT-b? [long] rjias-b? [green] (6) KaKaH 6biJia y nea rojiOBd?
[round]. (7) Hto ona cxajia nnxb? (8) Koxopoe mojioko? (9) Hxo
cjiyqHJiocb KaK-b paa-b? (10) Ki* KOMy npnuiJia co6aKa? (11) Hxo
HoxoM'b cjiyqHJiocb? (12) Ha qxo CMOxp'feji'b cxapiiK-b? (13) Kan-b
nocxynnjia cxapan 6a6a? (14) Hxo cjiyqnjiocb cb [to, lit. with] coSaKofi?
(15) A C-B K6u.K0ft? ^^^, , ^
C. Rewrite Exercise A, substituting
cxap^i^xa and BHyqKa for cxapiiKX. and bh^kt. ;
MyiKiiK-b for 6a6a ;
^^meH6K'b, Ka [Jtjenok, Jtjankd], puppy, for co6aKa ;
KOxenoK'b, Ka [kAtonAk, kAtonkA], kitten, for KOUiKa.
D. Translate into Russian :
(1) I did not know what had happened yesterday. (2) It was fine weather
[Ex. B 3] and she was sitting in the garden before the house. (3) Just
then our little black puppy went into the garden and lay down in the sun.
(4) The peasant-woman's stupid son saw the dog lying [how the dog lay] there
and wished to drive it away. (5) He could not. (6) Then he behaved very
badly. (7) He found a small bucket of [with] water that was standing behind
the house. (8) He brought it, poured it on the puppy, and threw the puppy
into the water ; it was dirty water. (9) Then the young dog ran away and
unfortunately it fell into the river. (10) But another boy came and saved
it. (11) Then there was a scrimmage between the boy who (had) poured
the water on the dog and the boy who (had) saved it. (12) The little-girl
[one word] liked the cat's round head, its pink nose and green eye. (13) Surely
she did not say that ? (14) It is impossible to say what she used to do.
(15) What is she to do now ?
^ H in this position means too, also.
^ What sort of weather was it ? (pAg6dA).
f
F-l -H^^-^l
70 LESSON XVII 64-66
LESSON XVII
64. Many feminine nouns end in -b. They are declined tlius :
nom. SBcpb [dWr], door
gen. JiBepH [dv6ri]
dat. SBepn [dv6ri]
ace. ABcpb [dve^r]
instr. aBepbK) [dverju]
prep. HBepn [dv6ri]
Note. (1) Nominative and accusative are identical.
(2) Genitive, dative, and prepositional are identical.
(3) Prepositional ends in -H.
65. MaTb and JtOHb are not declined like aeepb (see Par. 86).
66. -b is the one termination that, of itself, affords no exact
indication of gender, for, as was seen in Par. 26, masculine nouns
also have this ending. The feminines are in a majority.
VOCABULAKY
TCTpaAb, H [tatra^t], copy-hook Bife (fern, of HBa) [dvs], two
JiomaAb, H [tojAt], Jiorse Tenjibiii [topti], warm
Hoqb, H [not/], night xoJioaHbiii [xAtodni], cold
nocTejib, H [pAsU^i], hed TeMHbiii [tomni], dark
6ceHb, H [osan], autumn CB-fexjibiti [svstti], light
KOHibuiHfl, H [kAnuJnA], stable
B^AHOCTb (/.) HC nopoK-b [bsdnAst na pAiok], Poverty is no vice.
Exercises
A. Indicate the meanings of the following prepositions and the case
or cases they govern :
Ses-b, Ha, K-b, nepe^-b, B-b, 3a, o, npn.
Give one short sentence illustrating the meaning of each.
B. Indicate the meaning of the following nouns, indicate the gender
of each by placing an adjective before each nominative, and
give the dative and instrumental case of each noun :
uapb, 6a6a, Bcapo, KouiKa, TOBapHiUT), mhco, BHyK^, HOHb,
capaft, noApyra, h66o, pyOjib, aBopen-b, ojienb, Mope, KycoK-b,
cojKaji'feHie, caMKa, pifena, oceji-b, KOHibniHH.
C. Combine each of the nouns in B with jiiBa, flB'fe or nexbipe.
67-69 LESSON XVIII 71
LESSON XVIII
67. The instrumental case, apart from its use after prepositions
as explained in Par. 44, is also employed, as its name implies, to
indicate the means by which, or instrument with which, an act is
performed. Contrast
Ona npnmjia Cb aaMOii [And prijtd sddmAi], She came with, i.e. along
withy the lady,
with
Ona HHcajia nepdn-L, KapanaamoMt, M-fejiOMt [And pisdtA p9r6m,
kATAndAJom, liistAm], She wrote with a pen, a pencil, chalk.
KpecTbHHHH'b naxaJi'L cox6k) [krestjdrdn pAxdt sax6ju]. The peasant
was ploughing with a plough.
68. The instrumental is also used in certain idioms expressing
times and seasons, e.g.
ceroAHH ^TpoMTj [s9v6dnA litrAm], this morning {to-day in the morning).
BHcpa BeHcpoMt [ftjard v^tJarAm], yesterday, last evening.
saBxpa yTpoM'L [zdftiA utrAm], to-morrow morning.
JtneM'L [dnom], day, by day.
HO^bK) [notjju], hy night.
BCCHOH [vesnoi], in spring.
3Hm6h [zimoi], in winter.
oceHbK) [osgiiju], in autumn.
Ji'^TOM'b [istAm], in summer.
69. The instrumental case is also used predicatively after the
verb 6i>iTb (and several other verbs, some of which are illustrated
in Lesson XL VIII). This is the general form of the phrase when
a change of state or a temporary condition is described, e.g.
no CMepxH {prep.) oxna OH-b SbiJii, {or cxaji-b) uapeM-b [pA sm6rti Atsd on
bit (stat) tsArom], On, i.e. after, his father's death he was {became) czar.
Ona c^-fejiajiacb noBapHxcio (oh) [And sdstAtAs pAVArixAJu (aI)], She made
herself, i.e. became, a cook.
Note. If the complement of 6bixb, cjii'fejiaxbCH, to become, is an
adjective, use the instrumental case (Par. 88) after the infinitive, and the
predicative nominative (Par. 187) after any other form of the verb, e.g.
Ona xox'fejia 6HTb doraxoio [And xAtstA bit bAgdtAJu], She wished to he
rich.
Ona 6biJia Si^AHa [And bitd badnd], She was poor.
72 LESSON XVIII 69
Vocabulary
BecH^, jk [vasnd], spring ji^me [da 59], even
Ji'feTO, a [istA], summer hjih [iii], or
dceiih, H [osaii], autumn OTflbixaTb 131 A [Adixa^t], to rest
3HMa, ik (ace. ^y) [zima], winter BCTp-feTHTb [fstr6tit], to meet
ji;eHb, AHA [de^n, diia], day CKaaaxb [skAza^t], to tell, say
;^Tpo, a [utrA], morning pascKaaaxb [rAsskAza^t], to relate
B^qep-b, a [v^tjor], evening ona WHJia A [siW], she lived
noroaa, bi [pAgodA], weather naxaTb A [pAxd^t], to plough
Mopds-b, a \mA.v6B\, frost maib A [sa^t], to reap
Aep^BHH, H [dar^vriA], village BbipacTaTbl31A[virAstd^t],^o5^row^,
BI) aep eBH'fe [vdor^vne], in the country grow
KpecTbiiHHH'b, a [krastjdrdn], npHroTOBJiHXb 131 A[prigAtAvid^t],
peasant to prepare
nojie, fl [poio], field jKapKitt [sdrki], hot
jKaxBa, bi [5dtvA], harvest xpyA0JiK)6HBbm [trudAlubfyi], w^orA:-
JKHXO, a [s'itA], grain loving, i.e. industrious
cepni), a [ssrp], sickle MOKpbiii [mokri], damp
Koca, bi [kAsd], scy^/ie aypnoH [durnoi], had
coxa, II [sAxd], Russian plough noHXH [pAtjtf], nearly
KHHra, H [kni'gA], hook Bcerna [fsogdd], always
uiKOJia, bi [jkotA], school HHorji;a [iiLigdd], sometimes
ypdK-b, a [urok], lesson y>K6 [U38], already
Bee xo, Hxo a'fejiajiocb [fso to Jto dstAtAs], aW ^M did itself, i.e.
aM t^^ was done, took place.
Note. cejio is a village with a church, ^ep6BHfl is a hamlet, a village without
a church.
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) Bnepa yxpoM-b h Bcxp-fexHJia noApyry, Koxopan mhIj pascKa-
sajia Bce xo, ^xo ji^jiajiocb, Korjia ona JKHJia B-b aepeBH-fe. (2) BbiJia
BecHOH eme xojioAHaa noroaa, ho xpyaojiioSHBbift KpecxbjiHHH'b
naxaji-b MOKpoe nojie coxoio, h cfenji-b aqMCHb h obcct*. (3) ^HeMX>
OH-b paSoxajix. na Jiyr;^ hjih B-b canf; BeqepoM-b oii-b oxAbixajix.,
a HoqbK) OKI) cnaji-b. (4) Bcchoh moh nojipyra xome xo^HJia bx>
uiKOJiy. (5) BeqepoMX> oh^ npnroxoBJiHJia yp6KX>. (6) JT^xomx*
6bijia oSbiKHOBeHHo xopoman, xenjiaa, nnoraa H^apKan noroaa,
H HHMeHb ym6 BbipacxaJiij. (7) 6ceHbH) 6biJia JKaxBa. (8) Kpecxb-
HHiiH-b JKaji-b >KHxo ccpnoM-b iKjiH KOCOK). (9) 3hm6h 6bijia no^ixH
Bcerna aypnaH noroaa h ciiJibHbm Mopos-b. (10) 3hm6h HejibSH
paOoxaxb na ABop'fe [out of doors].
SuMoii ueAhdR padomamb ua deopm.
70 LESSON XIX 73
B. Bonpocbi :
(1) H-feM-b naxaji-L KpecTi>flHHHT>? (2) A H'feM'B owb JKaji-B jkiIto?
(3) KaKaH dbijia occhbio bte> aep^BH-fe nor6Aa? (4) Bosmojkho jih
padoxaxb 3hm6h na HBop-fe? (5) IIoqeM^? (6) Kora^ A'feBoqKa
npnroTOBJifljia ypoK-L?
C. Translate into Russian :
(1) The girl's book was lying with her pencil on the table that stood before
the window. (2) She has no [y ueA H'feT'B] copy-book, and her pen and black-
pencil are in school. (3) In spring the peasant was never at home ; he was
always ploughing or sowing, and often he was still working in jfield or meadow
in the autumn. (4) Last night our young son lay down in [on to] bed, but
this morning he was lying on the floor. (5) Surely he (had) not fallen on
to the floor ? Yes, he was on the floor. (6) Yesterday morning, when I was
walking on the meadow, I saw the two (little) girls ; one was playing with the
dog, the other was working. (7) In that year there was a hot spring, and a
cold autumn. (8) In winter the boy usually went (Par. 40) to [into] school.
(9) In summer the idle man used to lie in the sun ; he would never [never not
wished to] work, because he always wished to sleep. V (10) To whom did the
httle girl bring the nice ripe apple ? (11) What was the old man talking about
this morning ? (12) Who was standing before the door ? (13) Whom did
you see this morning ? (14) With what did she usually do that ? (15) I
was not speaking of the rich man who became a peasant. (16) Last night I
saw him giving [saw how he gave] oats to the horse. (17) He generally
ploughed in spring when there was still bad weather ; and in autumn, when
there was often hot weather, the industrious peasant reaped barley that had
grown up [grew up] in the summer. (18) Is it possible to reap or sow in winter ?
(19) Why did your old friend nearly always wish to work outside at night ?
(20) He could see all you [thou] showed him. (21) I never knew that you
[thou] still reaped corn with a scythe, because I never lived in the country.
LESSON XIX
70. Of the prepositions governing the genitive several have
already been introduced. The most frequently used are :
6631. [bss, bas], without HSTb [iz, is], out of, from
SjiHaTb [biis], near KpoM'fe [kroriia], besides
BM-fecTO [vilisstA], instead of mhmo [liiimA], past
BOSJi-fe [vozio], beside ott. [ot. At], from, away
flJiH [dia, diA], /or y [u], at, near
ao [do, dA], up to, till, before
74 LESSON XIX 7i
B.g, :
6e3T> KHHrH [bas knfgi], without a book.
Sjihs-b iiepKBH [biis ts6rk\d], near the church.
BM'fecTO nepa [vihsstA para], instead of a pen.
BOSJiife neepH [voT^h dv6ri], beside the door.
flJlfl MeHfl [diA riiand], /or me.
SO ^Toro AHH [dA stAVA diio], till this day.
H3i> niKOJibi [is jkoli], from school.
H3'L PocciH [is lAsii], from Russia.
KpoM'fe Toro [kroiha tAvo], besides that, in addition.
MHMO aoMa [ihimA domA], past the house.
OTt Apyra [At drtigA], from a friend.
y BacL [u vas], with you, near you, in your possession, etc.
71. Observe :
OHTb SbiJiT. aoMa [on bit d6inA], He was at home (rest).
Oh-l nomejit aoMoii [on pAj6t dAmoi], He went home (motion).
Ona npHUiJia aoMOii [Ana prijta dAmol], She cams home.
VOCABULAKY
Kaeeapa, li [kafodrA], teacher's desk pncoBaTb A [risAva^t], to draw
CKaMCHKa, H [skAiii^IkA], bench yqiixt A [utjit], to teach
6yMara, h [bumdgA], paper yqi^Tbca A [utJitsA], to teach one-
JtocKa, li {ace. flocKy) [dAska], self, to be taught, i.e. to learn
board but yqiiTb ypoK'B [utjit urok], to
KJi^ccHaH ji;ocKa [ktasnAJa dAska], learn a lesson
black-board (class-board) cnpocHTb [sprAsit], to ask, to make
noxBajia, bi [pAxvAtd], praise an inquiry
yHHxejibHHixa, bi [ut/itainitsA], /o^2/- cnpauiHBaTb 131 A [sprdJivAt], to
teacher ask questions
yqHTCJib, H [utjitai], teacher OTB-feHaTb 131 A[AtY9tja^i],to answer
yHCHiiK'b, a [utjanik], pupil KpacHbift [krdsni], red
yqcHHua, bi [utjanitsA], girl-pupil Ji-feHHBbiii [ianivi], idle
LtepKGBb,! KBH [tssrkAf], church BHHMaxejibHbiH [vnimdtaim], atten-
whsiTy, a [mst], chalk tive
BOKBaJiT), a [vAkzdt], railway-station npHJiejKHbiH [priissni], diligent
nocifemaTb 131 A [pAsaJtJd^t], to CTapmiii [stdrji], elder, eldest
visit, frequent MJiaamiH [mtdtji], younger
(o)K6HHHTb [(A)k6ntjit], to finish cypoBbiii [surovi], severe
HHTaxb 131 A [tjitd^t], to read OTKy;:^^ [AtktidA], whence
^ As in KycdK-B or oTe^I. the vowel in the second syllable disappears in the
oblique cases.
71 LESSON XIX 75
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) MoH cxapmiii ctmi. ym6 KOHqHjit niKOJiA^. (2) Ho Kor^^
H SbiJit B-L AepeBH'fe, ero MJiaaniiii SpaxTj noc%i5ajn> eme MajiCHbKoe
yqnjiHme,! Koxopoe ctohjio 6jiH3'L'^0K3aJia. (3) Past oh-l npHineji-B
HOMOH HST* lUKOJibi. (4) Er6 ^S^pSrHJii) ero MajienbKiii TOBapnm'L.
(5) GnDocj^jit ^6, Hto tm cer6ji;HH ^xpoM-b a-fejiaji-b bx. iiiKOJi'fe?*
(6) npfajiejKhLiH yHeHHKx> noKa3ajix> eMy KHHry h xexpa^b, paacKa-
aajit Bce xo, hxo ^-fejiajiocb oSbiKHOB^HHo^H ,CKa3ajn>, hxo 6e3T>
KHHrH H xexpaAH Hejib3H yqiixbcfl. (7) KpoM-^^ KHnrn 6biJix> y
Her6 qepHbiH KapaH3;ann>. (8) Hnor^a cxapmiii yqeHHKX> nncajix.
nepoMt BM^cxo KapaHXtama. (9) KpoM-fe ^ xoro ohx> nHcajn> na
CyMar-fe. (10) Kjia6raa^ Hocika ' cxoHJia B03Ji'fe'KaeeApi>i yqE[xejiH
H nepej]ix> okh6mx>. (11) Tpyaojiio6HBLiH yqnxejib nacxo nncajix.
M^JioivTb' Ha aocK-fe. (12) JliHHBbiii yqeHHKx> Bceraa CHa'fejix> na
CKaMCHK-fe 6JIH3X, KaoeApbi. (13) GypoBbift cxapbitt yqiixejib j;ajix>
yp6Kx> ceroAHH ^xpoMx>. (I^J^Dh-l . mhofo cnpamnBaji-b, ho, kX)
cojKaji^HlK), xojibKO oniiHX. BHHMaVcjibHbiii y^enJiKX. xox'fejix. otw^-
qaxb. (15) 5xoxx> MajibqHKX> nojiyqnjnb oxx> y^Hxejifl noxBajiy'.
dmomb MOJihHUKh noAijHUAh oim> yuumeAR noxeajiy.
B. Kewrite Exercise A in the feminine, as far as the sense will
admit of that. (Use no^pyra in place of TOBapHmi>.)
C. Complete the following :
KpoM-fe ^x-, 6e3x. xoBapnm-, 6e3'b hhh-, cx> yq^xcjibHHit-, cx>
yqiaxeji-, npn napiiix-, no ABopit-, BM-fecxo kojk-, kx, cecxp-, mm
cxapyx-, BX, pifeK- [in], bx, p'feK- [into], na cxoji-, na Ji^r-, Bbsji-fe
ABep-, OXX> HCJIOB'feK- H3X> I^CpKB-, HpH I^ap-.
D. BonpocBi :
(1) OxKyaa npHinejix, Bauix, chhx,? (2) Kyji;a ohx, npnmejix.?
(3) Hxo ero cnpocHJix> xoBapnmxj? (4) Hxo ohx> noKasaJiX) xoBa-
pnmy? (5) Hxo oh-l Bce pa3CKa3aJix,? (6) Tv<k cna-fejix. o6biKHO-
BeHHO yHHxejib? (7) TaMx> jih xaKjKe cnnijix, yqeHHKX.? (8) T^h
cxoHjia KJiaccnaH AOCKa? (9) y Koro mhofo M-fejia? (10) H-feMX}
y^Hxejib HHcaji'L Ha HocK'fe? (11) HaHeMx,nHcajix>yHeHiiKX>? (12) Kxo
oxB-feqajiX), Korfla ynnxejib cnpamHBajix>?
^ yiiijiHme, a [utJiliJtj9]=niK6Jia.
76 PLURALS 72
E. Translate into Russian :
A warm spring ; a cold summer ; the cat's green eye ; its pink nose ; its
black tail ; its two paws ; ripe corn ; good barley ; blue chalk ; a red pencil ;
a lazy boy ; she is a kind teacher ; he is a good teacher ; he told you that ;
I told her that ; she never spoke French well ; I related everything to him ;
a lot of paper ; a little oats for the ass ; he has no oats for the horse ; how much
bread ? two palaces ; three heroes ; once I asked him ; he used to be always
putting questions ; he usually went to school, when he lived with his grand-
father ; this morning he was going past the house ; he went to school yester-
day ; she was at home ; she went home ; what is his sister to do ? surely he
has not left school yet ? was it possible to save [cnacTii] the dog that fell into
the river ? it is impossible to answer [na with ace.] this question.
F. Translate into Russian :
(1) Once in the spring my Uttle sister came home in the evening. (2) She
showed me a pretty red pencil which the lady- teacher had given her. (3)
She always used to answer when I questioned (her), and on that occasion
she related everything to me, when I asked her what happened in school.
(4) I (had) bought a lot of paper. (5) I gave it to her, so that she might
draw or write on it [so that she drew, see Ex. X B 8]. (6) But that
paper did not please her. (7) She read very well, because she was a diligent
little pupil. (8) At that time she studied in the school that used to stand
beyond the meadow. (9) Her young brother could not yet read. (10) He
was always a lazy boy ; that is why he could not read. (11) Surely he was
not always playing out of doors ?
THE PLURAL OF NOUNS
72. Masculine and Feminine Nouns
Hard Form
Nominative plural ends in -bi, e.g.
Jl'^Kh, Jl'iiJiM [dsd (t), dsdi], grandfather.
Jiana, Jianti [tapA, tapij, paw.
Soft Form
Nominative plural ends in -H, e.g.
napb, napii [tsa^r, tsAri], czar.
ABcpt, ABepn [dve^r, dv6ri], door.
(a) If tlie stem ends in r, k, x, m, q, m, m, the termination
is always -h, e.g.
KapaHAam-B, KapaHAamii [kATAndaJ, kArAndAji], pencil.
73-77 PLUKALS 77
73. Neuter Nouns
Hard Form
Nominative plural ends in -a ; e.g.
MrbcTO, M'fecTa [ihestA, riiasta], place.
Soft Form
Nominative plural ends in -fl ; e.g.
Mope, Mopii [m6ra, niArd], sea.
(a) If the stem ends in r, k, x, m, H, m, m, the termination
is always -a ; e.g.
yqiijinme, yqiiJiHiua [utjliijtja, ytJiiijtJA], school.
74. In all neuter nouns and adjectives, and in masculine and
feminine forms denoting inanimate things, the accusative plural
has the same form as the nominative plural.
75. The accent frequently changes in the plural and there are
many other irregularities among nouns in frequent use. A list is
given here of the nouns that have occurred in Lessons I-XIX.
The list is, of course, chiefly for reference, but it is recommended
that the list be learned gradually group by group and every new
noun as it occurs placed in the proper group.
76. Nouns that have occurred in Lessons I-XIX
The nominative and genitive singular, nominative plural, and
occasionally (in brackets) the genitive plural are given.
The genitive plurals will not be used before Lesson XXXVI.
77. Masculine Nouns
1
n-feaib, H'fena, H^jibi, grandfather
BHy^K-B, a, H, grandson oropoji'L, a, li, Jdtchen garden
usLJihmiK-b, a, H, boy Bt'feaji'L, a, li, entrance
MHHHCTpib, a, LI, minister M'feji'L, a, chalk
ji6mhk'l, a, H, little house Mopoa-L, a, u, frost
TOBapHiu'L, a, H, companion CB'feT'L, a, li, light, world
paSoTHHKi., a, H, workman ypoK-L, a, h, lesson
BOKS^ji'L, a, li, railway station nopoK-L, a, h, vice
78 PLUKALS 77
Most polysyllabic masculine nouns not accented in the nomina-
tive singular on the last syllable, especially nouns in eiJ['b, o6t>, OKh,
yet, do not change the accent in the oblique cases.
2
CTOjn>, CTOJia, ctojih, table
cepni), a, bi, sickle MymiiK-b, a, h, peasant
XBOCT'b, a, li, tail yqcHHK'B, a, h, pupil
ZlBop'b, a, LI, court, yard Kapanaamt, a, li, pencil
exapHK-L, a, ii, oZcZ man
Most polysyllabic masculine nouns accented in the nominative
singular on the last syllable and many monosyllabic nouns have the
accent on the termination in the oblique cases.
3
OTei^Tj, oma, OTixbi, father
ABopent, pua, LI, palace Kyn^U'L, nua, li, merchant
OBecL, Bca, i^i, oats KycoK'L, CKa, ii, piece
ocejiT), cjia, % ass npyjK6K'L, Ka, ii, dear friend
4
cajii'b, cana, cajubi, garden
nojiT*, a, LI, floor moct'L, a, li, 6nc?g'e
HOCL, a, lii, wose Bepxi), a, ii, to^, upper part
paai), a, li, a fime CLipi), a, li, cheese
5
capaft, capafl, capan, cartshed
rep6tt, fl, H, hero cji^qafi, h, h, occasion, opportunity
6
i^apb, i^apa, i^apn, C2;ar
Kopojib, A, A, Hiigr flHMeHL, h, h, ftar/ey
p^6jib, ii, H, rouble oji^hl,^ h, h, s^agr
acHb, HHH, aiiH, (Za?/ MCjliB^Ab,^ H, H, bear
7
rjiasTi, rjiasa, rjiasa (t>), eye
noMT), a, a (oBT)), y^owse h^T'l, a, a (ob^), meadow
ji'fec'L, a, a (oB'L),/ores^ Beqepi., a, a (obtj), evening
d^per-L, a, a (ob-l), bank, shore
^ Notice the accentuation of oji6Hb and MeflB'tflb.
78 PLURALS 79
y^HTejib, yHiiTejiH, yqHTeji}i,~ ,
(mre) y^HTCJiH,/
8
xji-feS-L, xji-feSa, xji'fe6^, 6recw^, rda-B, roaa, roaa,"\
Zoaves (rare) rosLi,/^
xji^6i>i, c(yrn
^B'feT'B, UB-fexa, ixB-fexa, coto^^r
ii;B'feTbi, flower
9
ClilH'L, Cl5[Ha, CLIHOBBH (B^ft), SOn
apyrt, ap^ra, JipysbH (36H),/nenc?
KH^3B, KH^3H, KHHBbii (S^tt), ^n^WJe
dpax-b, Spdxa, SpaxBH (BeBi>), brother
CT^jiT), CTyjia, CT^JiBH (bcb-l), chair
10
Young of animals
peSeHOK-L, peSeHKa, peSflxa [raWnAk], child
mcHOK'B, HKa, Hflxa, puppy
KOXCHOK-B, HKa, THxa, Utten
(Cf. Par. 229.)
11
Names of classes of people and of many nationalities
KpecxBHHHHT., KpecxbiiHHHa, KpccxbiiHe, a peasant
(Cf. Par. 230.)
12
HCJiOB'feK'b, qejiOB-^Ka, juban (eft), man, people
78. Feminine Nouns
1
Accent fixed
6a6a, 5a5bi, 6a6i>i, peasant woman
6yMara, h, h, paper A-feBOHKa, h, h (ckx,), little girl
6a6ymKa, h, h (en-b), grandmother >KaxBa, bi, bi, harvest
BH;^qKa, h, h (eKTb), granddaughter KeHii;HHa, bi, bi, woman
repoHHH, H, H (b), heroine Kaee^pa, bi, bi, teacher's desk
nana, bi, bi, Za^??/ KHHra, h, h, 600A;
nepcBHfl, H, H (cHb), village, hamlet K6>Ka, h, h, leather
AOHKa, H, H (eK'b), little daughter KOHiomHH, h, h, 5to6Ze
npaKa, H, H, quarrel KouiKa, H, h (eK'b), cai
80 PLURALS 79
Ji^na, H, bi, paw CKaM^iiKa, h, h (ck-b), he'mh, seat
MaxyuiKa, h, h (cK'b), mother cjiymaHKa, h, h (oKt), servant
HHHH, H, H (b), child's nurse co6aKa, h, h, dog
noBapHxa, h, h, cook cxapy^xa, w., u, old woman
norojxa, li, weather TbMa, bi, gloom, darkness
nojipyra, h, iiy female friend yqeHHita, bi, bi, schoolgirl
noxBajia, iJi, bi, praise yqiixejibHHi^a, bi, bi, ZacZ?/ teacher
nxHixa, bi, bi, ftiVc^ i^apHija, bi, bi, czarina
caMKa, H, H (oKt), female (of men, h, h (ft), neck
animals) lUKOJia, bi, bi, scAooZ
2
Singular termination accented ; plural stem accented
Hrpa, iJi, bi, game Koca, bi, -^bi, sc^/^^^
cecxpa, bi, -bi (ep-b), s*5ier eecua, ^i, -bi (ch-b), spring {season)
coxa, II, -^H, plough
The last four ma/ also have ace. sing, accented on stem.
Termination accented except in accusative singular and
nominative plural
BOfla, iJi, ^y, -^bi, water 3HMa, bi, ^y, -^bi, m?ifer
roJiOBa,bi,-^-y,--bi (first syllable), aocKa, h, ^y or -f, -^h, 6oarc^
/leowi pi^Ka, ii, ^y or -y, -h, nVer
The difference in accentuation distinguishes in these words and
in the words in Group 2 the genitive singular from the nominative
plural.
4
AB^pb,^ HBepH, nBepH (eft), door nocx^Jib, h, h, bed
Hoqb,^ H, H (eft), night occHb, h, h, autumn
Ji6maji;b,i h, h (eft), horse xexpa^b, h, h, exercise-book
CM^pxb,^ H, H (6ft), death 6'feaHOCXb, h, poverty
^6pK0Bb,^ KBH, H (6ft), church
79. Neuter Nouns
1
Draw bach accent in plural
Bejipo, BCApa, Benpa (ep-b), pail okho, OKHa, OKHa (KOH-b), window
cejio, cejia, cejia, village
* Termination accented in oblique cases of plural.
80 LESSON XX 81
2
Move accent forward in plural
Macjio,Macjia,Macjia(ceji'b), 6ttWer yxpo, a, a, morning
M'fecTO, a, a, place Miico, a, plur. rare, meat
Jl'feTO, a, a, summer, years jkhto, a, plur. rare, g^ram
nojie, nojifl, nojiH (6ft), ^eW Mope, h, h (6ft), 5ea
The transposition of accent in neuter nouns is very general.
3
Do not change the accent
mojiok6, a, a, milh nnxbe, h, h (6ft), cfrmA;
Kpecjio, a, a (cejit), arm-chair K^^manbe, h, h (itt), /oo<Z
coJiHue, a, a (hcu'L), sun yn^uhe,^ ^h, h, learning
yHlijiHiue, a, a, sc^ooZ Hey^eHbe,^ h, h, ignorance, illiteracy
BAanie, h, h (ift), building coKaji-fenie, a, a (ift), pity
4 5
hSjioko, a, hSjigkh, a^^te nep6, a, n6pbH (bCB-b), pen
6 7
h66o, H66a, He6eca (ecT>), sky, bp6mh, chh, end, tim
heaven (Lesson LIII)
LESSON XX
80. The plural of the past tense of any verb ends in -jih.
The complete form of the past tense is therefore :
tr
H\]xfMSi^i>, a^Majia (ny^Majio), thought
TH Vnomeji'b, nonijia (nouijio), went
owb, OHa, OHoJMor'b, Morjia (Morji6), could
Plural
Mbi [mi], we^ , rj/ \-x
ona (m. ay^ I ) [Ai]. [nom [P4 'J
0H4c/:)[Anii(4i"''["ff"]
^ Also spelt -ie.
82 LESSON XX 81-83
Note. (a) The pronoun bbi and the possessive Bamij are often,
especially in correspondence, written with a capital.
(6) Adverbial past participle (invariable) :
jt^MaBT. or A;^MaBmH, nom^AniH, M6rmH, having thought, gone, been able.
Adjectival past participle active (declined Hke an adjective) :
a^MaBUiitt, nomenmiii, Mormifi, one who has thought, gone, been able.
Adjectival past participle passive (declined like an adjective) :
(3a)3;;^MaHHbitt, something that has been thought.
These forms are given only in order that the student may
be able to recognize them in reading : they will not often appear
in Part I of this book.
81. MOH [mAi], TBOH [tvAi], HaiiiH [naji], BauiH [vaji] are the
plurals for my, thy, our, your or mine, thine, ours, yours. Hxt [jix] =
of them, their, theirs. 3TH [eti] and xife [ts] are the pliu-als of axoxt
and TOT'B.
82. Nominative Plural op the Adjective
Habd Fobm
Masc. Fern. Neut.
sing. 6'fejiHti 6'fejiaH 6'fejioe, white
plur. 6'fejibie [bstija] 6'fejibiH [betijo], 6'fejitiH [bstije]
sing. MOJiOAoft MOJioaaH MOJionoe, young
plur. MO JIG jpiie [mAtAdij 9] mo jig abih [m AtAdij a] mg JiOAiiH [niAtAdij a]
Soft Form
Ma^. Fern. Neut. ,
sing. Kpattnift KpaftHHH Kp aft nee, extreme, last, least
plur. KpaftHle [krdinije] Kpaftnifl [krairiija] KpattniH [krdinijs]
That is, the endings are, in the masculine plural, -Lie or -ie,
and in the feminine and neuter plural, -lih or -in.
83. Remember that h can never stand after r, K, x, m, H, in, m :
the plural of pyccKiii is pyccnie, in [ruskijo].
The difference between tie and bih and that between ie and ia
exist only in writing, as, in ordinary discourse, there is no appreci-
able distinction to the ear.
84r-86 LESSON XX 83
84. The accusative of masculine and feminine plural adjectives
qualifying names of inanimate things has the same form as the
nominative.
All neuter accusatives of nouns and adjectives have the same
form as the nominative.
85. Before taking up Lesson XXI, at least the regular nomina-
tive plurals should be learned. These and most of the others will
be impressed on the memory with very httle effort by reading over
the Kussian examples in Lessons I to XIX, taking them according
to the following scheme.
Re-read the Exercises, substituting, as far as the sense admits
of it, plural for singular subjects. Omit oji;hht>, etc. (The word 66a,
66'fe, 65a [obA, 6bo, oIda], meaning both, is a word that suggests
itself now and then, but 66a ^ takes the genitive singular like flBa.)
(a) Learn masculine groups 1, 2, 3, 4, 12.
Ex. I A, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 7, 10.
Ex. II A (omit Nos. 6, 14, 15, 16).
Ex. Ill B (omit Nos. 6, 8, 11, and 16).
Ex. IV A, Nos. 13, 14, 15, 18, 20, 21, 24, 25.
(b) Learn masculine groups 5 and 6.
Ex. V B, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 8, 12, 13.
(c) Learn masculine groups 7 and 9.
Ex. VI E, Nos. 5-13.
(d) Learn masculine group 8, and neuters 2-6.
Ex. VII A.
(e) Learn mascuHne groups 7, 8, 9 again and the remaining
groups of neuter nouns.
Exx. VIII B, IX C, X B.
(/) Learn masculine groups 10 and 11 and the rule for the
formation of feminine plurals (groups 1-3).
Ex. XIII A, Nos. 1-12, Ex. XV A, and Ex. XVI A.
(g) Learn feminines, group 4.
Exx. XVIII A, XIX A.
/HaM'L = to us \
\BaM'B = ^o you).
See Par. 176, d.
84 LESSON XXI 86
LESSON XXI
PLURALS AND PKONOUNS
Vocabulary
npHKaaqHKT., a, h [prikdstjik], kjhoh-b, a, vi [klutj], key
shop-assistant, clerk cyxott [suxoi], dry
BCMJiii, ^, -K), ^H [zemid], earth, land HpKitt [jarki], bright
OBu;a, iJl, -LI [Aftsa], sheep cepaiiTbiH [sorditi], angry, violent
KopoBa, bi, bi [kAiovA], cow eme pas'b [jajtjo ras], still a time,
Tpaea, lii, bi [tiAvd], grass i.e. once more
KyxHH, H, n [kuxiiA], kitchen TOMy Haaaai* [tAmii mvzdt], to that
KOMHaxa, bi, bi [komnAtA], room hack, i.e. ag'o
;^jiHiia, bi, bi [tiiitsA], 5iree^ TpH roAa tom^ Hasaa-b [tri godA
saMOK'b, MKa, MKH [zAmok], lock tAmii nAzdt], three years ago
TpyflT), a, li [trud (t)], trouble, diffi- ^aBHbiM'b-AaBHO [dAvnim-dAvn6],
culty long ago
Exercises
A. Write the following sentences with all nominatives in the plural :
(1) npundsHUKh npninejiT. kx spyry. (2) Eopdea a oei^d y
Mcemi^UHbi. (3) Bn^HKa ryjiHJia ch dddyiuKou. (4) H cm^ j^aji-b
KHiiry cecmpiji. (5) yudmejib roBopHJi'b o mempddu. (6) Cemmjiaa
^jiui^a MHife OHCHb HpaBHJiacb. (7) MonpaR mpaed na Jiyry^. (8)
CyxdH seMJiA emf H^paBHJiacb. (9) On-b cTp6Hjn> ji;epeB>iHHbi^
AOMT. ndpefl-b deopi^oMb. (10) CecTpa omt{d 6bijia xaM-b. (11) MoU
moedpuuf^h KynnjiT, OojibiuoH saMOK'b cb KJiioqoM'b. (12) Tbi npn-
uieji-b K-b onm^. (13) Cxapafl cjiyjKanKa npHHCCJia MajieHbKoe
Bcapo ch eodou, (14) YHHTejibHHi^a cnn'fejia ua Mocm^. (15) On-b
Tyaa nomeji-b Ses-b Md/ibHUKa. (16) Hepnaa Jiomasb 'fejia mpae^.
(17) B-fejiafl co6aKa CToajia n^pe^T) jioiuadbio. (18) Kkhsb BHA-fejiii
kpKzu cemmh bi. KOMuamrb. (19) Y cmapund CB-fexjibiH homhkt.,
MaJiCHbKift cajn-b, SojibuioH Jiyr-b, d-fejibiii oceji'b, qepnafl OBi^a. (20)
yqcHiii^a nponiJia luKo/iy.
yneuui^a npomjia mno/iy.
B. Substitute for the words in italics in Ex. A the proper form of the
3rd personal pronoun.
86-87 LESSON XXII 85
C. Translate into Russian :
(1) Did the diUgent pupils enter [into] the school ? (2) Why were they
sitting on the floor ? (3) The young men did not come to [Kt] the prince.
(4) Surely they did not go home ? (5) They came to that man. (6) The old
women went through the room. (7) Why was the lazy cook not working
in the kitchen ? (8) Once more the industrious peasant-women went into
the forest. (9) We never used to come home in the evening. (10) Surely
you were not always out of doors ? (11) The Uttle girl was going home when
she saw a bright light. (12) Why was the angry teacher always asking
questions ? (13) That happened here long ago. (14) They arrived [came]
here [hither] two years ago. (15) The hard-working lady- teacher asked once
more but the idle pupils never answered anything [never nothing not answered],
(16) Could they understand that without difficulty ? (17) They sat down on
the wooden chairs. (18) They were lying in bed. (19) We were sitting at
the window.*
* Par. 211 may be studied at this point and the imperative be practised
with any verb marked 131.
LESSON XXII
OF MSLTh AND AOHb
Plural
MaxepH [matari]
Maxepeii [mAtei-^i]
MaxepflM-L [mAterdm]
Maxep6ft [mAtor^l]
MaxepflMH (pbMH) [mAtarami (fmf)]
Maxepiixi. [mAtordx]
The declension of noHb [dotj], daughter, is exactly similar.
87. The preposition no is used with the dative case ; ^ it means
along, on, according to, over.
Some illustrations :
no MH^ [pAmns], or no MoeMy' [pAmAJemii], according to me, as far as I am
concerned, in my opinion.
no HCMy [pAnamti], in his opinion.
no KpafiHeii M'fep'fe [pA krainoi rii^ra], according to the hast measure, at least.
Ona mjia no y'Jinnli [And jla pA tiiitsa]. She was going along the street.
Ona 6poAHJia no ropojxy, no Ji-fecy [And brAditA pA gorAdu, pdiasu], She
wandered about the town, the forest.
In n6 Ji'fecy note the accent, no ropojuy may be similarly accented.
^ In quite different senses it is used with the accusative or prepositional, e.g.
no CMcpxH in Par. 69. Cf. also Par. 183.
86.
Declension
Singular
nom.
Maxb [ma^t], mother
gen.
Maxepn [mdteri]
dat.
Maxepn [mdtari]
ace.
Maxb [ma^t]
instr.
MaxepbH) [mdterju]
prep.
Maxepn [mdtari]
86 LESSON XXII 87
Vocabulary
M^pa , H , M [ih^rA], measure ohx y SHajit [on uzna t], he recognized,
JI'fecTHH^a, M, H [UsnitsA], sto*Vs, Ae gro to know
flight of stairs cna^aJia [snAtJaU], at first, to begin
OHt CA-fejiaji-L [on sdetAt], did (once) with
OTKpiiiJii, [Atkrit], opened caMT,, a, 6, caMH [sam, SAmd, sAmo,
OHT. noAHHJiCH [on pAdnatsA], raised sdriii], self (emphatic)
himself, i.e. went up no^TOMy [pAstAmu], so, therefore, for
Ona noAHHJiacb no JiicTunn-fe that reason
[And pAdriAtds pA Usnitsa], She Xopom6, qxo OHt 5to CKasaJit
raised herself by the stairs, i.e. [xaiaJo, Jto on stA skAzdt], It is
went up the stairs good, nice, a good thing, that he
said that
IIOBTopeHie MaxB yqentH [pAftAr6nJ9 ma^t utj6nJA], Repetition is
the mother of harning.
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) JKenmnHa noniJia no yjinn-fe cb 6qepbK). (2) HaKon^n-B ona
npnmjia k-l nB^pn. (3) Gxapaa Maxb OTKpMJia caMa neepb n Bomjia.
(4) Gna^iajia ona npouiJia k;^xhk) h HB-fe KOMHaxM. (5) rioxoMx. 6"^^-
nafl jK^nmnna noanajiacb no Ji'fecxnnn'fe n yanajia HBepb. (6) JXbq.
roAa xoMy^ nasajii'b ona o^enb xopomo snajia 5xy HBepb. (7) Ho
jKenmHHa ne xox-fejia caMa oxKpi^ixb. (8) ITo^xoMy ona sajia ^dqepn
KJiK)Hx> ox-b KOMHaxbi. (9) flo^b Oes-b xpy^a oxKpiijia h on-fe eme
paa-b BOUiJiA.
JJ,OHh 6e3h mpyda omKpbVia a oum eu^e pash eoxujiu.
B. Rewrite the sentences in A making the subjects plural.
C. BonpocLi :
(1) !> K-feM-b noHb nomjia no ^Jinii-fe? (2) Ky^a on-fe HaKon^nx.
npnmjiH? (3) Hxo cjiynnjiocb? (4) Kxo oxKpi^iJix, ABcpb, Maxb
HJiH OHb? (5) Hxo cjiyqiijiocb nox6Mx>? (6) KaKyio KOMnaxy
OH-fe cnaqajia npomjin? (7) Kani. on-fe noAHfljincb? (8) Hxo oni
ysnaJiH? (9) Kor^a on-fe oqenb xopomo anajin 5xy HBepb? (10)
KoMy^ Maxb Aajia KjiK)qx>? KaKott kjiiohx*? (11) H-feM-b oqb oxnpi^ijia
HBcpb?
D. Translate :
(1) Yesterday morning two (little) girls were walking along the street.
(2) I walked along the street. (3) The old man's sons went into the peasant's
garden. (4) The young women lived in the house that used to stand beyond
LESSON XXIII
87
the village. (5) His young companions opened the doors. (6) At first the
lazy pupils thought that the flowers (were) not in the room. (7) The lady-
teachers were not at home. (8) The diUgent pupils were writing with pencil
on paper. (9) It is a good thing that the two boys went up [verb plural] the
stairs. (10) I could not see him anywhere. (11) I saw the old benches in
the room. (12) Surely the little girls did not wish to play with that
woman's daughter ? (13) At last the mother came and opened the door.
(14) She wished to go for a walk with (her) mother. (15) We learned that
the old servants (were) in the kitchen. (16) At least one old peasant woman
went in. (17) She passed through the room and entered the kitchen, where
the grandmother was sitting. (18) Beautiful, clean, bright villages. \J{19) In
the evening we saw the old woman once more. (20) They were walking on
the bank of the stream and were playing with the nurse. (21) That happened
three years ago. (22) In his opinion the room is a very dark (one).
(23) The kind intelligent boys saved the girl from [h3I>] the water.
88.
LESSON XXIII
Declension of Adjectives
Hard Forms
(a) Stem accented
Masc.
CT^pbiH [stdri]
Neut. Fern.
cxapoe [starAJa] cxapafl [stdrAJa], old
gen.
dat.
ace.
instr.
prep.
nom.
gen.
dat.
ace.
instr.
cxaparo [starAVA]
cxapoMy [starAmu]
gen. or nom. nom.
cxapbiMX> [stdrim]
cxapoMX) [starAm]
Plural
Masc. Neut.
cxapbie [starijo] cxapbiH [stdrija]
cxapoii [starAi]
cxapoii [stdrAi]
cxapyio [stdruju]
cxapoii (oK)) [stdrAi (aju)]
cxapoii [stdrAi]
Fern.
cxapHfl [stdrija]
gen. or nom.
cxapbixX) [stdrix]
cxapbiMX) [stdrim]
nom.
cxapbiMii [stdrimi]
gen. or nom.
prep. cxapbiXT> [stdrix]
The complete declension of the plural is printed here for conveni-
ence : the obhque cases will not be employed before Lesson XXX.
88 LESSON XXIII 88
(b) Termination accented
Masc. Neut. Fern.
nom. npocT6it [prAstoi] npocT6e [prAstoja] npocT^n [prAstaJA], sm^Ze
gen. npocToro [piAstovA] npocToii [prAstoi]
dat. npocTOMy [prAstomu] npocT6fi [prAstoi]
and so on, in all forms corresponding to (a) above.
Note. (1) Except in the nominative and accusative the masculine and
neuter forms are identical.
(2) In the feminine singular the gen. dat. instr. and prep, are aUke.
(3) In (6) the masc. nom. sing, and the feminine gen. dat. instr. oxidprep. are
aUke.
Vocabulary
TBepsbiii [tvordi], hard (opp. of soft) anaKt, a, h [znak], sign
Tp^SHbiii [triidni], difficult Kyn^n'L, nna, ii [kupsts], merchant
TflJKejibitt [t836}i], heavy My>KqHHa,ibi, bi {masc.) [muJtJfnA],
JKCJiTbiH [sotti], yellow man {not a woman).
HSiyLK-bf a, II [J9zik], tongue, hinguage
Exercises
A. Decline in tlie singular and nominative plural :
jKejiTbifi KapaHnam-b, KpacHBan fl'feBoqKa, xoji6AHaH hohb, cxapHtt
oceji-b, qepnan Jioma^b, Tenjioe ji-fexo.
B. Give the (1) genitive singular, (2) instrumental, and (3) nominative
jplural of the Russian equivalent for :
Bad weather, a large pail, a diJfficult tongue, the hard sign, a young boy,
yellow oats, a sick peasant-woman, long lesson, cold day, rich merchant, damp
grass, red sun, green grass, brown horse, long nose, grey cat, brave hero, the
rich woman, old book, the long garden, the old house, intelHgent man, this
woman and that man.
* HejioB-feKi can have the wider sense of person.
89-90
LESSON XXIV
89
89.
LESSON XXIV
Declension of Adjectives (continued)
Soft Form
Singular
nom.
Masc. Neut.
p^HHifi [rdni] paHHee [rdnaja]
Fem.
paHHHH [rdnaja], early
gen.
dat.
ace.
instr.
prep.
paHHHro [rdnavA]
paHHeMy [rdnamu]
no7n. or gen. nom.
paHHHMT. [rdnim]
paHHeMTj [rdnem]
Plural
paHHeii [rdnai]
paHHCft [rdnei]
paHHiOK) [rdnuju]
paHHeii (eio) [rdnai (9Ju)]
paHHeii [rdnoi]
nom.
pdHHie [rdnaja] paHHin [rdnaje]
paHHiH [rdiiaja]
gen.
dat.
ace.
instr.
prep.
paHHHX'b [rdnix]
paHHHMt [rdriim]
nom. or gen.
paHHHMH [rdmriii]
paHHHXT. [rdnix]
90. That is to say tlie declension of panniH is identical with that
of CTapHii, the soft vowels replacing the hard vowels throughout,
i corresponding to H preceding ii or a vowel
H Bi in all other positions
^ )) j> ^
e unaccented o
10 y
Vocabulary
nosAHlii [pozni], hxie
nep^AHflH [pai'Miioja] (a feminine
adjective in form and declined
as such), entrance-hall
aoManiHiii [dAmdjni], tame, domestic
JKHBOTHoe [3iv6tnAJ8] (a neuter ad-
jective in form and declined as
such), an animal
90
LESSON XXV
91-92
Exercises
A. Decline in singular and nominative plural :
CHHce Mope, nosAHHH BCCHa, soManiHce jkhbothoc, paHHHH occhb.
B. Give (1) genitive singular, (2) prepositional singular, (3) nominative
plural of the Russian equivalent for :
tame bird, green sea, red door, white paper, warm spring, heavy board,
cold day, black cat, clean water, large bed, dark entrance-hall, late summer,
early autumn.
LESSON XXV
9L Declension op Adjectives {continued)
In tlie writing of adjectives, as in every part of Russian ortho-
graphy, the general rules must be observed, that
LI, H, K) never appear after r, k, x, jk, h, m, m ; they are replaced
by H (or i before vowels and half-vowels), a, y ;
fl, K), never appear after ii ; they are replaced by a, y ;
unaccented is replaced by e alter >K, H, m, m, ii.
In words hke aHKiii [diki], wild, and ropHHiii [gAratJi], hot,
these rules must be carefully -observed.
92.
Adjectives in r, k.
X
nom.
Singular
Masc. Neut.
jU^Kiii [diki] niiKoe [dfkAJa]
Fem.
Ai^KaH [dikAJa], wild
gen.
dat.
ace.
instr.
prep.
HHKaro [dikAVA]
jliHKOMy [dfkAmu]
nom. or gen. nom.
mKUMh [dfkim]
AHKOMT. [dikAm]
A^Koii [dikAi]
miKoii [dikAi]
nHKyio [dikuju]
miKOH (OK)) [dikAi (AJu)]
miKOfi [dikAi]
nom.
Plural
miKfe [dikija] W^kir [dikijo]
jiAkih [dikijg]
gen.
etc., H
HUKUXh [dikix]
replacing bi.
93-94 LESSON XXVI 91
93. The terminations in wliich tlie type flHKiii differs from the
type cxapbiH are printed in italics in Par. 92.
Vocabulary
BCJiiiKiii [vaiiki],^ great mnpoKlti [Jiroki], hroad
JierKifl [ioxki], light, easy ^3Kiii [tiski], narrow
MiirKiii [rhaxki], soft
Exercises '
A. DecHne in singular and nominative plural :
jKapKoe ;^Tpo, MHrniH SHaK-B, Beji^mtt uapt, jierKitt ypdK-L,
HiiKoe mHBOTHoe, mnpoKan CKaMeiiKa, ^3Kifi CTOJi-b.
B. Translate into Russian :
soft hands, bright suns, broad streets, narrow rooms, easy lessons, hot
[a^^pKlft] days.
C. Give the proper forms in the singular of the examples in Ex. B
(1) with the prep, o
(2) HJiH
(3) KT,
LESSON XXVI
94. Declension of Adjectives {continued)
Adjectives in >k, q, m, m
Singular
Masc. Neut. Fern.
nom. ropflHiH[gAratJi] ropHqee[gAratJoJ9] ropiiqa^ [gArdt/eja], ^o<
gen. ropaqaao [gAratJavA] ropaqeH [gAratJai]
dat. ropHHCMy [gAratjemu] ropaqeH [gArdtJoi]
ace. nom. or ace. nom. ropHq[/io[gArdtJuju]
instr. ropflqHMT> [gAratjim] ropHHctt (eio) [gArdtj8i (eju)]
prep. ropHHeMt [gAratJ"9m] ropH^eft [gAratJai]
Plural
Masc. Neut. Fern.
nom. ropfl^ie [gAratJija] ropHHin [gArat|iJ9] ropHqin [gArdtJijg]
gen. ropflqnx'L [gArdtJix]
etc., like paHHift in Par. 89.
^ Cf . p. 26, note 5 to k.
92 LESSON XXVII 95-96
95. The type ropHqift is very similar to the type paHHiii,
from which it differs only in the terminations printed in italics in
Par. 94 : a and lo never follow m, h, ui, ux.
Vocabulary
cqacxie, h [stjastja], happiness HCCHacTie, h [nastjdstja], unhappi-
cfwbf a, bi [sup], soup ness, misfortune
Exercises
A. Decline :
xopomaH noroaa, ropiiqiH cyni..
B. Translate into Russian :
much ripe corn ; how much clean water ? he was speaking of the
hard sign and not of the soft sign ; little warm water ; (it is ) cold weather
to-day ; with the black horse ; of the blue chalk ; in the dark room ; about
the easy lesson ; a late summer ; to a difficult language ; with a yellow pencil ;
on the wooden table ; of the old black arm-chair ; without the poor man ;
behind the dark forest ; into the old school ; about a difficult language ;
on to the wild animals ; I was speaking of your great misfortune and of
her happiness ; he saw a tame bird ; about the rich merchant ; into the deep
water ; towards the bright light ; there are our black horses ; there is her
poor mother ; his intelligent sons.
LESSON XXVII
96. Certain irregular past tense forms,i e.g. necL, carried, and
MOn>, could, was able, have been already employed (see Par. 63).
Two verbs in frequent use having mascuHne past tense without the
usual Ji are :
OHt yMcpij [uriier], he died.
OHT) Bes'b [vos], he carried in a vehicle, conveyed.
In all such verbs the other forms of the past tense are regular in
appearance :
yMepjiai ^Mcpjio, yMepjiH [uiherla, uriiorlA, timarii]
BCSJia, BCBJio, BCSJiH [vazlo, vazlo, vazlij
(a) The past participles (cf. Par. 80, note b) of these and the
verbs dealt with in Par. 97 are :
1 See hst of several such forms in Par. 239.
97-98 LESSON XXVII 93
Adverbial past participle : yMepuiH, BesuiH, xohhb'L,
lueAuiH, ixaBt.
Adjectival past participle : yMepmift, BeamlH, xonHBUiifi,
ineHuiiH, ixaBuiili. . j..jjErU^ dt^^..^^^^ . u^kf^
97. The verbs xoaHJii* {inj. xoahtb) and mejn> {inf. htth) both v^ .
mean Ine went. The distinction between them was explained in V
Par. 40. But both these verbs always mean to go on foot, to go hut
not in a conveyance. If the word go means to travel by any kind of
vehicle, not on one's own legs, then the word that replaces uieji'L is
(oHT>) 'fexaji'L [jsxAt], e.g. :
Oht> mejiTb MiiMO [on Jot ihfmA], He was walJcing {walked) past.
OiYh 'fexaJi'B MHMO [on jsxAt rfiimA], He was driving {drove) past.
And just as we have
Oht. npHmejit (n'femKOM'B) [on prijot pejkom]. He arrived {on foot),
so
OhT) npi'fexaJi'B [on prijsxAt] means He arrived {in a conveyance).
npi'fexaTb BepxoMT) [prijexAt verxom], to come riding.
The prefix npn in these words evidently corresponds to the
EngUsh near, up, up to. In the second example it is written npi
because i, not u, is the regular form of this vowel when it precedes
a vowel.
Similarly we form compounds of 'fexaxb corresponding to all the
other compounds of htth {infin. of uieji'L) given in Par. 62 :
B-L-fexaxb [vexAt]; npcfexaTb [prAJsxAt]; na^xaTb [nAJexAt], to drive
up, come together; ncfexaxb [pAJsxAt].
98. The preposition from is sometimes troublesome to trans- ^
late. Notice these examples : 6^
Fepoii nojiynHJi-b HBopeu'b OTt i^apii [gardi pAtutJit dvArets At ^
tsArd], The hero received a palace from the czar,
Maxb yMcpjia oxt xcji^pbi [ma^t uriiertd At xAlsri], The mother died
from {of) cholera.
Ohtj npi-fexajix. nst Apyr6ro ropoAa [onprijsxAtiz drugdvA gorAdA],
He arrived from {out of) another tovm.
Kojibuo c^'fejiaHO 1 HS-L aojioxa [kA^itso sdstAnA iz z6tAtA], The rin^ is
made from {of, out of) gold.
^ Neuter predicative (Par. 187) of passive past participle cfffejiaHHMft. The
active past participle of this verb is cH'fejiaBinitt (cf . Par. 80, a).
94 LESSON XXVII 98
G-L Tor6 HHfl OHt HHKorsa h6 SbiJit xaM-L [stAvo dna on nikAgda
nsbit tarn], From {since) that day he was never there.
Note. Ct (co) =from, is used with the genitive :
Ohtj CHfljn> KHHry co CTOJia [on snat knigu sAstAta], He took the hook
from {off) the table.
Vocabulary
r6pojii'b, a, a [gorAt], town Bapyn* [vdruk], suddenly
HapoAt, a, LI [n^vrot], people OTBeat [Atvoz (s)], conveyed away
^pMapKa, H, H [jarmArkA], fair ocTaxbCH [Asta^tsA], to remain, be left
xojiepa, LI [xaIsia], cholera njiaKaxL A [ptdkAt], to weep
H^ena, li, -li [sand], wife saSoji-feTb [zAbAkit], to fall ill
SojiLHHi^a, Li, LI [bA^initsA], hospital SHaHHTTj [znatjit], that means, that is
6oJi43HL, H, H [bAl^zn], disease to say
ymsicuhiii [uT^asm], terrible MHoro napojuy^ [mnogA rnvrodu],
ccHqaCL [satjds], immediately, lit. many folks, many people
this hour
Euf TOJibKO TpH roaa [jamti t6^ikA tri godA], He is only three.
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) B-L OAHOM-b ropoA'fe 6Lijia HpMapKa. (2) Bt. 5to epeMH
SLiJia xoji^pa. (3) Mnoro napday yMepjio^ ot-l 5toh ymacHoii
doji-feaHii. (4) npiixaji-L na ^xy npiviapKy o^hh-l Kynei^-L hs-l
apyroro ropoAa cl jKenoH h mojig^oh ao^KOii. (5) JX-^BO^K-h
6LIJI0 TOJiLKO HexLipe r6ji;a. (6) Bjiipyr-L oxeiiTb h Maxb saGoJi-fejin.
(7) CeH^acL oxbcsjiii b-l SoJiLHHtty GojiLHoro oxita cl 6'fe^H0H
MaxepbK). (8) SHaHHXx., ocxajiacb MaJicHLKaa A'^BO^Ka o^Ha. (9)
njianajia, 6ibji;HaH, njiaKajia.^
SHamimh, ocmaaacb McuieHbKaH dmeoHKa odua.
B. BonpocBi :
(1) Tflife SLiJia HpnapKa? (2) KanaH Soji-fesHL Smia b-l 5xo
BpcMfl? (3) Hxo yme cjiynHJiocL? (4) Ox-l KaKofi Soji'fesHH ohh
^ This form in -y is a partitive genitive found in certain phrases after measures,
weights, adverbs of quantity. Cf. namKa Haio (Voc. XLIII).
2 Note the neuter singular verb, the subject having the force of a singular
collective.
' In English, too, we make use of this simple device of repetition, in order to
deepen the impression of intensity : she wept and wept.
99-100 LESSON XXVIII 95
^MepjiH? (5) Ct. K'hu'h npi-fexaji-b Kyneiit? (6) Ckojilko nd^K-fe
ji-feTt [years]? (7) Hto cjiyqnjiocb, Koraa Kyn^iit Cb JKenoil
npi^xajiHi? (8) Ky^a cettHact oxBesjiii otu^ h Maxb? (9) Hto
CJiyqiijiocb ct [happened to] AO^KOii?
C. Translate into Kussian :
(1) They usually lived in one small room. (2) In the winter my poor
father died of that illness. (3) At that time a great many people were walking
along the street. (4) The rich merchants drove up when we were standing
before their door. (5) The cold streets of the big town did not please me.
(6) His young son was then only two years old. (7) When did her old mother
turn ill ? (8) The sick boy was in the other building, but I did not know
then who (had) carried him away there [thither]. (9) Why were they
left alone in that great dark house ? (10) She received that book from my
father.
LESSON XXVIII
99. The preposition no governs the genitive and means to, up
to, till, before, e.g.
ao i^Toro AHH [do (dA) stAVA dna], up to, till, before that day.
no PomnecTBa [dA rA5d9s(t)va], till Christmas.
no BOHHLi [dA VAini], before the war.
no PoJKnecTBa XpHCTOBa ^ [dA rAsdostvd xristovA], up to, i.e. before the
birth of Christ, B.C.
OTt Ha^aJia no KOHn;a [At nAtJatA dA kAntsa], from beginning to end.
. no ^Toro MajiCHBKaro noMa [dA stAVA maienkAVA domA], up to that
little house.
100. The preposition npo is used with the accusative ; it means
about, of, concerning, e.g.
H yanajit npo Bame Hccqacxle [ja uznat prA vdja nostjastja], / got
to know, learned, of your misfortune.
Mm pascKasaJiH npo Bofiny [mi rAsskAzdii prA vAinii], We told of the
war.
That is, npo with the accusative has the same value as o
with the prepositional.
^ Notice this plural form, where, in English, the singular would be used.
* Oenitive of Xphct6bi>, a, o, h, an adjective found only in this short form.
96 LESSON XXVIII 101-103
101. Tlie 3rd plural of the verb used without a subject expressed
has the force of the indefinite they or people, e.g.
roBopHJiH [gAVAriii], They were speaking, they were saying.
CKasaJiH [skAzaii], They said, it was said.
102. (a) This indefinite 3rd plural is often the most convenient
idiom to use in translating our passive, e.g.
Mwh CKasajiH [mns skAzaii], They told me, i.e. / was told.
He nycKajiH en. [lis puskaii J9J6], They did not admit her, i.e. she was
not admitted.
(b) The passive may often be rendered by the Kussian reflexive
verb, e.g.
^TO cjnibjiajiocb [stA sdstAtAs], That was done, that took place.
103. The reflexive pronoun for self referring to any subject is
decHned thus : .
gen. ce6fl [saba]
dat. ceS'fe [sabs]
ace. ce6fl [ssbd]
instr. C06610 [sAboju]
prep. ceS'fe [sdhi]
Vocabulary
CHpoxa, bi, OTBi [sirAta], orphan HCKaTb (with genit. or ace.) A
CHpoTKa, H, H [sirotkA], little orphan [iska^t], to seek
BOftHa, ik, BOHHbi [vAina], war sa^^Maxb [zAdumAt], to conceive a
CCMbfl, H, H [s^mja], family plan
PowaecTBO, a [rA5das(t)v6], Christ- p'feniHTb [rajit], to make up one's
mas mind, resolve, solve
HaqaJio, a, a [iiAtjatA], beginning SpofliiTb A [brAdit], to wander
rope, H, H [goi-a], grief, sorrow about
CBOH [svoi], one's own B3Hjn>, Jia [vzat, vzaIq], he took
qyjKOH [tju36I], strange, not one's {once)
own B3HTb K-b ceS-fe [vza^t ksabs], to take
U'fejlbiH [tssli], whole, entire to oneself, to adopt
CHacTJiHBbiH [stJAs(t)iivi], happy Homeji-b, mjia, 6 [dAj6t, jta, 6], went
HecHacTHbiH [n9stjas(t)m], unhappy, up to, reached
unfortunate OTHiero? [AtJ9v6] stands for OTt
TaK-b H [tok i], and so too Hero? from what ? i.e. from what
nycKaxb 131 A [puska^t], to let, cause ? and is a common equiva-
admit lent for why ?
103 LESSON XXVIII 97
EXEKCISES
A. Translate :
(1) HsLKOu^JXh OHa saa^Majia ncKaib otu,l h MaTb. (2) Ilomji^
OHa no r6poay. (3) Bpoanjia i^-fejibiii eHb h xojibKO Kt B^nepy
AouiJia ona no Sojibuion 6ojibHHnbi. (4) Ho BTt GojibHnny eA ne
nycKajiH. (5) 'fexajii, mhmo fl-feBo^KH Soraxbiii Kyn^i^-b. (6) Ona
pascKasajia CMy npo CBoe ^ rope. (7) j[i;66pbiii HejioB^Ki* Bomeji'b B-b
SojibHiiny yanaTb npo OTi;a h Maxb HecHacTHott ^-febOHKH. (8) TaMt
eMy^ CKaaajiH, hto ohh yjK^ ;^MepjiH. (9) H p'femnji'b noSpbiii Kynei^i.
B3flTb cnpoTKy K-b ceSi. (10) Tan-b h cjxhsiasn>. (11) Gxajia jkhtb
HecqacTHafl cnpoxa B-b HyjKott ceMb^ KaKX. bx> CBo6fi.2
TaMh eMy cKaacuiu, umo ohu y^yfce yMepjiu.
B. Rewrite Ex. A, making the subject of eacli sentence plural.
C. Bonpocbi :
(1) Hxo ona p'femiijia cH-fejiaxb? (2) CK6jibK0 BpeMCHH [of time]
OHa SpoAHJia no ropoay? (3) Korji;a ona AoniJia ao 6ojibHiinH?
(4) Morjia jih ona BH^ifexb oxu^a h Maxb? (5) Oxqer6 nifexx*? (6) Kxo
npl-fexaji-b B-b 5x0 Bp^MH? (7) Ilpo ^xo MajienbKafl A'feBoqKa bm^
pascKaaaJia? (8) KaKOBX. 6bijix. ^xoxx. Kynei;x>? (9) Hxo OHt
ysHaJiT* Bx> SojibRHi^-fe? (10) Hxo ohx> p'femHJii> ca-fejiaxb noxoMX*?
(11) Cff-fejiajiT) JIH OHX> 5x0 BT> caMOMX> A'feji'fe? [in very deed, cf. npn
c^MOMX> EXj-fesA-fe in Ex. X].
D. Translate into Russian :
(1) Surely she did not wish to wander all day about the street ? (2) We
took it into our heads [conceived the plan] to remain in the garden all [bcio]
night [ace. sing.]. (3) They said he never reached the white house in which
the old woman lived. (4) From the beginning of the year till Christmas he
was left alone in that large house. (5) Why did they not let the boy into those
beautiful rooms ? (6) What did you learn about the poor man's unhappy
son ? (7) It was well that I was not told about that. (8) The rich man
(had) already died in the great hospital. (9) I learned that only last
night. (10) The young men were standing in front of that large window.
(11) The kind Russian ladies who arrived to-day adopted the little orphan.
(12) She was walking past the little house.
* About her (own) grief.
2 In her (own) family. The distinction between eA and cB6it is made clear in
the next Lesson, Par. 109.
98 LESSON XXIX 104-107
LESSON XXIX
Declensions of Possessives, Demonstkatives, etc.
104. MOH, TBOH, CBOH, my^ thy, one's own.
Singular Plural
M. N. F. M. N. F.
n. CBoii [svoi] CBoe [svajo] CBo;i [svAJa] CBOii [svAf]
g. CBoero [svAJavo] CBoett [svAJ6i] cbohx-l [svaIx]
d. cbocm;^ [svAJomu] CBo6ii [svAJei] cbohmi. [svAim]
a. nom. or gen. nom. cbok) [svAJii] cboh [svai] , -Hxt [svaIx]
i. CBOHM-L [svAim] CBoett(eio)[svAJ6i(6ju)] cbo^mh [svAuiii]
p. CBoeMT) [svAJ6m] cbo6h [svAJ6i] cbohx'l [svaix]
MOfi and TBOH are declined in exactly tlie same way.
105. HauiTj, Kama, name, nauiH, our, ours, and Bamt, Bama,
Bame, BauiH, your, yours, are declined exactly Hke tlie words in
Par. 104, except that the termination is never accented, e.g.
Hamero, Hamen, HaiuHX'B are the genitives.
106. The following pronomis and adjectives are also dechned
like CBoii :
qett [tj6I], Hbfl [tjja], Hbe [tjjo], hbh [tjji], whose? (stem qt, e.g. ace.
sing. HLcro, Hbio, Mbe), e.g. O ^bctt KHHr-fe Bm roBopiaJiH? [AtJj6I
knige vi gAVArili], Whose hook were you talking about ?
ceii [s6i], cia [sija], cie [sijo], cIh [sii], this (stem c, e.g. gen. sing, cero, cefi ;
ace. fern. CK) or ciib). This word is idiomatic in a few set phrases and
is otherwise little used, e.g. ceroffHH [sevodnA], of this day, i.e. to-day ;
ciib MHH^xy [sijii mimitu], this minute, i.e. at once.
BCCb [ves], BCfl [fsa], Bce [fso], Bcife [fse], all (stem bc, e.g. gen. sing. Bcero.
'fe replaces H, e.g. instr. sing. BcfeMT*, gen. plur. Bcifex'L), e.g. Bce 5x0
[fso stA], all that ; jiiJiH BcfexTi Hact [dlA fssx nas], for us all.
107. aTOT'b [stAt], this, is dechned fully thus :
Singular
Plural
Masc. Neut.
Fern.
31. N. F.
nom.
^TOT-b 5to
^xa [stA]
5xofi [stAi]
5xH [6ti]
gen.
i^Toro
^XHX-b [etix]
dat.
^TOMy
5X0H [stAi]
etc.
ace.
gen. or nom.
5xy [etu]
instr.
^THMT,
5X0H [stAi]
prep.
^TOM-b
5xofl [stAi]
10^109 LESSON XXIX 99
(a) TOT'b, that, is similar in declension but takes "fe every-
where instead of H and always accentuates the final syllable, e.g.
gen. sing. Toro [tAVo].
axoT'L corresponds to either ' this ' or ' that.' TOTt means ' that.'
When both words occur in a sentence axoTt means *this' and
TOT'b means * that.'
(6) OHHH'L, oji;Ha, ohho, with plural ohhh (-Hxt) for masc. and
neut. and OHH-fe (-'fexT>) for feminine, is decHned like stottj, but the
accent always^falls on the final syllable, e.g. gen. sing. OAHoro
[AduAVo], OAHOii [Adnoi],
(c) The emphatic pronoun caMt, caMa, caMO, caMH, self,
has genitive caMoro, -oh, -oro, -hxt>, and is otherwise dechned
like OHHHt, oana, -ho, -hh.^ (One form only for all genders in
plural.)
108. The words ero [J8v6], en [jajo], hxt> [ix, jix], are the
genitive forms of oh-l, oho, ona, ohh and oui, but, as has been
learned by this time, they do duty for the possessives of the 3rd
person with the meanings his, her, its, their.
109. The distinction in use between the possessives moh, tboh,
HauiTb, Bani'L, ero, en, hxT), and the word cboh, cboh, CBoe, cboh,
must be carefully observed. The latter always refers to the sub-
ject of the clause and may refer to a subject singular or plural, of
first, second, or third person, and may accordingly at different
times require to be translated by any one of our possessive adjec-
tives, e.g.
H BiiA'feJit er6 ciiHa [ja vidal: J9v6 siiia], / saw his son.
H BHH'feji'b CBoer6 ciiHa [ja videt svaJ9v6 siha], / saw my {ovm) son.
Oh-l BHA'feji'b Moero Cbinsi [on videt inAJ9v6 sinA], He saw my son.
Ohtj BVijifh^Ti CBoer6 ci^ina [on videt svaJ9v6 sinA], He saw his (own) son.
Oh'l BHS'feji'L ero ciiiHa [on vid9t J9v6 sinA], He saw his {another man^s)
son. j
Ona BHjt'fejia ero (oh) Cbina [Ana vidgtA J9v6 (J9J6) smA], She saw his
or her {another person's) son.
Ona BHA'fejia CBoero ci^iHa [And vidgtA svaJ9v6 sinxv], She saw her
(own) son.
^ In the fern. ace. singular there is an alternative form caMoe [sAmAJo].
7^ /^^^ ^"^
100 LESSON XXIX 109
VOOABULAEY
TCTKa, H, H [t6tkA], aunt npaBJia, bi [pravdA], truth
rAusi, VLf II or h a [dadA], uncle r6jioc'L, a, a [g6tAs], voice
nJieMiiHHHKT., a, h [piaihdnik], KOJibi^o, a, -^a [kA^itso], ring
nephew bojioto, a [zoUtA], gold
nJieMHHHHi^a, m, bi [piamdnitsA], rpoMKitt [gromki], loud
niece aojiOTofi [zAtAtoI], of gold
pyna, h, ^h [ruka], ace. pyKy, Kp-fenKiii [krspki], firm
hand or arm po>KamiH ^ [drA5aJtJi], trembling
n^jieit'L,! najibi^a, li [paiats, cjnimaTB A [stiJAt], to hear
pd^itsA], finger HyjKHO [nu3nA], it is necessary
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) Bbi cxpoHJiH CBoft aoM'B. (2) Xopomo, qxo a xox-fejit KynHTb
Baui-b AOM-b. (3) Oh-b paSoTaji-b B-b cBoeM-b ca^^. (4) HeyjK^jiH
OHi. cioAa npi'fexaji'b hsi* Toro ropoaa? (5) Mm 5to nojiyqHJiH ot-b
CBoero OTi^a. (6) Bauia KopoBa SpoaiiJia Becb eHb no i^TOMy Jiyry.
(7) Heii rpoMKiii rojiocb mm xan-b qacxo cjibimajin? (8) Bcfe 5xh
miKifl mHBOXHMH i^JIH x6jIbK0 OAHy OBny. (9) HYJKHO SblJIO HX-b
SpysbflM-b CKasaxB Bce xo, hxo mm yjK6 nexbipe roaa snaJiH. (10)
Bo3m6hho jih 6bijio EHfl-fexB xo, qxo Bbi n'fejiaJiH b-b CBo6ii KOMnax-fe?
(11) Bcfe naniH npy3BH 6bijih xor^a s^-fecB. (12) HBCMy- ciiiHy Bm
a^jiH cxapyio CBoib KH^ry? (13) HBeii Honepn bm pascKaaajin Bce
xo, qxo cjiy^HJiocB? (14) HeyjK^JiH ^xo npaB^a? (15) ITo CHacxiio
fl He aHaJi-B 5xoro r6pona.
B. Translate into Russian :
(1) My aunt is the sister of my father or mother, or my uncle's wife ; I
am her nephew. (2) My uncle is the brother of my father or of my mother ;
I am his nephew. (3) My niece is the daughter of my brother or sister ; I
am her uncle and my wife [remember the my wife is the subject of an in-
dependent statement] is her aunt. (4) I heard his trembling voice. (5) He
gave me his trembling hand. (6) The little boy was playing with his finger.
(7) His firm hand was lying on the table. (8) In a trembling voice \instr.
without preposition] he was reading my book. (9) Whose book was he read-
ing ? (10) I saw a gold ring on your finger. (11) Her ring was of (Par. 98)
gold. (12) Can it be [is it possible] that he slept in his room ? {ambiguous in
English].
^ This word is declined like oTe^'B, but as the ji in the nominative is soft, the
b appears in the other cases to indicate that the Ji is still soft.
* In form a present participle active.
110-114 LESSON XXX 101
LESSON XXX
110. The dative, instrumental, and prepositional plural of
nouns have one set of endings throughout, viz. :
Haed Form
dat. plur. aM-L, e.g. ctoji&M'B [stAtdm], tables
instr. aMH, ctoji^mh [stAtami]
prep. axt, ctoji^x-l [stAtdx]
Soft Form
dat. plur. HWb, e.g. HiinflM-L [nanam], nurses
instr. HMH, HiiHflMH [ndnoihi]
prep. HXT., H^HHXt [ndnax]
111. Exceptional Forms in Instrumental Plural. ^Feminine
nouns belonging to group 4 in Par. 78 often end in lmh, e.g.
JiomaAbMH [lAjAdihi], horses.
Maxb has MaTcpbMii [matarmi] (see Par. 86)
jiom, noMepBMH [dAtJerihi]
112. Note that those words marked ^ in group 4 in Par. 78 have
the accent on the termination in the obhque cases of the plural, e.g.
nom. sing. Jioma^b [t6jAt] but dat. plur. JiomaAiiM'b [tAJAddm]
nom. plur. JidmaAH [t6jAdi] instr. plur. JiomaABMJi [tAjAdihi]
prep. plur. Jioma^jix'B [tAjAddx]
113. The corresponding case-endings for adjectives are :
Hard Form
dat. plur. BiMt, .gr. KpiLCUUWb [hcasnim], red, beautiful
instr. LIMH, KpdCHHMH [krdsmmi]
prep. HXT., Kp^CKHXT) [krdsnix]
Soft Form
dat. plur. HM-B, e.g. paHKHM-B [rdrdm], early
instr. HMH, paHHHMH [rdnimi]
prep. HX'B, paHKHXi. [rdnix]
114. In connexion with the terminations given in Pars. 110 and
113 remember the universal rules of Kussian orthography :
H must never appear after r, K, x, m, h, m, m, i^ : write a.
H r, K, X, m, H, in, m : write h.
102 LESSON XXXI 115-116
VOCABULAEY
nopxHdii (an adj. in form) [pArtnoI], BHc6Kift [visoki], high
tailor rJiydoKiii [gtuboki], deep
KopdxKiii [kArdtki], short hhskIh [nlski], low {not high)
fldJirift [dotgi], long (more generally thxIh [tixi], low (not loud)
of time)
Exercises
A. Decline in the singular and plural (omitting the genitive plural) :
noSpLiH Kyn^tti), mojiojs,6Pl njicMiiHHHK'B, xop6mee kojibiio,
Tp^^Hbift HSBiK'b, innpbKaH ^jiHi^a, Moji qepnaH coSaKa, ;^3Kafl
KdMHaxa, Hauia rjiy66Kafl p-feK^, eA Apomdmiii rojioct, ero Kp-feuKiii
n^jiei^t, er6 npyraH jiom>.
B. Translate into Russian :
(1) He was speaking about the long days. (2) Into all the long, broad
rooms. (3) Towards these low doors. (4) For my rich old uncle. (5) Into
the deep rivers. (6) About all the loud voices. (7) With [cb] whose gold
rings ? (8) From the nephew of that poor tailor. (9) Along [no] our
narrow streets. (10) On the long tables. (11) Between your kind old aunts.
(12) On to these short bridges. (13) Before their low doors. (14) The boys
fell into the deep water but a brave man saved them. (15) About our damp
fields. (16) Towards that high place.
LESSON XXXI
Notice the following idioms :
115.
Hto ^to 3a nepo? [jto stA za paro], Wh^t is that for a pen ? i.e. Wh^t
kind of pen is that ? What is there to know about that pen ?
KaKHM-L ddpaaoMt? [kAkim 6brAZAm], By what means ? How ?
116.
Mjrh JierK6 (h^jkho) 5to S'fejiaTb [mne hxk6 (ntisnA) ^tA d^tAt], It is
easy (necessary) for me to do that.
Euf Tp^AHO roBopHTb no-pA^ccKH [J9mti trdduA gAVArit pAidski], It
is difficult for him to speak Russian.
Mn-fe (HaMx) nplHTHO cjnimaTb 5to [mne (nam) prijdtnA si^iJAt stA],
It is pleasant for me (v^) to hear that.
:^ft HenpijiTHO CMOTp'feTb Ha ^xy nrp^ [j6I naprijatnA smAtr6^t ua ^tu
igrti], She does not like to look at that game. Of. Par. 189, 2.
116 LESSON XXXI 103
Vocabulary
ndpeHb, pHH, H [paran], lad CTapdTbCfll31A[stAra^tsA],to5nve,
piiat, a, iJi (b-l pflfl^, among) [ra t (d)], try
: row, rank CKpLiB^Tb 131 A [skriva^t], to keep
KpoeaTb , H , H [krAvd ^t], bed, bedstead concealed
H^BCTBO, a, a [tjvifstYA], feeling CKpbiTb [skrit], to conceal
Kp^CHHfi [krasni], red o^CBiinHO [AtJavfdiiA], evidently
noKpacH-fexb [pAkrAsn6^t], to blush pii^OMi. ch [rddAm s] (with instr.)y
Gjl'feHHHfl [biedni], pale alongside, close beside (lit. in one
no6ji'feji;HrfeTb [pAbiadn^^t], to turn row with)
pale MauiHH^jibHO [mA|ma^inA], absently,
3aM'feTHTb [zAiii^tit], to notice mechanically, instinctively
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) O^H^ MOJiOAafl jKenmHHa, K0T6paH CH^-fejia oji;Hd>Kji;Li pAjiou-b
cb cBo6tt 1 CTapoii xeTKoii, h ManiHH^jibHO nrpajia naJibiiaMH en^ pyKii,
saM^THJia aojioToe KOJibi^o na usLSihixh TexKH. (2) Ona cnpocHJia,
TeTKa, WTO ^to sa K0Jibi;6? (3) Gxapan a^Ma noKpacH-fejia,
noTOMT. noSji'feAH'fejia, h CKaaaJia nsLKOU^ixh npojKamnM'b rojiocoMt,
MH'fe HenplHTHo oS-B ^TOM-b roBopHTb. (4) OqeBi'iAHO ona cxapa-
JiaCb CKpblTb OT-b nJieMHHHHI^bl CBOli^ H^^BCTBa.
Oueeuduo ona cmapojiacb cKpbimb omh n/ieMHHHUiibi ceou uyecmea.
B. Rewrite tlie passage A, substituting a small hoy for the young
woman, an uncle for an aunt, and make the old uncle answer
in a firm voice.
C. BonpocLi:
(1) r^'fe cnrfjia MOJioAaH jK^nmnna? (2) KaKOBa SbiJia eii
TexKa? (3) H-feMi. nrpajia njieMHHHHi^a? (4) KaKX* ona 5to H'fejiajia?
(5) Hto ona cnpoci^Jia? (6) Hto cjiy^HJiocb?] (7) Xox-fejia jih
cxapaH jtaivia roBopiiTb o sojioxoM'b KOJibn-fe? (8) Hxo 68 6iiJio
HenpiflXHo? (9) Ox-b Kor6 ona xox-fejia CKpHBaxb H^BCXBa?
D. Translate into Russian :
(1) The rich merchant's beautiful wife drove up to {Kh\ the door. (2) At
last the door was opened [see Par. 102, a] and she entered [into] the hospital.
(3) First she passed through a dark entrance-hall, then she entered a large
1 cBoeft referring to the subject MOJionaH weHmnHa.
2 eji does not refer to the subject, but to the other person, the aunt.
' cBoii referring to the subject in this sentence, oh^.
104 PLUKALS 117
bright room, where (there) were clean white beds on which ^ lay the sick
men. (4) She entered another room, passed one bed and came up to [Ex.
XXVIII, A, 3] the bed which she was seeking. (6) There she found her son,
the unhappy boy whom she had adopted two years ago. (6) He had been a
strong, healthy lad then. (7) But suddenly he had fallen [past tense'] ill with
that dreadful disease. (8) There he (was) now a poor weak man. (9) His
pale fingers were playing absently with the yellow papers that were lying on
the bed before him. (10) The mother sat down on the chair that stood beside
the wooden bed. (11) It was evidently difficult for her to conceal her feelings.
(12) But she could say in a firm voice, " What papers are these ? "
Nouns that have occurred for the First Time in
Exercises XXI-XXXI
The numbering of the groups corresponds to that used in tbe
list given in Pars. 77, 78, 79.
117. Masculine Nouns ^
1
bh^kTj, h, h, sign njiCM^iHHHK'B, a, h, nepheiv
cfwh, a, LI, soup npHKa3^HKT>, a, h, shop-assistant
HapoA'L, a, bi, people
2
xpys'b, k, ill, trouble, difficulty kjiio^'B, k, ii, key
flSiiiK'b, S, il, tongue
3
Kyn^U'B, nua, uuj^i, merchant n^Jieui,, Jibua, jibubi, finger {see
BaMdKT., MKa, H, lock note to Voc. XXIX)
4
p^STi, a, lii (t), time, occasion pHAt, a, ii (na pnjty', in a row, at
the same time), row, rank
6
ndpcHb, pHH, H (eft), (peasant) lad
7
rdsiocb, a, l, voice r6poji'b, a, k, town
Feminine in Form
13
AJiAH, H, H (eft) or hA (b^Bt), uncle MyjKHHHa, u, bi, man
^ KOT6pMii is declined exactly like any other adjective in -mM.
2 nopTiidti, tailor, is in form an adjective.
118-119 PLURALS 105
118. Feminine Nouns
1
6ojibHHi^a, M, LI, hospital np^BHa, bi, truth
KOMHaxa, bi, H, room CHp6TKa, h, h (ok-l), little orphan
KopoBa, bi, bi, cow TCTKa, H, H (oK-b), uunt
K^XHH, H, H (OHI) or OHb), kitchen ;^JiHi;a, bi, bi, sfreei
Ji-fecTHHUja, bi, bi, 5to*V5 X0Ji6pa, bi, bi, cholera
M-fepa, bi, bi, measure HpMapKa, h, h (0K'b),/a*V
njiCMHHHHi^a, bi, bi, mece
2
BOHH^, iJi, -^bi, t^ar TpaB^, iJi, -^H, grra5
JKCHa, bi, -bi, w?*/e
3
OBi^a, li, -^H (ei^i)), 5^eejp seMJiii, A, -H), -^h (6jib), eari^, land
CHpoxa, bi, 6Tbi, orphan pyna, li, -^y, -^h, y^^wZ, arm
The first two mai/ have the accent drawn back one syllable in
the accusative singular, e.g. cnpoxy.
Note ccMbii, 6, -^H {^i^), family, has the accent on the stem only in
the nom. plur.
4
6oJiife3Hb, H, H (e^), sickness, disease KpOB^Tb, H, H (efi), bed, bedstead
5
M^Tb, epH,*epH (6ft), mother no^b, epa, epn (6ii), daughter
6
nep^AHHH (fern, adj.), ^ZZ, fo66y
119. Neuter Nouns ^
1
K0Jibu6, ^, -^a (jieuT)), ring
2
r6pe, fl, A (6h[), g^ne/, sorrow
3
H^^BCTBO, a, a, feeling naHaJio, a, a, beginning
SOJIOTO, a, groZc^ Pokacctbo, a, a, Christmas
^ aHB6THoe, animal, is in form an adjective.
106
VERBS, A
120-121
Hecq^cTie, h, h (iii),
misfortune
3 {cont.y
inesSy c^acTie, h, h (itt), happiness
noBTop^Hie, h, h, repetition
120. Prepositions that have occurred in Lessons I-XXXI
With gen. : Sea-L, Gjihst,, BM'fecTO, B63Ji'fe, jih, ao, hst,, KpoM-fe, m6mo,
OT-L, y.
(iaf. : Kt (ko), no.
accits. : npo, 3a, b-l (bo), na.
instr. : M^JKsy, 3a, cl (co), pii^OMTb cb, n^peni,.
prep. : o, na, Bt (bo), npn, no (Par. 69).
Verbs that have occurred in Lessons I-XXXI
121.
I A (cf. Lesson XXXV)
(1) BLipacxaTB
(no)roHHTb
(no)ryji;iTb
(no)A;^MaTb
(c)ji;'fejiaTb
(c)A'fejiaTbCfl
(y)3HaTb
(C'b)HrpdTb ^
(no)K^maTb
(1) OTB-fe^aXb
(1) oT^bixaxb
(1) nOHHM^Tb
(1) nocfen^aTb
(1) npnroTOBJijiTb
(1) npbiraxb
(1) nycKaxb
(no)pa66TaTb
(3a)ciHTb
(1) CKpblB^Tb
(1) cnpaniHBaTb
(no)cTapaTbca
A (see Par, 206)
I A a, 6, c,
(a) (cf. Lesson XLII)
(no)Be3Tti
(no)>KHTb
IIA 1, 2, 3
1 (cf. Lesson XXXVII)
* (no)roBopHTb
(no)jiejKaTb
(no)HTTH 2 (inf. of meji-b) (no)cHa^Tb
(no)HecTii (inf. of necb) (no)cnaTb
(6) (cf. Lesson XLIII)
(no)jiiiTb
(BlJl)nHTb
(c)jKaTb
(c) (cf. Lesson XLIV)
(no)^xaTb
(no)HCKaTb
(Bc)naxaTb
(Ha)nHcaTb
(3a)nji^KaTb
(c)Moqb (inf. of Mon*)
[fut. is CMor^]
(no)c^flTb (Par. 168 a)
(no)CTOHTb
2 (cf. Lesson XXXVIII)
(y)B6fl;'feTb
(no)HpaBHTbCfl
(y)cjn^imaTb
(2) CXdHTb
(no)cTp6HTb
3 (cf. Lesson XXXIX)
(no)6poji;iiTb
(no)CMOTp'feTb
(Ha)yqHTb
(Ha)yqHTbCfl
(2) xoA^Tb
(no)qHTaTb
(3a)6oJi'feTb (simple verb = fo be ill)
(3a)xoT'feTb (irreg., (Ha)pHCOBaTb
Par. 222) (Par. 225)
1 'hw must be written u.
(no)^CTb, to eat, is ir-
regular (Par. 220)
* Contracted to nofixHt.
122
VEKBS, B
107
122.
noKpacH-feTb
noSjii^AH^Tb
saSoji'feTb ^
sanymsiTh
CA'fejiaTb
ysHkTh
B (see Par. 206)
I a, 6, c
* B3flTb
(1) otbcstA
(1) npHHecTii
noiiTH (nomejii.)
* npHTTiA (npHinejiT*)
* npoiiT^
* HafiTii
* BOfiTil
(1) nocjiaxb
(1) yndcTb (yn^Ji-b)
(1) cnacTb (cnacb)
* CKasaxb
(1) noKaa^Tb (Par. 232)
(1) pa3CKa3aTb(Par.232)
(1) OTKpiiiTb (Par. 232)
(1) CKpbiTb (Par. 232)
(1) nO^HHTbCH
(1) CHHTb
(1) npi-fexaTb
(1) Jieqb (jier-b)
(1) cfecTb (c-fejib)
(1) CTaxb
(1) OCTaXbCH
(1) yaiep^Tb
II
1) BaM-feTHTb
1) p'hunkTh
1) CJiyHHTbCfl
1) cnpociiTb
1) 6p6CHTb
1) nojiyqHTb
1) K6HHHTb
1) KyniiTb
1) yQ-bm^iTh
1) nocTyniiTb
1) BCTp-fexHTb
1) OTornaTb
1) cjiyqHTbCH
(1) AaTb (naji-b) is ir-
regular (Par. 231)
6iiiTb is irregular
(Page 34)
no'feji'L is irregular
(see Par. 220)
* See note to Voc, LIII.
108 LESSON XXXII 123-124
LESSON XXXII
The Futuee Tense
123. The future tense of the verb Cbitb is :
fl 6^jiY [budu], / shall be
TBI Qfjieuih [btidaj], thou wilt be, etc.
OH-B^
OH^ le^^ACTi. [btidet]
oh6J
MH Qfjieu-b [biidam]
BLi 6;^AeTe [btidata]
OHil^^^y^^ [b6dut]
124. Tbe future tense of any verb in the groups marked A
(Par. 121) is composed by simply adtiing to the forms given in the
preceding paragraph the infinitive of the verb, e.g.
Ona 6fjs,eT'b pHCOBaxL [Ana btidat risAva^t], she will draw.
Bbi Oy'flCTe CTapaTbCH [v! biideta stAra^tsAJ, you will try.
Note. ^No verb under B (Par. 122) can have a future of this
form. This is most important (cf. Par. 204).
VOCABULAEY
np^BHJiLHO [pratiinA], correctly ;icH0 [jasnA], clearly
npaBO [pravA], really np6>K3;e {prep, with gen. or adv.)
npaBAa [pravdA], truth, the truth is [ipH^dd], before, formerly
CKopo [skoiA], quickly, soon nocjiife (prep, with gen. or adv.)
M^HJICHHO [rh^diaiiA], slowly [p6si9], after, afterwards
nosAHO [p6z(d)nA], late no-H^MeuKH [pAnemetski], in
n63>Ke [p639], later German
pane [ranA], early no-HTajibHHCKH [pAitAljanski], in
paHbme [rd^nja], earlier, sooner Italian
ropasAO 66jibme [gArazdA bo^ijo], MOJKCTb-SbiTb [m639t-bit], may be.
far more
Hhkto HHqer6 He noHHMajni [iiixt6 iiitjevd na pAiiiindt], No one
understood anything.
125-126
LESSON XXXIII
109
A. Translate :
(1) ripaBAa, fl ^Toro He 3Hajn>. (2) P^ho Ajih n63AHO h bc6
6^fly 3HaTi>. (3) Toraa oh-l roBopHJit no-p^ccKH, ho d^enb m6a-
JICHHO. (4) CKopo OHi> SyAeT'L roBopi^Tb iicHO h npaBHJibHO. (5)
OhT) npHuiejiTb nosflHO, a ona npHUiJia ropasAO n63>Ke. (6) Hhkt6
^Toro HHKorfla ne 6yji;eTi> noHHMaTb. (7) MojKeT-b-SbiTb, OHTb
MeHii HHKorAa He noHHMaji'L. (8) Ona TOJibKO d^enh neMHoro
roBopHjia no-H'^feM6i;KH h no-HTajib^iHCKH. (9) npem^e ouA TOJibKO
HCMHoro HHxajiH, HO BT. mK6ji'fe muTy HyjKHO 6fji,eTi> rop^3ji;o 66jibme
HHTaxb. (10) Xopomo, qxo OH-fe T6jibK0 n63>Ke [not till later]
6^ayTl> OTB'feHaTb.
B. Translate into Russian :
(1) Why will the boys be taught at home ? (2) Will they not learn far
more at school ? (3) She will never answer quickly and clearly. (4) It is
impossible to say when the industrious workmen will rest. (5) It is well
that he will not eat all his bread till later [say : will eat only later}. {&) No
one will write anything. (7) The corn will be growing up in spring. (8)
From whose friend will she try to conceal her feelings ? (9) Sooner or later
these old men will be working in the fields. (10) All the diligent school-girls
will learn their lessons. (11) The one girl will lie on this bed, the other will
sit on that chair.
LESSON XXXIII
125. The complete plurals of the 1st and 2nd personal pronouns
are
nom. Mbi [mi], we bm [vi], ymt
gen. nacL
[nas], of us, etc. Bacb [vas], of you, etc.
dat. HaMTj
[nam] BaM-L [vam]
ace. Hacb
[nas] Bacb [vas]
instr. HaMH
[naihi] BaMH [vaihi]
prep. HacL
[nas] ! BacB [vas]
126. The plural of the 3rd personal pronoun is :
Masc. and Neut, Fern.
nom.
OHH [Alii] OH-fe [aus], they
gen.
(h)hxt> [(j)ix], of them, etc.
dat.
(H)HM'b [(j)im]
ace.
(h)hx'L [(j)ix]
instr.
(h)6mh [(j)imi]
prep.
HHXT. [nix]
Most of these forms have already been introduced.
110 LESSON XXXIV 127-128
127. URWb [nod], over, above,
noat [pod], beneath, below,
are both used with the instrumental. Accompanying verbs of
motion noAT) governs the accusative.
Exercises
Translate into Russian :
A. About them, on to them, behind us, over them, over me, between them,
between us and you, with you, up to them, under us, with you, for them,
towards them, according to them, towards you, about you, before them, in
them, beside them, under them, over you, in his presence, in their presence.
B. (1) We saw them all. (2) They answered us. (3) You heard it.
(4) What were you doing there ? (5) We shall speak of you. (6) They will
ask them questions. (7) When shall we eat them ? (8) They never let us
(in). (9) Are you speaking of our tame animals ? (10) The white sheep were
lying under the old bridge. (11) I saw this bright light above them. (12)
We shall look for it later. (13) He will know it far better to-morrow. (14)
Who found the black cow that fell into the deep water ? (15) She will never
do that again. (16) They heard nothing. (17) He was sitting under the
old chair. (18) He never spoke to us. (19) Whose pupil was trying to read ?
(20) Have you (got) those books I gave you yesterday ?
LESSON XXXIV
128. Time phrases :
KOTopLifi ^acb xen^pb? [kAt6ri tjas tap6^r], what time is it now ?
Bt KOTopoMTj qacy? [fkAtorAm tjAsd], at what time ? at what o'clock ?
BT> HE a qaca [vdva tJAsa], at two o'clock.
btj paHHCM'B Hacy [vrdfi8m tJAsuJ, at an early hour.
"Bii BOCKpec^Hbe [vVAskr9s6nja], on Sunday.
Bii i^TOMb roay [vstAm gAdii], in this (or that) year.
BX Gy^aymcMb ^ rojif [vbudujtjom gAdu], next year.
Bb TCKymeMb 1 roa^ [ftektijtjam gAdu], in the current year.
btj HacTOHiuee ^ BpeMH [vnAstAJaJtJoja vr^iiiA], at the present time.
Ha npyroH AeHb [ua drug6I de^n], on the following day.
K'b Beqepy [kv6tJ9ru], towards evening.
no B^^iepaM'b [pAv6tJorAm], of an evening.
P'fe^KO [rstkA], rarely, seldom.
^ These words are participles.
128
LESSON XXXIV
111
Vocabulary
oS^At, a, LI [Ab^t], dinner
saBTpaKt, a, h [zdftiAk], break-
fast
qdcL, a, LI [tjas] (after 2, 3, 4, gen.
sing. [tJAsa]), hour
noHe^-fejiLUHKi., a, h [pAngd^^inik],
Monday
BOCKpeceHLe, h, n (eB-L) [vAskra-
seiija], Sunday
n^Jio, a, a [dstA], business, ajfair
poJKL, pjKH [roj], r^/e
nmeHHLta, li [pJanitsA], wJieat
PocciH, H (h, k), efi, h) [rAsiJA],
Bussia
B-L Poccz'u [vrAsii], in Russia
OpaHLtiH, H (H,io,eft,H)[frdiitsiJA],
France
BO OpaHi^iu [vAfrantsii], m France
Anrjiifl [angiiJA], England
Hxajiifl [italiJA], Italy
FepManiH [ggrmaniJA], Germany
HHOcxpaiieu'L, Hi^a, li [uia-
strdnats], stranger y foreigner
aHrJiHqaHHHT), a [angiitjdnin], pi.
aHrjiKHane, aH-b [angiitjdna],
MH'feHie, fl, H [mn6njo], opinion
HHHcro [iiitj9v6], is not worth speak-
ing about, never mind
BOBce [v6f89], at all
6cjiH [j6sii], if
H6BLifi [n6vi], new
TCK^mitt [takujtji], current
S^aymiii [budujtji], future
HacTOJimift [nAstAJdjtJi], present,
actual
np6mjiLift [pi*6J^i] V^ist, last
rpoMaaHLlii [grAmddni], enormous
OHi> ymeji'L [on ujoi:], he went
away
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) IIpejKne MaJicHLKaH yqen^i^a tojilko neMHdro yqiijiacb, a
B-L S^^ymeM-L TOjif OHa rop^sao 66jiLine Sy^nexT. yqHXLCH. (2)
IIoqeM;^ OHa S^nex-L cnpLiBaxb ox-l mchh cboh MH-fenifl? (3) Hejib3^
3Haxb, Hxo saBxpa Sy^ex-b. (4) B-b BOCKpec^Hbe ohh d^ayx-b hmxi
HHcaxb. (5) ficjiH Bbi Bcer^a nneM-b h Hoqbio 6yji;exe pa66xaxb,
Bli 6yAexe doji-fexb. (6) ripaB^a, h HHKora odxi ^xoM-b He a^^Maji^.
(7) Hhkxo HHKoraa ne Sy^nexnt nycKaxb xaKoro MajicHbKaro M^Jib-
HHKa B-b Hamy K6MHaxy. (8) B-b CyAymeM-b ro^^ ^xh 6oraxbie
HHocxpaHi^bi d^nyx-b cxpoHXb rpoMannbiii HOBbiii ^Bop^ix-b na 6eper;^
p-feKii. (9) J\o PojKjtecxBa mh Q^mwh yniixbcfl HOMa. (10) Ha
Jtpyr6ii nenb mh roBopHJiH ciy BauiHM'b ap^roM'b. (11) BecHoii
npHJi6>KHLiH KpecxLiinHHi. G^^ex-L cibflxb H^M^Hb H OBecb, a occhlio
poJKb H nmeHHHy. (12) Xlo^eM^ anrjiH^^He HHKorad ne xox^jih
roBopAxb c-h HHMH? (13) Bx> KOxdpoM-b qac^ Bbi npninjiii aoMoii?
(14) On-b npumeji'b na Apyrofi nenb. (15) ObA BdBce ne noHHMaJin
Bcer6 5xoro.
112 LESSON XXXV 129
B. BonpocH:
(1) Hto yqeHtI^a np^jK^e ^-fejiajia? (2) Hto ona S^flext ^'fejiaxb?
(3) Hero HejibSH snaTB? (4) Kor^a OHii 6;^yTT> hmt, nHcaxb?
(5) O HCM-L OHT, HHKorAa He n^MajiT,? [Oh-b HHKorna ne ayMajii, o
TOMT), HTO, about the fact that, etc.] (6) Koro HHKor^a He GyAyTt
nycK^TB? (7) Kto h rife S^ayxT, CTponxB J^Bop6^'B? (8) KaKofi
^B0p6^'B OHii S^flyT-B CTpOHTB? (9) ^O KOTOparO HHH MBI d^^^eMT*
y^HTBCH? (10) Hto KpecTBiiHe S^Ayx-B c^htb BecHofi?
C. Translate into Eussian :
(1) To-morrow we shall speak about all that with the Russian merchants
who arrived here last Sunday. (2) We shall all work by night and amuse our-
selves by day [say ryJliixB H HrpaxB]. (3) After dinner we shall sleep in your
bed. (4) It was not easy to speak with your poor friends, as [xaKX. KaKi)] they
came very late. (5) Their yoimger daughter will speak with you at an early
hour on Monday. (6) How much will that breakfast cost ? (7) Next year
we shall be in Russia and perhaps we shall live there till Christmas. (8) She
was never in France before ; last year she was in Germany and this year she
will be in England. (9) Why will the old peasant-woman pour the clean
water on the already damp ground ? (10) Next day the peasant's friends
arrived early from the town, but the old man (had) arrived still earlier
along with us, and his wife arrived only a little later. (11) We shall write to
them in the current year about this business. (12) At what time did they
go in T^ (13) They found him here at four o'clock. (14) Why did the silly
boy not eat this black bread ? (15) Never mind, he will eat it to-morrow.
(16) Wheat was sown last year and rye will be sown this year. (17) EngHsh-
men will not always speak Russian badly. (18) They rarely spoke Russian
well. (19) If you always speak [fut.] so fast, no one will ever understand
what you are trying to say. (20) After Sunday we shall be hving with our
old friend.
LESSON XXXV
The Present Tense
129. Up to tliis point only the infinitive, future, and past tense
of the verb have been used. The Present Tense is not quite so
simple in form as the past tense, and in many verbs it is not so simply
derived from the infinitive ; in fact two verbs may be in the in-
finitive very similar, and in the present tense quite different in
appearance. Eussian verbs are usually classified according to the
form of the present tense.
130-131
LESSON XXXV
113
130. All verbs, excluding a very
few
irregulars, have in tlie
present tense one
of the two following
sets of endings :
I
n
1. fl
K) or y [ju, u]
H) or y [ju, u]
2. TH
euib [j9j]
^HlUb [IJ]
8ing.-
OH'L^
3. OH^ I
ex-B [J9t]
HXT, [it]
. OHO J
'4. MH
CM-b [J9m]
HMT) [im]
Plur.
6. Bh
exe [jate]
Hxe [ita]
ioxT> or yx-b [jut,
ut]
HX-B or axx. [jot, at].
Note, (a) Cf. the endings learned in Par. 123.
(6) The variety of possible
stem-fori
tns is considerable.
131. All the verbs under I A in Par. 121 form the present tense
by substituting the endings I in Par. 130 for the Tb of the in-
finitive, so that we have :
(1) (2) . (3)
fl n^Maio [diimAJu], ryjuiio [gulaju], cxapaiocb [stArajus], try
think walk
Xbi ^^Maenib [diiniAJaJ] ryjifleuib [gulajaj] cxapaenibCfl [stArd jaJsA]
ona j-a^^Maex'b [ddniAJat] ryjiflcx-b [guidjat] cxapaexcfl [stAra jatsA]
OHoi
MH H^MacM-b [ddniAJem] ryjiiieM-b [guldjam] cxapacMCfl [stArdjemsA]
Bm jt^Maexe [diimAJate] ryjiiiexe [guld J9t9] cxapaexecb [stArd J9t9s]
^|Ay^MaH)X'b[dumAJut] ryjiiiioxxj [guld jut] cxapaioxcfl [stArd jutsA]
These are not three distinct types ; they are merely three
examples. Verbs in 'fexb belong chiefly to this class.
(a) The present participles of verbs of this type have the following
forms :
Adverbial present participle (invariable) :
nyMaa, ryjiaa, CTapaacb (pres. stem plus a), while
thinking, walking, trying-,
Adjectival present participle active (declined as an adjective) :
HyMaiomiii, ryjiaiomlH, CTapaiomiiica (formed from
3rd plur. pres. tense), one who is thinking, walking, trying.
(b) Compare Par. 80 (b).
H
114 LESSON XXXV 132
132. Note carefully the spelling of the present tense of the re-
flexive verb :
Cb in 1st sing, and 2nd plur. {i.e. after vowels).
Cfl in all other cases.
Before reflexive cb, ch, in all parts of the verb h is preserved
but t is omitted.
VOCABULABY
Ji^Mna, H, Bi [tampA], lamp 3a>KHr^Ti> [zAsigd^t], to light, set on
niima, h, h [piJtjA], food fire
HtejiaTb [38td^t], to wish, desire TporaTb [tr6gAt], to touch
npoHOJiJKaTb [prAdAt5dit], to con- cJiymaTb [stuJAt], to listen
tinue ynoTpeSjiHTb [upAtrebla^t], to use
OTKpbiBaTb [Atkrivd^t], to open pifemaxb [rejd^t], to solve, resolve
saKpbiBaxb [zAkrivd^t], to shut yM'fexb [um6^t], to understand, to know
nojiaraxb [pAtAgd^t], to suppose, hoiv to
have an opinion BHHMaTeJibHO [vnimdtaiiiA], atten-
nojKHBaTb [pA5ivd^t], to live, to dwell, tively
to he {of health)
All verbs in this vocabulary belong to class I A.
. ^ , , Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) H BHHMaTeJibHO cji^^maio Bce to, hto Bh qnTacTC. (2) Ohh
BcerAa ^JiaioTi>, KaK-b JKCJiaiOT-b. (3) Ilo^eMy^ Bbi npoaojuKacTe
roBopHTb oST) ^TOM'b? (4) Hto HaM'b Cfl^JiaTb \to do now, once, on this
occasion]! Ohhl cKpbiBaiOT'b OT-b nacb Bce to, qTO ohh ayMaiOT-b.
(5) Ona xopomo yM'feeT'b npHroTOBJiHTb 5to miIco. (6) Bcer^a
JIH pano sajKHraioT-b JiaMny? (7) H n^^Maio, hto ona ne cjiy^maeT'b.
(8) B-b PocciH H B-b repManin pojKb ynoxpeSjiHiOT'b B-b nnmy [as
food]. (9) KaK-b Bbi nojiaracTc? (10) HeyH<6jiH oH-b yjK6 yqiiji-b
ypoK-b? (11) He nojiaracT-b jih OH-b, hto en yneHHitbi nosjKe
S^ayx-b yqHTbCH? (12) Xopomo, hto Mbipanbuie ne HpnuiJiiiciofla.
(13) KaK-b Bbi HOJKHBaeTe? [How are you?]
B. Write sentences 1-3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 11 in the past and future.
C. Translate into Russian :
(1) They wish ; they conceal ; we think ; you know , do you know ?
what do you know ? (2) They touch. (3) We solve them all. (4) They are
preparing that meat. (5) We are opening this book. (6) They shut it. (7) I
am listening to all that [Bce to, hto] you are reading. (8) He supposes that
they will speak to them. (9) It is done [H'fejiaTbCfl] here. (10) We are trying
133-137 LESSON XXXVI 115
to teach ; they will learn. (11) Do they always [Bceraa JIH OH A] do that ?
(12) She fell ill. (13) She showed them all that. (14) Who generally opened
this door ? (15) Did she not give them good food and drink ? (16) Does he
not understand what [that which] you said ? (17) We use meat as food.
(18) She can [i.e. knows how to] speak distinctly and quickly. (19) Will he
not [He Sy^fleT'b jih] touch this thing ? (20) He asks them how they are.
LESSON XXXVI
Genitive Plural of Masculine Nouns and of Adjectives
133. Nouns in -T> have genitive plural in
-OBt, e.g. CTOJi'L, ctojiobTj [stAtof]
or -CB-L, e.g. najien'b, najibi^eB-b [pafeaf], after i^ when
the termination is not accented.
134. The most notable exceptions that have occurred, apart
from words dealt with in Par. 136 (b), are :
rjiasT), eye, which has gen. pi. rjiaat.
paa-B, time, paa-b.
anrjiHqaHHH'B anrjinqaHi. [anglitjan].
KpecTbflHHH-b KpecTbHHT. [krastjdn].
135. Nouns in -Pi have the genitive plural in -eBij, e.g.
CJif^SiU, cji^qaeB-B [stutjAJaf] (Group 6, Par. 77).
136. (a) All nouns in -L, both mascuUnes and feminines, have
the genitive plural in -eii, e.g,
napb, napeii [tsAr6i].
nocTejib, nocTejieH [pAst^lsi].
(Masc. nouns, Group 6, Pars. 77 and 117.)
(Fem. nouns. Groups 4 and 5, Pars. 78 and 118.)
(b) All nouns in ->KT>, -Hi>, -ui'B, -uxh, have the genitive plural
in -en, e.g.
HOKi), HOJKeii [noj, nA36l], knife.
137. The genitive plural ending of adjectives is for all genders
-i>ixi> in the hard form, e.g.
KpacHBHii, KpacHEbixt [kiAsfvix], beautifuL
116 LESSON XXXVI 138
and -HX'b in the soft form, and after r, k, x, jk, ^, ui, ux, e.g.
nocJi-feflHiii, nocji-fe^Hnxt [pAsUdnix], latter, last.
MJi^Ainifi, MJiajxinHX-B [mtdtjix], younger.
138. Tlie genitive singular of the noiin must be employed after
ji;Ba, TpH, HeTLipe, these words being nominative or accusative.^
With numerals, after 4, in the nominative or accusative case the
genitive plural of the noun is used.
Examples : aea pySjiH [dva rubid], two roubles.
necHTb pySjieii [d6s9t rubUi], ten roubles.
BT) BOCCMb qacoBT. [vvosom tJAsof], at eight o'clock.
Notice the usage with compound numerals :
aBafluaxB oflMHt py6jib [dvatsAt Adin rup] (nom. sing.), twenty-one
roubles ;
^BaAuaxL ABa py6jiH (gen. sing.), twenty-two roubles;
and so with 23 and 24, but
ABaAnaTb hhtb pydJi^fi [dvatsAt pa^i rubi6i] (gen. plur.), twenty-five
roubles, etc. etc.
Vocabulary
^^JKHH-B, a, LI [u5in] supper yqHjiHmHbiii [utjiiijni], school, of
HBop-b, a, bi [dvor], yard, court the school
cajmax-b, a, bi (tb) [sAtddt], soldier bchkIh [fsdki], every
3aaHa, h, h [zAddtjA], problem, KaJKabiii [kdsdi], each
exercise nocji'feaHiH [pAsMdni], latter, last
HHXb [pa^t], five SesnpecxaHHO [basprostdnA], iTices-
mecxb [jest], six santly, continually
ceMb [sem], seven BM'fecx'fe c^h [vih6stas], together with
BOCCMb [y6s9m], eight HrpaxbB-b coJiji;axbi[igrd^tfsAtddti],
ACBflXb [d^vat], nine to play at soldiers
necHXb [d6s8t], ten saHHMaxbca I A [zAnimd^tsA], to
HBaauaxb [dvdtsAt], twenty occupy oneself, to be occupied
Bce [fso], all, always xaK'b KaKX) [tak kak], as (conj.)
MH'fe HyjKHO [mns niisnA], to me ii6o [ihA], for (conj.)
necessary, i.e. I must, I need to
Exercises
A. Give the genitive plural of :
Majib^HK-b, oceji-b, rjias-b [irreg.], repoit, ji;Bepb, najieit'b, Maxb.
B. Translate into Russian :
3 boys, 5 boys, 20 boys, 21 boys, 22 boys, 26 boys.
1 Read Pars. 179, 180 at this point.
139
LESSON XXXVII
117
C. Translate into Russian :
past all the red houses ; beside these black tables ; for those tame animals ;
from the other houses ; from my kind aunts ; out of the narrow, dark entrance-
halls ; from those Russian towns ; till a late day ; that is done in our house
of an evening ; we are trying to answer ; they are ill [Coji'feTb] ; what are
their sons reading ? whose sons are reading ?
D. Translate :
(1) Hto ^'feJIaeT'b xenepb Bami, mojioaoh chh-b? (2) IlpaBO
He 3Haio, HO fl noJiaraio, hto oh-l xenepb BM'fecT'fe co cbohm'l dpaxoM-b
BTb yqiijiHin-fe. (3) On-b, MdjKex-b-Sbixb, co BcfeMH apyriiMH MaJienb-
KHMH MajibHHKaMH Hrpacx-b Ha ynnjiHinnoM-b ABopi bt. cojih^xh,
xaKTb KaKTb, btj Hacxoflmee bp^mh, BCHKift nejioB'feK'b saHHMaexcH
BoiiHoio, aajKe MajienbKie ayMaiox-b xojibKO o H^ii. (4) KajK^bift
B^Hcp-b, Koraa samHraroxT. jiaMny, hxx. MJiaAuiiii cbiH-b Bcerna
p^i^oM-b ch cxapuiHMH cecxpaMH y cxojia. (5) Tporaex-b, oxKpbiBaex'b,
saKpbiBaex'b KHiirH h xexpaan. (6) Bee BHHMaxejibHO cji^maex'b xo,
Hxo HMxaiox-b ero 6paxbfl h cecxpbi. (7) OShkhobchho nocji-feanie
no ^H^HHa npnroxoBJifliox'b ypoKH h p'femaiox'b 3aji;aqH, a OH-b Bcera^
acejiaexX) yanaxb, qxo a-fejiaexcH. (8) BeanpecxaHHO cnpauiHBaex'b,
HO cecxpbi o^cHb qacxo ne oxBibHaiox'b na ero Bonpocbi.
E. As far as tlie sense admits of it, write the sentences in Ex. D in
the past tense and future.
LESSON XXXVII
Present Tense of type II A
139. Verbs in group II A in Par. 121 have in the present tense
the second set of endings given in Par. 130, e.g.
(1)
H roBopib [gAVArii], speak
Xbi roBopiimb [gAVArij]
OWb\
ouk VroBopHXT. [gAVAi-it]
oh6J
Mbi roBopHM'b [gAVArim]
Bbi roBop^xe [gAVAi-ita]
^^SjroBopax'b [gAVArat]
, (2)
cxpoK) [str6ju], build
cxpoHUib [stroij]
cxpoHX-b [stroit]
cxpbHM-b [str6im]
cxpoHxe [str6ite]
cxpoflx-b [str6J8t]
(3)
yq^ 1 [utjii], teach
^^HUib [litjij]
^qHXX) [lit/it]
^qHM-b [lit Jim]
^HHxe [utjita]
^qax-b 1 [litjAt]
1 H) and H never appear after r, k, x, m, n, m, m, u,.
118 LESSON XXXVII 140-141
(a) Types (1), (2), (3) differ only in accentuation.
(6) The participles of verbs of these types have the following
forms :
Adverbial participle present :
roBopa, cxpoa, yna ^ (pres. stem + a), while speaking, building,
Adjectival participle present active :
roBopHiniii, CTpoflmiii, ynamiH ^ [from 3rd plural pres.], one
that is speaking, etc.
Adjectival participle present passive :
, cipoHMBiH, yHHMBiH [from 1st plur. pres.], one that is
being built, taught.
Adverbial participle past :
roBopiiB'B, cxpoHB'B, yHHB'B [from past tense], having spoken,
built, taught.
Adjectival participle past active :
roBopHBiuift, cxpoHBUiiH, yHHBmiii [from past tense], one
who has spoken, built, taught.
Adjectival participle past passive :
roBopeHHBiH, (no)cTp6eHHHH, yqeHHBm [y or lo of pres. tense
changed into eHHBiii], one that has been spoken, built, taught
{ = learned).
(c) Compare Par. 80 (6), 96 (a), 131 (a).
140. There is very frequently a change in the form of the stem.
In verbs of the 2nd conjugation such a change in the present tense
appears as a rule only in the 1st singular.
141. Present Tense of Type II A 1
CHA'^Tb, to be sitting BHcfexb, to hang, to be hanging/
cumf [sisii] BHm^ [vijii]
CHHiimb [sidij], etc. BHCiimb [visij], etc.
caaiiTbCfl [sAditsA], to sit doum cnaxb, to sleep
caJK^cb [sA5tis] cnjiK) ^ [spiu]
caAiiuibCH [sAdijsA, sadiJsA], etc. cnnmb [spij], etc.
^ 10 and fl never appear after r, k, x, jk, % m, m, u,.
2 Ji is inserted after 6, b, m, n before m.
142-144 LESSON XXXVII 119
JieJKdxL, to lie, to recline cxoiiTb, to stand
Jiemf [iasu] * CTOib [stAJii]
JieJKHUib [ias'ij], etc. CTOiimb [stAij], etc.
JioJKliTbCfl, to lie down npHHajocJiejK^Tb, to belong
nomfch [tA^iis] npHnaaJiem^ [prinAdiasu]
JioJKHinbCfl [tA3iJsA], etc. npHHaAJieH^Aiub [prinAdigsiJ], etc.
142. (1) In cmjifkTh and caAHTbCH the ji; changes to m in the
1st singular present tense. This is characteristic of verbs ending
in -HHTb and -H'feTt.
(2) In BHC^Tb the c changes into ui in the 1st singular present
tense. This is characteristic of verbs in -CHTb and -cfexb.
143. Observe carefully the difference in meaning between
jie^Kaxb, to be lying down (a verb of rest) and jio^khtbch, to lay
oneself down, i.e. to lie down. Of. CHaixb and caAHTbca (Par. 60).
Note JiojKiATbCH enaxb [tA3itsA spa^t], to go to bed.
144. In English we say, * What is he doing ? ' ' I think he is
reading,' and the Kussian Hto oh'l H'fcjiaeT'B? Ilojiaraio, hto
OHt HHTaexTb exactly corresponds.
If the second sentence is reported in the past, it becomes, ' She
thought he was reading,' but in Russian the verb in the subordinate
class must still be present, e.g.
Ona A^Majia, hto OH'b qHT^eT-B.
So : H CKasaJi'b cm^, hto er6 Maxb cujiAttj y OKHa, / told him that
his mother ivas sitting at the windoiv.
Vocabulary
BOJIKX., a, H (oB-b, termination KapTHHa, bi, h [kArtinA], ptcf^re
accented throughout oblique cases JiHca, bl, li (jiHCHua, bi, m) {use 2nd
of plural) [votk], wolf word in oblique cases) [iisd ,
Jiee-b, jibBa, JibBbi [isv (isf), iva, IMtsA}, fox
ivi], lion CBHHbii, ii, H {termination accented
^HCTTE), a, bi [dist], stork in oblique cases of plural) Isymja],
MKypaBJib, A, 6 [surdf, surAvia], pig
crane cxifena, i^i, ^y, -h [stand], wall
3B'fepb, fl, H (6h, jiM-b, etc.) [zWr], ji;6peB0, a, a or aep^Bbfl (BbCBt)
wild beast [d^ravA], tree
A'feBymKa, h, h (cK-b) [dsvuJkA], me [T^e], for, indeed, often suggests an
girl {growing up) antithesis
120 LESSON XXXVIII 145
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) ^-feByuiKH CHAHTt y OKH^. (2) Ona CH^-fejia na CT^Ji-fe y OKHa;
OHa c^Jia Ha cTyjit. (3) ^hcmtj jibbh h Bcfe jtpyrm seepH cnax'b
B-B Jl-fec^. (4) JIhC^ CTOHTI. 3a ^THMT, A^pCBOM'B. (5) AhCTH H
wypaBJiii CTOflTi> Ha moct^. (6) Mh B6Bce ne noHHMaeMt, noqeM^
eH KpacilBLIH KapTHHLI BHCHTt Ha CT-fenaXt ^TOtt TCMHOft KOMHaTLI.
(7) Mbi nojiaracM'B, 'ito T-h CBiiHbH npHHaAJien^aT'b G-feflHOMV npecTbii-
HHHy; eM^ >Ke npHnaflJiejKHT'L ^Ta S^Jian jidmaab. (8) 5th 4>paH-
HyacKie coji^aTbi jiomaTCH naacMb (=Ha seMJiio); ohh siemki-b na
MOKpoii acMji^.
B. Write Exercise A in the past and future, as far as the sense
admits of that. Omit sentence (2).
C. Translate into Russian :
(1) He asks whose picture is hanging on this wall. (2) Our old dog is
not sleeping. (3) She told me that the lazy girls were lying in bed. (4) They
lie down on the bed. (5) They lay down on the bed. (6) They always went
to bed at nine o'clock. (7) Why are you always speaking either [hjih] of lions
[O with prepositional] and other wild beasts or of tame animals that belong
to poor peasants ? (8) To whom does this black pencil belong ? (9) I never
go to bed at night ; I sit at the table and work all night, and then I sleep till
dinner. (10) That is why they went upstairs [naBepx-b]. (11) On whose
chair are you sitting ? (12) She always sits on my chair.
LESSON XXXVIII
145. Present Tense of Type II A 2 (Par. 139)
Bli^'feTb, to see cjniimaTb, to hear
BHJKy ^ [vi'su] cjHiimy [stiju]
Bii^Hmb [vidij], etc. cjibimnmb [stijij], etc.
CTpoHTb, to build HpaBHTbCfl, to be pleasing
cxpoK) [stroju] HpaBJiiocb ^ [nrdvius]
CTpoHmb [stroij], etc. HpaBHmbCfl [nraviJsA], etc.
CT6HTb, to cost n6MHHTb [pomnit], to remember
ct6k) [stoju] noMHK)^ [pomiiu]
CTOHmb [stoij], etc. noMHHmb [pomnij], etc.
^ Cf. Par. 142 (1). ^ Ji inserted after 6, b, m, n before lo.
^ Governs the genitive or takes o with the prepositional.
146-148 LESSON XXXVIII 121
146. Do not confuse ctohtb with CTOHTb. Note the difference
in accentuation.
He CTOHTt [na stoit], It is not worth while.
noK6pHO 6jiaroaapib Bacb.)) He CTOHT-b.)) [pAkornA btAgAdArd
(II A 1) vas. na stoit], '/ thank you very sincerely (lit. devotedly)' 'Do not
mention it.'
Em^ ct6hti tojibko naMt noKasaTb nacnopTi> [jamii stoit to^ikA
nam pAkAza^t pa JpArt], He only needs {it costs him only) to show iis his -passport.
147. noMHHTb is often used reflexively and impersonally, e.g.
BaMt noMHHTCfl, MomtT-h-^hiTh [vam pomnitsA, mosat-bit], You
remember, perhaps.
148. Numerals 11-19
OAHHHaTOaTb [AduiAtsAt] 11
^B-feHajiiuaTb [dvandtsAt] 12
TpHHamJtaxb [trinatsAt] 13
qe-n^ipHaALtaxb [tJotirnAtsAt] 14
EHTHaauaTb [patnatsAt] 15
mecTHaAiiaxb [JastnatsAt] 16
ceMHaaLtaxb [samnatsAt] 17
BOCCMHaai^aTb [vAsamndtsAt] 18
ji;eBflTH4AU[aTb [davatnatsAt] 19
These numerals mean some unit added on to ten, anaxt being
contracted from necflXb.
Except 11 and 14 all have the accent on Ha.
Carefully observe the speUing, e.g. the final e of qexBipe and
the b of nflXb etc. are dropped.
Vocabulary
noM-fenxHKTb, a, h [pAih6jtJik], land- ffyS-b, a, iJi [dup], oah
owner CTOJiOBaH {fem. adj.) [stAtovAJa],
pnc^HOK'b, HKa, HKH [ristinAk], dining-room
sketch, drawing Miiimb, H, h (eii) [mij], mouse
ycaAbSa, bi, u. (aed-b) [usd^dbA], SjiaroaapHTb II A 1 [btAgAdArit],
estate to thank
cnaJibHfl, H, H (en-b) [spa^iriA], noKopHbm [pAkorni], submissive,
bedroom humble
122 LESSON XXXIX 149
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) B^AHxe jiH Bm ^tot-b rpoM^^Hbifi aomx? (2) Ilojiardio, ^to
owb npHHaajiejKJ^T-B ^TOMy noM-femnKy. (3) T-fe KapxHHbi HMt
BdBCe HCHpaBHTCH. (4) MH-fe OHCHb HpaBHTCH ^Ta MaJICHBKaH
co6aKa. (5) Gb^hbh ctoht'b noAt nyGoM-L. (6) Ckojibko ctoht-b
xa ycaAB6a? (7) He ctoht'l n^^Maxb oS-b ^tomt,. (8) Mn-fe noM-
HHTCH, HTO BauiH flpysBH HHKorji;a He Shjih y Menji. (9) Owb
MeHH noKopno Gjiaro^apHT-b, ho npaBO He ctohti,. (10) BoT-b
noqeM^ M6fi ji,Aji,fi HOBbifi capdft CTpoHX-b. (11) Hcjibsh cjibimaxb
BT. CTOJioBOH ero npojKamaro rojioca. (12) H HHKorjia He cjniiuiaji'b,
HTO OHa er6 naniJi^ na Jiyr^. (13) TpHnaAi^axb MajibHHKOB-b na
yniiJiHmHOM'b HBop'fe.
B. Write Exercise A in tlie past tense.
C. Translate into Russian :
(1) All that belongs to that rich old man that used to live in the village,
(2) He said he never heard or saw anything. (3) Don't you remember the
old wooden table that used to stand in the dining-room ? (4) Yes, I remember
it. (5) I don't at all understand why he always goes to bed so early. (6)
Surely you know that I have no sketches here. (7) How many bedrooms are
there in this immense house ? (8) I supposed there were at least four large
bedrooms. (9) Then I think the house is costing too [cJinniKOM'b] much.
(10) I do not like these little pictures. (H) ^ Fifteen men, nineteen men,
three tall men, six tall men, twenty-four tall men. [Note that with numerals
the genitive plural of qeJiOB'feKTb is like the nominative singular. 1 (12) Eleven
rich merchants, five long fingers, three grey mice, fourteen lazy pupils,
four old teachers, five heavy keys. (13) ' Thank you ; I did not know
about that.' ' Don't mention it.'
LESSON XXXIX
149. Present Tense op Type II A 3 (Par. 139)
xoAHTb,^ to go KypHTb [kurit], to smoke
xojK^ [xASti] Kypib [kurii]
xoAHUib [xodij], etc. K^pHnib [kiirij], etc.
dpofliiTb,^ to wander jiioShtb [lubit], to love
6po>Ky [brA5u] jik)6jii5 ^ [iubiu]
6p6aHmb [brodij], etc. jhoShuib [iiibij], etc.
1 Read Pars. 179, 180. ^ Cf. Par. 142 (1).
2 n inserted after b, b, m, n before lo.
150 LESSON XXXIX 123
CMOTp^Tb, to look at AepjK^Tb [darsait], to hold
CMOTpib [smAtrii] epjK^ [d^r^ii]
CMOTpHUib [sm6trij], etc. j;6p>KHmb [d^rsij], etc.
CJiyjKHTb [stu3it], to serve
cjiyjK^ [stu5u]
cji^jKHUib [stu3ij], etc.
150. Numerals 30-100
TpiimxaTb [tritsAt] 30 c^Mb^ecflTi, [s^mdosat] 70
cdpoK-b [s6rAk] 40 BdceMb^ecflT'b [v6s8md9sat] 80
nflTbji;eciiT'B [padasat] 60 neBHHOCTO [davanostA] 90
mecTbaecjiT'b [Jasdasdt] 60 cto [sto] 100
Distinguish these numerals carefully from the -feew5. Here we
are dealing with multiples : * 5 tens,' etc. Notice that the accent
does not always fall on the corresponding syllable. Again observe
the spelling (b or !>) : xpHHi^axb alone is contracted, and the Tb in
50-80 is to be thought of as the genitive plural ending of ^eCflXb.
The form for ninety has never been properly explained, while
cop 0Kb is the middle part of the Greek word for 40 (recraapdKovTa).
Vocabulary
qHH6BHHK'B, a, H [tjin6vnik], official Ho6poTa, h [dAbrAta], goodness
CTapocTa, bi, bi (m.) [starAstA], B^mb, h, h [v6JtJ], things affair
village elder npaB^HBOCTb, h [prAvdivAst], up-
CTaKan-b, a, u [stAkan], glass rightness
CK^3Ka, H, H [skaskA], tale, fairy-tale jKHJibe, h, -h [3iij6], dwelling
6acHfl, H, H (enx) [basnA],/a6Ze Ha npHM'fep'b [ha primer], for
CHrapa, w, bi [sigarA], cigar example
nannpoca, bi, bi [pApirosA], cigarette CKp6MHbift [skromni], modest
Tp^6Ka, H, H (oK-b) [triipkA], pipe cjiiimKOM'b [siijkAm], too much, too
H jik)6jii5 er6 3a CKp6MH0CTb (ace.) [ja iubiu javo za skromnAst],
I like him for his modesty.
CJiy>KHTb tp^6kok) {instr.) [stu3it trtipkAJu], to serve as a pipe.
yniiTb (II A 3) Hanay'CTb [utjit nAizdst], to learn by heart.
JIioSoBbH) Mipii a^pjKHTCfl [lubovu riiir d6r3iLtsA], TTie world is maintained
by love.
JH66poe a-fejio caMO ce5ii XBdJiHT-b [dobrAJa dstA sAmo saba xvdiit],
A good deed needs no praise {praises itself).
Tpyni) KopMHTi., a Ji'feHb nopTHT-b [trut korihit a ie^n portit], By labour
we live, but sloth leads to ruin {work feeds, sloth spoils).
124 LESSON XL 151-152
Exercises
A. Translate :
(I) OSlIKHOBCHHO Mbl XOHMMT, HOMOft B-L J^^BHTb qac6B'L. (2)
CLiHOBbii Kyni^a SponflTt no ropoay. (3) ^tot-b j^epeBiinnbift
capaii cji^JKHT-b SojibnoMy cxapHK^'^ HtHJibCM-b. (4) Oht, K;^pHT'b
rpiianyK) Tpy6Ky; cnrapbi n nannpocbi ctohtt. cjiiimKOM-b MHoro.
(5) Mbi jnbSHMTj Bamnx-b Hpys^ii 3a hxtj jio6poTf h npaBaiiBOCTb.
(6) Bjiaroapib Bacb sa KpacHByio KHnry, KOTopyio Bbi MH-fe aajin.
(7) HejibSii yanaxb, qxo on-b aepjKHT-b pyKoio (B-b pyK'fe). (8) 5to
np6>KAe cjiyjKiijio HBopnoMTj. (9) npnjiejKHbie yqennKH ;^qaT'b
ypoKH HaH3;^cTb. (10) GTapocTa h HeBHHOcxo mecxb KpecxbHH-b
CXOflLX'b nepe^-b nOMOM'b ^HHOBHHKa.
B. Substitute past and future for the present tenses in Ex. A.
C. Translate into Eussian :
(1) Wild animals are wandering about [no with dat] the forest. (2) It is
possible to find out [get to know'] all that. (3) What are you holding in your
hand ? (4) They said they liked the Russian fairy-tales, but that the fables
were not so pleasing to them. (5) I thought they were always smoking bad
cigars. (6) What are you looking at ? [on to what, etc.]. (7) They sent us
five glasses of water and a little black bread. (8) Fifty cigarettes are not
worth two roubles. (9) Why could he not show me the new books he had
bought ? (10) Do you learn this lesson by heart ? (11) 15 industrious men,
55 poor men, 46 red pencils, 87 stone houses.
LESSON XL
Genitive Plural op Feminine Nouns
15L Nouns in -a have the genitive plural in -i>, e.g.
KOMHaxa, KOMHaxX) [komuAt], room.
^ cA^^ 152. (1) Nouns in -a have the genitive plural in -b, e.g.
I **^ HHHH, HHHb [110^11], child's nuTse.
(2) Nouns in -h preceded by a vowel or b take h, e.g.
m6fl, m6i4 [J6ja, |6!], neck,
or eft, e.g.
ccMbji, ceMeii [samja, h^mkl], family.
153-155 LESSON XL 125
153. If tlie a or H is preceded by two consonants whicli would
be diflS.cult to pronounce when final, the pronunciation is facilitated
by inserting o or e (when accented tliis is sometimes e) between
those two consonants in the genitive plural, e.g.
cjiyjKaHKa, cjiyjK^HOK'L [stusdnAk], servant.
cecTpa, cecTep'L [89st6r], sister.
caSjifl, ca6ejib [sdblA, sabei], sahre.
This e is also used in the genitive plural to replace b or h, e.g.
Kon^iiKa, KonecKT. [kAp6IkA, kAp^jak], copeck.
cnaJibHH, cnaJiCHt [spd^iiiA, spdkn], bedroom.
Notice in this last example T> is found where we might have
expected b.
Note. Nouns in b were discussed in Par. 136.
154. As the points dealt with in Pars. 152, 153 are rather
troublesome to remember, the genitive plural has been indicated of
all feminine nouns not accounted for by Pars. 151 and 136.
155. NuMEKALS ' hundreds ' and ' thousands.'
aB'fecTH [dv6sti] 200
Tpncxa (cxa gen. sing, of cxo) [tfistA] 300
HCTbipecTa [tjatirastA] 400
nflTbCOTt {gen. plur. of cxo) [petsot] 500
mecxbcox'b {gen. plur. of cxo) [Jasts6t], etc. 600
xbicflqa [tisetJA] 1000
AB-fe xi^iCHHH {gen. sing.) [dvs tisatji], etc. 2000
HHXb Xbicflq-B {geni plur.) [pat tisatj], etc. 5000
MHJiJiioH-b, a, M [liiiijon] 1,000,000
VOCABULAEY
qHCJio,^ a, ^a (ejn>) [tjisto], qacxb, h, h (6ii) [tjast], part
number, date OKpecxHOCXb, H, h [AkrssnAst],
MHomecxBO,^ a [mn63astvA], a neighbourhood
number, many, a lot r6HqiH [gontji], hunting
HOJK-L, a, H (6h) [no J], knife MorfmVt [mAgutJi], powerful
ACHbrH, erx> {fem. plur.) [d6^ngi, BejiHKOJi'fenHbift [vaiikAlspni],
d6nak], money
KBapxHpa, bi, H [kvArtiTA], h^me, ocxpbiH [ostri], sharp
flat xynoii [tupoi], blunt
ca6jiH, H, H (ejib) [sdbiA], sabre Majibiii [mdti], small
^ Governs the genitive. Cf . Par. 30.
126 LESSON XL 155
M^Jioe qHCJi6,^ a, a [matAJa CK63ihKO '^ [skoAkA], how many, hoio
tjisto], a small number much
M^H-fee ^ [m6naJ8], fewer H^CKOJlbKO ^ [nsskA^kAJ, a few,
66ji'fee ^ [bo^ioja], mx)re some
MHoroHHCJieHHbift [mnogAtjisioiii], ctojilko ^ [sto^ikA], so many, so
numerous much
MiiJiuii [miti], nice, dear 6oJibmaH ^acxb ^ [bAilJdJA tjast],
H3o6pamaiomiH {a present parti- a large part
ciple) [izAbrA3djuJtJi], depicting Sojibman ^acTb ^ [b6^ij9Ja tJast], the
MaJio ^ [matA], few, little larger part, the majority
HCMHoro 1 [namnogA], few, little
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) MHOJKeCTBO TymilXTb HOJK^ft. (2) H'fecKOJIbKO npi^THblXT.
p-feK-b. (3) Mnoro GojibniHX'b ycafleSi*. (4) GTOJibKO Kon^eK-b.
(5) Ha cyxoii seMJirl^. (6) CKOJibKO neHer-b? (7) Bojibuiafl qacTb
S^nHbix-b JKenmHH'b. (8) Men-fee jibBOB-b h Coji-fee BOJiKdE-b. (9)
MHoroqHCJieHHMH c^MbH p^ccKHX-b KpecTb^Hi.. (10) B-b npiiixHoii
0Kp6cTH0CTH HaiuHXT, ^epeBeHb. (11) GjinniKOM-b MH6ro MOKpoii
xpaBbi. (12) HeMHoro Soraxbix-b noM'femHKOB'b. (13) Mhojkccxbo
OCXpblXX, CaSeJIb. (14) H-fecKOJIbKO ^OM^UIHHX'b JKHBOXHblX'b. (15)
Majioe HHCJio KpaciiBbix-b KOMHax-b. (16) GxojibKO KapxiiH-b h30-
SpajKaiomnx-b MyjKqHH-b h M^JibqHKOB-b. (17) GjinniKOM'b mhofo
BejiHKOJi^HHbix'b aoMOBT.. (18) Y noM'femHKa o^eHb MH6ro roHqnx'b
coSaK-b. (19) GxojibKO Jincni^'b. (20) O Mory^qeMx. KHiiat h noqe-
pHXlj CKpOMHarO KpeCXbHHHHa. (21) IlpOCXblfl JKHJIbH CKp6MHbIXX>
jiioaeH. (22) Gx6jibK0 A^nerx, h xaK-b MaJio xji-feSa. (23) Mo A
MHJiaa HHHH H cii MHoroqiicjieHHbie py3bii. (24) KaJK^OMy MaJib-
qHKy naJiH 6cxpbiH ho}kx>. (25) B6ceMbji;ecHXx> nnxb qejiOBrfeK'b.
(26) GcMb xbicflq-b mecxbc6xT> xpiinuaxb aepcB^Hb.
B. Translate into Eussian :
For the young Russian ladies, the large estate of my old aunts, the dirty
windows of that large infirmary, without money and without books, out of
the dark rooms, the great doors of those splendid houses, at their nurses', his
sisters' games, the necks and tails of the black cats, the white paws of their
dogs, old women's tales, each of [na-b] them, 100 cigars, 777 idle men, 11 small
rooms, 16 young boys, 2222 wooden houses, the majority of your new pictures,
the too numerous friends of our elder sisters, so many difficult lessons, how
many splendid churches.
1 Governs the genitive.
155 LESSON XLI 127
LESSON XLI
Revision Present, Past, Future Tense.
Vocabulary
jiK)663Htifl [iubszm], agreeable^ HHiepecHO [interssiiA], it is in-
amiable teresting
XHxpbitt [xitri], cunning mojkho [m63nA], it is possible
xiiiUHLiii [xfjni], ravenous HcaaBHO [naddvnA], not long agoy
HM^Tb I A [im6^t], to possess, to own recently
npeanoHHTaTb I A [pratpAtjitd^t], B-feab [ve^t], why, surely
to prefer ch fl-feTCTBa [sdststvA],/rom childhood
H3o6pa>KaTb I A [izAbrA3d^t], to ohh (oH'fe) snaKOMbi [ahi (ahs)
depict znAkomi], they are known
3a6iiTb [zAbit], to forget bo BCiiKOM-b cji^qa-fe [vAfsakAm
stiitjAJa], in any case
. ^ , , Exercises
A. Translate :
Mbi p'femaeM'B, ona SyflCTT. cujiiThf ona H^cjiajia, h 6fjxy sajKnraTb,
OHT. TpdracT-b, on-b cnaji-b, h cxoib, mu sajKHraeM-b, Bbi roBopHxe,
OHH CJI^^maiOT-b, H CTpOK), OH-b CTOHT-b, OHT. CTOilTl), OH-b BilAHTT.,
CHHT-b JIH OHa? npHrOTOBJIfleTT. JIH OH-b? 5tO HMTb HCHpaBHJIOCb, OHii
xoAHT-b, fl jiepmf, h nojiaraio, ohh ^qaxcfl, KypHxe jih Bbi? h ot-
KpbiBaio, Bbi CH^HTC, ona bhchtt., OHii S^jtyx-b cnaxb, a Kypib
nanHp6cy, ona saRpbiBaex-b, a chjk^ HOMa, a cnjiib, ohh cji^JKax-b,
qxo OH-b nep^KHx-b B-b pyK'fe? onii dpoAHX-b, OH'b CMOxpHXi*, mh
jiejKHM'b, H 6yay cnaxb, Bh cjnJiuiHxe.
B. Translate into Russian :
He was reading, he is reading, he was lying, she is lying in [na] bed, they
will stand, it will cost, I saw, I see, I worked, I am working, it cost, it costs,
he stood, he stands, we do that, we used to do it, it used to hang, it hangs, we
slept, we are sleeping, I hear, she heard, he is here, he was here, he will be here,
I do not love her and she does not love me, I was smoking yesterday, I do not
usually smoke, I shall not smoke to-morrow, I serve, he served, he serves,
what are you gazing at [na with ace] ? we shall conceal it from her, it belonged
to him, it belongs to me.
C. Translate :
(1) B-b Hamefi OKp^cxHOcxH ecxb o^i^hx, 5oraxbiii h Mor^qiK
nOM^mHK'b. (2) OhX> HM-feeXX) MHOJKCCXBO rOHHHXX. C06aKX> H
JiomaA^H BX> CBO^ft yca^bSife. (3) EMy HpHHaAJie}KHXi> h [also]-
128 LESSON XLI 165
aTOT-B rpoManHbiii, eejiHKOJi'fenHbift jjom-b, KOTopuft ctoht'l npn
CaMOM-B B-b^SA-fe B-b Jl-feCb. (4) KOFAa CHffHTT. y MCHH B^b cnajibHife,
]a[jiH CTOiix-b y OKHa B-b nep^aHett, mojkho BH^-feTb ^TOT-b asopei^'b
BOSJI-fe IXepKBH. (5) GkOJIBKO CTOHT-b TaKOe JKHJIbe? (6) IIpaBO, H
He 3HaK). (7) Bo BCHKOM-b cji^naib Bce ;to MH-fe ne HHxepecHo, h6o
(xaK-b KaKT,) H npejtnoHHTaio CKpoMHbix'b jnoaett h npocTbiH B^mn.
(8) Ha npHM-fepij, a nacxo xojk;^ CMOxp^xb na i^xh MHJibiH homhkh,
Koxopbie Bbi BHAHxe aa JiyroMii. (9) Mn-fe npaBHXCH ^xh Kpacii-
Bbifl KapxM[Hbi, KOXopbiH BHoixx. Ha cx-feHax^ Bameii KBapxnpbi.
(10) He^aBHo JiK)663Hbiii apyr-b moh nocjiaji-b Moett cecxpi ORuf
HS-b CBOHX-b KHHrX) Ch pHCy^HKaMH H3o6pa>KaK)mHMH cxapbiH p;^CCKifl
6acHH H cKasKH, KoxopbiH KamaoMy hsx. nacb ch ^-fexcxBa snaKOMbi.
(11) B-fejtb H Bbi caMH He 3a6biJiH BojiK'b h Ancx-b*, JTHca h
>KypaBJib, JIeB'b h Mbimb, GBHHbH hoaT) jiy6oM'b, JJ,B'h Go6aKH.
D. Bonpocbi :
(1) FA'S HOM'l^mHK'b? KaKOB-b ^xox-b HejiOB'feK'b? (2) KaK^x-b
coSaKTb y Hero MHOJKecxBO? Fa-fe on-b hxi. jtepjKHx-b? (3) Tjifb
HaxoAHXCfl [finds itself, i.e. is] ero hobmh aoM-b? KaKoii y Hero
AOM-b? (4) OxKyna mojkho EHj^-fexb ero? (5) Hxo roBopHn^eMy
[speaker'] ropasAO Sojibine npaEHXCH? (6) Ha qxo eM^ npiaxHO
CMOxp^xb? (7) Ffl-fe HaxoAHXCfl KapxHHbi? (8) KaK^K) KHiiry
nojiyqiijia [received] neaaBHO MaJieHbKan a-feBOHKa? Ox^ Koro?
Hxo HSoSpajKaiox-b phc^hkh? (9) Snaexe jih Bbi cb n-fexcxBa
H^CKOJibKO Sacen-b h CKasoK-b? Kanie, na npHMibp-b?
E. Write Exercise C in the past tense.
F. Translate into Russian :
(1) A lot of tame animals, of horses, cows, sheep, pigs, dogs, cats.
(2) How many wild animals, lions, wolves, bears, 'foxes ? (3) Twenty-
one cranes and five storks. (4) Four oaks and many other large trees.
(5) Twenty old books, forty-one new books, ninety-six French books.
(6) Five thousand six hundred and forty-four men.
G. Translate into Russian :
(1) The teacher showed the younger pupils a number of pretty sketches
and pictures. (2) He asks them what those pictures represent. (3) In theii
opinion they all represent old Russian fables. (4) You could see the raven-
ous wolf lying [say how the wolf lies, or break the construction and say
simply the woK lies] under the tall oak in the forest along with the sick
lion and the sly fox. (5) I always thought that there were a great many
beautiful trees on the large estate of the rich proprietor who owns this village.
(6) Surely they are not still sitting at table in the dining-room ? (7) I
suppose they are smoking cigars after dinner ; at least they usually do that.
156-157 LESSON XLII 129
(8) In any case there are a lot of books lying on the table. (9) I know that
she is still lying in bed. (10) We have known [pres. tense] these tales from
childhood ; the majority of [hs'l] them are also known to om: friends. (11)
Next year we shall, perhaps, be in France, and if we like yom* town and
its environs, we shall stay there till Christmas. (12) Did those Englishmen
understand what was said? (13) I am told that it was two of his sons
who saved him when he fell into the river. (14) We are all taught in the old
school.
LESSON XLII
Present Tense, I A (a)
156. In Paragrapli 121 a small group of verbs is given under
I A (a, 6, c). They are sometimes treated as irregular verbs.
The present tense of these verbs has a stem ending in a consonant,
in -^ (preceding -htb), or in -b (see Par. 162).
These verbs all have in the present tense the endings -y,^ -eniL,
-ext, -eMT>, -exe, -yxi,.!
157. I A (a). Terminations accented throughout :
(1) MKHTi* [sit], to live Be3TH[ [vostf], to be actiially carrying
>KHB^ [Sivii] in a vehicle, to convey
jKHBeuib [sivoj] Be3^ [vazii]
jKHBCT'b [sivot] Besenib [v8z6J]
MKHBCMt [s'ivom] etc.
H^HBCTe [s'ivotQ]
JKHBCT'b [sivtit]
Similar are :
(2) TKaxb 2 [tka^t], to weave
TKy, TKemb or xnemb, etc. [tku, tkoj (tjoj)]
TKyT-b [tkut]
(3) npHCTb [prast], to spin
npHA^, npaaenib, etc. [prAdii, prAd6J]
(4) HecTH [nasti], to carry, to be actually carrying
uecf, Hccemb, etc. [nasii, nasoj]
(6) HTTH [iti], to go, to be actually going
ujif, Haenib, etc. [idii, idoj]
(6) cwhAihCH. [smajd^tsA], to laugh
CMibibcb, CM'feembCfl [smajiis, sihajoJsA]
^ Become lo and ion. after vowels or i>.
2 This verb might also have been given under Par. 163.
130
LESSON XLII
158-159
(a) The participles of these verbs have the following forms :
Adverbial participle present :
H^HBfl, Be3fl, , npHHH, HCCH, HUH (ujiymi), CMMCb.
Adjectival participle present active :
TKHBymiii, Beaymiii, TKymifi, upnjiyuxim, necymiii, HAymiii,
CM^feiomiiicfl.
Adjectival participle present passive :
, BeSOMBlii, , npanOMBIH, HeCOMBIH, , .
Adverbial participle past :
JKHBUIH, BeSUIH, TKaBUIH, npHHUIH, HeciiiH, mefluiH,
CM'feflBUIHCB. ^
Adjectival participle past active :
jkhbiuIh,. Besmift, TKaBiuiii, npanmifi, Hecmiii, mefliulH,
CM'feHBmiiiCH.
Adjectival participle past passive :
(npo)>KHTBiH, (no)Be3eHHbm, TKanHLm, npflaenHBifi, HeceHHtm,
(6) Compare Pars. 80 (b), 96 (a), 131 (a), 139 (6).
158. Note that changes in the stem of these verbs are frequent,
and that, as well as the typical ending of the infinitive, viz.
vowel + Tb, e.g. ji;4jiaTb, to do,
there are the forms ^ in
consonant + Tb, e.g. npacTb, to spin,
consonant + th, e.g. hccth ^, to carry,
vowel + Hb, e.g. MOHb ^ [motj], to be able, can.
159. XOAHJIT* and meJi'b, which were exactly distinguished in
Par. 40, are the past tenses of the verbs xo^HTb, to go, to be in the
way of going (pres. xoJKy), and htth, to go, to be actually going
(pres. Hay), e.g.
06hkhob6hho h xgh^^ no B^nepaM-B A0M6ii [AbiknAvsiiA ja xA3ii
pAv^tJerAm dAmoi], I generally go home of an evening.
Kyna OHT, Tenepb Haexi.? [kudd on tape^r idot], Where is he going now ?
Gn-fer-B HflCTt * [snek idot], It is snowing.
J^OKflB HAex-B [dojt idot]. It is raining.
^ See Par. 239. ^ Infin. of Heci,, carried. ' Infin. of Mort, C(mld.
* =n^Haen. [padAJat] cntn., Snow is falling.
160-161
LESSON XLII
131
160. The compounds of htth (see Par. 122, 1 a, 6, c noiiTH, etc.),
like tlie compounds of most other simple verbs, have a form which
looks exactly hke a present tense, but is really an immediate future
referring to one definite event (see Par. 204), e.g.
H nofia^ ccHHacB [ja pAidd satjds], / shall go at once.
Oh-b BOHaeTt H^peat nacb bi. KOMHaxy [on vAldot tJ6ras tjas
fkomnAtu], He will enter the room in an hour (lit. through an hour, after the
lapse of).
Cer6HHfl Mbi npiiineM-b (or npHaeM-b) kt> BaMi. b'b Tpn naca [sevodnA
mi pridom kvam ftri tJAsd], To-day loe shall come to you at 3 o'clock.
Similarly :
npoHji;^ [piAidii], / shall go through, traverse.
BbifiAy [viidu], / shall go cnit (come out).
nepettji^ [pareldii], / shall go through to the other side.
TifiVmif [dAldii], I shall reach, go up to.
161. Past tenses of verbs in Par. 157 :
Beat, Bcsjia, bcsjio, bcsjiA
H^HJIt, JKHJia, JKHJIO, JKlijIH
TKajit, TKajia, tk^jio, TKajiH
npflji-b, npfljia, npflji6, npnjiii
HecL, Hccjia, Hecjio, necjiH
meJiT>, mjia, mjio, mjiH
CM-feiijicfl, CM-feiijiacb, etc.
Vocabulary
JiibAH, 6h[ ^ (m. pi.) [iudi], people
CH-fer-L, a, k [snsk], stww
B'b CH'fer^ [fsnegu], in the snow
AOJKb, A, [dojt], rain
yfeaai), a, bi [ujsst], canton, district
rySepnlH, h, h (ifi) [gub^rniJA],
government (corresponding to
province or department)
H35a, iJi, y, bi [izbd], peasant's
house, hut
H'fejio, a, a [detA], act, deed, business,
affair
rojiOAHbift [gAtodni], hungry
OHT) aoJUKeHi. n-fejiaTb [on dotsan
dstAt], he is under an obligation
to (he must) do
^ instr. plur. -i,uvl. ^ Cf .
OHa AOJiJKHa [dAt3na], she must
oho jiojijkho [dAt5n6], it must
OHH aojijkheJi [dAtsni], they must
Ha ABop'fe [nA dvArs], out of doors,
Kt. on the yard
HST) HOMy 2 [izdAmu], out of the house
OKCAHeBHO [J938dnsvn.v], daily, each
day
coBci^M'b H'feT'b [sAfssm nst], not ai
all
VL^pesTi {gov. ace.) [tj^fas], through,
across
HaxojiiHTbCfl [nAXAditsA], to find it'
self, to be
yMHpaxb I A [uriiirait], to die
oTTb^xdjioHy {gen. in -y), Voc. XLIII.
132 LESSON XLH 161
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) Ha HBop-fe HseT'B AOJKAb. (2) He SHdexe jih Bm, npHH^T-L
jiH [whether] xen^pt ;^th CTap;^XH? (3) GoBcfeMt H'^t'l; OH-fe TKyT-B.
(4) Mm nojiaraeMTb, hto H-feMeitKie coji^aTbi nepeuiJiH q6pe3T> pin^.
(5) Ond yjKe Hexiiipe roaa jKHBexi. b-l ^tomt. ccji-fe, ho Hxt aepeBHH
HaxoAHTca BT) npyroMTb yfeaa-fe. (6) ^TOTt MajitHHK'B ujxeTb b-l
lUKdjiy, BOTt uoneuf owb HeceT-B KHiirH h TexpaHH. (7) Cer6j];HH
OH-B npifinexT. noMoii ii3i> niKOJibi bx, xpn qaca, ho oSbikhob^hho
x6jibK0 Bb HHXb qacoB-b npHXOflHX'b. (8) Oxqer6 Bamn jipyshA
Bcerna CM-feibxca? (9) Mbi aojiJKHbi paSoxaxb okcah^bho jio <'^H^HHa.
(10) rojioffHbifl co6dKH jiejK^XTi B-b cH-fer^. (11) Hhm iisSbi cxoaxb
3a p-feKoii? (12) HeyjK^JiH 5xh MHoroHHCJiemibm c6MbH Bcife jKHB^^xb
Bb offHOM-b nepeBiiHHOMb HOMnK-fe? (13) HejibaA yanaxb, nomjj.eT-h
JIH OHa o 5xoro M^cxa. (14) J];66pbie jho^h yMHpaioxx>, ho A'feJia hxx.
JKHB^X-b.
B. Translate into Kussian :
(1) In the hut the old peasant woman is spinning or weaving, but her
husband is always working out of doors in summer. (2) She will come out
of the house after dinner ; she will go through the garden and come to us.
(3) We have lived in this town for [we Uve already] two years. (4) Our town
is [say finds itself] in one of the large governments of Russia. (5) Surely you
have not lived here for two years ? (6) I am going home now. (7) I go
home every day at six o'clock. (8) To-day I'll go home at seven. (9) They
went along the street this morning. (10) We must carry the little boy.
(11) She is not to go out of the house. (12) What are we to do ? Do you
know that it is snowing ? (13) He did not carry it. (14) I suppose she is
spinning ; she does not know how to weave. (15) In this government there
are [find themselves] seven districts, forty-six towns, two hundred villages,
and one million two hundred and seventy thousand people. (16) Did she
get to know that ? (17) Not at all ; she never reached the house where her
friends were living at that time. (18) I did not know whether she came here
yesterday. (19) They continued to laugh, because they did not understand
what the old teacher was [is] saying to them.
162-166 LESSON XLIII 133
LESSON XLIII
Present Tense, I A (b) (Par. 121), Monosyllabic Words
162. Initial consonant soft tkrougliout :
nHTb [pit], to drink
nbK) [pju]
nbenib [pjoj]
nbCTt [pjot]
nbCM'b [pjom]
nbCTe [pj6t9]
nbH)Ti> [pjut]
Similar are :
jiHTb [lit], to pour
BHTb [vit], to windf twine
niHTb [Jit], to sew
6wTh [bit], to beat
163. Some other monosyllabic verbs, often called irregular :
3KaTb [3a H], to reap jK^axb [sda^t], to wait
muy [3nu] mny [sdu]
JKHenib [snoj], etc. mjieuih [sdoj], etc.
H^aTb [sa^t], to press TKaTb
TKmy [smu] (see Par. 157)
>KMemb [siiioj], etc.
The 3rd plural forms are JKHyTi, JKiviyx-b, wnyTt, TKyTl>.
164. Past Tenses
HHTb, BHTB, JIHTB, MK^aTB, TKaTB bave the accent on tbe
feminine ending ; all tbe otber past tense forms of verbs in Pars.
162, 163 have tbe accent on tbe stem.
165. Distinguisb hhtb from ni^TB, noio, euiB, etc., n-fejiB, nijia
[pe^t^ pAJU; pAJoJ pet^ PstA], to sing.
166. Ordinal numbers are, as a general rule, formed from
tbe cardinals by giving tbem tbe termination Biii, aa, oe. Just
as in Engbsb, among tbe first few ordinals tbere are some exceptional
forms :
n^pBbifi [psrvi] 1st
BTop6tt [ftAr6I] 2nd
134 LESSON XLIII 167
xp^Tift (hH, be) [tr6ti (tj9, tj9)] 3rd
qcTBepTbift [tj9tv6rti] 4th
uAtuPl [pati] 5th
mecT6ft [Jastoi] 6th
cefli.M6fi [sadmoi] 7th
B0CbM6ft [vAsmoI] 8th
ACBiiTbitt [davati] 9th
neoiTHii [dasati] 10th
OAiiHHai;aTLiti [AdinAtsAti] 11th
and so on up to IQtli, the accentuation being the same as in the
cardinals.
167. These words are decHned Hke any regular adjective of
corresponding form.
In TpeTift the stem is everywhere, except in the nominative
masculine, Tpext-. The genitive singular is xpeTbHro, xpexbeH,
xpexbflro ; otherwise the declension is that of qeft, hlh, etc. (Par.
106):
Tp^TbHro HHH [tr6tJ8VA dna], tTie day before yesterday.
The nominative plural is xpextH [ti-etji] for all genders.
Vocabulary
qdft, fl, H [tjai], tea bhh6, 4, -^a [vino], wine
pyqeii, hA, b6 [rutj^l], brook, stream nJiaTbe, h, h [ptdtja], dress, clothes
q^uiKa, H, H (cKt) [tJdJkA], cup thxo [tixA], low, softly
q^mKa naio ^ [tJaJkA tjdju], a cup rpoMKO [gromkA], loudly, alcmd
of tea aojiro [dotgA], hng {of time)
pyS^uiKa, H, H (cK-b) [rabajkA], e^Ba [jodva], hardly
shirt HCCMOTpii na t6, qxc [nasmAtra
nxAqKa, h, h (ckT)) [ptftjkA], little nAt6,jt6], not looking onto, i.e. in
bird spite of, the fact that
BcpcBKa, H, H (oK'b) [varofkA], noJiHBaxb I A [pAiiva^t], to liJa^er
rope, line JiHXb pyqbeMX. (pyqbHMH) [lit
cjies^, ii, -bi [siazd], tear nitjjom (rutjjdriii)] or JiHXb
He^-fejiH, H, H (b) [nad^lA], week KSLK^b HS-b BC^pa [lit kak iz
n'fecHH, H, H (ewh) [p6snA], song vadrd], to pour in torrents
CHpoxcxBO, a[sir6tstvA], orp^w^oo^ jK^xbCH ox-b x6jiOAy ^ [3a^tsA At
rHibaad, A, -a [giiazdo, gnozdA], xotAdu], to shrink together with
nest cold, to be pinched with cold.
u&BO, a, d [pfvA], beer
1 Cf. Voc. XXVII. 2 cf. rial HOMY in Voc. XLII.
167 LESSON XLIII 135
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) Bt KOT6poMi> qac;^ Bh nbexe ejKenH^BHo H^ii? (2) Cer6AHfl
HCJibSii BiJiHTH lisT* AOMy, noTOM^ HTO Hexopomafl noro^a. (3)
Hauia MHJiaH, TpyAOJiioSiiBaH Maxb mbeT-B njiaxbH ajih MJiaarnHX-b
H0Hep6ft H py6amKH ^jih cbiHoe^ft. (4) Bqepa JHOTK^b jikjit, py^bjiMH;
HecMOTpfl[ Ha 5x0, CTapaa cjiyat^HKa nojiHeaeT'b mokphh ym^ cslkl.
(5) ^aBHiJiM'b-fl;aBH6 Bcife KpecTbiiHe Bt ^xoii ^ep^BH'fe n^Jin n'fecHH,
HO ym^naBHo 66jibme saifecb He noibx-b. (6) Tp^xbHro ahh OH'b BHJi-b
BepeBKH. (7) He BHSHxe jih Bm, KaK-b hxhhkh Bbiox-b rH^SAa?
(8) H xox-fejix. ysHaxb, noHeM^ Bamx. chhi. 6bexx> CBOib co6aKy.
(9) Ona xaKi> x6xo noexx>, hxo h e^Ba cjnJimy. (10) Il^pBbm aenb
Heit-fejiH BOCKpec^Hbe, a Bxop6ii noHerfjibHHKi.. (11) Ten6pb
ce^bMaH Hen'fejiH rbaa. (12) Xopomo, wto xen^pb xenjian noro^a;
npiflXHO pa66xaxb na SBop'fe. (13) B'fecHoio noc^HSiu,^ a oceHbio
jKHyxx>. (14) Majib^HKH jKMyxcH oxx> x6jioAy. (16) Bx. cnpdxcxB'fe
>KHXb CJieSbl JIHXb.
B. Translate into Russian :
(1) Every day at five o'clock most ladies drink a cup of tea ; their little
daughters drink a glass of milk. (2) It is well that she can [knows how to]
sew. (3) I used to see her sewing [how she sews] at the window. (4) It is
pouring in torrents to-day, and all the little birds are sitting in their nests,
huddled together [and they press themselves] with cold. (5) Our friends
did not sow in spring and they will not reap in autumn. (6) When does that
bird build [wind, weave] its nest ? (7) In spite of the bad weather we go to
school each day, but to-day, perhaps, we shall not go to school. (8) How
many cups of tea do you drink ? (9) The industrious peasants must make
[wind] ropes in the evenings, when it is impossible to work out of doors. (10)
A lot of large birds are building their nests in the wood. (11) I thought that
they usually reaped the harvest with a scythe or a sickle. (12) They have
lived for fifty years ^ in our government. (13) Why were they speaking of the
sixth day of the week ? (14) When I passed her, there she was pouring [pours]
the water on the garden in front of our door. (15) Ten men came through the
second field. (16) Five easy books, eighty- two white horses, four deep streams,
six long years. 2 (17) He never drinks wine or beer.
^ the sowing was done.
* Genitive plural with numerals after qexiipe is JitrB from Ji-fexo.
136 LESSON XLIV 168-169
LESSON XLIV
168. Present Tense, IA(c) (Par. 121)
Termination accented only in 1st singular or not at all.
(1) nnc^Tb [pisait], to write
nnm^ [piju]
nHUieniB [pijaj]
nHincT'L [pijet]
nAm^Wh [pijam]
niimeTe [pijata]
nnmyT'L [pijut]
Similar to nHcaxt are :
(2) BHsaxb [veza^t], to knit
BflJKy, Bi^H^emb [v93u, vasaj], etc.
(3) njiaKaxb [ptakAt], to weep
njiaqy, njianeuib [ptatju, ptdtjaj], etc.
(4) HCKaxb [iskd^t], to seek (governs gen. or ace.)
vmxf, Hmemb [ijtjii, ijtjej], etc.
(5) ^xaxb ^ [jsxAt], to drive in a vehicle, ride, go
-feay, ijtenib [jedu, jsdaj], etc.
(6) naxaxb [pAxa^t], to plough
nam^, namemb [paJu, pdjaj], etc.
(7) MO^b [motj], to he able, can
uovf, MbjKenib, etc., Moryxt [mAgu, 111659 j m6gat]
(a) Verbs in -"feflXb, like cfenxB, to sow, have the same endings :
ctio, ctenib [seju, sejaj], etc., K) replacing y after the vowel.
169. Notice in these verbs the changes in the form of the stem :
(1) Verbs in -caib, e.g. nHcaib, change c into m in the present
tense.
(2) Verbs in -3HTI> and -saxb, e.g. Bflsaxb, change 3 into m.
(3) Verbs in -xaxb and -Kaxb, e.g. njiaKaxb, change x or k
into H.
(4) Verbs in -cxaxb and -CKaxb, e.g. HCKaxb, change ex or CK
into m.
(7) Verbs in -Hb, e.g. MOHb, change q in the 1st singular and 3rd
plural into r or K, in the other forms of the present tense into jk or q.
^ The important distinction between this verb and htt6 was pointed out in
Par. 97.
170-171 LESSON XLIV 137
170. Past Tense of verbs in Par. 168 :
(1) nHcajn>, nncajia, ajio, ajiH (2, 4, 6 similar).
(3) njiaKajiTj, njiaKajia (5 similar). In fact all these verbs
preserve in the past tense the accent of the infinitive.
(7) Mor-b, Morjia, Morjio, mofjih.
171. Ordinal Numerals tens, hundreds.
ABajxnaTLiii [dvAtsati] 20th
ABaanaxb n6pBHii [dvdtsAt p^rvi] 21st
ne^AUaTL BTop6ii [dvdtsAt ftAr6i] 22nd
and so on to 29th.
TpnanaTMft [tritsati] 30th
COpOKOBOft [SATAkAVOl] 40th
nflTHjteciiTbifl [p9tid9sati] 60th
mecTHecflTBiti [Jastidesati] 60th
ceMHaecjiTMH [saihidesati] 70th
BOCbMHAecHTBiii [vAsihidasdti] 80th
aeBHH6cTLiii [davanosti] 90th
c6Ti.m [soti] 100th
CTO c6poKi> HjiTbift [sto sorAk pati] 146th
Notice in the last example that, as in Enghsh, only the last
element has the form of an ordinal.
Vocabulary
M'fecfln'b, a, Bi (eB-b) [ih^sats], month taaxb 3a rpanAny [za grAnitsu], to
liHCbMO, a, a (cMT*) [pismo], letter go abroad, i.e. beyond the frontier
^lyjiOK-b, JiK^, JiKli (oK-b) [tJuMk], dHTb 3a rpaHnneio [grAiiitsaju], to
stocking be abroad
npyr'b np^ra [druk drtigA], each BcpKbHi} [varxom], on horseback (Kt.
other as the top, the upper part)
flpyr'b Ap^ry [druk driigu], to each rfexaxb BepxoM-b [varxom], to ride, to
other be riding
rpaniina, h, h [giAnltsA], frontiery xoAHXb n-femKOM-b [xAdit pajkdm],
boundary to go on foot
TiopbM^, li, -^H (cMb) [turma], Haflxii [iiAlti], to find
prison BaaA'b h Bnepefl-b [vzatifpardt], back-
wards and forwards, to and fro
Hxo Bbi xaKX) nocxyn^exe? [Jto vi tak pAstupd jata]. Why do you act so ?
(Hxo? = Oxqer6?) ./
P^SB-fe OH-b iSxo cn^Jiaji-b? [rdzva on stA sd^tAt], Perhaps he did that? V
138 LESSON XLIV 171
Did he do that ? equivalent to M6>KeT'B-6HTb, OHi. 5to crfjiaJi-L, or simply
Ga^JiaJI-b JIH OHTb ^TO?
Oh-l He xoT'feji'b (}Keji^jn>) OTB-fenaTb, na h T6jibK0 [on na xAt^t (satat)
Atvatja^t, da i t64kA], He did not wish to answer, and that is ally that is the
end of it.
He bcAkiVl xjifeSi. n^meTi., aa BcAviVi er6,'fecT'b [na fsaki xisp
pajat, dA fsaki J9v6 jest], Not everyone grows {ploughs) corn, but everyone
eats it.
JJ,vltA njianeTb, y Maxepn c^parte SojniTt^ [ditd ptatjot, u mdtari
s6rtso bAlit], The child cries, the mother's heart is sore, i.e. whn the child
cries, etc., etc.
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) PasBife OHi. HHKorad He niimeT'L? (2) H noKopno 6jiaro-
api5 ji;65pyK) cxap^xy, KOTdpan MH-fe BHrneTb nyjiKH, ho ona Bce
roBopiiT'b: ne cxdHTb. (3) Kb comaji^Hiio OHb Bb HacTonmee
Bp^MH 'fe^eT'b 3a rpaHiii^y; nejiba^ cnpociiTb ero. (4) Kte> cqacxiio
OH-b ym AOJiro jKHBeTb 3a rpaHiii;eK). (5) PasB-fe Bbi ne 3HaeTe,
HOHeM^ A-feBOHKa njianexb? (6) Mnife CKasaJiH, hto jnoHKa T'fex'b
Sfenbixb Jiiojt^ii yjK6 A6jiro limexb MaTb, ho ne MoiKexb HattxA en.
(7) Hxo OHH ^myxb cBoero oxua? (8) H ne mejiaio 5xoro CKa3axb,
aa H xojibKO. (9) Mn-fe homhhxch, hxo moh cecxpbi npittn^xb cioji;^
cero^HH. (10) Hxo OH-fe Bce x6ji;HXb B3a^b h Bnepefl-b? (11)
H-fecKOJibKO Jiioa^ii nojiaraioxb, qxo ym oxBesji^ Bauiero apyra bi.
TiopbM;^. (12) H He Mor^ BaMi noKasaxb naiunxb HOBMXb KapxHHb.
B. Translate into Russian :
(1) Perhaps you did not know for whom the countr3rwoman was knitting
stockings. (2) What sort of stockings does she knit ? (3) I think she does
not knit stockings at all. (4) They write letters to each other. (5) They are
riding to-day in the forest. (6) I usually go to the town on foot. (7) I
cannot send them all ; neither can they [they also cannot do it]. (8) Why
are they weeping ? (9) Whose letters was she carrying ? (10) What are you
writing about and to whom ? (11) Surely you have known that for long ?
(12) They told me he was walking to and fro in the garden. (13) He is at
the present moment riding along the street. (14) Why can they not relate
that story to you ? (15) I suppose they do not wish to, that is all. (16)
The 25th day of this month is Sunday. (17) I was talking of the 37th week
of the year. (18) A great many, too many, wealthy Russians live abroad.
1 With a personal subject this verb Soji-ixi. belongs to I A,
172-174 LESSON XLV 139
LESSON XLV
Genitive Plural of Neuter Nouns
172. Nouns in -o have genitive plural in -t, e.g.
Ji'feTO, Ji'fex'B [istA, let], yeaff summer.
As was explained in Par. 153 it is often necessary to insert o
or e, e.g.
okh6, 6kohi [Akno, 6kAn], window.
Kp6cJio, Kp^ceji-B [kr^stA, kf^set], arm-chair.
173. Nouns in -e preceded by a consonant have -eft, e.g.
M6pe, Mop6ft [more, mAr6i], sea.
Nouns in -ie take -ift, e.g.
ajii^Hie, BAaHiii [zddnja, zdani], building.
174. The genitive plural of aU neuter nouns is either indicated
in the vocabulary or accounted for in Par. 172.
Vocabulary
HSB'ifecTHbifi [izvss(t)ni], certain, yibTHBifi [ujutni], comfortable, cosy
Tmown, well-known BBicoTa, ii, bbic6ti^i [visAtd], height
HaJieKift [dAi6ki], distant
Exercise
on the Declension of Nouns of all Genders
Translate :
The colour of the blue seas, how many distant places, a lot of wooden
arm-chairs, the height of those tall buildings, a few pretty villages, for the
splendid houses, towards the angry men, in a certain place, to [into] a remote
village, of the simple pictures, from [OT^] other friends, from [cl] the long
tables, from [nsi.] a distant government, a few difficult things, a number of
'large pails of [with] water, too little good rye, about the bad weather, he
does not know these enormous buildings, he does not know these rich land-
owners, of your gold rings, so many pleasant rooms, about [o or npo] the
large estates, in a numerous family, the larger part of the dark forest, the
majority of the Russian peasants, in my cosy bed-room, in their splendid
dining-room, on to the green meadow, in front of their new red house, the
angry lion's tail, in that beautiful neighbourhood, on the blue walls, under
the wooden chairs; 6 brothers,^ 13 wooden chairs,^ 8 sons,^ 18 friends,^
31 chairs, 86 years, 804 people.
1 See Par. 77 (9).
140
LESSON XLVI
174
LESSON XLVI
Revision
toXLV.
Verbs of all the types discussed in Lessons XXXII
Vocabulary
n^aymKa,^ h, h (cKt) [deduJkA],
grandfather
6aTK)mKa ^ [batujkA], father
MaxyiUKa ^ [matuJkA], mother
can6n>, 4, ti (-l) [sAp6k], booty foot-
gear
K6jKa, H, H [k65A], leather
noc^Aa, H {sing, collective) [pAstidA],
vessels, utensils
M66ejib, H [rh^h^i], furniture
MCT^Jib, H, H [m9t6^i], snow-storm
n^qb, H, H (ett) [p6^tj], stove
npoBa, % {neut, plur.) [drAva],
wood fuel
H'^TH {an irregular neuter noun, Par.
229) [d6ti], children
B3p6cjibiii [vzrosti], grown up
Apyr-L CL Hp^roMt [druk sdrdgAm],
with on. another
^TO npocTO [stA pr6stA], that is
simple
^TO yibTHO [stA ujiitnA], that is cosy
6biBaTb I A [bivd^t], to be usually the
case, to be customary, to happen
saHHMaxbCfl I A [zAnimd^tsA], to
busy oneself, to be engaged
TCMH-feTb I A [tamn^^t], to grow
dark
paacKasbiBaxb I A [rAsskdzivAt],
to be relating {stories)
noHHHjiTb I A [pAtJind^t], to re-
pair
ToniiTb (jiib, 6nHmb) [tApit], to
heat
BaxonjiflTb I A [zAtApld^t], to heat,
make up fire
npOBOAHTb (>K^, OAHUIb) [piAVA-
dit], to spend {time)
poBHO [roviiA], exactly
OAH^KOKT. [AdndkAj], however
HTTii cnaxb [iti spa^t], to go to bed
np^JK^e Bcero [pr^sda fsavo], before
all, i.e. first of all
OHa XOHCXX. (Par. 222), she wishes
Exercises
A. Paying attention to the accentuation of each word, read aloud
and translate the following verb forms :
OHH xodujiu, OHa HCCJia, mh npsuiu, bh n^exe, xbi ^Mcueemh, oH-fe
ruiaHymh, h npuHadjieotcy , ohh BomjiH, ona ebemh, Bbi jkhbcxc, h
cjiyoicy, OHT) depofcumh, h xomy, Bbi MO>Kexe, mh Sy^eM-b cudrhmb,
ynumecb, eudmnib, cmounvb {two words), cmoumb, cmoRirib, cmpoumh,
npHACxTb, MorjiH, nucajia, ona mKertih, mm neceM'b, bh omKphieaeme,
ona npnuijia, h CMompw, lubjomh, cmeim, cmapacMCH, npuzomoe/isiemh,
/iiodumb, jiwdumb, h cnmy, ohh cAbiuiamb,
^ Diminutives in frequent use instead of the more formal H'feH'B, oT^n-b, MaTb.
174 LESSON XLVI 141
B. Give tlie infinitive and the 1st singular, 2nd singular, 3rd plural
of the past, present, future tenses of the verbs printed in
italics in Ex. A.
C. Translate :
(1) Mh JKHBCMt B-L M^JICHLKOtt HSS-fe BT* yfes^-fe BCkMli HSB-fecTHOfi
jiajicKoii ry66pHiH. (2) SnMott oqenb ^acTO y nact SbiBaeT-b nypnafl
noroAa. (3) IIo^TOMy mm HHora He MOH^eM-B ryjiaxb bt. Ji-fec^
[or no Ji-fecy]. (4) Gero^HH cn-fer-b HACT'b. (5) Ha jiBop^ cepaHxafl
MCT^jib H HCJibSfl BbiiiTH ik3T> ffOMy. (6) Mofl MJiaflmaH cecTp^
njiancT-b h xoqex'b snaxb, qxo naiM-b A'fejiaTb h o ^ewh roBopHXb.
(7) Oah^kojkx. Bce 5xo dneuh npocxo. (8) TaK-b KaKX. yjKe pano
xeMHibexx>, 3a>KHr^K)xx> jiaMny bx> xpn ^aca. (9) Ho np^JK^e Bcer6
Mbi 3axonjiiieMX> ne^b; ne^b x6nflxx> (HpoBaMH). (10) M^jiCHbKifl
A-fexH, KOxopbiH He oji>KHii pa66xaxb, y>Ke c^jih na cxyjibH Bosji-fe
HCH. *(11) OhH HHXaK)Xl> KHiirH, Hrpdl0XX> Ap^rX> CX> npyTOMT>, HJIH
pa3CKa3biBaK)xx> j;pyrx> ap^ry CKa3KH h 6^chh. (12) B-b h36^
nplHXHO H yibxHO. (13) JK^HnjHHbi npHroxoBJiiiioxx> K^manbe.
(14) B^qepoMx. Mbi nbCMX. naniKy naio poBHO bx> ccMb qac6Bx>; nox6MT>
Moft MJianmiii 6paxx, jiojkhxch cnaxb. (15) Ho BspocjibiMX. n6cji'fe
fmnna. eme AOJiro h^jkho paSoxaxb. (16) MaxyniKa h 6a6ymKa
XKyxx>, npflA^xx>, BHJKyxx> HyjiKii, nibioxx> njiaxbH. (17) A CaxiouiKa
mbexx> canorii h3x> kojkh, i^jih noHHHiiexx> noc^^ay h MeSejib.
D. Rewrite Ex. C, 1-9, 11-17, in the past and future.
E. BonpocLi :
(1) Fa'fe roBop^imiii H<HBexx>? (2) Hxo 6biBaexx> qacxo y !Sxhxx>
jiiOA^tt 3HM6ft? (3) IloqeM]^ hmx> Hejib3H ryjiaxb na ABop-fe?
(4) KaKafl cero^HH nor6aa? (5) IloHCMy^ ne M6ryxx> bijhxh ii3x>
HOMy? (6) Hxo xo^exx. snaxb MJia^maH cecxpa? (7) Tp^^HO jih 5xo
CKa3^xb? (8) Bx> KOx6poMX> ^ac^ 3a>KHraioxx> Jiaiwny? (9) rioHCM^?
(10) H'feMx> x6nHXX> neqb? (11) Ky^a yjKe c^jih a^xh? (12) KaKiiMX>
66pa30MX. OHi^ npoBOAHXx. bp^mh ji;o fmvLUSi'7 (13) KaKX> 6biB^exx>
Bx, H36'fe? (14) B-b Kox6poMx> nsLCf nbioxx> naniKy Haio? (15) Korfl^
H^xx> cnaxb cerojiHfl? (16) H-feMX. 3aHHMaioxcH JK^nmnHbi h
MyH^HHHM nocji-fe ;^mHHa?
F. Translate into Russian :
(1) I was told that this man's two sons lived in the little village beyond
the river, but at the present time they live, I am told, in that great house
that you see before you. (2) Surely you sometimes have good weather
in this district. (3) Do you know what problem they are solving now ?
142 LESSON XLVII 176-176
(4) I suppose their father has been carried away, that is why they are crying.
(5) Perhaps they did not tell you that they went upstairs and entered the
large dining-room, where the old lady was sitting. She was sewing or knitting.
(6) What's to be done now ? (7) What is he to do ? He does not know
how to work. (8) I thought that the stove used to stand near the windows,
but there it is standing behind the door. (9) I was lying on one bed and he
lay down on the other. (10) He is sitting there now. (11) What are they
talking about ? (12) We told each other that that was not the truth. (13)
Why did most of these poor people always drink tea ? (14) They do not drink
tea at all ; they drink water or milk or bad wine or beer. (16) She remembers
that the EngUsh lady gave him that little gold ring. (16) I do not like the
colour of those enormous buildings at all. (17) Surely she does not want to
go to school yet ? (18) Really I cannot say whether boots are always made
of good leather. (19) You are obliged to remain at home after dinner.
(20) Did you never think of the lesson that you were to learn by heart ?
(21) Usually we go home at five o'clock ; to-day we are going home at
four and after Sunday we shall always go home at three o'clock.
LESSON XLVII
The Numerals
175. The declension of ordinal numerals was indicated in Par. 167.
If an ordinal numeral be compound, only the last element is
declined, e.g. in " the 674tli verst,"
mecTbCOTi. ceMbAecHTT) HCTBepTaa BcpcT^ [J9s(t)s6t s^mdasat
tJ9tv6rtAJa versta]
only qeTBepxafl is declined along with the noun.
176. The declension of cardinal numbers :
(a) Numbers ending in b are declined like regular feminine
nouns in b ; in 5-10, 20, 30 the accent is on the termination, e.g.
naxb, HHTH [ptft, pati].
(6) copoKt, nesHHOCTO, CTO, TbiCflHa, MHJiJii6HT> are declined
like nouns of corresponding form. But when copoKb, aeBHHOCXO,
CTO stand before other numerals the oblique cases all end in a,
e.g. copoKa nflXH, of 45 ; directly before nouns this also happens ;
the prepositional ends in ife or a. The genitive plural of cto
is COT'L.
177-179 LESSON XLVII 143
(c) The declension of ojiuuh was indicated in Par. 107 (6).
The plural means the only^ alonej the ones.
(d) nom. 66a (m. and n.) [obA], 66"^ (/.) [oba], both, has
gen. o66hxl [Aboix], o6ivLXh [Abeix], etc., etc.
65a, like PiBa, takes the noun in the genitive singular. 66'fe
takes the nominative plural.
(e) nom. JiBa (w. and n.), HB'fe (/.)
gen. Hsyxii [dvux]
dat. SByM-B [dvum]
ace. nom. or gen.
instr. aeyMH [dvuriia]
prep. neyx'B [dvux]
(/) nom. xpH [tri] qextipe [tjafire]
gen. Tpex-L [trox] qcTHpext [tjefirox]
dat. TpcMT* [trom] qexBipcMTj [tjatirom]
ace. Tpn or xpexx. nom. or gen.
instr. xpcMii [treihd] qexfcipbMfl [tjatiriha]
prep, xpexi [trox] lexbipext [tjatirox]
177. In numerals of two or more digits each figure is separately
decHned, if the number be cardinal, e.g.
nom. xpiicxa [tfistA], 300 mecxbXbiCHq'B [|9s(t)tis9tJ], 6000
gen. xpex-LCOX-b [troxsot] mecxHXbiCHHb [jastitisatj]
dat. xpcM'bCxaM'b [tromstam], etc. mecxHXi^iCHqaM'b[j8stitisatJam],eto.
Fortunately, however, numerals occur with great frequency in
the nominative or accusative.
178. It has already (Par. 138) been pointed out that after the
word ojuhhTj in the singular, even when this is merely the last element
in a compound numeral, the noun is singular, e.g.
cxo ACBAHdcxo OAHa JKenmnna, 191 women.
179. JIBS, and qcTLipe {two pairs) were dual forms. The dual of
masculine nouns happened to be identical with the genitive singular,
and when the dual fell into disuse the mechanical rule became
universal that after 2 and 4, even when they are merely the last
element in a compound numeral, the genitive singular of the noun
144 LESSON XLVII 180-181
must be used. Tpn came to liave the same effect by analogy. In
any phrase involving one of these three words, i.e. where the con-
struction normally requires nominative or accusative, though the
noun is in the genitive singular, the adjective is nominative plural
or genitive plural, e.g.
jtB^auaTB Ba 6ojihm.uxT> (6ojibmie) a6Ma [dvatsAt dva bAiijix
(bA^ijije) domA], 22 large houses.
180. After other numerals from 5 upwards, when the numeral
is nominative or accusative, both noun and adjective are in the
genitive plural, e.g. xpiiauaTb mixb 6ojii>mHxi> aom6bi. [tfitsAt], thirty-
five great houses.
Whatever be the cardinal numeral used in a phrase, if the
phrase be nominative or accusative, the numeral determines the
form of the noun ; if the phrase be in any other case, the numeral
must agree with the noun.
181. (a) The date of the month is expressed by using the
genitive {^ of the tenth of the month '), or nominative neuter.
HCCHTaro Man, cer6 (M'fecHua) [dasatAVA maJA, sevo (rii^satsA)], on the
tenth of May, of this month, curt.
Cer6Hfl neciiToe (qHCJi6) iibjin [s9v6dnA dasatAJa ijiilA], To-day is the
10th of July.
(b) The date of the year is expressed in two ways :
(1) ' 1892 A.D.' is
B-b TiicHqa B0ceMLc6Ti> neBHHocTO BTopbHi. Tonf no POJK-
necTB'fe {no = after takes the prep.) XpHCTOBOM'b [xrist6vAm] {after the
birth of Christ).
(2) ' the 22nd June 1892 ' is
SBaAuaxb BTop6ro libHH TMCHHa BOceMbcoT-b aeBHH6cT0 BTop6ro
r6na.
(3) 'In June^ is B-b iibni^ [vijiina].
(4) * On Monday ' is B-b nonea^JibHHK'b [fpAnadd^lriik].
* On Mondays," * of a Monday," is no nonen'fejibHHKaM'b [pApAnad^^l
riikAm].
(c) The time of day is expressed thus :
MHH^xa [ihintitA], minute.
qacb [tjas], one o" clock {=hour).
flBa, xpn, qexijpe nacd [tjAsd], two, three, four o'clock.
nflXb, mecxb etc. HacoBT) [tJAsof], five, six etc. o'clock.
182-184 LESSON XLVII 145
q^TBepxb qcTBcpTaro [tj^tvart], 3*16 {a quarter ofihefcmrth hour).
nojiOBHHa HeTBepxaro [pAtAvuiA], 3-30 {half of the f mirth hour).
Sea-L H^TBcpxH Hexiiipe [bas tj^tverti], 3-45 {four, less a qimrter).
A^CHXb MHH^xi> nnxaro [d^sat riiinut patAVA], 4-10 {ten minutes of the
fifth hour).
Qes-b A^CflXH unufTb nflXb [d^sati], 4*50 {five less ten minutes).
B'b nflXb ^lacdB-L, at five o'clock
6kojio nflxii qacoBt [6kAtA], about five o'clock (genitive).
182. To indicate an approximate number the numeral is placed
after the noun, e.g.
HBaartaxb py5ji6H [dvatsAt rubMi], twenty roubles.
but py6ji6fi flBajmaxb [ruble! dvdtsAt], about twenty roubles.
rdaa Hexbipe [g6dA tjatira], about four years.
183. To express the distributive form {at the rate of, so many
each) no is used with the accusative of HBa, xpn, HexBipe, but with
the dative of any other numeral, e.g.
Oh-l viwh AajiX) no Ba pySjiii [on jim dat pA dva rubld], He gave them
two roubles each.
no oaH6ft Kon^liK'fe [pA Adnoi kAp6ika], one copeck each.
Ilo xpHHaauaxH [pA trinatsAti], at the rate of thirteen.
184. Ordinal numbers that have not yet been given are :
HByx-bC^Xbift [dvuxs6ti] 200th
xpex-LCOXbifi [tfoxs6ti] 300th
Hexbipex-LcdxHii [tjatiroxsoti] 400th
nHXHCOXbiii [patisoti] 500th
mecxHCOXbift [Jastisoti] 600th
ccMHCOXbiH [samisoti] 700th
B0CbMHc6xbm [vAsmis6ti] 800th
aeBHXHCOXbitt [davatisoti] 900th
XbiCfl^Hbiii [tisatjni] 1000th
HByxt xi^icfl^Hbiii [dvux tisatjm] 2000th
cxoxbiCHHHbiii [stAtisatJni] 100,000th
MHJiJii6HHHH [mii6ni] 1,000,000th
146 LESSON XLVIII 185
Vocabulary
BOCK^ec^Hhe, Sunday (Voc.XXXIV) MapTT>, a, bi [mart], March
noHeH'fejibHHK'b, Monday (Voc. anp-fejib, h [Apf6^i], April
XXXIV) Maft, fl, H [mai], May
BxdpHHK'b, a {second {working -)day) iibnb, h, h [ijii^n], June
[ft6rnik], Tuesday iiOJib, h, h [ijii^i], July
cpeaa, li {middle {of week)) [sradd], ^Brycx'b, a, bi [avgust], August
Wednesday cenx^Spb, A, h [sontabr], September
HBTB^pr-b, a [tjatvsrk], Thursday OKTHSpb, h, h [Aktabf], October
ni^THHita, bi [patnitsA], Friday H0H6pb, a, h [iiAJabr], November
cy666Ta, bi {sabbath) [subotA], ^CKaCpb, A, w. [dekdbr], December
poUHTbCfl [rAditsA], to be bom
HHB^pb, fl, H [janva^r], January CKOHqaTbCfl [skAntja^tsA], to die, lit.
^eBpaJib, A, II [favra^i], February to come to an end, to decease
Exercise
Translate into Russian :
(1) The woman's rich friend died on the 29th of January, 1852. (2) They
were born on the 10th of May 1903. (3) To-day is the 9th of October. (4)
How much did she give you ? She gave us only ten copecks each. (5) In
June we sometimes have good weather, seldom hot weather. (6) The third
day of the week is Tuesday. (7) There are 365 days in the year. (8) Twenty
men went into this Uttle room ; but the twenty-first man they did not
admit. (9) The landed proprietor who lives near [in the neighbourhood of]
the town has four beautiful white horses and about twenty hunting-dogs.
(10) The twenty-fifth of December is Christmas. (11) They came here early
in the morning of the 23rd of this month. (12) We saw about 40 soldiers
who were walking along this wide street. (13) 546 men, the 546th man.
(14) On Fridays we always go to church. (15) 257,649 roubles.
LESSON XLVIII
185. Certain verbs in frequent use require tlie complement in
the instrumental case. Such verbs are :
6biTb [bit], to be ^
cxaxb [sta^t], to become ^
cjt'fejTaTbCfl I A [sdstAtsA], to become ^
cjiyjKHTb (^, ^Hinb), to serve as
3BaTb (30B^, euib) [zvQ^t], to Call, to name
^ Especially when a merely temporary quaUty or change of state is expressed.
See note to Par. 69.
186
LESSON XLVIII
147
HasHBaTbCH I A [nAziva^tsA], to he called
c^HTaTb I A [stjita^t], to reckoriy to consider
no^HxaTbCH I A [pAtJita^tsA], to be regarded as
BJia^'i^Tb I A [vtAd6^t], to dominate^ to rule over
Examples :
Owh CTaji-b doraTbiMT. KyniidM-b [on stat bAgatim kupts6m], He
became {a) rich merchant.
pT3L KdMHaxa CM^ c^frnvLTTy cnaJibHCK) [stA k6mnAtA jamti sttisit
spd^naju], This room serves him as a bedroom.
Ero aoB^^Tt HnKOJiaeM'b [J9v6 zAviit nikAtdjam], They call him
Nicholas {by the name of N.)
5to h CHHxdio Hy^jKHbiM-b [stA JQ stjitdju niisnim], / consider that
186. caMbiii [sami] preceding an adjective gives to it the force
of a superlative. This word itself means self, same ; prefixed to an
adjective it means extremely , in the highest degree, e.g.
cksLhiVi. 6ojibm6ft [sdmi bA^ijoI], the largest.
Vocabulary
KysH^iXT), a, bi [kuznsts], smith
B'feK'b, Si, u or a. [vsk], age, century
Ha CBoeM-b B-feK^ [na svAJom vekii],
in his {life)time
itapcTBO, a, a [tsdrstvA], kingdom,
empire
i^apcTBOBaxb [tsdrstvAVAt] (^apcT-
Byio, emb [tsdrstvuju]) (see
Par. 225), to reign
rocyHapb, a, h [gAsudd^r], the
Ruler, Lord, Emperor
HMnepaTop-b, a, bi [impordtAi],
Emperor
rocya. HMnep. [gAsudd^r impord-
tAr], His Majesty the Emperor
rocyflapcTBO, a, a [gAsuddrstvA],
state, empire
Kopoji^Ba, bi, bi [kAFAisvA], queen
BJiaa-fenie, h, h (Ih) [vtAd^nje],
territory, possession
BJiaA-fexb I A [vtAd^^t], to rule over.
cfeBcpi), a [ssver], north
ibr-b, a [jug, juk], south
BOCTOK'b, a [vAstok], east
sanaa'b, a [zdpAt], west
npHTOKTi, a, H [prit6k], a tributary
BcpSjiiofl'b, a, bi [verbiiit], camel
CM^pxb, H, H (6tt) [sriiert], death
Bcpcxa, ii, -H [varstd], verst (1067
metres)
pa66xa, bi, bi [rAbotA], work
nycxbiHH, H, H [pustinA], wilderness,
desert
oaepo, a, ^'a [oi^erA], lake,
noKOHHbili [pAkoIni], deceased, late
paSoHlft [rAbotji], working, work-
man
npasffHHHHbift [prdz(d)nitjni], holi-
day, feast{-day) (adj.)
noji63HbiH [pAiszni], useful
XHH^xbCfl {f, ^enib) [UnuitsA], to
stretch, extend
Hoxoniixb (}K^, 6Hmb) [dAXAdit],
to reach
Bnajt^xb I A [fpAdd^t], to fall into
148 LESSON XLVIII 186
. , , ^ Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) B-L mecTH^HuaTOM'L B-feKife h6 6hjio bi> BJiaa-feHiH Poccfn hh
OHHor6 M6pH, HO xenepb ona BJianibeT-b h^ckojibkhmh Mop;iMH.
(2) B-B npdmjiOMt rojt,f iiapcxBOBaji-Lrocyaapb MMnepaxop'L HnKOJiaii
BTopoli; OHt cxaji-b (cA-fejiajicfl) HMnepaxopoMT, nocji'fe (or no vdth
prep.) CMepxH noKofinaro AjieKcan^pa xpexbaro. Bi. nacxojimee
Bp^MH y>K6 ne napcxByexT>; xenepb n-fex-b HMnepaxopa. (3) P^ccKoe
napcxBO, KOx6poe xflnexcn cx> B0cx6Ka na 3anaHx> na xpHnaanaxb
XHCfl^'b BepcxT), a cb cfesepa na lor-b na qexbipe xbicnqn Bepcx-b,
pyccKie cHnxaioxx, caMbiM-b 6ojibmHMx> rocyaapcxBOM-b na CB-fex-fe.
(4) HexBepxbift aenb neaibjiH nasbiBaexcH cpeaoio, a mecxoii nenb
nnxHHna. (5) Illecxb paSoqnx'b h6h jnban paSdxaioxi, n'fejibifi
nenb, a Bb BOCKpec^Hbe h B-b apyrie npasAHHqnbie hhh Bcfe oxjtbixaioxb
ox-b paGox-b H xonflx-b Bb nepKOBb. (6) B-b rojif AB-fenaanaxb
M^CHncB-b, a ^BifeHaAnaxbiii M'fecHnb soB^x-b jj,eKa6pewb. (7) P-feKa,
KOXopaH He nox6flHxx> ao Mopn iijih jio 63epa, a BnaA^exi. bt, apyryio
P'^K^, HasbiBaexcH npHXOKOMb. (8) Bep6jiiox> onenb noji^snoe
WHBOXHoe, xaK-b KaK-b MOJKexb npoiixii, q6pe3x> nycxbinio, ox-b cxa
BOCbMHJXeCHXH ^B^^XCOXT* BepCX-b B^ HefltjIK). (9) On-b pOAHJICfl
B-b xi^iCHqa BOceMbcdx-b SBaanaxb BxopoM-b rojif, a CKon^ajicfl (^Mep*b)
xpiAanaxb n^pBaro MaH xbiCHHa BOceMbcoxi. aeBHH6cxo niixaro rd^a.
B. BonpocLi: ^^ ^?
(1) Kor^a Poccifl ne BJia^-fejia hh oaneiso M6p? (2) Kxo ^
napcxBOBajiT. B-b Anrjiin bx> xi^icnqa BoceMbCoxx. AeBflnocxo naxoMX*
roa;^? (3) Kxo ^ cxajib KopojieM-b no CMepxn 5xoti Kopoji^Bbi?
Koxopoe napexBO anrjinqane cqnxaiox'b c^MbiMb dojibniHM'b na
CB-fex-fe? (4) GKOJibKO padoqnx-b an^ft B-b nefl-feji^? (6) KaKX> /j
30Byxb n6pBbiii HeHb He^^Jin? A xpexiii j];eHb? (6) KaKan pi^K^
Ha3biBaexcH npnxoKOMb? (7) rioHCM^ BepSjiib^b cqaxaexcH nojies-
HMMX. JKHB6XHbIMb? (8) KOFA^ Bbl pOffllJIHCfl?
C. Translate into Russian :
(1) I have been told that the present landowner is the son of a smith
who lived in this district forty-five years ago. (2) The smallest wooden house
in the village served his father as a dwelling at that time. (3) But a few years
after the death of his wife the man went abroad. (4) He lived in one of [031.]
the largest towns in England. (5) There he became a merchant and was
soon regarded as a very rich man. (6) The youngest son, who was only ten i
years old at the time of his mother's death, was boirn on the 24th of February
1885. (7) The father died abroad ten years ago and the second son, who had
always wished to live in Russia, bought this little estate. (8) He has been
Uving here for five years now [pres. tense with ym].
^^ BHKT6pifl. ^ Bfly&pa-b.
187-189 LESSON XLIX 149
LESSON XLIX
187. Most of the adjectives that have occurred have been used
attributively, i.e. they quaUfy nouns. But there is also a shorter
form of the adjective ending in -t, -a, -o, -u (or -h), which, in theory,
ought to be used when the adjective is predicative.
y Hero 6ojii>h6h cbih'l, He has a sick son, shows the attributive
form.
Ero CbiHTi SojieHTj [jovo sin bolen], His son is ill, shows the
predicative form.
This form is obtained from the attributive by substituting in the
mascuUne t for hh, oft, by dropping, in the feminine and neuter,
the final fl and e, and, in the plural, the final e or fl, e.g.
cjiaSbift, cji^SaH, cji^5oe, cjidSbie, hh
cJiaS'L, cjia6a, cji^So, cji^Sbi [stab (p), stAba, stabA, stabi], weak.
In fact the predicative adjective in the singular and often in the
plural has the endings already associated with the past tense of the
verb and with the noun.
188. The word pa^Tj [rod (t)], meaning glad, has no longer form.
Adjectives in ckIh Hke pyccKift, and adjectives indicating materials
and ending in hhhhh, Hke AepeBHHHtiH, are without the predicative
form. Most other quahfying adjectives have this form. As it is
found very frequently in current speech and in Hterature, the pre-
dicative form must be known, but both in writing and speaking the
attributive form takes its place to a very great extent. Outside
popular poetry one rarely meets the predicative form in the obHque
cases.
189. The neuter singular is of very frequent occurrence :
(1) Used as an adverb, e.g.
xopom6 [xArAjo], loell.
nji6xo [pt6xA], badly.
150 LESSON XLIX 190-191
(2) As the complement of the verb to he expressed or mider-
stood in phrases like
MH'fe H^JKHO, HcnpiHTHO, JierK6, Tp^H0 5to A'fejiaTB [mne nu5nA,
naprijatnA, l9xk6, triidiiA stA detAt], It is necessary ^ unpleasant^ easy, difficult,
for me to do this. (Cf. Par. 116.)
190. It will be observed in the lists given in Par. 237 that o or e is
sometimes inserted in the mascuUne to faciUtate pronunciation ; e.g.
KopoTKifl : Kop6TOK'L [kArotAk], KopoTKa, etc., sTiort,
TTpfjlKuPL : Tp^ACHt [truden], Tpyana, etc., difficult,
but to give a rule is hardly practicable, for combinations of consonants
that at first seem almost impossible to the foreigner are quite easily
negotiated by the Russian, e.g.
MepxBjb [mortf], dead.
191. The accentuation of the attributive adjective is a very
simple matter : the accent remains throughout on the syllable
corresponding to the accented syllable of the nominative singular
mascuhne. In the predicative form the accent can only be mastered
by continual observation. Paragraph 237 gives the predicative
forms of most of the adjectives that are used in this book.
Vocabulary
r'pn6'b, ^,j^i[gH^,gviha'\, mushroom rpoaa (in ace. sing, and nom. plur.
Tp^Cb, a, LI (oBt) [trus], coward stem accented) [grAza], thunder-
SbiKT), a, H [bik], ox storm
necB, nca, bi [pos], dog miksHh, h [31211], life
r^Cb, H, H [gns], goose KOCTb, h, h (6h) [kost], bone
mK^n-b, a, i>i [Jkap] (ei. musiuf Hano [nadA], it is necessary
[fJkApti]), cupboard jk^jiko [3dtkA], it is a pity
rpdwh, a, bi (oB'b) [grom], thunder BJi'feBTb [vlest] (BJi'fes'b, BJi-fesjia ;
jiOAKa, H, H (oK-b) [totkA], boat fut. -"feay, -emb), to climb
JianKa,H,H (oK-b) [tdpkA],/oo<,^a!z; exaxb [sta^t], to become, get; to set
(diminutive) about
H He 3H^io, npomeji-b jih ohi. [ja na znaju, prAjot ii on], I do not
know whether he has passed, it is past.
epasy no ABa, AB'fe [srazu pAdva, dvs], tivo at a time.
The following simple examples are taken chiefly from Tolstoi's
AsSyKa. Any adjectives not yet given in the vocabularies will
be found in the Hst in Par. 237 and in the general vocabulary.
191 LESSON XLIX 151
Exercises
Translate :
A.
(1) A-fea-b SbiJit CTapi. H cjiaSi., a BHyKi. MJiaA-L^H rjiyn-B. (2)
GTajit HaniT. cajHT. rojit. (3) Cxaji-B nam-b neci> njioxi,. (4) Majib-
qHK-b CbiJiTb pafl-b. (5) FpHS-b 6hmT> rnnji'b. (6) Owb SbiJi-b Tpy-
cjiHB'b. (7) Gxaji-b 6uK'b aoji-b. (8) Owb n6cjiife Toro He fl6jiro
SbijiT. rnHB-b.
B.
(1) Hrp^ SbiJia njiox^. (2) Go6aKa 6biji^ yMHa. (3) HsSd 6biJi^
He Majia. (4) Ba6a 6biJi^ pa^a. (5) Bo^a SbiJia ^Hcxa. (6)
CTajia JioHKa nojina Bomi. (7) Jlnca ijia cpaay no rb^ ADbiuin, n
CT^jia jKHpna. (8) Eh >KH3Hb Tpy^n^. (9) Kp^nKd KaK-b Kocxb.
r C.
(1) Ha Boa-fe 61J1J10 TSikjiKO. (2) Ha Bop^ Sijjio HiicTo. (3)
Em^ cxajio CMibmno {he felt inclined to laugh). (4) Mwh JierK6
5x0 a^Jiaxb. (5) BbiJia rpoaa h rpoM-b.^ MajibHHK-b dHJi-b
xpycb. On-b BJi-fes-b b-l niKani). TaMi. 6iiiJio cm^ xeMHo h a^mno.
Em^ h6 6biJio cjibimno, npouiJia jih rposa. (6) TnibaAO ym6 Si^iJio
nycxo. (7) Bee, hxo Haji;o. (8) Ab6ph Si^ijih x-fecHbi. (9) JIanKH
ryceii 6i^ijih BHflHbi. (10) Majib^HKH cxajin mokph. (11) >KaJiKO
61J1J10.
Proverbial Sayings
X^AO XOM^, Kxo Ao6pa ne n-fejiaex-b hhkom^ [xMa tAmd, xto dAbrd
na detAJat nikAmu], Woe he to him who does good to no man.
}KH3Hb Aana na aoGpbm oi'fejia [sizfi dAnd iia dobrija data], Life was
given us for good deeds.
(j^aHT} is the predicative form of JtaHHbiii, passive past participle of
juaxb. Such participles in anx*, ana, ano, anbi are very frequent.)
CKyqeH-b nenb js,o B^^epa, kojiii A'fejiaxb H^qero [skiitjan de^ii dA
v^tJarA, kAii dstAt n^tJavA], The day is long {weary, tedious) till evening, if
there is nothing to do.
y Bora Bcfe p^BHbi [u bogA fss ravm (rAvni)], Before Ood all are
egual.
. 1 =m6jioai. ^ rpoMT, rpewcATb [grom gtonilt], the thunder rolls.
152 LESSON L 192-195
LESSON L
The Compaeative Degree
192. Tlie predicative form of the comparative degree of the
adjective is formed by changing tift, ift, or oii into "fee. The short
form 'feii is frequently used in poetry and popular speech. In most
adjectives of more than two syllables the accent remains where
it falls in the positive ; in words of only two syllables in the positive,
the predicative comparative is accented on the ife.
Examples :
npflM6tt, npHM'fee [pr9m6i, pram6J9], upright, straight
npiiiTHbitt, npiiiTH'fee [prijatni, prijdtiiaja], pleasant
KpacHBbitt, Kpaci^B'fee [krAsivi, krAsivajo], beautiful
^MHBitt, yMHibe [umni, umn^ja], intelligent
MOKpLift, MOKpie [mokri, mAkr^jo], damp, wet
193. A number of adjectives, mostly in frequent use, have the
predicative comparative in -e. Many of these also modify the final
consonant of the stem. A Hst of some of the forms in frequent use
is given in Par. 238.
194. Than following the comparative is translated by H'feM'b
[tSem] or He>KeJiH [nesali], e.g.
Gbm-b j^MH-fee H-feMTj n6HKa [sin umn^ja tjgm dotJkA], Th son is more
intelligent than the daughter.
JKeji-feao nojiesHifee q'feM'b cepe6p6 [^bUza pA^znaja tjsm sorabro],
Iron is more useful than silver.
M6tt nplHTCjib ji^HUie H-twh A [m6i prijatai tdtja tjsm ja], My friend
is better than I.
Another way of using the comparative is to omit H'feM'b or
HCJKejiH and substitute for the nominative the genitive case. The
three examples might therefore have been written :
GbiH-b yMH-fee HO^KH [dotjki].
JKcji'feao nojiesHifee cepe6pa [sarabrd].
Moii nplHTCJib Ji^^me MCHii.
195. When the comparative is attributive it is formed, as in
EngHsh, by prefixing doji'fee [bolaje], more, to the positive, e.g.
OoJiifee Hoporoii cxyjii) [bdiaja dArAgoI stut], a more expensive, a
dearer, chair.
196-198 LESSON L 153
(a) As in English, a few words have exceptional forms, e.g.
xop6mitt [xAroJi], good Ji^qmift [Mtji], better
xyji6u [xudoi], bad x^^flmitt [xutji], worse
MOJioaoft [mAtAdoi], young MJiaflmift [mtdtji], younger or junior
CTapbifi [stdri], old CTapuiiii [starji], elder or senior
BbicoKiii [visoki], high Biicmifi ^ [viji], higher
HH3Kitt [niski], low Hiianiitt ^ [niji], lower
MaJiMft [mati], little fM^Hbmift [rii^^nji], less or lesser
iMCHbrnofi [m9nj6i], younger, youngest
6oJibm6tt [bA^ijo!], Zarae^ ^, ri^'iir-n
' -^r-i'i-i / Y 663ihUiiVi [ho}lh\ greater
BCJiHKift [velikij, great J l j j> ./
196. A few adjectives have a special form for the attributive
superlative ending in -aHmin, -tlimiH, e.g.
rJiySoKiii, deep rjiydoHaftmlii [gtubAtJdlJi]
npocToii, simple npocT-feiimifi [prAst^iJi]
cjiaSbiH, weak CJiaG-fefimitt [stAb^iJi]
SoraTbiii, rich SoraT-fetiiniii [bAgAt6lJi]
sajieKifi, distant, far ^ajibH-feiiniift [dA4n6lJi]
KopoTKitt, short Kpaxq^fimift [krAtJaIJi]
HdJirifi, kmg nojiJK^iimitt [dAtsaiJi]
Kp-fenKitt, strong Kp-fenHaiimift [kraptjdlji]
These words are absolute superlatives in meaning, as they
correspond to the English very deep, very simple, etc.
197. The relative superlative, the form corresponding to the Eng-
hsh adjective in -est, is expressed in various ways ; the most useful
form is obtained by prefixing caMbifi to the positive (cf. Par. 186).
This superlative is used both attributively and predicatively.
198. The three degrees of comparison of an adjective having
all the forms, attributive and predicative, that have been mentioned,
are therefore as follows :
Attbibutive Form Predicative Form
Positive
Kp-feuKift CTOJI-b CTOJI-b Kp'fenOK'B
Comparative
Sdji-fee Kp-feuKift CTOJi'b ctojit, Kp-fenqe
Superlative
Kp-fenHaHiuifi CTOJi'b A
CaMblft Kp-fenKifi CTOJi'b CTOJi'b C^Mblft Kp-feuKlft ') Qj]>f^
^ These forms are not now so frequent as the regular forms with Sdnie. /
154 LESSON L s 198
Vocabulary
edp-B, a, LI (oBt) [vor], thief paneHbifi [ranani], wounded
CEHH^ix-B, Hi^a [svinets], lead {metal) Hopor6fi, Hop6jKe [dArAg6i,dAr659],
CTOJiilua [stAiitsA], capital {city) dear, dearer
CKapjiaxHHa [skArtAtinA], scarlet- meji^SHLiii [5oiszni], iron (adj.)
fever 6pHTaHCKiH [britanski], British
nepqaxKa, h, h (ok-b) [partJdtkA], HcnancKm [ispdnski], Spanish
glove 3apa6aTbiBaTb [zArAbdtivAt], to earn
Aop6ra [dArogA], road, way BopoBaxb (pyio, feuih) [vArAvdit],
CTpana, ik, -^ti [strAnd], country to steal
npnCbiJib, H, H [pribii], profit, MHt KaJKexcH [mns kdsatsA], it
gain seems to me
rnSejib, h, h [gibai], ruin A'fefiCTBHTejibHO [d8ls(t)vit9inA],
njiomaffb, H, H (6h) [ptoJtJAt], really
place, square 66jibnie Bcero [bo^ija fsavo], more
3HaHie, fl, fl (ift) [zndnja], knowledge than all, most
Gor^TCTBO, a, a [bAgdts(t)vA], nanpoTHB-b {with gen.) [nAprotif],
wealth opposite
Exercises
A. Translate :
(1) HepHoe Kp6cjio, na KOxopoM'b bm chahtc, ropasao KpacHB-fee
^Toro cxyjia. (2) Bijibifi xji'fe6'b ne Bcer^a AopojKe qepnaro. (3)
GaMoe 6ojibm6e saanie bt, nameM-b ropoAife caMan cxapan rtepKOBb,
HO nocji-feaHHfl M^Hbine toh i^^pkbh, KOTopyio bm Biia-fejiH HanpoTHB-b
CBoeii KBapTHpbi B-b cTOjnkixh. (4) yMniiiuiaH yqeHH^a HHKorAa
He xoneT'b oTB-fenaTb, Korji;a ee cnparnHBaex-b ao^paa yHHxejibHHi^a.
Ona yMHa, ho en cxapmiH dpax-b npnjiejKCH'b h ropasao BHHMaxejib-
H-fee en. (5) P;^kh paHeHbix-b 6ifeji'fee q-feM-b KpoBaxn, na Koxopbn/b
OHH jiejKaxTb. (6) HeyjKejiH ne Bcfe SHaioxT,, hxo xojiepa Coji-Be
yjKacHafl Soji-fesHb H-hwh CKapjiaxiina? (7) GaMan xeMHaa KOMHaxa
MH-fe HpaBHXCfl dojibme Bcero. (8) Mn-fe roBopHxi,, mo caMaa cxapan
jKenmnna BHrnex-b caMbie Jiyqmie qyjiKH h nepnaxKH. (9) UoHemf
Sorax-feHinie ^0Mib^:^HKH Bcer^a mejiaiox-b HM'fexb en;e 66jibme scmjih?
(10) Mn-fe KaJKexcH, qxo HacxoHmiii aomtj ixapa BejiHKOJi'fenH'fee ^xoro
rpoMaanaro ABopi^a, Koxopbiii xen6pb expoHX-b. (11) Xopom6, qxo
caMbie xpyjtoJiK)6iiBbie Kpecxbane HHor^a sapaSaxbmaiox'b 66jibme.
(12) Ohh nojiyqaiox-b caMyio SoJibmyio npnGbiJib. (13) npaB^a
CB'fexji'fee cojiHLta. (14) SnaHie Jiyqmee 6oraxcxBO. (15) FIpaBaa
nopojKe 36jioxa. (16) Bop-b Bop^ext He hjih npii6biJiH, a hjih cBo6fi
rii6ejiH.
199-201 LESSON LI 155
B. Translate into Kussian :
(1) In their letter they say that white bread is now dearer than black.
(2) Perhaps your sister is younger than you. (3) In the majority of towns
there are broad streets and narrow streets, and all the streets are narrower
than the squares. (4) The largest village is more distant than your town.
(5) I do not like that white paper that you sent me, it is too thin ; send me
some thicker paper [partitive genit.]. (6) Of course, the railway [iron way] is
shorter than the river. (7) It seems to me that the problem we are solving
to-day is far easier. (8) In our country the evem'ng in summer is generally
hotter than the morning. (9) The Russian language is, in my opinion, much
harder than Spanish. (10) When I was living in that village, they told me
that the old blacksmith was richer than all the hard-working peasants. (11)
We thought that the light was brighter in the other room. (12) I thought
that everybody knew that lead was heavier than iron, and also that iron
was cheaper than lead. (13) I do not know whether the Russian Empire was
really larger than the British Empire, but in the opinion of the Russians their
empire was the largest of all.
LESSON LI
The Aspects of the Verb
199. The Russian verb has no special form for the conditional
mood of other tongues : this is rendered by simply adding the
particle 6bi [bi] to the past tense, e.g.
Oh-l HM-fejiT) 6bi [on iriist bi], He would have.
200. Nor is there any special form for subjunctive or conjunctive :
the past tense introduced by the conjunction ht66h [Jtobi], that,
in order that, does duty for that mood, e.g.
IJapb nocjiajit MHHHCxpa, qT66bi oHt KynHji-L caATb My>KHKa [tsa^r
pAstdt ihinistrA, jtobi on kupit sat mu3ikd]. The czar sent his minister, that
he might buy the peasant^ s garden.
201. In order to express modifications in the meaning of verbs
some languages have elaborate systems of moods and tenses : this
is characteristic of Greek, Latin, and the Romance tongues. Other
languages achieve the same end by the facihty with which they
combine, in an almost endless variety, infinitive and participles
with auxihary and modal auxihary verbs : Enghsh and German
156 LESSON LI 202-204
are two sucli tongues. The Russian verb lias but tbree moods :
infinitive, imperative, indicative ; and of these only the indicative
appears in different tenses ; it has the three tenses that have been
discussed. The Russian verb possesses only to a very Hmited extent
the power of forming compound tenses. Yet, lacking the character-
istic features of both the French and the Enghsh verb, the Russian
verb is one of the subtlest instruments of expression, as the want
of variety in mood and tense is more than compensated for by the
modifications introduced by the use of numerous prefixes and by
transformations of the stem itself.
202. One form of the verb indicates merely that the action was
going on, is going on, or will be going on, without any reference to
its beginning or end, without affording any information as to its
completion. In this form, which is called the imperfective aspect,
the action is thought of only as a duration.
Most, not all, simple verbs, i.e. verbs not compounded with a
prefix, are imperfective. All the verbs under A, in Paragraph 121,
are examples of this aspect, which therefore, in the indicative mood,
has three tenses : past, present, future.
203. Another form of the verb expresses the action from the
point of view of its completion : it indicates that something happened
once and was done with, or that something is about to be begun and
completed. This form of the verb is called the perfective aspect.
All the verbs under B, in Paragraph 122, are examples of this
aspect. Now, as an action cannot at one and the same time be
conceived as perfected and as still going on, this aspect has no
present tense ; it has only two tenses : past and future.
204. For foreigners the chief pecuharity of this perfective aspect
is, that the future tense has exactly the appearance of a present
tense.^ That is to say, all the verbs under B, in Paragraph 122,
have a tense with the inflexions of a present tense and the meaning
of an immediate future. A mistake that must be carefully avoided,
is to form the future of the perfective aspect on the model of the
imperfective future.
^ The verbs given in Par. 160 are examples of this perfective future.
206-206 LESSON LI 157
205. The complete scheme of the verb in the infinitive, indicative,
and imperative, is therefore as follows :
Impebfbotive Aspect Perfective Aspect
Infinitive
HHCdTb, to loritey to he busied with Hannc^Tb, to turite once, to start
writing writing and get it finish^
Indicative Past ^
fl nHC^JiT*, / vrrotey I was writing, h nannc^Ji'L, I wrote once, I Jiave
I was occupied in writing, written on a definite occasion,
I buried myself with ivriting I have completed the writing
Indicative Present
H niim^, I write, I do write, I am None
^*'*^ Indicative Future
fl ^fjiy HHC^TB, / shall write, I shall H nannm^, / shall write now or soon,
busy myself with writing I shall get the writing started and
Imperative
nnm^xe, write, make it your practice Hannm^TC, write now, write something
to write, be busied with writing definite on a definite occasion,
write and get it finished
206. In the hst of verbs given mider A, in Paragraph 121, it
will be observed that each word is accompanied by a prefix enclosed
in brackets, or by one of the signs (1), *, or (2).
a. Verbs marked (2) have no separate form for the perfective
aspect, are not used as perfective veits, or undergo a real change
of meaning in the so-called perfective.
6. * indicates a verb whose perfective aspect is expressed by
the use of a different root, e.g.
roBop6TB,2 cKasdTb, to say.
c. (1 ) indicates a verb whose perfective is derived by modifying the
form, often the length, of the stem or by changing the termination ; e.g.
cnp^mHBaTb, cnpocHTb,^ to ask,
P'femdTb, p-feniHTb, to resolve.
In this class of words the perfective is frequently a simpler form
than the imperfective, the latter being derived from the former.
^ These Past Tenses also render our / have or had written.
^ roBopttTi.=<o speak has as the perfective noroBopATi..
3 For this type see Par. 232.
158 LESSON LI 207-208
d. Where a prefix is given, it is this prefix that is used to form
the perfective aspect, e.g.
n]^MaTb, non^MaTb, to think.
nji^Kaxb, sanjiaKaTb, to weep.
The Hst of perfective verbs given under B in Paragraph 122 is
marked in the same way.
207. All the words in those Hsts are in frequent use and as the
lists were not compiled for the special purpose of illustrating the
formation of the aspects, they may not unfairly be regarded as a
representative collection of verbs. It would therefore appear
(1) that the majority of Kussian verbs come under headings c ov d
of the last paragraph, i.e. that they have a perfective aspect ; (2)
that perfectives formed by modification of the stem are numerous ;
(3) that any prefix may be used to form the perfective, but that the
prefix no is of far greater frequency than any other. Very often
this no has the effect ot ' doing the action a little.''
208. Which prefix, if any, is precisely the right one to use for
any given verb, can be learned only by observation. If any other
prefix be taken, the compound verb resulting, if it really exist, is
indeed a perfective verb,^ but one in which the meaning has been
altered according to the meaning of the prefix. The peculiarity
of THE perfective aspect of an imperfective verb is, that the force
of the prefix is more completely exhausted in making the verb per-
fective, though even in thi^form the modification of the sense
may be so decided, that the meaning is best rendered into English
by a different verb.
Some illustrations :
Simple verb nHcaxb [pisd^t], to write ji.'fejiaTb [d^tAt], to do
Perfective HanncaTb [iiApisa^t] CAibjiaxb [sdstAt]
Other Com- cnHcaxb [spisd^t], to copi/ nan'fejiaTb [iiAdstAt], to prepare
pounds BixinHcaTb [vipisAt], to Biia'fejiaTb [vidatAt], to fashion, to
extract, sitbscribe for execute
Simple verb nnxb [pit], to drink njiaxiiTb [ptAtit], to pay
Perfective Bbmnxb [vipit] sanjiaxnxb [zAptAtit]
Other Com- naniixbCfl [nApitsA], to oxnjiaxnxb [AtptAtit], to pay back
pounds drink one's fill of Bi^injiaxHXb [viptAtit], to pay out
^ See note following this paragraph.
209 LESSON LI 159
Simple verb Jifmscrh [dumAt], to think
Perfective nofl;^MaTB [pAdumAt]
Other Compounds BJ^myuscTh [vidumAt], to devise
3aji;>^MaTb [zAdiiinAt], to propose to oneself
All the verbs given under * other compounds ' are perfective verbs
in virtue of the fact that they are simple verbs compounded with
prefixes, and corresponding imperfective forms are made from most
of them on a system which is explained in Paragraph 232.
Note. There is, however, a class of verbs of which xoahtb and
HTTH (for the distinction see Paragraph 40) may be taken as the
type. These words occur in two forms, each form having both
imperfective and perfective aspects. xoflHTb is called the indefinite,
potential, or abstract form of the word, and htth the definite, actual,
or concrete form. In verbs belonging to this category the com-
pounds of the indefinite verb are all imperfective and the com-
pounds of the definite verb are perfective. (See Voc. LII (4) ; LIV
(5) ; LV (5) ; LVI (4).)
Such verbs are :
(no)6^raTb (aio) and (no)6'fejKaTb, to run
(no)BOj];HTb (jk;^, 6AHmb) (no)BecTH, to lead
(no)B03HTb (jk^, 63Hmb) (no)Be3TH, to convey
(no)roHHTb (>iK)) (no)rHaTb, to drive, persecute
(no)jieTaTb (aio) (no)jieTibTb (nf, ernmb), to fly
(no)HOCHTb (m^, 6cHMb) (no)HecTii, to carry
(no)njiaBaTb (aio) 3 (no)njibiTb (hiBf, enib), to swim, float
(no)'fe3ji;HTb ('fe3}Ky, ^anuib) (no)'fexaTb, to drive, ride, travel
209. Onty a few exercises on the use of the aspects are given,
but before undertaking these exercises it will be useful to read
carefully the following passages, observing, in the light of Pars.
199-208, in which aspect each verb appears. New words occurring
in these passages are given in the vocabulary, but as the purpose
in printing them here is solely to illustrate the distinction between
the imperfective and the perfective, a close translation of each
passage is given : the English version is, for our present purpose,
as important as the Kussian.
160 LESSON LI 209
1
{Perfective Verbs are in Italics)
Jld^Ka 6liji^ roT6Ba. H crbjih bt> nee cl JteyMii rpeSi^aMH. Ohh
omndjiujiu u yddpujiu Bt Becjia.
H660 6iijio HCHO. Jlyna cinjia. nor6Ha 6wji^ THxan. Bojira
Hecjiacb poBHo h cnoKofino. JIojtKa cKOJibSHJia no noB^pxHocxH
TeMnLix-L BOJiHt. npouuio OKOJio nojiy^aca. Mh docmdzAii cpe-
fliiHbi p-feKii. Bjipyr-L rpeSi^iii HdHCUiu inenxaTtcH M^JK^y co66k).
Hto TaK6e? cnpocujih h.
He SHaeMTj.
FpeSuii CMOTp'fejiH B-B onuf CTopoHy. Fjiaaa MOii npduAjiu T6/Ke
HanpaBJi^Hie, h h yeudrnjih b-b cyMpaK-fe ht6-to. HesnaKOMbift npen-
M^TT. njibijn> BHHS-b no Bojirib. npnSjiHJKajicfl. Jlyna aaiu/id 3a
66jiaKO. IIjibiB^mift npnapaK-b cdrbJicuicR e^^e TCMn-fee. Oh-b 6biji'b
oil, Menfl yjKc 6jih3ko, a h Bce eme ne Mor-b ero pasAUHumh.
Bapyr-b Jiyna ei^iiujia H3b-3a 66jiaKa, h osapd/ia 3p'fejiHme ymacnoe.
K-b naivi-b naBCTp-fe^y njibijia BHcfejini^a, ymeep^HcdeHHaa na njioxy.
Tpn T^jia BHcfejiH na nepeKJiannnife. Boji'fe3nennoe JiioSonbiTCTBo
OBAadrbJio Mnoio. H aaxomfbAh ese/iHH^mb na JiHLta Biic'fejibHHKOB'b.
KannxancKaH J];6qKa,
n^mKHn-b.
{Perfective Verbs are in Italics)
BojibuiaH, BbicoKan, TeMnaa 34jia, ocerhii^eHHaR TOjibKO Hexbipbiviii
lijiH nflxbib CB'feHaMH, ch KOxopbiMH AOKXopa noAXOAHjiH ocMaxpHBaxb
p^nenbix-b, 6hijik SynBajibno nojina. HociijibmnKH desnpecxanno
BHOCHJiH panenbix-b, cKJia^biBajin hxx> ojiMWh n6ji;ji'fe npyroro na
noji-b, na KOxdpoM-b ym6 6biJio xaKX) x^cno, qxo necnacxnbie xojiKajincb
H MOKnyjiH B-b KpoBH Apyr'b apyra, n mjin sa noBbiMH. Gecxpbi, co
cnoKOHHbiMH JiHitaMH H cb BbipaH^^HicMx. A-fenxcjibHaro npaKxii-
qecKaro yqacxin, xo xaMb, xo chmt* MCJibKajin uemjiy panenbiMH.
J^OKxopa, Cb sacyneHHUMU pynaBaMH, ocMaxpHBajin, onj^nbmajiH
H 3onfl6poBajiH panbi, necMoxpn na yjKacHbie cxonbi cxpasajibLteB-b.
Oflnn-b H3'b AOKxopoB-b cHfl-fejib 6kojio HBepn 3a cxojiHKOMb, n B-b
xy MHn^xy, nan-b bt* KOMnaxy eoiuejib o^nnep-b, 3anHCbiBaji'b yjK6
532.
GeBacx6nojibCKie Pa3CKa3bi,
ToJicx6ft.
209 LESSON LI 161
Translation
The boat was ready. I embarked (seated myself into it) with two boatmen .
They cast off and set to work (struck away) at the oars.
The sky was clear (bright). The moon shone. The weather was calm.
The Volga flowed smoothly and quietly along. The boat glided over the
surface of the dark waves. About half-an-hour elapsed. We had reached the
middle of the river. Suddenly the oarsmen began to whisper to each other
(among themselves).
" What is that ? " I asked. " We do not know."
The oarsmen were looking in a certain direction (to one side). My eyes
took the same direction, and I caught sight in the gloom of something or other.
The unknown object was floating down the Volga. It was approaching.
The moon went behind a cloud. The floating apparition became still darker.
It was already close to me, but I was still unable to make it out.
Suddenly the moon shone out from behind the cloud, and illumined a terrible
spectacle. The thing that was floating along to meet us was a gallows /os^ericd
to a raft. Three bodies were hanging from the crossbeam. A morbid curiosity
mastered me. I was seized with the desire to look upon the faces of the dead
men (hanged men).
The Captain's Daughter,
Pushkin.
Translation
The great, high, dark hall lighted only by the four or five candles, by the
aid of which the doctors were stepping up to examine the wounded, was
literally full. Stretcher-bearers were continually bringing in wounded men ;
they laid them down one beside the other on the floor, on which they were
already so closely packed that the unfortunate men were roUing up against
each other and weltering (being drenched) in each other's blood ; [then] they
would go for more. The nurses, with unruffled countenance and an expres-
sion of active practical sympathy, flitted hither and thither among the
wounded. The doctors, with sleeves turned up, examined, palpated, probed
the wounds, in spite of the awful groans of the sufferers. One of the doctors
was sitting near the door at a little table and at the moment when the
officer came into the room he was already entering number 532.
Tales of Sebastopol,
Tolstoi.
L
162 LESSON LI 209
3
{Perfective Verbs are in Italics)
Ilocji^uiaii, cji-fendtil cKasd/ih oh'l: depern to m^^cto . . .
SHaeuib? THM-B CoraTbie TOBapLi . . . cnaofcd xosHnny, hto h eM^
66jibme ne cjiyr^ . J^ifejia nouiJiu xyflo , oht, Menii 66 Jibuie ne yeudumh :
Tenepb onacHo: nomdy HCKaxb paSoTbi B-b npyroM-b M-fecx-fe; xaM-b a
6^y }Kji;aTb y^oSnaro cjiyqaa. fla ckq^hcil, ecjinS-b ohT) nojiynme
njiaTHJi-b 3a Tpyabi, xan-b u h 6bi ero ne noKunyjih. Ona noihdemh
CO MHOK); em nejibSH s^-fecb ocxaBaTbCH.
A fli cKaadjih cji-fenott >Kajio6HbiM'b rojiocoM-b.
On-b HTo-TO nojiooicuAh cjiifenoMy B-b pyny, npuMOJieueh: Ha,
Kynd ceG-fe npHHHK0B'b. TojibKo? cnasdAh cji-fenott. Hy, botT)
Te6^ eme, h yndemaR MOHexa saaeenrbjia, y^apacb o KaMCHb^.
Cji-fenoii eii ne noduRjih. Ohh cm/iu B-b jiojuKy; Bibxepi. ayji-b ox-b
6epera; ohh Si^icxpo noHecjidcb. ^ojiro npn cB-fex-fe whcRixa. MCJib-
KaJiX) S-fejibiH napycx> M^H^^y bojihT); cji-feHoii Bce CHflibji-b na 6eper^
H HJiaKaji-b, H AOJiro sojiro. ^ , ,
FepoH Hamero BpeMenn
[slightly altered],
JlepMOHTOBT>.
4
{Perfective Verbs are in Italics)
TeMa q^BCXBOBaji-b ce6A OKonqaxejibHo cddmuMh cb noaJiuiH:
K6pnycT>, eme xaKT> neaaBHO KasaBinittcH a^JioM-b pmiueHHbiMh,
omodeuHyjicH Kyaa-xo najieKO-aajieKo .
Tbi Korjia, TeMa, nomdeuibl cnpocuAa Haxama, Bxopan
cecxpa, cxapaacb cnpumh BOJinoBaBiniH ee nyBCXBa nosx> MacKoft
npocxoro jiio6onbixcxBa.
TeMa sazjiRHyAh B-b rjiasa cecxpiJi.
HHityna fl ne nomdy, omerhmujih ohx>, eadoxHijeh, h ecmaeh,
HanpdeujiCR bx. Ka6HH6xx..
TaMx> OHX) marajix> bx> coananiH npuHeceuHou hmx> jKepxBM.
M6>KexX)-6bixb, hjih jKepxBbi ero BHnx> 6bmx> cjihuikomx. cnoK6eHx>,
HO xifeMx> He MCH-fee ^xo He M-femajio eMy cnnxaxb ce6H JKepxBoii, h
eMy' Kasajiocb, hxo ohx> cpaay xohho eiiipoch na nibcKOJibKO Ji'fexx>.
Ohx> ^626 Ha HHBaHXj, sajiootcujih 3a rojioBy py^KH h aad^MQAca. o
xoMx>, Hxo jKH3Hb He xaKafl npocxan h JierKaa Ben^b, KaKoii ona
Kamexcfl no napyjKHOMy BHuy.
TaKx> H ycH^jih, ny^Man Bce o xomt> JKe.
CeMefiHaa XpoHHKa, v>
FapHHTj.
1 o= against governs the accusative.
209 LESSON LI 163
8
Translation
" Listen, blind boy," he said ; " keep a watch on that place. You know ?
There is great wealth (are rich wares) there. Tell the master that I am no
longer his servant. Things have turned out (gone) badly, he wonH see me any
more ; it's dangerous now. I am going to seek work in another place. There
I shall await a convenient opportunity. And tell him, if he had paid me better
for my labour, I should not have left him in the lurch. She is going to go with
me ; it is impossible for her to remain here."
" And what about me ? " said the blind boy in a piteous voice.
He put something in the blind boy's hand, adding {having said) as he did
so, " There, buy yourself some spice-buns." " That's all ? " said the blind
boy. " Well, there is something more for you," and a falling {fallen) coin
tinkled as it struck (striking) the stone. The blind boy did not pick it up.
They took their places in the boat ; the wind was blowing off the shore and
they ivere swiftly carried away. For a long time the white sail in the midst
of the waves shimmered in the light of the moon ; the blind boy still continued
sitting on the shore and wept and wept.
A Hero of Modern Times ^
Lbrmontof.
4
Translation
Timothy felt himself driven once for all from his position \i.e. felt that
he had no ground left to stand upon] ; [his entrance into] the corps [of
officers], which, such a short time before, had appeared a settled thing, had
[now] receded to a point (somewhere) far, far away.
" When are you to set off, Timothy ? " asked Natalia, his second sister,
trying to con^ceal the emotions that agitated her under the mask of mere
curiosity.
Timothy looked into his sister's eyes.
"I am not going anywhere," he answered with a sigh {having sighed)
and getting up {having stood up), he betook himself to his room.
There he strode up and down in the consciousness of the sacrifice he
had made (that had been made by him). Perhaps, for a victim, his aspect
was too calm, but nevertheless that did not prevent him from regarding
himself as a victim, and it seemed to him that he had, as it were, grown
older all at once by several years. He lay down on the sofa, put his hands
behind his head, and gave himself up to musing on the fact that life was not
such a simple, easy thing as it seemed on a superficial view.
And thus, still thinking over that fact, befell asleep.
Family Chronicle,
Garin.
164 LESSON LII 210-212
LESSON LII
The Imperative
210. As indicated in Paragraph 205, both the imperfective and
the perfective aspects have an imperative mood, formed in the im-
perfective from the present and in the perfective from the future
tense.
The 2nd singular ends in -li, -h or -h ;
the 2nd plm-al ends in -Hie, -HTe, -LTe.
211. I. When the termination of the 2nd singular is preceded
by a vowel, change the termination into -ft and -ftxe, e.g.
CH-fejiaemb cfeemb CTapaemBCfl
CA^jiatt [sdetA!], do cfeft [s6i], sow cxapaftcb [stArdis], try
Cfl'fejiaHTe [sdetAlta] cibftre [s6lt9] cxapaiiTecb [stAraltas]
(a) The verbs in Par. 162 change the h which follows the initial
consonant into e, e.g.
nbemb
n6ft [p61], drink
nefixe [p^Ita]
(6) The verb HaTb, which is very irregular in the future tense,
has JXSlPl [dai], flattTe [daita] (cf. Par. 231).
212. II. When the termination of the 2nd singular is preceded
by a consonant :
A. If the termination is accented in the 1st singular,^ change
the termination of the 2nd singular into H and Hxe, e.g.
necf CKajK^ xomf
Hecemb CKajKcmb x6ji;Hmb
HecH [nasi], carry CKSimA [skA3i], say, tell xoAti [xAdi], go
HCCHTC [nasita] CKamAxe [skA3it8] xouhxc [xAdita]
jiio6jii5 y^f
jubSnmb ynnmb
JI1066 [iubi], love ynik [utjf], teach (learn)
jiK)6Axe [iubita] yq^xe [utjita]
^ The accentuation of the 1st sing. pres. is generally that of the infinitive*
2ia-2i6 LESSON LII 165
B. If the stem is accented in the 1st singular, change the termina-
tion of the 2nd singular into h and bxe ; e.g.
BJiibsy njia^y G^sy (future)
Bji-feaemfa njianemt dyaemb
BJi-fesb [vie^s], climh njia^b [ptatj], weep 6yAb [bu^t], be
BJi-fesbTC [vksta] njiaHbTC [ptatjta] O^Abxe [bd^ta]
C. If two consonants precede the termination, then, irrespective
of where the accent faUs, change the termination into H and Hxe ; e.g.
KpiiKHy [kriknu] M^ajiH) [lii^dlu] nyni^ [pujtjd]
KpiiKHcmb [kriknaj] M^AJinmb [ih^diij] n^CTHmb [ptistij]
KpiiKHH [krikni], cry out MCflJiH [ihedii], hesitate nycTH [pustl], let
KpiaKHHxe [krflinita] m^ajihtc [rii^dlite] nycTHTe [pustita]
213. The verb jichb has Jifln> ^ [lak], Jiarxe [iakta], lie down.
-fecTB tmb[jeS],'fjmbTe[jeSt8],ea^. (Cf.Par.220.)
214. The first plural of the future perfective may be used without
a subject as the equivalent for let us do etc. ; e.g.
Gfl'fejiaeM'L TO, HTO oht. naM-b BejiHTi> [sdstAJam to, Jto on nam valit].
Let us do what he orders us (dat.) to do.
215. The imperative nycKaft [puskai] of nycKaxb, to allow^ or
the form nycxb [pu^st] is used with the 3rd sing, or plur. of the present
imperfective or future perfective as 3rd sing, or plur. imperative ; e.g.
nycKaii on-b npoHAeT-b ca^-b [puskdi on prAidot sat], Let him go
through the garden.
216. Many salutations and other frequently used expressions
are imperatives ; e.g.
sjtpaBCTByiiTe [zdras(tvul)t8], good day, how are you?
is really the imperative derived from the present SApaBCXByK), euib
etc. of the verb SflpaBCXBoeaxb, and means hail I he of good health !
npon;aftTel [prAJtJalta], farewell !
(no CBHsanifl [dA sviddnja], au revoir)
and npocTATcI [prAstite], pardon me/
are respectively the imperfective and perfective imperative of
npomaxb, npocxnxb.
CMOTpHTel [smAtrita], look out/ H3BHHiiTeI [izvinita], excuse me/
nomaJiyHl [pA3dtui], after all, as far as I am concerned, may be;
nojKajiyftCTal [pA3dt(ui)stA], please.
^ The only imperative ending in i.
166 LESSON LII 217-218
217. The imperfective imperative is a general command ; the
perfective imperative is an indication that something is to be done
now, at once.
In negative commands the imperfective form is generally used.
218. The infinitive is often used instead of the imperative in
general commands or prohibitions, e.g.
He BCxaBaTbl [na fstAva^t], Do not stand up!
He roBopHTbl [na gAVArit], No speaking !
Vocabulary
(1) Perfective formed with prefix
(no)6oiiTbCfl (lb, nmb) [(pA)bAJa^tsA], to fear
JjKeHb (JKry,i jKJKeuib, JKryT-B) [setj], to hum
\c>Keqb (coJKr^) [ssetj]
(noji;o)>KAaTb (y^, emb) [(pAdA)5da^t], to wait, await
(2) Imperfective in axb, perfective in HTb
rnojiyqaTb I A [pAtutJait], to receive
InojiyMHTb (qy, ^qnmb) [pAtutjit]
fnocTynaTb I A [pAstupd^t], to act, behave
\nocTynHTb (njiib, ^nnmb) [pAstupit]
JnycKaxb I A [puskd^t], to let, allow, admit
\nycTiiTb {m^, ^CTHmb) [pustit]
(npomaxb I A [prAjtJd^t], to remit, pardon
npocTHTb {u\f, CTiimb) [prAstit]
(3) Imperfective long : perfective short.
(In this group many of the imperfectives, especially those in eaxb, are
verbs indicating the repeated or continuous occurrence of the act, and are
derived from the perfective verb, which is itself a compound of a simple verb.
Cf. Par. 232.)
rnoKasbiBaTb I A [pAkdzivAt], to show
\n0Ka3aTb (my, aJKcmb) [pAkAzd^t]
/BCxaBaTb (Bcxaib, euib) [fstAvd^t], to stand up, get up, rise
^BCTaxb (any, emb) [fstait]
r oai^BaTbCH I A [Adavd^tsA], to clothe oneself, dress
[oji^ThCH. (^Hycb, embcfl) [Ad^^tsA]
Jpaan'feBaTbCfl I A [rAzdavd^tsA], to undress
\pa3jtibTbCH [rAzd6^tsA]
{yMbiBaxbca I A [umivd^tsA], to wash {oneself)
yMi^iTbCfl (oH), emb) [umitsA]
^ Imperative mm, mrHxe.
218 LESSON LII 167
(4) Imperfective and perfective from different roots or from
different forms of cognate stems
/npoxoaHTb (mfy OAHUib) [prAXAdit], to traverse
\npofiTH (nf, euib) [prAiti]
f npHHOCHTB (m^, ocHUib) [pririAsit], to bring
\npHHecTli (c;^, enib) [prinasti]
(Cf. note to Par. 208.)
T6jibK0 qxo [to^ikA |to], just (with o chx-l nopi. [dAsixpor] {up to
past tenses) these times), till now
nopa cj^'fejiaxb (perf.) 5x0 [pArd Cb T-fex-b nopi. [stexpor] {since those
sdstAt stA], it is time to do that times), since then
nopa, ik, -^y, -^u [pAra], time
Proverbial Sayings
KfA (from KOBaxb) JKeji-feao, noKa ropHqo, Strike the iron while ifs hot.
yeaJKatt cxapHKa, caMX. 6fji,emh cxapx.. Honour {esteem) the aged
{man), you will be old yourself
B-feKX) JKHBii, B'feK'b yqilCb, Live a life-time {an age), learn a life-time, i.e.
it's never too late to learn,
Beperii KoneeqKy npo nepHbiii nenb, Save the farthing for a rainy day.
J1io6h 6jiiiJKHHro, KaKX> caMor6 ce6fl, Love thy neighbour as thyself
He MOJiH Ji'fexa aojiraro, mojih xenjiaro, Don't pray for a long summer,
pray for a warm one.
. rr, T ^ Exercises
A. Translate :
I. ji-fejiaiixe, cfeflxe, cxapaiixecb, aaBaft, cjiy^maftxe, cxott, cxpottxe,
nycKatt, npomaiixe, sjipaBcxByiixe, HM'fettxe, ne 66iixecb, noJKa-
Jiyiicxa, play, answer, work, ask questions, read, build, continue, laugh, do
not blush, dress, undress, let, farewell, sing, wash, behave.
{a) n6iixe, Ji^iixe, beat, wind, sew.
II. {a) HecH, CKajKHxe, cnpocHxe, xoanxe, n^iixe, yniixecb, speak,
show, sleep, sit down, pardon me, live, seek, write, look, inquire, plough, act
{perf), bring.
(6) BJi^3bxe, njia^b, Bcxanb, eat, sit down, dress,
(c) Kp^KHHxe, MeJiHxe, let, press, reap, wait, burn.
III. cA-fejiaeMX), noHeceMX>, sanjiaqeMX., KpliKHeMX>, let us sow, let
us listen, stand, build, play, go, live, look, wait, write, burn, dress, wash.
B. Translate :
(1) IIpHHeciixe MH-fe, noH^ajiyHcxa, 5xy H6ByK) p^ccKyio KHHryl
(2) npHHOCHXe MH'fe OKCflH^BHO Xexpa^H CXapmHXX> yHCHHKOB'bl
168 LESSON LIII 219
(3) JIojKHxecb cnaTb Ka>Kflbiii BdHep-b b-l ceMb Hacoetl (4) Ilopa
UTTik cnaTbl Pasfl^Hbxecb, M^jib^HKH, h siAne cnaxbl (5) niiuiH
M^flJieHHO H npaBHJibHoI (6) HanniiTHTe to, ^to h BaM-B CKam;^I
(7) GMOTpHxel (8) nocMOTpHxe to, hto OHii fl-fejiaioT-b Tenepbl
(9) He roBopi'iTe 6ft o tom-b, ^to h BaMi> TOJibKo hto paacKasajiTiI
(10) He a-fejiafixe ^Torol (11) He oTB-fenattTe Ha dTOTTb Bonpocbl
(12) nycKdii OHa CA-fejiaeT-b, KaK-b ona JKejiaeTi,! (13) IlycTb ohh
noPLjxfT-h Tenepb b-b uiKdjiyl (14) Bcer^a cjiymafiTe to, hto roBO-
p^T-b yqiiTejibI (15) Y^HTejib roBopHTi. xen^pb; nocjiymaHTC erol
C. Translate into Russian :
(1) Stand up at once. (2) Always sit on this chair, please. (3) Don't
do that. (4) Let him receive the money. (5) Read this paper quickly.
(6) Read aloud at home. (7) Let us have a look ^ at what is going on out of
doors. (8) Show me, please, what you are holding in your hand. (9) Do
not eat so quickly. (10) Halt [stand]. (11) Get up early in the morning,
wash, dress, and go to school ; do [act] so every day. (12) It is time to get
up, boys. Get up, wash, dress, and go to school. (13) Let them live here.
LESSON LIII
219. Declension of BpeMfl, time.
Sing. Plur.
nom. Bp^MH [vr^riiA] BpcMCH^ [vrariian^]
gen. CHH [vr6m9m] CH'b [vraihon]
dat. CHH [vr^marii] enaM-b [vraiiiondm]
ace. H [vr^iiiA] ena [vraihana]
instr. CHCM'b [vf^ihenam] enaMH [vramondmi]
prep. CHH [vr6m8iii] enax-b [vramandx]
There is a small group of nouns, all neuters, of this form. The
most frequently used of them are :
6peMfl [br^riiA], burden
Amh [iihA], name
3HaMfl (sHaMCHa) [zndriiA], banner
nJiCMH [pierfiA], tribe
njiaMfl [ptdriiA], flame
CTp^MH [str6mA], stirrup
cfeMH [s6mA], seed
^ Perfective of cMOTp^Tb.
220-224 LESSON LIII 169
220. The verb -fecTb, noicTL [jest, pAJest], to eat, is irregular. The
present tense is
^Mt, 'fenib, 'fecT'L [jsm, jej, jsst], ImAwby lixe, AtTj [jedim, jedita, jaddt]
The imperative is 'feuib, i^iULTe [jeJ, jejta].
221. (no)'fexaTb, to drive or ride, has in the present "637,
-^euib [jedu], and only one form in the imperative, no'fesjKaii,
afixe [pAJQsai].
222. Present tense of xoT'tib [xAte^t], to wish; perfective
BaxoTiTb [zAXAte^t], to conceive a wish or desire :
XOHf [XAtJli] XOTHMt [xAtim]
xo^emb [xdtjaj] xoxiiTe [xAtita]
xo^eTT. [xotjat] xothtt* [xAtat]
223. (1) The conditional in Russian is formed by adding the
particle 6h to the past tense, e.g.
Oht. npociiJn> 6m [on prAsit bi], He would ask or he would have asked.
If the condition is unfulfilled, this form of the verb is used in
both parts of a conditional sentence, e.g.
H 6bi HanHC^Ji-B cm^, 6cjih 6bi h snajit ^to [ja bi iiApisat jamti, j6sii
bi ja znat stA], / should write {have written) to him, if I knew [had knoum) that.
With ecjiH or qxo, 6u often becomes 6t> : ecjiH 61., htoSt,.
(2) If the present tense is used in EngHsh in the conditional
clause, there is still a chance of the condition being fulfilled or if
may have the force of whenever ; and in Russian the present and
future tenses without 6hi are used, e.g.
JScjih Bbi SyACTe roBopiiTb cb HHM-b, CKamiiTe cm^, etc. [j^sii vi
budate gAVAiit siiim, skA3it8 jemii], If you speak with him, tell him, etc.
H B-fepio CM^, 6cJiH OHT. MH-fe THK^ roBop^T'b [JQ v6ru jamu, j6sii
on mns tak gAVArit], / believe him (dat.), if he speaks to me so.
224. (1) With xoxixb when only one person or group of persons
is involved, the construction is the same as in Engfish, e.g.
H XOH^ (c)xi;'fejiaTb [ja xAtJd (s)d8tAt], / wish to do.
(2) If there are two persons or groups of persons involved, the
Russian does not say I wish you to do but / wish that you did or
I wish that you should do :
H xo^f, ht6 ^h Bbi CA-fejiajiH [ja xAtJii, Jto bi vi sd^tAli],
This is the construction to use with other verbs of requesting.
170 LESSON LIII 224
Vocabulary
(Where no special indication of genitive case, etc. is given, it is to be understood
that the oblique cases of the noun in question are regularly derived and that there
is no change of accent.)
Bon> [box], God cxap^niKa [stAriijkA], old woman
BojKel [bosa], God/ Jionaxa [lApatA], spade
^paHi^^ST) [frAntsiis], Frenchman CTapHHa [stArina], former days, days
KJiaST) [ktad (t)], treasure of old
HaxoAKa [nAxotkA], a find, treasure- 6iiiJib [bii], true story
trove HTO-HH6y3L [jto-nibu^t], something
or other
CB'feTJioe BocKpec^HLe [svsttAJa vAskres^njg], Easter Sunday {Bright
day of Resurrection)
Heqero [ni^T'i. nnqero, Hero] [n^tJavA], {there is) nothing of which
HCH'feM'B [H-fexi* HH^ero, H-feMT*] [n^tjam], {there is) nothing with which
Verbs
(1) Perfective formed by use of prefix
{HTTH {ujif, euib) [iti], to go {on foot)
noHTii (noiiay) [pAiti]
(no)piJiTb (oK), eiub) [(pA)rit], to dig
(no)npocHTb (m^, ochuib) [(pA)prAsit], to request, beseech
(no)MOJiHTbCH (locb, -HUibCfl) [(pA)mAiitsA], to pray, say one* s prayers
/(no)njiaKaTb (a^y, euib) [(pA)ptakAt], to weep, lament, bewail
\(3a)njiaKaTb ^ [(zA)ptakA.t], to weep, start weeping
(o6)paaoBaTbCH (paayiocb, embcn) [(Ab)radAVAtsA], to rejoice
(2) Imperfective lon^ perfective short {see Par. 232) /
JnoMoraxb I A [pAmAga^t], to help, assist
\noM6Hb (like Mory, Par. 168) [pAmotj], {dat. of person)
fsapbiBaxb I A [zArivd^t], to bury
\3ap1iiTb (6k), euib) [zATit]
TnocbiJiaTb I A [pAsitd^t], to send
\nocjiaTb (niJiio, euib) [pAstd^t]
/BcnoMHHaTb I A [fspAriiind^t], to remember
^BcnoMHHTb (k), Hinb) [fspomnit]
fnoKynaxb I A [pAkupd^t], to buy
\KyniiTb (njiib, fnmuih) [kupit]
. . (3)
fpasroBJiiiTbCfl I A [rAzgAvid^tsA], to eat meat for the first time after a fast
\pa3roB^TbCH (-feiocb, ^eiiibCfl) [rAzgAv6^tsA]
^ Perfectives formed with the prefix aa are mostly inchoatives, i.e. they indicate
the beginning of an action.
;
t>bsjt>tCe^ C<^^.^*^^ /<S^owvv.
224 (T LESSON LIII 171
(4) Imperfective and 'perfective from different roots
froBopiiTb 1 (i5, HUib) [gAVArit], to speaky say
tcKasaTb (>Ky, euib) [skAzd^t], to say, tell
(Gpaxb (6epfy enib) [bra^t], to take
\B3flTb (B03bM^, euib) [v:ia^t]
Exercises
A. Translate: ^^^^^
B-b OAHofi Aep^BH-fe WHJia cxap^uiKa co (cb) BH^qKoft. OH-fe
6i[JiH oqcHb 6feHbi, H i^CTb HMT, 6iijio H^qero. rXpHiiiJio CB-feTJioe
BocKpec^Hbe. Hapda-b pa^yeTCH. Bcfe KyniijiH ce6^ paaroB-feTbCH,
xdjibKo cTap^uiK'fe CO BH^qKOH H^qi^MT. paaroB-fexbCH. IIonjiaKajiH
OH^ H cTajiH B6ra npocnxb, qxodx. On-b hmx. noMdrx.. H Bcn6MHHJia
cxapy^uiKa, qxo bt> cxapHHy^, bo bp6mh $paHi;^3a, MyjKHK^ A^Hbrn
Bx> a^MjiK) sapbiBajiH. Cxap^xa h roBopiix-b BH^qK'fe: BosbMli (xh),
BH^qKa, Jionaxy h HAii na cx^poe ceji6, noMOJi6cb Bory, Ha nop6tt
Bx, acMJii: M6>Kexx. 6bixb, Borx> HaMx> h nonijiex-b wro-uvL6fji,h.
Tojicx6ii
(a) Pboverbial Sayings
He p6tt Apyr6My HMy, caMX> bx> nee nonaAeiub, DonH dig a pit for
another y you may fall into it yourself.
Hxo nocfeemb, xo h noJKHeuib, WJmt you sow^ that also shall you reap.
Oxx> xyji;6ro c^mchh He >kah A66paro njieMCHH, From had seed do
not expect a good stock.
Kxo pa66xaexx>, xom^ Bori. noMor^exX), Who worksy him Ood helps,
B. Translate into Kussian :
(1) Do you know that they are digging ? Always let him dig here. Dig
now. We shall dig at once. You will be digging (this) afternoon. She
has just dug. She was digging. She would dig if she had a spade. Her
mother wants her to dig.
(2) Why will she be crying ? Why will she lament ? Why will she begin
to cry ? Do not cry. She bewailed her misfortune. She would have started
to cry, if they had taken her father away. We do not want her to cry.
(3) Go home at once. Do you not know that she has gone already ? I
am going home now. I shall go home now. I should go to the village, if
my mother told me that (there was) a treasure there.
(4) The old woman would have been glad, if God had sent her a treasure.
* The perfective noroBopiiTi. must be used when the verb corresponds to to speak.
172 LESSON LIV 226-227
(5) She says her prayers every morning. Has she said her prayers this
morning ? No, she is going to say her prayers now. Every day say your
prayers night and morning.
(6) Who usually helped the poor girl to do her work ? We often help her.
You are going to help her now. Surely you did [neyjK^JiH . . . He] help her.
She wants me to help them. I should be glad if you helped them.
(7) Send us a lot of those pretty flowers every week. Send her the flowers
now. I should have sent them, if I had got to know that she liked flowers.
(8) I generally buy my books of [y] that man, but to-day I am going to
buy what I need [what to me (is) necessary] of my friend. Surely you have
not bought yours already ? I should have bought them, if I had had any
money. I want you to buy your books here.
(9) She'll tell you what we are talking about. Speak with him about it
and tell him what you think of the matter. I should speak to him about it,
if I knew where he lived [hves]. I want to tell you something.
(10) Take this pen and paper. We'll take them now. He is always taking
what does not belong to him. You would have taken the money, if it belonged
to them.
(11) Do not eat that meat.
(12) He will drive to church. Drive home.
C. Translate into Russian :
Before [js,o with genitive] that time I did not know that peasants in that
district buried their treasure in the earth, but at Easter, when the others were
buying food for the feast, we prayed to God that He might send us something,
80 that we too might have food and clothes. I took a spade and went into
the old village ; I asked God to help me and started to dig in the damp earth.
LESSON LIV
225. Verbs in -OBaxb have the present in -yio, -yenib ; -eBaib
changes to -lOK), etc., e.g,
pHCOBaTb, pHC^^K), imperat. pHc;^fi [risiii], to draw.
p^AOBaxbCH, panyiocB, imperat. pa^yficfl [raduIsA], to rejoice.
ropeeaTB, ropibio, imperat. ropibii [gArava^t, gArtii], to grieve, mourn.
226. Verbsin-biBaibj-HBaxb are regular verbs with -BaK),-Baemb,
etc., e.g. oTKpBmaTB, otkpbib^k) [Atkrivaju], to open.
227. Ex. A of the last lesson and Ex. A of this lesson are almost
exactly Tolstoi's version of this story. It will be noticed that the
228 LESSON LIV 173
writer mingles past and present tenses, where, in English, we should
prefer the past or the present throughout.
228. Kemember the form corresponding to whether in sub-
ordinate clauses :
Oht. MBHii cnpocHJi'b, 3H^K) (sHaji-L) JiH fl ^TO [on ihana sprAsft,
zna ju (znat) li ja dtA], He ashed we, if {whether) I knew {had known) that.
Vocabulary
FocnoAb (rocno^a, y, a, OMt, -fe) MOJiHTBa [mAiftvA], prayer
[gAspo^t], the Lord cep^SpflHMtt [ser^brani], of silver
rocnoaHl [gospAdi], Lord nojind [pAtno], {it is) fill
npasAHHKTb [prdznik], festival n6jiH0 [polnA], stop, enough !
JKiixeJib [sitai], inhabitant o, 66o (with ace.) [o, obA], against
iiMa [jamA], pit, hole BHcaanHO [vnazapnA], suddenly
KySbiuiKa [kubiJkA], jug ny [nu], loell
MOH^xa [mAnstA], coin S^ACTt [budat], that will do, evmtgh I
Verbs
(1) Perfective with prefix
(no)a^MaTb I A [(pA)diimAt], to think
(no)Beji'feTb (lb, Hinb) (dat. of person) [(pA)v9i6^t], to order, command
(^o)6JIa^oJ^apIiTb (ib, nmb) [(pA)btAgAdArit], to think
(no)6'fejKaTb ("fer^, JKiiuib, 3rd plur. Tfi-h) [(pa) basalt], to run
(3a)3BeH'feTb (lb, Auib) [(zA)zv9n6^t], to ring, tinkle, jingle
(3a)xoT'feTb (Par. 222 and note to Voc. LIII) [(zA)xAt6it], to wish
(c)A'fejiaTb I A r(s)dstAt], to do, make
(y)cjnimaTb (|6, nnib) [(u)stiJAt], to hear
(y)Bi;ifl'feTb (>Ky, ^Hmb) [(u)vid9t], to see (perf. =to catch sight of)
(2) axb, HTb
rSpocaTb I A [brAsa^t], to throw
t6p6cHTb (6my, ocHUib) [brosit]
(3) Long and short {see Par. 232)
jEbipbiB^Tb I A [viriVa^], to excavate
VBiipbiTb (oK), enib) [virit]
JoTRpbiBaTb I A [Atkriva^t], to open
\oTKpiiiTb (oH), enib) [Atkrit]
{noAHHMaTb I A [pAdnimd^t], to lift, pick up
nosHiiTb (hhm^, ^Menib) [pAdna^t]
/noTpflcaxb I A [pAtrasd^t], to shake
tnoTpacTH (c^, euib) [pAtrastfj
174 LESSON LIV 228
(4) Perfective in Hyxb
{HarHSaxb I A [iiAgiba^t], to bend
HarH^Tb (ny, euib) [nAgnuit]
fcxyqaxb (qy, HHUib) [stutja^t], to knock
\cxyKHyxb (y, euib) [stuknut], to knock once
JKpHHaxb (h^, qiiuib) [kritja^t], to cry, call out
(KpHKHyxb (y, euib) [kriknut], to cry out once
Perfective verbs in Hyxb indicate a single, and often sudden, performance
or occurrence.
(5) Different stems
jHaxoaiixb {mf, ojirnuh) [nAXAdit], to come upon, find
\iiaHXH (ay, euib) [nAiti]
Exercises
A. Continuation of the " True Story " from Tojictoh.
Translate :
Bu^qKa H jiyMaex-b : KaK'b mojkho KJiaa-b HaftxH? Hy aa, cn-fejiaio ,
KaK-b 6a6ymKa bcjiuxtj.)) BsHJia Jionaxy h noiujia. Biiipbijia oua
;iMy H ayMaex-b: By3ex'b, nottay 0M6ft. Xoxijia noaunxb
Jionaxy, cjuiiuiHX'b ^ 66o hx6-xo Jionaxa cxyKuyjia. Oua Haruyjiacb,
BiiAHX'b 1 KySiiiUKa Gojibmaa. noxpncjia ee, hx6-xo BBeuHX'b. Oua
6p6cHJia Jionaxy, noS'fejKajia kX) 6a6yiUK'fe, kphhhxx>: Ba6ymKa,
KJiaa-b nauiJial OxKpi^iJin KyObiuiKy, B'b nen nojino cepeSpHUbix'b
Monex-b. H 6a6ymKa co BnyHKott KyniiJiH ceS-fe ki> npaaaHHKy,
q-feM-b pasroB-fexbCfl, n KopoBy KyniiJiH, h 6jiaroflapiijiH Bora, hxo
Ohtj ycjuiuiaji-b ux-b MOJiuxBy.
{a) Proverbial Sayings
MaxepHHCKafl MOJiuxBa co jina [dna] Mopa noflUHMaex'b, A mother's
prayer raises (even) from the bottom of the sea, i.e. can remove mountains.
Focnojib noBCJi'feji'b ox-b scmjih KopMHXbCH [gAspo^t pAvoist At 4amii
kArriiitsA], The Lord commanded men to live on the fruits of the earth.
Kxo BHepa cojiraji^, xoMy h saBxpa ne noBibpax-b [xto ftjara
SAtgat, tAniu i zaftrA na pAv6rAt], Who {hus) lied yesterday, ivill not be believed
to-morrow.
B. Translate into Russian :
(1) How difl&cult (it is) to find the treasure we are seeking ! How easy to
dig a hole in the garden when you have a good spade ! We must do as granny
has ordered.
(2) Thank you. When we thanked him for his goodness, he said, " Don't
mention it."
^ This broken construction with verbs of hearing and seeing is very common.
228 LESSON LIV 175
(3) The old man ordered his grandson to bring him his pipe. Why does
he order you to take a look at what the other pupils are doing ? Order him
to write this letter to-day.
(4) Why is she running ? They are not running. I should like [condit.
of xoT'feTb] to know whether she did indeed run home to her grandmother.
Run to her.
(5) Suddenly we felt a desire to hear what they were saying to each other.
Did you hear that they had already opened the book ? We hear the coins
jingling [how the coins jingle or we hear the coins are jingling].
(6) We caught sight of them throwing stones at the dog [how they were
throwing with stones into the dog]. Throw (away) the wooden spade. I
shall throw it away, if you command me.
(7) What are they excavating in the ground ? Let them go into the
garden ; let them excavate a deep pit, perhaps they will find what we want.
(8) Do you know whether they have opened the door ? They always open
the doors at six o'clock. They will open them at once. If they open them,
we shall go in. If they opened them, we should go in.
(9) I want them to pick up all those white stones and throw them into the
river. Pick them up. She will pick up the spade at once. Why did the old
teacher want the elder pupils to write on white paper instead of copy-books ?
If you shake the black jug, you will hear the coins jingling. If you had shaken
it, you would have heard the coins jingling. Shake it. Do not shake it.
(10) She was always bending down. She bent down and saw something
in the ground.
(11) It is well that they always knock. Then he knocked, opened the
door and went in. Surely they are not still crying out ? They started to
cry out. He cried out, " Mother, I have found that beautiful treasure you
were speaking of. God has heard our prayer." We do not always find that
which we seek. We always used to find it. I found it yesterday. I want
to find it. I want you to find it. I asked him whether you had found it.
I'll seek it and perhaps I'll find it. If I find it, I'll tell you.
(12) If those foreigners had known that cholera (was) in the town,
perhaps they would not have come to the fair. I should like to know how
many of the unfortunate inhabitants have already died of such dreadful
diseases.
176
(1)
(2)
T.ESSON LV
229-2
LESSON LV
129. Declension of two words for child.
8ing,
Plur.
nom.
aHTji [dita]
Ai^TH [deti]
gen.
Ath [ditdti]
eft [dat6i]
dat.
HTH [ditati]
H'feTHM'b [d6tam]
ace.
fl [ditd]
6ft [daUi]
instr.
HTCK) [ditataju]
kmi (bmh) [data mi
(datmf)]
prep.
HTH [ditati]
a-feTflX-L [d^tax]
nom.
pe6eH0KT> [rabonAk]
pe6iiTa [rabatA]
gen.
HKa [r9b6nkA]
"L [rabat]
dat.
HKy [rabonku]
aM-L [rabatAm]
ace.
HKa [rabonkA]
t [rabdt]
instr.
HKOM-b [rabonkAm]
aMH [rabdtAiiii]
prep.
HK-fe [rabdnka]
ax-B [rabdtAx]
(3) Of these the singular of (2) and the plural of (1) are in
most frequent use.
Pe6flTa ! is used by officers addressing soldiers.
(4) The declension shown in (2) is typical of the names of
young of animals. (Of. Group 10, Par. 77.)
230. Many names of peoples, of classes or ranks, end in -anHHt,
-HHHHt, -HHt. In the singular they are regular. The plural
endings are
-(aH)e, -(aH)'b, -(aH)aMT>, -(an)!,, -(aH)aMH, -(aH)ax'b
or
-HHC, etc. (Cf. Group 11, Par. 77.)
Such words are :
6ojirapHHT>, ape [bAtgdrin, dfa], Bulgar
aHrjiHqaHHHTb, dne [angiitjdmn, dna], Englishman
naTqaHHHt, ane [ddtjanin, Ana], Dane
flBopHHHH-L, HHe [dvAranin, rdna], noble
rpajKflaHAHT., ane [grA3dAnfn, dna], burgher
M'fen^aHiiHT), ane [liiajtjanin, dna], small townsman
KpecTbiiHHH'b, Ahq [krastjdmn, jdna], peasant
xpHCTlaHJ^Ht, ane [xristJAnfn, jdna]. Christian
Typical feminine form :
Gojir^pKa; anrJiHq^HKa [bAtgdrkA, angiitJdnkA]
231 ^ LESSON LV 177
231. The verb ji;aBaTi>, naxb, to give, is irregular.
Present tense of HaBaTb is
^aI5, eiiib, etc. [dAJii, dAJ 6J],
but the imperative is
aae^fi, ^ftxe [dAval, dAvdIta].
Future tense of flaxb is
jtaMT) [dam], aanib [da J], AacTi) [dast], HaA^M-B [dAdfm], ^xe [dAdfta],
Hafl^TT. [dAdiit],
and tbe imperative is
Aaft [dal], n^iiTe [daita]
The imperative pjaBaii is frequently used with an infinitive in the
sense of let us, e.g.
Jl^aB^ti ^HT^Tb [dAvdl tjitd^t], Let us do some reading.
Vocabulary
CJiyr^, iky -^H {masc.) [stuga], servant cepaue, a, d (^itt) [s^rtsa], heart
caMOBapt [sAmAvdr], tea-urn KOJi'feHO, a, h [kAlsiiA], knee
SapHHi), a, 6ape [barin], master ocTaJibHoii [AstA^noI], remaining
maji^Hi. [Jatun], young scamp ^OBOJlbHO [dAvo^nA], sufficiently,
npnpoaa [prirodA], nature fairly, rather
npHx6>KaH {adj. inform) [prix659J9], KaK6ii-HH6yAb [kAkoi-nibii^t], some
ante-room, corridor or other
BopoTa {also accent on a) {neut. pi.) np6cT0 [prostA], simply
[vAr6tA], gate caajiiH [ssadi], from behind
CTopoHd {accent on ct6 in ace. sing. hb to [na t6], not that, if not that, or
and nom. pi.) [stAiAnd], side else
JiejK^HKa [i83dnkA], bench beside HeTaKT>[ri^ tak], not in the right way
the stove paByM^excH [rAzum^jatsA], it is
K^qa [ktitjA], hap, lot, group understood, of course
Verbs
(1) Perfective formed with prefix
(no)6oJiTaTb I A [(pA)bAttd^t], to chatter
(no)cT^BHTb (bjik), Hmb) [(pA)stdvit], to set, put, stand (trans.)
(no)cTOHTb (lb, limb) [(pA)stAJd^t], to stand (intrans.)
(no)jiK)6HTb (6jii5, ^nuih) [(pA)lubit], to love
(no)MHpHTb (lb, limb) [(pA)mirit], to reconcile, make peace between
(MMpi) [riiir], peace)
(no)cHji;'feTb (JK^, anmb) [(pA)sid6^t], to sit
. (no, 3a)BopHaTb (f, uuih) [(pA, zA)vArtJd^t], to grumble, growl
(B3)HpeMaTb (<MJiib, eMJiemb) [(vz)dr9md^t], to doze, slumber
(y)BUJikrh I A [(u)viddit], to see
M
178 LESSON LV 23i
(2) aTb, HTb
j sacxaBJiflTb I A [zAstAviaH], to cause, get, make, oblige
\3acTaBHTb (bjik), BHinb) [zAstdvit]
ocTaBJiiixb [AstAvia^t], to leave, abandon
nocTaBJiHTb [pAstAvia^t], to set, put on
(3) Imperfective long perfective short {see Par. 232)
rnoHMCTdTb I A [pAdmeta^t], to sweep up
(noHMecTii (exy, enib)^ [pAdmasti]
fo6BHBaTb I A [Abvivd^t], to twine round, embrace
\o6BHTb (o6oBbK), enib) [Abvi't]
rnocMaxpHBaTb I A [pAsmdtrivAt], to look on things about you
^nocMOTp-feTb (k), -^HUib) [pAsmAtr^^t]
{ycxpaHBaxb [ustraivAt], to arrange, organize
ycTpoHTb (610, HUib) [ustroit]
(4) Perfective in nyxb
(noKHHaxb I A [pAkidd^t], to give up, leave
\noKHHyxb (y, euib) [pAkinut]
(5) Different Stems
/yxoanxb (JK^, oflHinb) [uxAdit], to go away
\yiixH (jif, eiiib) [uiti]
f npoBoanxb (>K^, anuib) [prAVAdit], lit. to lead through, pa^s, spend (time)
\npoBecxH (ejif, eiiib) ^ [prAvasti]
Exercises
A. Translate: Ji-feHHBBm Cjiyra
JI-feHiiBbitt ox-b npnpoabi, 0HT> ocxajibH6e BpeMH HH^ero ne A'fejiajix>.
On-b He aaBaji-b ced'fe xpy^a hh ^ nocxaBHXb caMOBapa, hh ^ noflMecxii
iJ7 nojioB-b. On-bi HJiH jipcMaji-b B-b npHXOJKeii, hjih yxoAHJi-b 6oJixaxb
BT> KyxHK); He^ x6, xaK-b no n'fejibiMx> nacaM-b cxoHJi-b y Bopox-b n
nocMaxpHBaji-b na Bc-fe cxopoHbi. Oht, Bopqaji-b BCHKin pasx., KaKx>
rojiocX) Capnna 3acxaBJi^jn> ero noKnaaxb jiemanKy. HecMOxp)i
na Bce ^xo, oht> 6biJix> aoBOJibno MarKaro n aoSparo cepana. Onx*
jiK)6Hjn> flame npoBo^nxb BpeMH cii fl-fexbMH. Ha flBop-fe, y Bopox-b,
er6 ^acxo BHflajin cx> Kyqeii fl-fexen. Ohi> hxx Mnpiix-b, ycxpanBaexX)
i^rpbi, 6jih npocxo cHfliixx> c-b hhmh, BSfiB-b^ oflHoro na 03h6 KOJi-feno,
flpyroro na npyroe, a csaflH m^io ero oSoBbexx, enie KaKofi-nndyab
maji^m> pynaMH.
Adapted from 06^6U0B'b ,
by FonqapoBX)
* For past tense see List A, Par. 239. ^ neither . . . nor . . .
^ ' Having taken,'' from BSHXb, to take.
231 LESSON LV 179
(a) Proverbial Sayings
He ocTaBJiHH [AstAvidi] oxixa h M^Tepn na cTapocTH [staiAsti]
Jii^TT), H Bor-b Te6fl He ocTaeHT'b, Do not abandon father and mother in their
old agCf and God ivill not abandon you.
Kto npaBJibi iimex-B, Toro Bon. dimex-b [sijtjat]. Who seeks truth,
him Ood will find {seek out).
KaKX. Borx> no Jiioa^ft, xaKi> ox6ux> ao n'fex^ft, As Ood is to men, so
is a father to his children.
MajieHBKoe ahxh Maxepn rope; GojiBuioe ahxh oxiiy 3a66xa
[zAbotA], A young {little) child is the mother'' s sorrow : an older (big) child is
the father'' s care.
3a yqenaro [utJonAVA] Byxx HeyqeHbixi [n9utJ6nix] Aaibxx>, One
instructed person is worth two ignorant ones.
Tepninie Aaexx. yM'fenie [tgrp^nja uih^nje], Patience brings power
[understanding).
B. Translate into Russian :
(1) The rich burghers would sometimes like to be [Lesson XL VIII] nobles,
and poor workmen often wish to be burghers.
(2) Surely those two lazy servants are not always standing chattering in
the corridor ? Would you like to know what they are chattering about ?
Perhaps they are grumbling because their master makes them get up so early.
Make them go to bed. When their master is kind, few industrious servants
will grumble.
(3) Let us sweep this dirty floor. I thought it had been swept already.
Give me what you are holding in your hand. I am not holding anything. I'll
give the poor man what he needs. Give him a few silver coins.
(4) As he was rather kind-hearted [of a fairly kind heart], you might
[could] often have seen him sitting near the iron gate, playing with his master's
little children. One would sit [sat] on one knee, a second would be on his other
knee, while (a) third young scamp would embrace his great thick neck from
behind.
(5) He is always looking about him on all sides. Look at [na with acc.'\
him ! If you had looked at what [xo, qxo] was going on out of doors, you
would have known that he was not a bad man, in spite of the fact that [xo,
Hxo] he was lazy by nature. He has just been arranging the children's games,
but he did not do it right. I wish you would make peace [between] those
three children.
(6) I wonder why [I should wish to know] he always makes me leave the
bench when I am dozing in the comfortable kitchen. He'll make you go
away. They will oblige us to go to one of [H3X>] those old houses that still
stand on the meadow behind the wooden church. Do not leave your kind
old master. _ ^
180 LESSON LVI 232
(7) How do you spend so much time at home when it is raining and it is
impossible to work outside ? I like to play with the child ; I study a little,
of course not too much ; or I repair the furniture. I should have spent the
whole day in bed, if I had not been well [healthy]. I want her to spend the day
at home ; I want her to sweep the floor, to prepare the dinner and then to knit
stockings for her father. Do you know whether she has put on the samovar ?
(8) You have lived a long time [already Uve long] with us in this cold,
dark forest ; if you went away now you would never know what might [ = could
{cond.)] happen to [CB, instr.] all your friends. If she goes away, what will
you say to her ? I do not want her to go away. She goes away every day
at six o'clock. Go away. Do not go away.
LESSON LVI
232. In vocabularies LII-LV appear a number of verbs
under * Long and short ' belonging to a very numerous class. The
typical verb of this class has in tbe perfective aspect a form com-
posed of prefix plus simple verb, and from the perfective is formed
the imperfective infinitive by adding to tbe stem tbe termination
(i>i)BaTb or (H)BaTL, the stem-vowel occasionally being modified.
Such words are :
(1) (Ha)nHcdTi>, to tvrite (5) (no)cTp6HTL, to build, construct
fonucsLTh (perf.), to describe TycTpdHTb, to arrange
\onHCbiBaTb (imperf.) tycTpaHBaxb
(2) (no)piJiTb, to dig . (6) (c)BHTb, to twine
/sapiJiTb, to bury f o6BHTb, to embrace
\3apbiBaTb 1o6BHBaTb
(3) (no)KpiJiTb, to cover (7) KaadxbCH, to appear
j OTKpbiTb, to open /noKasaxb, to show
\OTKpbIBaTb \nOK^3bIBaTb
TsaKpiiTb, to close rpaacKaaaxb, to relate
tsaKpbiBaTb tpascKasbiBaTb
(4) (no)npocHTb, to request
/cnpocHTb, to ash
\cnpamHBaTb
This type of imperfective indicates that the action takes place
again and again (cf. Voc. XIX, cnpauiHBaTb and cnpocHTb) or
occupies some duration of time.
23a-235 LESSON LVI 181
233. The verbs (no)Hafl;'feflTBCH [(pA)nAdejotsA], to hope, and
(no)6oflTLca [pAbAJa^tsA], to fear, have the same construction as
xoT^Tb (cf . Par. 224 (2)), i.e. they are used with the conditional, e.g.
H HaA'feiocb, htoSbi ona npnuiji^ [ja nAddjus, Jtobi Ana prijtd], I hope
she comes.
Owb 6oiiTCfl, ht66li h hc ndHflJii) [on bAitsA, Jt6bi ja na ponAt], He
is afraid I shall understand.
Note the He in the last example.
234. If the subordinate clause following 6oflTLCfl is negative,
use the future perfective with conj. hto, e.g.
Owb doiiTCH, HTO fl He noiiM^ [on bAftsA, Jto ja na pAlmii], He is
afraid I shall nx)t under sta7id.
235. Distinguish clearly between caMBiH (used before nouns
with the meaning of same, very, and before adjectives to form the
superlative) ^ and caMt, the emphatic pronoun (meaning self).
CaMHH is decHned Uke any adjective in -hh.
CaMT) is dechned hke o^HHt (see Par. 107 (c)). Examples :
Oh^ caMa He noHHMdex'B [And sAma na pAiiimdjat], She herself does
not understand.
GaMO co66k) paayM-feeTCH [sAm6 sAboju rAzum^jatsA], That understands
itself of itself, i.e. it is, of course, understood ; it goes without saying.
but
TOJKe caMoe [tosa sdmAJa], (just) the same thing ;
B-B caMOMT> a-feji-fe [fsdmAm d6ia], in very deed ;
c^MBifi Ji^qmiti npHM-fept [sdmi tiitji priihsr], the best example.
VOCABULAKY
rCHcpaJi'b [ganardt], general BCibAy [fstidu] or BCSff^ [vazd^],
nox6ji;'L [pAxot], campaign everywhere
HenpiiiTejib [liaprijdtai], enemy He B-fepHO? [na vsrnA], not tru ? i.e.
b6hcko, a, a [voiskA], army is it not so ?
Bpari>, a, ii [vrak], enemy HcnpaBHbiii [isprdvni], correct, exa^it
pa3CKa3'B,Bi [rAsskds], toZe,mirra^*o?i CM'fejiBift [srfisti], 6oiW
cJi^JKSa {gen.pl. e6'B)[stu3bA],5emce BCceJiBiii [vasoti], glad, jolly
Kama [kdjA], gruel, porridge cojifl^TCKlH [sAtddtski], soldierly
m^TKa (OKT)) [jntkA], joke bo6hhbih [vAJsni], warlike, military
uxa, m^fi (/em. pi.) [Jtji, |tJ6i], h.t.h. =HTaK'BAaji'fee[itakddiaja],
cabbage-soup and so forth
CTOHTB Ha nacaxT) [stAJd^t nA tJAsdx], to be {stand) on guard.
1 Cf. Voc. X, Pars. 186, 197.
182 LESSON LVI 235
Verbs
(1) Perfective formed with prefix
(no)6HTB (6bH), eiiib) [(pA)bit], to heat
(no)HiicTHTb (nmy, iActhuib) [(pA)tjistit], to clean
(no)Han^flTbCH (tio, feeuib) [(pA)nAd6J8tsA], to hope
(na, no)cM'femiiTb (;^, HUib) [(ha, pA)smoJit], to make laugh
(Ha)yqHTbCH {dat. of svhject learned) [(nA)utjitsA], to learn, study
(Bbi)y^HTbCfl ^ {dat. of subject learned) [(vi)utjitsA], to learn, learn off
(o)6e3noK6HTbCH (lo, HUib) [(A)b9spAk6itsA], to put oneself about, take
thought
/noK6ft (m.), rest
i noKottHbiii [pAkoini], peaceful, at rest, deceased
\(c)noK6fiHOH HOHH I [(s)pAk6inAl notji], good night //
(npo)cJiyH{HTb (f, -^HUib) [(prA)stu3it], to serve
(c)KOMaHAOBaTb (ayio, euib) (gov. instr. case) [(s)kAmandAVAt], to
command
(2) axb, HTb
fnocxynaTb I A [pAstupa^t], to step, act, behave, enter (upon)
\nocTynHTb (njiib, ^nniub) [pAstupit]
/noS'femAaTb I A [pAb85dd^t], to conquer, overcome
tno6ifeflHTb (-hmjif, 'femiuib) [pAbadit]
(3) Long and short
/oniicBiBaTB I A [ApisivAt], to describe
\onHcaTb (m;^, ^uieuib) [Apisa^t]
{CHHTaxb I A [stjita^t], to count, consider, regard as
cqecTb (co^xy', enib) [stjest]
/HaHHH^Tb I A [iiAtJina^t], to begin
\usmkTh (HHy, Henib) [nAtja^t]
(4) Different stems
{npHXOfliiTb [prixAdit], to come
npHTTii [priti]
Exercises
A. Translate :
CyBopoBt
MaJibHHKt p^HO HaqajiTb yqiiTbCH h cb p^hhhx'b ji'feT'B nojiioSiijn,
KHiirH, BT, KOTOpbrXT) OHliCBIBaJIHCB BOfiHBI, nOXO^BI, H.T.A. IlflTH^A-
^ Perfectives in bu are accented on the prefix.
235 LESSON LVI 183
AaTH ji-feTt MOJioA6fi CyB6poB'B nocTyn^Jit na so^HHyio cji;^>K6y h
fl^BHTb JI-feTT, npOCJiyJKHJI-b npOCTMMT. [aS a] COJIAaTOM-b.
H6 6biJio cojiAaxa HcnpaeH'fee ero : OHt BCTaB^jn> panbuie ApyrHX-L ,
caMt qncTHJi-b ceG'fe canorii h njiaxbe h cxoiijii. na qacaxi. bo BCiiKyio
nor6y. JKHJi-b OH-b BM'fecx'fe ch npocxiiMH cojinaxaMH h ifejn> coji^ax-
CKifi mn H Kamy; CbiJiii Bcer^a CM-feji-b h Becejii. h CM-fem^jix. cboiixt.
xoBapHmeii BecejibiMH ui^xKaMH h paacKaaaMH. Bcfe jik)66jih er6.
Korj];a oht* cxaji-b o^ni^^poMX) h nanaji'b KOManaoBaxb coji^axaMH,
BcioAy Ha BOHH-fe OH-b noS-femaajii. nenpiflxejifl.
Pe6Hxa roBopHJiT. GyBdpoB-b cojiaaxaM-b, Bceraa mjivne Bne-
pea-b Ha Bpara. He 6e3noK6ttxecb o xoM'b, CKOjibKO nepe^-b BaMH
Henpiiiiejieft. Bh B-fe^b npHuijiii 6HXb HX-b, a ne cHHx^xb.
From HexBepxafl Kniira ajih Hx^hIh ,
by H. G. MnxecB'b
(KaaaHb, 1907)
B. Translate into Eussian :
(1) The brave general was at that time only a private [Lesson XL VIII]
in the Russian army. I thought that the Russians regarded [Lesson XL VIII]
him as their best officer. Why did he call him their weakest general ?
(2) Don't beat the poor children. She was always beating them. I wish
she would not beat them. Let her beat them, if she likes. If she often beat
them, they would not love her.
(3) I want the same servant to clean the children's black boots and I hope
that she will clean all the windows and the utensils in the kitchen too. She
is cleaning them now, I am told.
(4) Some of that boy's friends are always laughing ; he keeps them laugh-
ing all day. It would be a pity if the silly boy made his little friends laugh
on that occasion.
(5) Surely your youngest brother has not learned his lesson yet ? Yes,
he has already learned it by heart. Has he been studying the Russian lan-
guage [dat. case] ?
(6) If you put yourself about over that business, it would be a pity. It
will be a pity, if you put yourself about. Don't put yourself about. I should
be glad if she took [gave herself] a little more trouble when I tell her to put
on the samovar and to sweep the floor. Perhaps she did not understand
what you said.
(7) Perhaps your eldest son finished his service long ago. Do you not
understand that that dark pit served the animal as a dwelling ? I did not
understand you.
(8) Of course, as an officer, he had command of large numbers of private
soldiers.
184 LESSON LVI 235
(9) Would you not like to know how he would act, if you told him whai
had happened to [ct, instr.] his rich old aunt ? When will you enter military
service ? Really, I scarcely know myself yet. I hope that I may soon enter
the service, but I am afraid that I may not enter it till Christmas.
(10) Is, it really true that that general always defeated his numerous
enemies ? He would always defeat them, if he had enough soldiers.
(11) If you ask those two intelhgent children, they will describe fairly
well what took place. Describe it to me.
(12) You must never count your enemies. Do not count them. I hope
he won't start counting them to-day. If he does, we shall not come home
till late [come only late].
(13) I am afraid the lazy boys will not get up before nine o'clock. We
always used to get up early in the morning, but to-day we did not get up till
eight. Stand up. Sit down, please.
(14) When the four httle boys came into the wooden hut, they found
their father and mother weaving. They begin to work very early. When
will he begin to repair the old arm-chair ? He has already begun, hasn't he ?
We shall begin a little later. Begin now, if you Uke. Why must I begin ?
PREPOSITIONS
185
236.
PREPOSITIONS
EMPLOYED IN LESSONS I-LVI
With Oeniiive
dJiHS'L, near
BM^CTO, instead of
B63Ji'fe, near, beside
KpoM'fe, besides
MHMO, past
HanpoTHB'L, opposite
6kojio, about, approximately
n6AJi'fe, beside
nocji-fe, after
np6THB'b, against
(The words from SjiHSt
np^JK^e, before (of time)
caa^H, from behind
6 est, without
Jifl, for
flO, up to, till, before
usii, out of, from
M^JKJty (cf. instr.), between
OTb, away from, from
Ch (co) (cf. instr.), /rom, ojf
y, at, near, with
to cs^AH are also adverbs.)
With Dative
Kt (ko), to, txywards
no (cf. ace. and prep.), over, on, along, according to
BTb, into (cf. prep.)
3a, behind, in exchange for, in return
for (cf. instr.)
Ha, on to (cf. prep.)
HecMOTpii Ha, in spite of
o, oOT), 66o, against (cf. prep.)
n^peai,, before (place) (cf. instr.)
With Accusative
no, up to, at the rate of (cf. dat. and
prep.)
no^t, under (cf. instr.)
npo, about, concerning
CKB03b which has not occurred means
through
H^peat, through, across, in (of time)
M^WKHy, between (cf. gen.)
CL (co), with (cf. gen.)
With Instrumental
3a, uowby ndpe^t (cf. ace.)
Hajti), over, above
With Prepositional
no, after (cf. dat. and ace.)
npn, near, at, in the time of
BT,, in (cf. ace.)
Ha, on (cf. ace.)
o, oST), 66o, concerning (cf. ace.)
_^ofe. 3a, n^pe^t, noaii govern ace. or msfr.
Bt, Ha, o govern ace. or ^e^.
CT, governs gen., ace. (=a5 in comparisons), or instr,
no governs dat., ace, or prep.
M^JKjuy governs gen. or tW^r.
186
PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVE
287
237. PREDICATIVE FORM OF ADJECTIVES
Observe that o or e is inserted very frequently in the mascuUne
singular.
Other forms in brackets indicate alternatives.
The neuter may generally be used adverbially, though the accent
sometimes changes.
(1) Feminine termination accented^ e.g.
npocToii : npocT'L, npocxa, npocTO, np6cTbi
Similar are :
Sji-feaHHii (ch-l)
S-feflHbiH (en-b)
C-fejibiii (6)
BCcejibiH (Beceji-b)
BHflHblH (cH-b; 6, li)
BKy^CHblH (CHt)
BbicoKiii (6, h)
rjiasKiH (OKT* ; 6)
rjiySoKift (6, A)
rjiynbift
rHHJi6ft
rOJIOaHbitt (CHT))
rojibifi (6)
rp6MKiH (OK-b)
rpjisHbift (cH-b)
aiiKitt
HJIHHHblft (liHCH'b)
AOJiriii (on.)
aypnott (cH-b)
a^mHbiii (cHT.)
majiKift (oK-b)
jKapKiii (oK-b)
jKejiTbift (6)
JKHBOii
mnpHbiii (cH-b)
sejieHbift
Kp^CHblH (CHT, ; 6, li)
KpOTKiii (OKT))
Kp^rjibiii
Kp-fenKitt (OKT.)
mcjikIh (okt.)
MepTBblfi (6, li)
Mlijiblfi
MOKpblii
MOJIOAOtt (MOJIOflT.)
HH3Kift (OKT.)
HOBblH
H^JKHblfi (CH-b)
njioxoii
nOJIHblH (OH-b)
npaBbiii
npocToii
npHMofi
nycToii
paBHbiii (eiTb)
p66Kitt (oK-b)
poBHbiH (en-b)
p-feaKift (OKT.)
ciijibHbiii (cHJieH'b ; or (2))
CKpOMHblii (CHl.)
CK^qHblH (CHT.)
cjiaSbitt
cjnJimHbiii (en-b)
cn'fejibitt
CTapbiti
cyxoft
cfepbitt (or (2))
TBcpjiibiii
Tenjibitt (xeneji-b ; or (2))
Tiixiii
xpyaHbift (bhtj)
^3Kitt (OKTi)
xpa6pbm (a or a)
xyaott
PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVE
187
HepHBiii (eu-b)
H^CTHbitt (em,)
Note. ciiHift : chhb ; A, e, h
(2) Terminations accented, e.g.
H66pbiH : flo6pT>,
SojibHoii (66jieH'b ; o)
Sojibinottl . , .
Be^HKlft /(B^^HK-t; O. ")
BOJIBHblH (BOJlCH'b)
BblCOKift
ropiiqift (e, h)
n66pbiii
KaKOBOH (OB-b)
KOpOTKitt (dTOK-b)
jierKiii (oK-b)
HMaji'b)
MajibiH J ^ ^
qncTHii
iipKift (OKT,)
iicHbift (em,)
no6pa, Ao6p6, aoSpii
MiirKia (oK-b)
6cTpbift (ocTep-b)
CB-feTJibiii (ejiTb)
CHJibHbiii (see (1))
CMifeUIHOH (dH-b)
TCMHblft (ewb)
Tynoii
THJKCJIblii
;^MHbiii (en-b)
XHTpbiii (ep-b)
xopomiii
mnpoKift
(3) Accentuation of the attributive adjective preserved, e.g.
SAOpOBblH : S^OpOB'b, SflOpOBa, SAOpOBO, 3Op6BW
SoraxbiH
BCJiHKOJi'fenHbm (en-b)
BHeaanHbiii (en-b)
BHHM^TejIbHblii (CHTb)
n-fettCTBHTeJIbKblii (CHT.)
HOBOJIbHblH (CHT,)
SflOpOBblfit
3JI0H (aoJiT,), 3Jia, etc.
H3B^CTHHH[ (CHT,)
HHTep^CHblft (eHT,)
HcnpaBHHti (en-b)
KHCJibiii (ejiT. ; or (1))
KpaciiBHft
JlibHHBblfi
JII0663Hblii (CH-b)
M^ajieHHbiil
Morynitt
HCKpaciiBbift
HeCH^CTHblii (CH-b)
OHeBiiflHbm (cH-b)
noKottHbiii (ocH'b)
noK6pHbift (em,)
noJi63Hbiii (em,)
npHJi6?KHbiii (em,)
npiiiTHbift (em,)
(pa^T,)
piiiJKiii
cepAiiTbifl
CKopbiii
CM'fejibiii
cyp6Bbifi
CHacTJiHBbiii
TpyA0JIK)6HBblft
Tpycjii^Bbiii
T-fecHbiii (em,)
yMKacHbiii (eni,)
yibxHbitt (em,)
xiimHbiHi (eni.)
(4) iVo^e. xoJiojXHbiH : xojioaem,, nna, 6 or o, li or bi
xopomeHbKifi : xopomeHeK-b, ^HbKa, etc. {pretty)
CBHToft : CBiixa etc.
188 PREDICATIVE COMPARATIVES 238
238. PREDICATIVE COMPARATIVE IN -E
(1) ENDING IN ->Ke
6ji63Kiii, lame, near H^SKitt, lijKe, low {not high)
rjia^Kii!, ^jkb, smooth p-fej^Kifi, 'hme, rare
rjiySoKift, 6me, deep cxporift, ome, strict
aoporoii, 6>Ke, dear TBepatiH, pme, ^rd
H^iiAKift, ume, fluid ;^3Kifi, ;^JKe, narrow
MOJioflott, 6me, young xyaoii, x^jKe, bad
Note. The stem of the positive ends in -r, -a, -HK, -3K.
(a) n63AHHtt has n63?Ke or nosAH-fee, late.
(2) ENDING IN -me
BbicoKift, Biiime, high cyxoii, 3^me, dry
najiCKlii, Jibme,/ar Ti^xift, i4me, Zot^? {not loud)
ndJiritt, ojibme or oji-fee, long T6HKift, OHbiue, thin
Note. ^The stem of the positive ends in a guttural.
{a) Observe the irregular forms :
xop6mlft, Ji^^Huie, good CT^pbifi, ^pme, old
6ojibm6tt, SoJibuie, large paHHitt, ^Hbine, early
M^jieHbKitt, M^Hbine, little
(3) ENDING IN -me
rycT6fi, ^me, thick, dense TOJiCTbift, 6jime,/a^
npocT6tt, 6me, simple ^iicTbitt, ^me, clean
Note. ^The stem of the positive ends in -ct.
(4) ENDING IN -He
6or^Tbifi, dne, rich Kpyxofi, fne, steep, brusque
r6pbKiii, pne, bitter Kp^nKiii, n^e, strong
rp6MKiH, qe or n-he, loud JierKiii, erqe, light
JKaJiKift, ne or H'he, pitiful m^jikIA, Jibne, fine, shallow
H<apKifi, He, hot MiirKiii, M^irqe, soft
KopoTKifi, one, short p66Kiii, 6qe, timid
KpoTKifi, 6He or othc, gentle lipKlft, pqe, bright
Note. ^The stem of the positive ends in -K or -T.
(a) Observe :
nliKift, anq-fee, wild
(5) Irregular Forms
jnemcBbifi, 6BJie, cheap * TflJKejibiii, Tfl>K6jie or XHJKeji'fee,
mHp6Klii, mnpe, broad heavy
The pronunciation of these forms in -e is simple : the syllable preceding
the termination bears the accent.
239
IREEGULAK VERBS
189
239. A FEW COMMON IRREGULAR VERBS i
A. Some verbs in -ctb, -cth
Infin. Pres. Imperat. Past
(1) (no)BecTH ejify enib ejsjk ejit, d, 6, ii, to lead
KJiacTb any, enib a^Ii ajit, a, o, h, o put, lay
The perfective is noJioJKHTb (JK^, 6jKHmb).
(y)KpacTb '
(no)npiicTb
(2) (BlJl)MeCTH
(3a)i;B'fecTii
(3) (no)rp6cTb
an^, enib ajuk aji-b, a, o, h, to s^eaZ
sijlf, enib flii flJi-b, ^, 6, iky to spin
eTff enib exii ejii>, ^, 6, li, to ^i^eep
i^T^, euib "feTH 'feji'b [jot], ^, 6, li, to bhom
e6f, euih e6A eS^, 6ji^, 6, h, to rot/?
Perfective also rpeSn^Tb.
CKpecTii e6fy enib e6ii
Perfective CKpeSnyTb.
e6T3, 6jid, 6, H, to scrape
(4) (no)HecTH
(no)TpHCTii
(BIj)pOCTH
(5) (npo)KJi;icTb
Infin.
(no)Be3TH
(pa3)rpiJ3Tb
(no)ji^3Tb
ec:^, eiub ecii eciy, cjia, 6, h, to carry
ncf, enib hch HCb [jos], cji^, 6, ili, to sAafce
CT^, enib CTii OCT., ocjid, 6, h, to grow
Huf, enib HHH HJiT), &y o, H, to cwrse
B. Verbs in -3Tb, -3th
Pres. Imperat. Past
esf, euib 636 gs-b, 3Jia, 6, ii, to convey,
carry in a vehicle
bi3^, enib bi3H rpiJis-b, Jia, o, h, to gn^iw
^3y, enib fe3b Ji'fe3'b, Jia, o, h, to climb
C. Verbs in -hb
Infin. Pres. Imperat.
(no)6ep6Hb r^, jKenib ^ ern
(c)jKeqb ry, JKenib ^ jKrn
Future Perfective coJKr;^ etc.
(no)c'feqb K^, Henib ^ 'hK^
(no)T6Hb K^, Henib ^ eKH
Past
enb, rjia, 6, 6, to jfcee^, preserve
jKer-b, jKFJia, o, h, to bum
"feK-b, "feKJia, o, H, to cw^, ^0^
CK-b, Kjia, 6, A, tofiow
Infin.
jieqb
CfeCTb
D. The perfective verbs jichb and cifecTb
Fut. Imperat. Past
Jiflry, iijKemb Jifln>, Hrxe Jien,, Ji^, 6, li, to Zie down
cjiny, enib cit^fc, bxe cifejfb, a, o, h, to sit down
The Imperfectives are JiOJKiATbCfl and cafli^TbCH.
Cf. Par. 156.
2 Present tense like that of Mo^b : ry (ky), wenn. (qenn.) e<c., ryn. (Kyrb).
EXAMPLES OF RUSSIAN SCRIPT
"Glie Writtetv AlpK^Vec
A a iJ^a C c ^ <?
E e /^V U u <^/^ 1?// ^ ^
^^ n aS ^ a-
n u/l/ln e e <^ ^
190
EUSSIAN SCRIPT 191
Wo^U from Sficdon^ VUl -XX
o^/o^uii^^ ru:H^.^^u^^i^^ Al(2^^aJc^^^^
f^rmdjty, ^l^Ciy, Jl/l^uc^, ^Cl^t^'l^
z ^drancu^, ct/c^ciy, Jl^^uc^, ^^^^<
3 ^aci/c:i^ c^i^^^H^^ /:^a^^ ^M^^^^^ui^^iey
xi. I 0<ye^a^,/7i^7Uy,zyi^,^/n^^/i^^^
xii. 1 y^i
t^^/^ j^i^fm^^ n^fii/ii^^ /yz^ci^mtf
192
RUSSIAN SCRIPT
t^^^'
xvi wa^M/^i^^, 9j^fe; ^^^^, ^^^^ ^
XViii U^i^^ ^U^a^ ^/^^/pt/ ci^a^4^^^^
r^i^^i^a^i/^ /^f^^ a:^^^^ ^^^^v^ '
Sen.ibmce^ in It^ic^
jVotn Lessons I --XXXt
KUSSIAN SCRIPT
193
in
iv
V
vi
Mil
viii
X\
Xiii
XV
xvi
xviii
xix
xxi
xxh
xxvii
^m^^^u^{Z /yiAuc^o/ az/afUytc
xxviii J/loM^^
//^/Ui4^uS ^Oc^e^^t:^
XXXI
N
PHONETIC TRANSCRIPT
Exercise I
(1) starid8d(t). (2) naSAtsts. (3) on stabi stari tJetAvsk. (4)
bsK xlsp i tSorni xlsp. (5) yaj sin sdni mAtAdoi ma^tjik. (6)
tSorni iss. (7) on ptAXoi ma^itjik. (8) naj sin gtupi, a vaj sin
umni ma^tjik. (9) stari dom. (10) naj det 49g!iipi tjatAvek.
Exercise II
A. (1) vaj dst bit stari tJotAvsk. (2) zimoi on lAbotAt liamnogA ;
on spat. (3) ja xaiaJo znai tjorni dom, gds on sit zimoi. (4) naj
Atsts bit n9 tAkoi stabi tJotAvsk. (5) IstAm on XAdit vlss, gds on
mnogA lAbotAt. (6) J9v6 sin bit umni md^tjik. (7) IstAm on igrat
i prigAt. (8) nA on bit nogtupi ma^tjik. (9) gds on igrat zimoi ?
(10) ti namnogA rAbotAt zimoi ; ti n9 XAdit vlss. (11) stAt ma^ltjik
jst bsti xlsp. (12) ti XArAjo znat naj dom. (13) ti J9v6 znat.
(14) moi mAtAdoi sin znat tvoi dom. (15) vot moi sin. (16) vot on.
B. VAprosi. (1) xto bit stari tj9tAvsk ? (2) Jto on dstAt zimoi ?
(3) kak ja znat dom, gds ^'il vaj dst ? (4) xto ns bit tAkoi stabi ? (5)
kuda on XAdit ? (6) kAgda on XAdit vlss 1 (7) kAkof bit J9v6 sin?
(8) Jto on dstAt ? (9) Jto jet mdltSik ? (10) znat li ja tvoi dom ?
Exercise III
B. (1) ma^tjik dot stAriku tot tjomi xlsp. (2) tvoi dobri Atsts
pAkAzat mns tvoi sad (t) i AgArot. (3) vaj vnuk miis skAzdt stA.
(4) on rii9na n9 znat. (5) ja t9ba n9 znat. (6) J9v6 umni sin
pAkAzdt t9bs moi stari dom. (7) ja pAkAzat sinu bsti dom bratA.
(8) stA ns bsti, a tjorni xlsp. (9) ja dot J9mu vaj sir. (10) on
J9v6 jst. (11) jix brat gAVArit XArAjo pAruski, ua on gAVArit tAgdd
6tS9ii ptoxA pAongiiski. (12) gds yaj Atsts? (13) on t9pe^f zdes (s).
(14) IstAm siini mus'ik XAdit vlss; on tam rAbotAt. (15) tvoi
194
PHONETIC TRANSCRIPT 195
vnuk ;pAkAzat miis AgAiot Atsa. (16) naj druk bit tAgda niAtAdoi,
a on tope^i" stari tJatAvek. (17) ja xaiaJo znat stciri dom, gde s'it
starik. (18) ti nikAgda no rAbotAt.
Exercise IV
A. (1) dlA maUtJikA. (2) basstArika. (3) udnigA. (4) unavo.
(5) dlA riiand ; u nix ; dk toba. (6) dlA kAvo ? (7) u kAVO ?
(8) bos taba. (9) u Atsd. (10) dU Atsa. (11) gds 31! dobri stari
druk Atsa ? (12) Jto jomti dot tvoi Atsts ? (13) Adnajdi on dat
tJotAvsku XAroJi bsK dom. (14) komu on skAzat stA? (15) IstAm
stAt ma^ltjik bit tJastA u musika. (16) tAgda vaj limni druk sit
zdes (s). (17) zimoi sin tarn lAbotAt bos Atsa. (18) ti xaiaJo znat
stA. (19) brat Atsa skAzat jim stA. (20) kuda ma'-ItSik tJastA
XAdit IstAm ? (21) moi niAtAdoi vnuk tope^r u ihona. (22) xto bit
tAgda u toba ? (23) u ihona zdes (s) dobri druk. (24) u stAVA
mu3ika bit tjorni xlsp. (25) sir ne dlA toba, a dlA nix. (26) on
nikAgdd no igrat u ihona.
Exercise V
A. (1) bos goroJA. (2) dlA stArika. (3) dva stArikd. (4) u
tsArd. (5) bos AlenA. (6) tri goroJA. (7) bA^ljoi SArdi. (8) xrdbri"
goroi. (9) silnitsa^f. (10) zdArovi md^ltjik. (11) mAtAdoi sin tSArd.
(12) u tobd bAgdti druk.
B. (1) bsdni musik zndt goroJA. (2) xrdbri goroi dobri tJotAvsk.
(3) zimoi stdri rAbotnik no tJdstA XAdit fsad (t). (4) IstAm vaj bA^lnoi
sin sit zdes (s). (5) gds on tope^r ? (6) u Atsd tri sinA ; vot Ani !
(7) u mu5ikd tope^r otjon mdlonki AgArot bos SArdJA ; on lis bAgdti, ua
otjon bsdni tJotAvsk. (8) raz (ras) silni tsa^r dot goroju bA^Soi dom.
(9) u StArikd tSofiro vnukA. (10) u novo bA^noi sin. (11) Adin
sin tsA^rd gAVArit xArA^o pAfrAntsuski i pAniski, a drugoi gAVArit
to^kA pAruski. (12) ja jovo nikAgdd no znat. (13) gds sit bA^ijoi
Ale^n ?
Exercise VI
E. (1) tjotiro Astd. (2) bos jotSihond. (3) dlA Astd. (4) Astu.
(5) bit tAgdd otjon silni i bAgdti tsd^r ; u novo bit bA^ljoi dvArsts.
(6) u tsArd bit druk-goroi. (7) tsa^r dot goroju dva domA i
Wijoi Iss. (8) istAm on xAtst gAnd^t AlenA. (9) bsdni musik
pAkAzdt jomu tri AlenA. (10) mdlonki sin xAtst tjdstA igrd^t, a
196 PHONETIC TRANSCKIPT
javo Atsts na xAtst. (11) on bit nobAgati tJatAvsk; u liavo matA
xlebA, nA on sejat mnogA jatjriiena i Afsa. (12) zimoi on na mog
lAbotAt. {13) siini tsa^r xAtet kupit jevo malonki dom. (14) u
musika toHkA dva sinA ; Adin sin mnogA lAbotAt^, drugoi liikAgda
nitSavo na dstAt, nA on jet XAioSi xlsp u Atsa. (15) Atsts nikAgda
n9 XAtet da^t jamu xlsbA. (16) stArik dat Astii mnogA Afsa. (17) u
novo nst jotjihana. (18) ja mog to^kA matA pAnima^t.
EXEKCISE VII
A. (1) fkusnAJa jabtAkA. (2) sini tsvst nsbA. (3) siiieja mora.
(4) \)b\aJ9 nsbA. (5) spstAJa jabtAkA. (6) malankAJa zdanija. (7)
xAroJi sir i xAroJoja pitjo. (8) vot tvAJo spstAJa jabUkA. (9) naja
XAro^aja kuSAiija. (10) kistAJo pitjo. (11) vaja Wljoja sato. (12)
stA zdanja bA^ljoi dvArsts, kAtori dot garoju siini tsa^r. (13) malanld
sin drtigA bit zdArovi ma^ltjik; on jst stA bA^Joja jabtAkA, kAtorAJa
ti mns dot. (14) pAtom on xAtst igra^t. (15) ma^ltjik igrat i
prigAt ; vot pAtJamu ja nikAgdd na mog spa^t.
Exercise VIII
B. (1) sini tsvst morA i nsbA mns otjan nrdvitsA ; bA^ijoi Iss mns
nrdvitsA, nA vdja malaiikAJa sato mns otjan mdtA nrdvitAS. (2)
savodnA Adin tJatAvsk xAtst vidat madvedA vlasti. (3) knas, druk
tsATO, gAnat ihadvedA. (4) stA jamii skAzat musik. (5) pAtom
ja vidat stAVA tJatAvskA fsAdu musikd. (6) ksASAlenju u musikd
bA^noi malanki sin ; savodnA on bit u stAVA stArika, kAtori fsAdti
lAbotAt. (7) fkusnAJa kujAnja jamii nrdvitAs, pAtAmtiJtA on XAtst
jest. (8) bAHjoja zdanja, kAtorAJa ti tam vidat, dvArsts knazA.
(9) moi druk na domA tape^i*. (10) ksASAlenju ja javo Atsd nigds na
mog vidat ; on nikAgda ns bit domA. (11) vot on tape^r.
Exercise IX
C. (1) mAgutJi knaz sihinistrAm. (2) fkusni xlsp bas mastA. (3)
spstAJa jabtAkA jamu nanravitAs. (4) javo dobri druk sit zalasAm.
(5) Adno ki-estA stAJdtA pefat Aknom, a drugoja stAJdtA u stAtd (perat
stAtom). (6) stAt stot na stoit tSafira rubla. (7) malanki ma^ltjik
igrat stAvdri^tJam fsAdu. (8) bsdni sin stAJdt sAtsom perat etim
Aknom. (9) sksm on Jot kmofu ? (10) u ihand bit tAgda kdniani
PHONETIC TRANSCKIPT 197
doihik ssArajem. (11) skoUkA stoitA stA doravanAJa kr^sU ? (12) u
kAiAia bit kiAsivi sad (t).
Exercise X
B. (1) Adin silni tsa^f stroit bA^ijoi kaiiiani dvArets. (2) perat etim
zdanjom bit otjan krAsm sad (t). (3) ha pri samAm vjezda fsat stAJat
malanki dafavani doriiik. (i) stA nonravitAs tsAru. (5) vetAm
doihika 5it bsdni mus'ik, a snim javo Atets. (6) istAm tsa^r tJdstA
gulat sihinistrAm fsAdti. (7) ras on gAVArit stAvariStJam Atom
musiks. (8) nAkAnsts tsa^r pAstdt ihinistrA kmusiku, Jtobi on kupit
stari doriiik. (9) kAgda riiinistr pAjot vAgArot, tJatAvek ne bit domA ;
on lAbotAt tAgda vlasii. (10) stArik tagsa ns bit domA, a toHkA
otjan maianki sin musika bit zAstAtom. (11) kujAt tSorni xlsp
smastAm, a ksA3Alenju tot maHtJik na mog skAza't riiinistru, gds tAgda
bit Atsts. (12) Jto detAt ? naiza kupit doihikA.
Exercise XI
B. uriiana ; baskAVo ? Atjom ? ZAmnoju ; utaba ; basnavo ; stem ?
Anom ; ftabs ; stAboju ; nAtJom ? Akom on gAVArit ? Atjom ? kArnu
on stA gAVArit ? setim ; kstAmu ; kAkAvo bitA stA zdanja ? paro,
kAtorAJa lasatA tam ; maianki dom, kAtori stAJat pri vjesda ; kAkof
bit javo sin ? ti pAjot knamu ; tjsm ? ksASAlenju ; .ja nikAgdd na
skAZat StAVA.
Exercise XIII
A. (1) u sAbaki kusok riiasA. (2) bstAJa tdpA kojki. (3) staiAJa
nanA dsvAtSki. (4) u navo bAgatAJa babuJkA. (5) dobrAJa ruskAJa
damA sdsvAtJkAi fsAdu. (6) ZAtJem tJornAJa kq^kA nAstAls ? (7)
Ana tape^i" nA pAtii. (8) ja vidat damn ssAbakAi vlasu. (9) maianki
riiski maUtJik igrat snaiiaju nAmAstii. (10) u ko^ki kiAsivAJa JeJA.
(11) savodnA mAJa mAtAdaJA sastra nAtugii. (12) Jto on savodnA dot
SAbaka ? (13) ja na gAVArit a sAbaka. (14) xAioJi xlsp bas mastA
i ihasA nanrdvitsA stusanka. (15) gfaznAJa vAda vvadrs ; tJistAJa
VAda fsAdii.
Exercise XV
A. (1) Ana prijta nA jarmArku. (2) SAbakA stArika lasatA nA sontsa.
(3) tJoriiAJa koJkA upatA vrakii (vrsku). (4) ja jajo nigds na vidat, nA
stAt mdUtJik jajo spas. (5) Ana smAtrstA nA samku vlasu. (6) on nos
198 PHONETIC TRANSCRIPT
V8dr6 svAdoju. (7) nauseli Ana spAta nA stAm riiesta ? (8) vstAm
sMtjAJQ Ana J9J6 na mAgta vidat. (9) mAtAddJA pAdrugA senStJini
piAjtd sad (t) i vAjta vlss. (10) nalza skAza^t, gds And tape^f. (11)
neuseli And updtA vvodu ? (12) vot And !
Exercise XVI
A. (1) ftjord dobri stArik sidet zdes nA stAm sttila, kAtori J8v6 vnuk
prinos nA bersk. (2) s6nts9 jaS^S^ sijdtA. (3) on vidst^ kak tarn
losdtA ssrAJ9 ko^kA. (4) pAtom And stdtA pit mAtAko kAtorAJo jei
prinastd angliskAJg dsvAtSkA. (5) kak ras vaJW fsat 1159] a sAbdkA.
(6) priStd kko^ka, xAtstA AtAgnd^t J9J6. (7) n9 mAgtd. (8) bitd
drdkA riiesdu sAbdkAi i koSkAi. (9) stArik smAtrst nA drdku. (10)
vstA vreiiiA stdiAJa bdbA Jta liiimA. (11) vid9tA i And to^ Jto stutJitAs.
(12) n9std kak ras bA^Jojg V9dr6 svAdoi i stdtA lit vAdoi nA ko^ku i
SAbdku. (13) SAbdkA ub95dtA. (14) koJkA lagtd i snovA stdLv spa^t
nA s6nts9.
Exercise XVIII
A. (1) ftjard utrAm ja fstretitA pAdrugu^ kAtoiAJa mns lAsskAzdtA
fso to, Jto dstAtAS, kAgdd And 06 vd9revn9. (2) bitd vasnoi J95tS6
XAt6dnAJ9 pAgodA, nA trudAlubivi kr9stjdnin pAxdt m6krAJ9 pola
SAxoju, i seJAt jatjriie^n i avos. (3) dnom on lAbotAt nAhigu ili
fsAdti; vetJgrAm on Adixdt, a notjju on spat. (4) V9sn6i mAJd
pAdrtigA t659 xAdita fjkotu. (5) vetJarAm And prigAtAvldtA urok.
(6) IstAm bitd AbiknAvenA xAr659J9, toptAJa, inAgdd 3drkAJ9 pAgodA, i
jatjme^n U58 viiAstdt. (7) osanju bitd sdtvA. (8) krastjdnin sat
S'itA S9rp6m ili kAsoju. (9) zimoi bitd pAtjii fsagdd durndJA pAgodA
i silni mAros. (10) zimoi n9lzd lAbotAt nA dvArs.
Exercise XIX
A. (1) moi stdrji sin U3S kontjit Jkotu. (2) nA kAgdd ja bit vdarevno,
J9v6 mtdtji brat pAsaJt^dt jaJtSo mdi9nkAJ9 utJiliStJa, kAt6rAJ9 stAJdtA
biiz VAkzdtA. (3) ras on pfijot dAmoi is JkoK. (4) J9v6 fstretit javo
mdiaiiki tAvdriStS. (5) sprAsit J9v6, " Jto ti savodnA utrAm dstAt
fjkoig ? " (6) prilssni utS9nik pAkAzdt J9mu knigu i t9trd^t, rAsskAzdt
fso to, Jto dstAtAs AbiknAVsnA, i skAzdt, Jto l)9s knigi i tatrddi nalzd
utJitsA. (7) kroriia kiiigi bit u navo tSorni kArAnddJ. (8) inAgdd
stdrji utS9rLik pisdt parom vmestA kArAndAjd. (9) kroriia tAvo on
PHONETIC TKANSCRIPT 199
pisat nA bumaga. (10) ktasnAJa dAskd stAJatA vozlo kahdn utJitalA
i perat Aknom. (11) trudAlubivi utjitai tJastA pisat liistAm ha dAske.
(12) lonivi utjanik fsogda sidst da skAiiieika blis kdfadri. (13)
surovi stdri utjitai dot urok sQvodnA utrAm. (14) on mnogA spraJivAt,
nA, ksA3Alenju, t64kA Adin vnimdtaini utjaiiik XAtet Atvotja^t. (15)
stAt md^ltSik pAtutJit At utJitalA pAxvAlu.
Exercise XXI
A. (1) prikdstjik prijot gdrugu. (2) kArovA i Aftsd u senjtjini.
(3) vniitSkA guidtA sbabuSkAi. (4) ja jamu dat knigu sastri. (5)
utjitol gAVAi-it Atotrddi. (6) svsttAJa ulitsA mne otjon nrdvitAs.
(7) mokiAJa trAvd nAtugti. (8) suxdJA zamla jomu nanravitAs.
(9) on stroit doravani dom pefat dvArtsom. (10) sastra Atsa bita
tarn. (11) moi tAvdriStJ kupit bA^Joi ZAmok sklutSom. (12) ti
prijot kAtsu. (13) staiAJa stusankA prinostd malankAJo vadro
svAdoi. (14) utSitoinitsA sidstA nAmAstu. (15) on tudd pAjol bos
maUtSikA. (16) tSornAJg tojAt jetA trAvu. (17) bstAJo sAbakA stAJatA
perat toSAdju. (18) kiias vidst jarki svst fkomnAta. (19) u stArikd
svstti doriiik, malanki sat, bA^ljoi hik, bsti Asot, tJornAJa Aftsd. (20)
utJanitsA prAjtd Jkotu.
Exercise XXII
A. (1) senJtJinA pAjtd pAulitsa sdotjorju. (2) nAkAnets And prijld
gdveri. (3) stdrAJa ma^t AtkfitA sAmd dve^r i vAStd. (4) snAtJdtA
And piAjtd kuxnu i dvs komnAti. (5) pAtom bsdnAJa senJtJinA
pAdnAtds pAlesnitsa i uzndtA dve^r. (6) dva godA tAmii nAzdt And
otSan xaiaJo zndU sty dve^r. (7) nA senJtJinA naxAtstA SAmd Atkrit.
(8) pAstAmu And dAtd dotjari kiutj At komnAti. (9) dotj bas trudd
AtkritA i Aiis jaS^Jo ias VAjli.
Exercise XXVII
A. (1) vAdnom goiAda bitd jdrmArkA. (2) vstA vfemA bitd xaIsia.
(3) mnogA nArodu uriiartA AtstAi usdsnAi bAlezni. (4) prijsxAt nAstu
jdrmAiku Adin kupsts izdrugovA goiAdA ssanoi i mAtAdoi dotSkAi.
(5) dsvAtSka bitA to^kA tSatira godA. (6) vdruk Atsts i ma^t zAbAleli.
(7) sotjds Atvazii vbA^nitsu bA^novA Atsd sbsdnAi mdtarju. (8) -zndtjit,
AstdtAs mdiankAJa dsvAtSkA Adnd. (9) ptdkAtA, bsdnAJa, ptdkAlA.
200 PHONETIC TRANSCRIPT
Exercise XXVIII
A. (1) nAkAnets Ana ZAdumAtA iska^t Atsa i ma^t. (2) pAjta Ana
pAgorAdu. (3) brAditA tssK de^n i to^ikA kvetSoru dAjta Ana dA
bA^lJoi bA^mtsi. (4) no vbA^nitsu J9J6 no puskdli. (5) jsxaI riiimA
devAtSki bAgati kupsts. (6) And lAsskAzatA J9mu pro svAJo gora.
(7) dobri tJotAvek vaJoI vbA^iiiitsu uznd^t pro Atsa i ma^t nastSas(t)nAi
devAtJki. (8) tarn jamu skAzdli, Jto Ani U5s tiriiarii. (9) i rajit
dobri kupsts vza^t sirotku ksobs. (10) tak i sdstAt. (11) stdtA sit
n9stSds(t)nAJ9 sirAta ftjusoi soiiijs kak fsvAJei.
Exercise XXIX
A. (1) vi stroili svoi dom. (2) xArAjo^ Jto ja xAtst kupit vaj dom.
(3) on rAbotAt fsvAJom sAdu. (4) n9U5eii on suda prijsxAt istAvo
gorAdA ? (5) mi stA pAtutJili At svAJ9v6 Atsa. (6) voJa kArovA
brAditA ves de^n pA stAmu tugu. (7) tjei gromki gotAs mi tak tJastA
sHJaII ? (8) fse eti dikiJ9 5iv6tniJ9 jeli to^lkA Admi Aftsti. (9)
ntisnA bitA jix druzjam skAza^t fso to, Jto mi U3s tS9tif9 godA znali.
(10) vAzmosnA li bilA iidot to, Jto vi dstAli fsvAJei k6mnAt9 ? (11)
fse naji druzja bili tAgdd zdes (s). (12) tSJ9mu sinu vi dali staruju
svAJii knigu ? ^ (13) tjjei dotSofi vi rAsskAzali fso to, Jto stutJitAS ?
(14) n9U3eli stA pravdA ? (15) pAstJastju ja n9 znat stAVA gorAdA.
Exercise XXXI
A. (1) Adna mAl:AdaJ9 senStJinA, kAtorAJg sidstA Adnasdi radAm
ssvAJei starAi totkAi, i mAjina^lnA igralA pa^itsAihi J9J6 ruki, zAihetitA
ZAtAt6J9 kA^tso nA pa4ts9 totki. (2) Ana sprAsitA, " totkA, Jto ^tA za
kA^tso ? " (3) starAJ9 damA pAkrAsnstA, pAtom pAbl9dnstA, i skAzatA
nAkAnsts drAsaJtJim gotASAm, ^' mns n9prijdtnA Ab stAm gAVArit."
(4) AtS9vidnA Ana stArdtAs skrit At pigriidnitsi svai tJufstvA.
Exercise XXXII
A. (1) prdvdA, ja stAVA n9 znat. (2) rdnA ili poznA ja fso budu
zna^t. (3) tAgdd on gAVArit pAruski, nA 6tS9n ihedlonA. (4) skorA
on budgt gAVArit jdsnA i pravilnA. (5) on prijot poznA, a And
priStd gArdzdA P639. (6) nixto stAVA nikAgdd n9 biid9t j)Animd^t.
(7) m639t-bit, on ihgnd nikAgda n9 pAnimdt. (8) Ana to^lkA 6tS9n
n9mn6gA gAVAfitA pAn9rii6tski i pAitaljanski. (9) presdg Ani to^lkA
PHONETIC TRANSCRIPT 201
namnogA tjitali, nA fSkolo jim ntisnA budat gAiazdA bo^Ja tjita^t.
(10) xaiaSo, Jto Ane to^lkA posa btidut Atvotja^t.
Exercise XXXIV
A. (1) presdo malonkAJa utJanitsA to^kA nomnogA utJitAS, a
vbuduJtSom gAdii Ana gArazdA bo^Ja budot utJitsA. ^ (2) pAtJamu
Ana btidat skriva^t At riiana svai mnenJA ? (3) nalza zna% Jto
zdftiA budot. (4) vvAskr9senJ9 Ani btidut (j)im pisa^t. (5) jesli vi
fsogdd dnom i notjju btidota PAbotAt, vi budata bAle^t. (6) prdvdA,
ja nikAgdd Ab stAm na dtimAt. (7) liixto nikAgdd na budot puska^t
tAkovA mdionkAVA md^itJikA vnaju komuAtu. (8) vbtidujtjom gAdu
eti bAgatiija inAstrantsi btidut stroit grAmddni novi dvArsts ua baragti
faki. (9) dA lAsdastva mi budam utJitsA domA. (10) ua drugoi
de^n mi gAVArili svajim driigAm. (11) vasnoi prils5ni krastjanin
btidat seJAt jatjihe^n i avos, a osanju roj i pjanitsu. (12) pAtJamu
anglitjdna nikAgdd na xAteli gAVArit sniihi ? (13) fkAtoiAm tjAsii vi
prijii dAmoi? (14) on prijot ua drugoi de^n. (15) Ani vofsa na
pAnimdii fsavo stAVA.
Exercise XXXV
A. (1) ja vnimdtalnA stiijAJu fso to, Jto vi tjitajata. (2) Ani fsagdd
dstAJut, kak satdjut. (3) pAtJamu vi piAdAtsdjata gAVArit Ab stAm ?
(4) Jto nam sdstAt ? Ani skrivdjut At nas fso to, Jto Ani diimAJut.
(5) And xaiaJo uihejat prigAtAvld^t stA ihdsA. (6) fsagdd li rdnA
ZA3igajut tdmpu? (7) ja diimAJu, Jto And lia stujAJat. (8) viAsii
i vgarmdnii roj upAtrabldjut fpiJtSu. (9) kak vi pAtAgdjata ? (10)
nauseli on U5s utjit urok ? (11) na pAtAgajat li on, Jto jajo utjanitsi
posa biidut utJitsA ? (12) xaiaJo, Jto mi rd^nja na prijli suda. (13)
kak vi pA3ivdjata ?
Exercise XXXVI
D. (1) Jto d^tAJat tape^i" vaj mAtAdoi sin? (2) prdvA na znaju,
nA ja pAtAgaju, Jto on tape^f viiiesta SAsvAim brdtAm vutJiiiStSa. (3)
on, mosat-bit, SAfseihi drugiihi mdiankiihi md^ltSikAriii igrdjat nA
utJiliJuAm dvAre fsAtddti, tak kak, vnAstAJdJtJaja vferiiA, fsaki
tJatAVsk ZAnimajatsA VAinoju, ddsa mdlankija diimAJut to^IkA a
nei. (4) kdsdi vetjar, kAgda ZAsigdjut tdmpu, (j)ix mtdtji sin fsagdd
rddAm sstdrjiihi sostrAiiii u stAtd. (5) trogAJat, Atkrivdjat, zAkrivdjat
202 PHONETIC TRANSCRIPT
knigi i totradi. (6) fso vnimatainA stiiSAJat to, Jto tjitajut J9v6 brat j a
i sostri. (7) AbiknAvenA pAsIednaja dA lisinA pfigAtAvlajut uroki i
rojajut zAdatJi, a on fsogda 38}aJ9t uzna^t, Jto detAJQtsA. (8) baspra-
stanA sprdJiVAJat, nA sostri otjan tJastA na Atvotjajut nA javo VAprosi.
Exercise XXXVII
A. (1) devuSki sidat u Akna. (2) Ana sidstA nA stub u Akna ; Ana
sstA nA stut. (3) dnom Ivi i fss drugija zveri spat vlasu. (4) lisa stAit
ZA etim deravAm. (5) aisti i sutavIi stAJat nA mAstu. (6) mi vofsa na
pAnimajam, pAtJamu jajo kiAsivija kAitini visat nA stanax stAi tomnAi
komnAti. (7) mi pAtAgajam, Jto ts svinji prinAdlasat bsdnAmu
krastjaninu ; jamti 3a prinAdlasit stA bstAJa tojAt. (8) eti fiAntsuskija
SAtdati tA3atsA nazarii (nA zemlu) ; Ani ia3at nA mokiAi zamls.
Exercise XXXVIII
A. (1) vidita li vi stAt grAmadni dom ? (2) pAtAgaju, Jto on
pnnAdla3it stAmu pAiheJtJiku. (3) ts kAitini jim vofsa nanravatsA.
(4) miis otSan nravitsA stA malankAJa SAbakA. (5) svinji stAJat pAd
dubAm. (6) sko^ikA stoit ta usa^dbA ? (7) na stoit dumAt Ab stAm.
(8) nms pomnitsA, Jto vaji druzja liikAgda ns bili u riiana. (9) on
liiana pAkornA btAgAdArit, nA pravA lia stoit. (10) vot pAtJamu mol
dadA novi sArai stroit. (11) lialza stijAt fstAtovAi javo drA3a5tSavA
gotASA. (12) ja nikAgda na slijAt, Jto And javo nAjta nAhigii. (13)
trinatsAt ma^tJikAf nA utSiliJnAm dvArs.
Exercise XXXIX
A. (1) AbiknAvsnA mi xodim dAmoi vdevat tjAsof. (2) sinAvja
kuptsa brodat pAgorAdu. (3) stAt daravdni sArai stu3it bA^lnomu
stAriku 3ilj6m. (4) on kiirit graznuju trupku ; sigari i papirosi stojat
siiJkAm mnogA. (5) mi liibim vajix druzei za jix dAbiAtii i prAvdivAst.
(6) btAgAdArii vas za kiAsivuju knigu, kAtoruju vi mns ddli. (7)
nalzd uzna^t, Jto on der3it rukoju (vruks). (8) stA pre3da siu3itA
dvAitsom. (9) prile3nija utjaniki litjAt uroki UAiztist. (10) starAstA i
davanostA Jest krastjan stAJat perat domAm tJinovnikA.
Exercise XL
A. (1) mn63astvA tupix nA3ei. (2) nsskA^kA prijdtnix rsk. (3)
mnogA bA^Jix usadap. (4) stoUkA kApejak. (5) ua suxoi zamls.
PHONETIC TRANSCRIPT 203
(6) skoUkA denek ? (7) bo^ISoje tjast bsdmx senStJin. (8) ihenajg
Ivof i b64aJ9 vAtkof. (9) mnogAtSlslonija semji riiskix krastjan.
(10) fprijatnAi AkrssnAsti najix dorove^n. (11) sliSkAm mnogA mokrAi
trAvi. (12) nomnqgA bAgatix pAiheJiJikAf. (13) mnosostvA ostrix
sabol. (14) nsskA^kA dAmaSnix sivotnix. (15) matAJa tjisto krAsivix
komnAt. (16) sto'lkA kArtin izAbiAsajuStSix muStJin i ma^itJikAf.
(17) sliJkAm mnogA volikAlspnix dAmof. (18) u pAiheJtSikA otjan
mnogA gontjix sAbak. (19) sto^lkA lisits. (20) o mAgutJam kndza i
dAtJarax skromnAVA krostjaninA. (21) piAStijo 31IJA skromnix ludei.
(22) sto^kA denok i tak matA xlsbA. (23) mAJa ihitAJa nanA i jgjo
mnogAtSislomJG druzja. (24) kasdAmu ma'ltjiku dali ostri noj.
(25) vosamdosat pa^t tJatAvsk. (26) seih tisotS Jastsot tritsAt dorove'n.
Exercise XLI
C. (1) vnajoi AkresnAsti jest Adin bAgati i mAgutJi pAriieJtJik.
(2) on iihejat mnosastvA gontjix SAbak i tAjAdei fsvAei usa^ba. (3)
jamu prinAdlosit i stAt giAmadni, valikAlspni dom, kAtori stAlt pri
samAm vezde vies. (4) kAgdd sidat u riiond fspa4n9, ili stAJat u Akna
fporednaij mosnA vidat stAt dvArsts vozla tserkvi. (5) sko^lkA stoit
tAkoja siljo ? (6) pravA, ja na zndju. (7) va fsakAm stiitjAJo fso stA
mns n9 intaresnA, ibA (tak kak) ja protpAtJitaju skromnix ludei i
piAstija ve^tji. (8) nA pririisr, ja tJastA XA5U smAtre't nA eti riiiKja
doiiiiki, kAtorija vi vidito zatugAm. (9) mns nravatsA eti kiAsivija
kArtini, kAtori j 9 visdt nA stanax vajoi kvArtiri. (10) nodavnA lubezni
druk moi pAstat mAJei sastrs Adnu is svaix knik srisiinkAriii
izAbrAsajuJtSiiiii starija ruskaja basni i skaski, kAtorija kdsdAmu
is nas sdststvA znAkonu. (11) ve^t i vi sariii na ZAbili 'Wotk i aist/'
" iisa i suraf/' " lef i nuj," " svinjd pAd dubAm/' " dve SAbaki."
Exercise XLII
A. (1) nA dvAr^ idot dojt. (2) na zndjata li vi, pradut li tape^r eti
stAruxi ? (3) SAfssmnst ; Ane tkut. (4) mi pAtAgajam, J to nariistskija
SAtdati parajii tjeras reku (rakii). (5) And U5S tjatira godA sivot
vstAm sals, nA jix darevnA nAxoditsA vdrugom ujesda. (6) stAt
md^tjik idot fSkotu, vot pAtJamu on nasot knigi i tatrddi. (7) savodnA
on priidot dAmoi is Jkoti ftri tjAsd, nA AbiknAvsnA to^lkA fpa^t tjASof
prixodit. (8) Atjavo vdji druzjd fsagdd sriiajutSA ? (9) mi dAtsni
TAbotAt jasadnsvnA dA u5inA. (10) gAtodnija SAbdki lasdt fsiiagti.
(11) tjji izbi stAJdt za rakoi ? (12) nauseli eti mnogAtSisIanija
204 PHONETIC TRANSCEIPT
semji fss sivut vAdnom deravaiiAni doihika ? (13) nalza uzna^t,
dAidot li Ana dA stAVA ihsstA. (14) dobrijo ludi uihirajut, nA data
jix sifvut.
Exercise XLIII
A. (1) fkAtoiAm tjAsu vi pjota josadn^vnA tjai ? (2) sovodnA
nolza viiti izdAmu, pAtAmuStA naxAioJaja pAgodA. (3) naJA ihitAJa,
trudAlubivAJa ma^t Jjot ptdtja dlA mtatjix dAtJarei i rubajki dlA sinAvei.
(4) ftjara doSt lit rut J j ami ; nssniAtra nA stA, staiAJo stusdnkA pAlivajat
mokri uss sad (t). (5) dAvnim-dAvno fss krestjdno vetAi darevna peli
pesni, nA U38 dAvno bo^ja zdes (s) lia pAJiit. (6) tretjavA dna on yit
varofki. (7) na vidita li vi, kak ptitjki vjut gnozdA ? (8) ja xAtst
uzna^t, pAtJamu vaj sin bjot svAJti sAbaku. (9) And tak tixA pAJot,
Jto ja jadvd stiju. (10) psrvi de% nadeli vAskrasenja, a ftAroi
pAnade^lnik. (11) tape^r sadmdJA nadelA godA. (12) xArAjo, St<^
tape^r toptAJa pAgodA ; prijdtnA lAbotAt nA dvAre. (13) vasnoju
pAseJAli, A osanju snut. (14) md^tjiki smiitSA AtxotAdu. (15)
fsirotstva 5it slozi lit.
Exercise XLIV
A. (1) rdzva on nikAgdd na pijat ? (2) ja pAkornA btAgAdArii dobruju
stArtixu, kAtoiAJa mns vdsat tjutki, nA And fso gAVArit :^ na stoit.
(3) ksA3Alenju on vnAStAJdJtJaja vreihA jedat za grAiiitsu ; lialzd spiAsit
javo. (4) kstjdstju on U3S dotgA sivot za grAiiitsaju. (5) rdzva vi na
zndjata^ pAtJamu dsvAtJkA ptdtjat ? (6) miis skAzdli, Jto dotJkA tsx
bsdnix ludei U3S ddtgA iStJat ma^t, nA na mosat nAiti jajo. (7) Jto Ani
ijtjut svAJavo Atsd ? (8) ja lia satdju stAVA skAzd^t, da i to^lkA.
(9) mns pdmnitsA, Jto mAi sostri priidut sudd savodnA. (10) Jto Ans
fso xodat vzat i fpafot ? (11) lisskA^kA ludei pAtAgdjut, Jto U3S
Atvazli vdJavA drugA ftufmu. (12) ja na mAgti vam pAkAzd^t ndjix
novix kArtin.
Exercise XLVI
C. (1) mi 3iv6m vrndlankAi izbe vujezda fssm izvss(t)nAi dAlokAi
gubernii. (2) zimoi otjan tJdstA u nas bivdjat durndJA pAgodA.
(3) pAstAmu mi iuAgdd na m63am guld^t vlasii (polasu). (4) savodnA
siisk idot. (5) nAdvArs sarditAJa riiateU i nalzd viiti izdAmu. (6)
mAJd mtdtjaja sastrd ptdtjat i xotjat zna^t, Jto nam dstAt i Atjom
gAVArit. (7) AdndkAj fso stA otjan prostA. (8) tak kak U3S rduA
PHONETIC TEANSCRIPT 205
tamneJQt, zAsigajut tampu ftri tjAsa. (9) nA presda fsavo mi
ZAtAplajam petj ; petj topat (drAvaihi). (10) mdlankija deti, kAtorijo
n9 dAtsni lAbotAt, use seli ha stulJA vozla najo. (11) Ani tjitajut
knigi, igrajut druk zdrugAm, ili lAsskazivAJut druk drugu skaski i
basni. (12) vizbs prijatiiA i ujutnA. (13) senjtjini prigAtAvlajut
kujAnja. (14) vetSorAm mi pjom tjajku tjaju rovnA fsem tjAsof ;
pAtom moi mtatji brat tAs'itsA spa^t. (15) nA vzrostim posla lisinA
jajtjo dotgA niisnA lAbotAt. (16) matuJkA i babuJkA tkut, pradut,
vdsut tjutki; Jjut ptdtja. (17) a batuJkA Jjot SApAgi iskosi, ili
pAtJinajot pAsudu i mebol.
Exercise XL VIII
A. (1) fSas(t)natsAtAm veka ne bitA vvtAdenii lAsii lii AdnAvo moi-A,
nA tepe^r Ana vtAdeJ9t nsskAHkiriii mArdriii. (2) fproJtAm gAdu
tsarstvAVAt gAsudd^r impordtAr nikAtdi ftAroi; on stat (sdetAtsA)
impardtAPAm posla siiierti pAkoinAVA AloksdndrA tretjavA. fnAstAJdStSaja
vreiiiA U3S no tsdrstvujat ; tape^ net impordtArA. (3) ruskAJa tsdrstvA,
kAtoiAJa tdnatsA svAstokA nA zdpAt nA trindtsAt tisatj vorst, a ssevQiA
nA juk nA tSotiro tisatji vorst, ruskajo stjitdjut sdmim bA^lJim
gAsuddrstvAm nA sveta. (4) tjatvorti de^n nadeli nAzivdjatsA srgdoju,
A Sostoi de^n pdtnitsA. (5) Jest lAbotJix dnei liidi lAbotAJut tseti de^n,
A yvAskrasenjo i vdrugija prdznitSnijo dni fse Adixdjut At rAbot i
xodat ftserkAf. (6) vgAdu dvandtsAt riiesatsaf, a dvandtsAti ihesats
ZAviit dakAbrom. (7) rakd, kAtorAJa na dAxodit dA moi-A ili dA ozqia,
A vpAddjat vdrugtiju rakii (feku), nAzivdjatsA pritokAm. (8) varbliit
otSan pAleznAJa sivotnAJa, tak kak mosat prAiti, tjeras pustinu,
At sta vAsriiidasati dA dvuxsAt vorst vnadelu. (9) on lAditsA ftisatjA
VAsamsot dvdtsAt ftArom gAdu^ a skAntJdtsA (uriiar) tritsAt pervAVA
mdJA tisatjA vAsamsdt davanostA pdtAVA godA.
Exercise XLIX
A. (1) ded (t) bit star i stap, a vnuk mtat i gtup. (2) stat naj sad (t)
got. (3) stat naj pos ptox. (4) md^tjik bit rad (t). (5) grip bit
gnit. (6) on bit truslif. (7) stat bik zot. (8) on posla tAvo na dotgA
bit 5iv (sif).
B. igrd bitd ptAxd. (2) sAbdkA bitd umnd. (3) izbd bitd no
mAtd. (4) bdbA bitd rddA. (5) VAdd bitd tjistd. (6) stdtA tdtkA
potnd vAdi. (7) lisd jetA srdzu pAdve miji, i stdtA 3irnd. (8) jajo
5izn trudnd. (9) krapkd kak kost.
206 PHONETIC TRANSCRIPT
C. nA VAcls bitA gtatkA. (2) nA dvAre bitA tJistA. (3) jamii
statA sriiaSno. (4) mns laxko stA dslAt. (5) bita grAza i grom.
maUtJik bit trus. on vies fjkap. tarn bitA jamii tomno i duJnA.
J9mu lis bitA stiJnA, prA^ta li grAza. (6) gnazdo U5S bitA pustA.
(7) fso, jto nadA. (8) dveri biii tssni. (9) tapki gusei bill vidni.
(10) ma^ltjiki stall mokri. (11) satkA bitA.
Exercise L
A. (1) tJornAJo krsstA^ nA kAtoiAm vi sidito, gArazdA kiAsiveja etAVA
stutA. (2) bsti xisp 119 fsogda dArose tSornAVA. (3) samAJa bA^ljoja
zdanja vnajom goiAda samAJa starAJo tssrkAf, nA pAslsdnoja me^iija
toi tssrkvi, kAtoruju vi vidali nAprotif svAJei kvArtiri fstAlitsa. (4)
umneijaja utSoiiitsA nikAgda no xotjet AtvotSa^t, kAgda J9J6 spraJivAJat
dobiAJo utJitoinitsA. Ana umna^ nA jajo starji brat prileson i gArazdA
vnimatelnoja jojo. (5) riiki ranonix beleje tSsm krAvati^ nA kAtorix
Ani lo5at. (6) nauzeli n8 fss znajut, Jto XAlsrA boUaja usdsnAJa
bAlezn tjsm skArtAtinA ? (7) samAJa tomnAJa komnAtA mne nravitsA
boHja fsavo. (8) mns gAVArat, Jto saniAJa starAJe senJtJinA vasat
samija tutjija tjutki i partjatki. ^ (9) pAtJamii bAgAteiSija pAriieStSiki
fsagda satajut iriie't jajtjo bo^Ja zamli ? (10) mns kasatsA, Jto
nAstAJaJtSaja dom tsAra valikAlepnaja stAVA grAmadnAVA dvArtsa,
kAtori tape^r strojat. (11) XArAjo, Jto samija trudAlubivije krastjana
inAgda ZArAbativAJut bo^Ja. (12) Ani pAtutJajut samuju boUjuju
pnbil. (13) prdvdA svatleja sontsA. (14) znanja tiitjaja bAgats(t)vA.
(15) pravdA dArosa zotAtA. (16) vor VArujat ne dU pribiii, a dlA
svAJei gibali.
Lesson LI
Illusteative Passages
1
totkA bita gAtovA. ja sst vnajo zdvuma graptsami. Ani Atjalili
i udarili vvostA.
nsbA bitA jasnA. tuna sijatA. pAgodA bita tixAJa. votgA nastas
rovnA i spAkoinA. totkA skA^lzitA pA pAvsrxnAsti tomnix votn. prAjto
okAtA pAtutJasA. mi dAstigli sradini raki. vdruk graptsi natjAli
Japta^tsA ihssdu sAboju.
Jto tAkoja ? sprAsit ja.
na zndjam.
graptsi smAtreli vAdnii storAnu. gtAzd mAi pfinati tosa nAprA-
PHONETIC TRANSCRIPT 207
vienJ9, i ja uvidet fsiimrAkg Jto-tA. liaznAkomi predriiet ptit vniz pA
votga. pribiisatsA. tuna zaJW za oblAkA. pKvuStSi pfizrAk sdstAtsA
jaStJo tamneja. on bit ot mana U3S bliskA, a ja fso jajtjo na mog
javo lAzlitJit.
vdruk tuna viStA iza obtAkA, i AZAritA zreliStJa usasnAJa. knam
nAfstretJu ptitd visalitsA, utvarsdonAJa nA ptAtii. tri tstA viseli nA
paraktadiiia. bAlsznanAJa lubApitstvA AvtAdstA mnoju. ja ZAXAtet
vzglanu^t nA litsA visalnikAf. ,. , ..,, , . ^,,
" kApitanskAja dotJkA,
puSkin.
bA^ijaja, visokAJa, tomnAJa zdtA AsvaJtSonAJa t64kA tSatiriha iii
pAtju svatSaihi, skAtoririii dAktAra pAdxAdili AsmatrivAt rananix, bita
bukva^uA pAtna. nAsilStSiki basprastanA vnAsili rananix, sktddivAli
jix Adin podia drugovA na pAt, nA kAtoiAm U3S biJA tak tesuA, Jto
nastSds(t)nija tAtkdlis i moknuli fkrovi druk driigA, i Jli za novimi.
sostri, SA spAkoiniriii litsAihi i zviiAsenjam deJAtalnAVA prAktitJaskAVA
utJastjA, to tarn, to sam malkdli riissdu rananimi. dAktAid^ zzAsutJoniihi
rukAvdihi, AsmatrivAli^ AjtJupivAli i zAndirAVAli rdni, nasmAtrd nA
U5asnifja stoni strAdaHtsaf. Adin iz dAktArof sidst okAtA dveri za
stolikom, i ftu ihiniitu, kak fkomnAtu vAjot Afitssr, zApisivAt U3S
patsot tritsAt dva. ,, , ^, .,-,.. , , ..
" savAstopA4ski]e lAsskazi/
tAtstOl.
3
pAstuJa (ai), slapoi ! skAzat on : bafagi to liisstA . . . znajaj ?
tarn bAgdtija tAvari . . . skAsj xAzdinu, Jto ja jamu b64Ja na stugd.
datd pAjii xudA_, on ihand boija na uvidit : tape^f ApdsnA ; pAJsdu
iskd^t lAboti vdrugom riiesta ; tarn ja budu sda^t udobnAVA stiitjAJA.
da skAsi, jeslib on pAtiitJa ptAtit za trudi, tak i ja bi javo na pAkinut.
And pAJedat SAmnoju ; jei nalzd zdes AstAvd^tsA.
a ja ! skAzdt slapoi sdtAbnim gotASAm.
on $t6-tA pAtAs'it slapomu vruku, pfimotvif: '^nA, kupi sabs
prdnikAf." " t64kA ? " skAzdt slapoi. " nu_, vot tabs jaJtSo/' i
updfjAJa mAnstA zAzvanetA, udArds o kdihan. slapoi jajo na podnAt.
Ani ssli vtotku ; vetar dut ot beragA ; Ani bistiA pAnaslis. dotgA pri
sveta ihesatSA riialkdt bsti pdrus ihesdu votn ; slapoi fso sidst ua baragu
i pldkAt, i dotgA dotgA. ... ,. ,. ., ..
'^garoi naJavA vremani/
IsrniAntAf.
208 PHONETIC TEANSCEIPT
4
tomA tJufs(t)vAVAt saba AkAntJatolnA sbitim spAzitsii : korpus,
joStJo tak nadavnA kAsafJisA dstAm rejonim, AtAdvinutsA kudatA
dAloko-dAloko.
ti kAgda, tomA, pAJedaJ ? spiAsftA nAtajA, ftAiaJA sastra, stAiaJAS
skrit vAtnAvafJija J9J6 tSufs(t)vA pAd (t) maskAi piAstovA iubApits(t)vA.
tomA zAglAnut vgtAza sastri.
^nikuda ja n9 pAJsdu, Atvetit on, vzdAxnuf, i fstav (f), nApravitsA
fkAbinst.
tam on ^Agat fsAznanja prinasonAi jim 5srtvi. mosat-bit, dla
3srtvi javo vid bil: sliSkAm spAkojan, nA tsm na menaja stA na ihaSatA
jamu stjita^t sabd ssrtvAi, i jamu kAzatAs Jto on srazu totJnA virAS
nA nsskA4kA Ist. on log nA divan, zAtAs'it m gAtAvu ruki i zAdumAtsA
A torn, Jto s'izn na tAkdJA prAStaJA i loxkAJe vejtj, kAkoi Ana kasatsA
pA nAiusnAmu vidu.
tak i usntit, dumAJA fso Atomge. . ,. . , . m >
"sariiemAja xromkA,
gdrin.
Exercise LII
B. (1) prinasita mns, pA5dt(ui)stA, etu novuju riiskuju knigu !
(2) prinAsita mns jasadnevnA tatradi stdrjix utjanikof ! (3) tA3itas
spa^t kdsdi vetjar fsem tjAsof ! (4) pAia iti spa^t ! rAzde'ntas, ma^tjiki,
i iakta spa^t ! (5) piji ihedlanA i pravilnA ! (6) nApiJita to, Jto ja
vam ska5u ! (7) smAtrita ! (8) pAsmAtrita to, Jto Ani dstAJut tape^r !
(9) na gAVArita jei Atom, Jto ja vam to^lkA Jto rAsskAzat ! (10) na
dstAita stAVA ! (11) na Atvatjaita nA stAt VApros ! (12) puskai Ana
sdsUjat, kak Ana satajat ! (13) pu^st Aiii pAidtit tape^r fjkotu !
(14) fsagda stujata to, Jto gAVArit utSital ! (15) utSital gAVArit
tape^r ; pAsttiJata javo 1
Exercise LIII
A. bii
VAdnoi darevna 5ita stAitiSkA SAvnutSkAi. Ans bili otjan bsdni, i jest
jim bi'tA netJavA. prijto svsttAJa VAskrasenja. nAiot radujatsA. fss
kupili sabs lAzgAve^tsA, toUkA stAruJka SAvnutSkAi netjam lAzgAve^tsA.
pAptdkAli Ans i stdli bogA piAsit, Jtob on jim pAmog. i fspomnitA
stAruSkA, Jto fstArinu, VAvremA fiAntsusA, mnsiki de^ngi vzemlu
ZAiivali. stAnixA i gAVArit vnutSka : " vAzmi (ti)^ vnutJkA, tApatu i
idi nA starAJa sato, pAmAlis bogu, da pAroi vzamls : mosat bit, bog
nam i pASlot Jto-nibu^t."
PHONETIC TRANSCRIPT 209
Exercise LIV
A. vnutSkA i dumAJot: "kak mosnA ktad (t) nAiti? nu da
sdetAJu, kak bdbuJkA valit." vzAta tApdtu i pASta. viritA Ana jdmu,
i dumAJQt : " biidat, pAidii dAmoi." xAtstA pAdna^t tApatu, stiSit obA
Jto-tA UpatA stuknutA. Ana nAgnuUs, vidit ^kubiSkA bA4jaJA. pAtrostd
J8J6, Jto-tA zvonit. And brositA tApdtu, pAbasdtA xbdbujka, kritSit :
^' bdbuJkA, ktat nAjtd ! " Atkrili kubiSku, vnei pAtno sarebronix
mAnst. i bdbuJkA sAvnutSkAi kupili sabs kprdzniku, tjem lAsgAve^tsA,
i kAiovu kupili, i btAgAdArili bogA, Jto on ustijAt jix mAHtvu.
Exercise LV
A. lanivi slugd
ianivi At prirodi, on AstA^noja vferiiA nitjavo na dstAt. on na
dAvdt sabs trudd ni pAstdvit sAmAvdiA, rd pAdihasti pAtof. on, ili
dramdt fprixosai, ili uxAdit bAttd^t fkuxnu ; na to, tak pA tsetim
tjAsdm stAJdt u vArdt i pAsnidtrivAt nA fse stoiAni. on VArtSdl: fsdki
ras, kak gotAs bdriuA zAstAvldt javo pAkidd^t lasdnku. nasmAtrd ua
fso stA, on bit dAv64nA ihdxkAVA i ddbiAVA sertsA. on lubit ddsa
prAVAdit vreriiA sdatihi. nAdvArs, u vArot, javo tJdstA viddli skutjai
datei. on jix riiifit, ustrdivAJat igri, ili prostA sidit sniriii, vzaf AdnAvo
UA Adno kAleuA, drugovA nA drugoja, a sddi Jeju javo AbAvjot jaStJo
kAkoi-rdbii^t jAtun rukdihi.
Exercise LVI
A. SUVOIAf
md^itjik rduA ndtjAt utJitsA i srdnix 1st pAlubit knigi, fkAtorix
ApisivAlis voini, pAxodi, i tak ddlaja. patndtsAti 1st mAtAdoi
SUVOIAf pAstupit UA vAJsnuju stu5bu i devat 1st prAstus'it prAstim
SAtddtAm.
ns bitA sAtddtA isprdvnaja javo : on fstAvdt rd^nja drugix, sam
tjistit sabs SApAgi i ptdtja i stAJdt nA tjAsdx vAfsdkuju pAgddu. s'it
on vihesta sprAstiiiii sAtddtAihi i jst sAtddtskija Jtji i kdju ; bit fsagdd
sihst i yesat i sihsSit svAix tAvdri^tJai vasotiriii JutkAihi i rAsskdzAriii.
fss lubili javo.
kAgdd on stat A^itssiAm i ndtjAt kAmdndAVAt sAtddtAihi, fstidu nA
VAins on pAbasddt naprijdtalA.
" rabdtA gAVArit suvoiAf sAtddtAm, fsagdd idita fparot nA viAgd.
na baspAkoitas Atom, sko^IkA perat vdihi naprijdtalai. vi ve^t prijll
bit jix, A ns stjitd^t."
o
GENERAL VOCABULARIES
VOCABULARY OF VERBS
The verbs are arranged alphabetically according to the form of the imperfective
aspect, but every verb used in the exercises is given separately whenever its form
differs so markedly from that of the imperfective infinitive that its meaning might
be troublesome to find.
The form of the perfective aspect is indicated by the prefix enclosed in brackets
or is given immediately below as a separate verb.
First and second singular present and first and second singular future perfective
are indicated. Reflexive pronouns are not always repeated.
The number enclosed in brackets indicates the vocabulary, paragraph, or
exercise where a phonetic transcript of the word will be found.
Verbs marked with an asterisk will be found also in the lists in Par. 239.
(o)6e3noK6HTbCH (6k)ci> dviuihcn) (56),
put oneself about, take thought
*(no)6ep.6Hi. (6eper^, Hierat, r^rfc), pre-
serve, keep, watch
(no)6HTb (6bib, eiut) (Par. 162), beat
(no)5jiaronapHTb (i5, iimi>) (38), thank >
(no)6ji1iHH-feTb (-tio, -feemb) (31), turn pale
(no)6ojiT^Tb (^K), ^emb) (55), chatter
{(3a)6oji'feTb (-tio, feeuib) (27), be (fall) ill
SojniTT,, SojiHT-b (3rd pers. form)
(44), be sore, hurt
(no)6orfTbCH (oibcb, liuibCH) (52), fear
/Spaxb (6epy, emb) (53), take
\B3HTb (BoabMy, emb) (28)
(no)6ponHTb (my, 6nHmb) (28), wander
about
/6poc^Tb (&K), &erab) (54), throw
\6p6cHTb (6my, 6cHmb) (16)
eyaex-b (54), that will do !
ewB^Tb (aio, Aeuib) (46), be usually,
happen, occur
6biTb (see 2, 6 ; Par. 123), be -
(no)6'fe>KaTb (ry, JKiimb, ryxx.) (54), run
*(no)Be3xii or Be3Xb (af, euib) (Par. 157),
convey, drive (trans.)
Beat (Par. 96), past tense of Be3xii
(no)Beji-fexb (lb, limb) (Par. 214), order,
command
*(no)Becxii or Becxb (ji^r, emb), lead
/ B3r JirfflbiBaxb (aio, aemb), look at
\ BsrjiHHyxb (y, rfnemb)
/B3nbix6xb (^K), aemb), sigh
\B3aoxHyxb (ny, oxnemb)
B3HXb (28) (see 6paxb), take; B3HTb
Kx ceS-fe, adopt
(y)BHflaxb (aio, ^emb) (55), see
(y)BHH'fcxb (JKy, numb) (8), see
fBHc-fexb (my. Climb) (Par. 141), hang
-| (intrans.)
(noBHcnyxb (y, emb)
^BHXb (BbK), emb) (Par. 162), wind,
-| twine, build (nest)
[cBHXb (cOBbK), emb)
(3a)B.iTaH'fexb (-feio, -feeiiib) (48), rule, pos-
sess, command
/BJi'fe3^xb (aio, aemb), climb into
\ BJitsxb (3y, emb) (49)
/BHOcrixb (my, dcumb), bring in^
\BHecxii (cy, emb)
Boiixii, see Bxoniixb
(B3)BOJiHOB&xb (Hyio, yemb), excite,
agitate
(c)BopoBaxb (pvK), yemb) (50), steal
(3a)BopMaxb or (no)BopHaxb (iy, limb)
(55), grumble
Bomeji-b (Par. 62) {see Bxoaiixb),
entered
210
VOCABULAEY OF VERBS
211
fsnajiATh (km, ^einb), fall into
VenacTB (any, eiiib) (48)
BcnoMiiHaxb (aio, deiin>) (53), re-
member
BCnOMHHTb (k), nuuy)
BCTaBaTi> (^K>, ^emi>) (52), stand
up, rise
Bcxaxt (^ny, emi.)
/Bcxp-feq^Tb (km, Aeuib), meet
XBcxp-fexHXB ("feny, -fexHrnt) (18)
(sxojiATb (Ky, oflHmjb), go into,
-| enter
[BOttXH (H^p-, euxb)
I Btm-fejiMBaxb (aio, aemb), prepare,
-| execute
[ BiiH-fejiaxfe (aio, aemb) (Par. 208)
Bbiflfly, Bi^MxH, see Buxomixs
fBtrnji^qiiBaxb (aio, aemi>), pay out
^BbmjiaxHXb (ny, xHuib) (Par. 208)
f BbipacxAxb^ (aio, ^eiiib) (18),
-j sprout, grow up
\ *BiiipacxH^ (cxy, enib)
{BbipbiBdxb (^lo, ^enib) (54), dig
out, excavate
BiJipbixb (oH), enib)
rBwxoHiixb (>Ky, 6jmua,)f go out,
-| come out
[bMiixH (ny, emb) (Par. 160),
(no)B'tpHxb (k), Hiiib) (Par. 223),
believe, trust
(c)BH3^xb (jk;^, -*iiib) (Par. 168),
knit, bind
(no)rH4xb (6hh), dnHiiib), hunt, drive
/(no)roBopiixb (ib, limb) (3), speak, say
\ CKaa^xb (jKy, ^TKeoib) (3), say, tell
(no)roHrfxb (hk), euib) (6), hunt
(no)ropeB^xb (pibio, eiiib) (Par. 225),
grieve, mourn
(3a)rpeM'fexb (mjiio, Miimb) (Ex. 49 (c)),
thunder
*(no)rpecx^ (e6y, eiiib), row
*(pa3)rpii3Xb (3:y^, eiub), gnaw, torment
(no)ryjijixb (jiio, ri;emb) (10), walk ; be
idle
naB^it {imperat. of naBdxb, Par.
231), let us, etc.
/naB^xb (naib, emb), give
Inaxb (3) (jiaM-b, Par. 231)
HajiT,, he gave
(no)aep>KAxb (>K^,6p>KHiiib) (Par. 149),
hold
flottxii, see oxoHHXb
/aocxHr^xb (&K), aeuib), reach
tflocxiirHyxb (ny, emb)
{noxo^HXb (>Ky, oflHmb) (48), reach,
arrive at
Hoaxii (ttfly, emb) (Par. 160)
Homejit, mjia {see oxoflHXb) (28),
reached
(B3)jxpeMaxb (MJiib, 6MJieinb) (55), doze,
slumber
r(3a)flpo>K^xb (mf, limb) (29), tremble
\ Hpornyxb (ny, eiub, or n^, emb)
(no)aj'Maxb (aio, aemb) (10), think
(no)Hyxb (y^H), emb), blow
(c)'fejiaxb (aio, aemb) (2), do, make
(c)H'tjiaxbCH (Par. 69), happen, take
place, become
ecxb (13) {pres. tense of 6iirrb, be),
there is, there are
r(no)a{axb (>KMy, emb) (Par. 163), press
-| (c)}Kaxb (coHMy, emb)
\ Ht^xbCfl (43), shrink together
r Hiaxb (>KHy, enib) (18, Par. 163),
-| reap
[ (c)H{axb (cojKH^, emb)
(noao)H{H&xb (mjnYy euib) (Par. 163), wait,
await, expect
(no)Htejiaxb (^H), ^enib) (35), wish,
desire
(*mem> (52) (>Kry, HOKenib, jKryx-b),
-| burn
(^CHteqb (cojKry)
(no)w^xb (jKHBy, emb) (2, 6), live
/3a6oji'feB&xb (km, ^emb), faU ill
Xsaeoji-txb (-tio, iemb) (27)
/3a6MB6xb (^lo, aemb), forget
\3a6uxb (5yay, eim.) (41)
(no)3^BxpaKaxb (aio, aemb), breakfast
r 3arjiHHBiBaxb (aio, aemb), glance at
Vsarjimiyxb (ny', rfnemb)
r3aHyMLiBaxb (aio, aeuib), conceive
-] a plan
(^3aayMaxb (aio, aemb) (28)
aamurkTb (610, Aemb) (35), light,
kindle
3a}K6ib (H<ry, Htmemb)
'aaKJi&^XbiBarb (aio, aemb), put;
pawn ; yoke ; lay
aajiOTKiixb (y-, 6>KHmb)
/saKpuB^xb (^K), Aemb) (35), cover
\3aKp1ixb (p6K), 6emb)
^ Also spelt with o in stem.
212
VOCABULARY OF VERBS
/aaM-feq^TB (&I0, ^eniB), notice
XaaM-txHTi. (-feny, -feTHim,) (31)
raaHHMaxB (^lo, ^eim>) (36), busy,
4 occupy, engage
[aaHjiTB (sattMy, eim.)
fsanikcuBaTB (aio, aemB), inscribe,
4 enter
l^aanHc^Tfc (Hmy, iimemb)
{aapaS^THBaxfc (aio, aenn>) (50),
earn
aapaSoxaTt (aro, aeiiib)
/aaptiB^xB (^H>, aems) (53), bury
\3ap1i1xb (poK), deuTb)
raacxaajijixb (hk), rieiiib) (55), oblige,
-J compel, cause
[aacxasHXfc (bjiio, bhuib)
faacyqaxb or aacy^HBaxB (aio, aeim>)
XaacyqiixB (y, yqHnib), roll up
aaxonjifixb (hh), rieuib) (46), stoke,
keep up fire
aaxoniixfc (njiio, 6nmui.)
faaxoHHXb (jKy, oaHiiib) /set (of sun)
\3aftxH (finy, eiiu,) \go behind
(no)3Baxb (aoBy, eiin>) (Par. 185), caU
(aa)3BeH'fexb (hio, linib) (54), resound,
tinkle
(y)3Hdxb (kK), aemb) (2), know
andiHXb (qy, ninb) (27), mean
aoHfliipoBaxb (pyio, yemt), sound,
auscultate
/ Hrpaxb (km, aeim,) (2), play
\ CMrpaxB
/naBHHHXb (liK), rieiub), excuse
VnaBMHiixb (mb, limb) (Par. 216)
rH3o6pa>Kaxb (aio, aenib) (41), depict,
-| represent
(HaoSpaaiixb (JKy, aiinib)
/Hsyqaxb (aio, &emb) \ learn, study
\HayuHXb (iiy, yiHiub)/ thoroughly
HM-txb ("tic, "feeiiib) (41), have,
possess
(no)HCKaxb (Hiny-, ]&memb) (28), seek
f HxxH (HAy, enib) (Par. 157), go, go
-| on foot, be actually going
(nottxii
Hxxii endxb (46), go to bed
Kaa^xbCH (KajKexcH) (50), appear,
seem
/*K;iiacxb (ajif, emb), put, lay
\ nojiojKiixb (>Ky, 6>KHuib)
(c)KOBaxb (Kyi5, emb), forge, hammer
(c)KOMaHaoBaxb (yK), erab) (56), have
command of troops
/ KOHq^xb (4h), ^emb), finish, end
\(o)K6HqHXb (qy, emb) (19)
(Ha)KopMHXb (MJiib, opMHmb) (39), feed
(no)KpacH'fexb or (3a)KpacH4xb (hio,
keuih) (31), blush
*(no)Kp&cxb or (y)Kp^cxb (ny, emb), steal
r(aa)KpHq&xb (qy, limb) (54), cry, cry
J out
1 KpiiKHyxb (ny, enib) (Par. 212), cry
1, out once
Kyniixb (see noKyn^xb) (6), buy
(no)Kyp6xb or (3a)KypHXb (ib, :^pmnb)
(Par. 149), smoke
(no)Kymaxb (aio, aemb) (10), eat
(co)jir^xb (jiry-, jiJKemb, Jiryxt) (Ex.
54 (a)), tell lies
jierx, (15) (see jiontiixbCH), he lay
down
(no)jiemkTh (my, jKiimb) (10), lie, recline
Jieqb {see JiojKHxbCH), lie down
(no)jiHXb (jibib, emb) (16), pour
jiojKHXbCH (mycb, HiiimbCH) (Par.
141), lie down
*jieqb (;iiiiry, jijiHteiiib, jiryxt)
*(no)ji't3Xb ("feay, enib), climb
(no)jiio6HXb (Sjiib, ibSnuib) (Par. 149),
love
(no)M6jiJiHxb (k), Hnib) (Par. 212, C),
hesitate, delay
/MCJibK^xb (aio, aeiiib), flit, flit past
\MejibKHyxb (ny, emb)
(no)MHpiixb (h), limb) (55), reconcile
Mort (6) (past tense of MO'ib), could
MdHtex-b (present tense ofmovcb), can,
may
(npo)M6KHyxb (ny, emb), be wet through
(npo)M6jiBHXb (bjik), BHmb), speak, say
(no)MOJiiixb (jiib, 6jiHmb), pray
(no)MOJiiixbCH (53), say one's prayers
(c)MOHb (Mor;^, djKemb, dryxx.) (Par.
168), be able, can, may
(no)MyqHXb (iy, mnb), torture, torment
(no)M'femaxb (^K), ^emb), prevent, dis-
turb
rHarH5^xbCH (4iocb, aenibCH) (54),
4 bend, stoop
(HarH^xbCH (H^cb, HembCH)
(no)Han'tHXbCH (-feiocb, -feembCH) (56),
hope
CHaabiB^xb (Aid, 4emb), call, name
HaaB^Xb (aoBy, emb)
HaawB^xbCH (Par. 185), be called
1:
VOCABULARY OF VERBS
213
/nanpaBaiiTi. (Am, Aemb), direct
(nanp^BHTb (bjik), BHinb)
fuaxojiATi, (jKy, 6ji.muh) (64), come
J upon, find
I HattTii (iifly, emt) (44)
VHaxomixbCH (42), be, be found
THaqMH^Tb (km, ^eim>) (56), begin
Vnaq^Tb (my, enib)
HamejiT. (Par. 62), found
HeHp^BHTbCH, neg. of Hp^BHTbca
*(no)HecTik (necy, enib) (Par. 157), carry,
be actually carrying
HecTHCb, hurry along
Hect (Par. 63), carried
(no)HociiTb (my, denmb), carry, be in
the way of carrying
(no)HpaBHTbCH (BJiiocb, BHuib) (Par. 38),
be pleasing
roSBHB&Tb (km, kemb) (55), twine
-j round, embrace
VoSBiiTb (oSoBbib, enib)
(no)o6^HaTb (aio, aeuib), dine
roBJian-feB^Tb (aio), master, take
-I possession
I^OBjiaji-feTb (-feio, -feemb)
roa-feB&Tb (aio, aeuib) (52), put on,
-| dress, clothe
Vofl-feTb (iny, emb) (52)
I oaapjiTb (riio, rfenib), shine (upon),
-| light up
[ oaapiiTb (lb , limb)
{on^cbiBaTb (km, aemb) (56), de-
scribe
onHC^Tb (my, limemb)
{ocB-fem&Tb (km, ^emb), illumine
ocB-feTiiTb ("femy, 'fexHinb)
{ocM^TpHBaxb (aio, aemb), survey,
inspect
OCMOTp-feTb (pib, dxpHiiib)
rocTaB^xbCH (ocTaibcb, embCH), re-
-| main, be left, stay
VocTdTbCfl (dnycb, embcn) (27)
{ocxaBJijiTb (Am, ^ienib) (55), leave,
forsake
OCT^BHTb (bJIK), BHUIb)
foTBoaikTb (>Ky , dannib), convey away
\oTBe3Tii (3f, emb) (27)
/oTB-feH^Tb (km, ^einb) (19), answer
XoTB-feTHTb (iiy, "fexHIIIb)
J OTroHjiTb (Am, jiemb), drive, chase
-| away
(oTroHdTb (oTroHib, dHHmb) (16)
/oTHBHr&Tb (km), remove
\oT(o)HBliHyTb (ny, nemb)
/oTHMx^Tb (km, ^enib) (18), rest
\oTaoxHyTb (h;^, emb)
{oTKpuBATb (km, ^emb) (35), uncover,
open
OTKpiiTb (6io, 6eiiib) (22)
f oTi^jiHBaTb (aio, aemb), unmoor,
cast off
OTH^JIHTb (H), Hmb)
oTh-kamkTb (km, &enib), drive off,
start
OT-b-fexaxb ("feny, emb)
omi^nbiBaxb (aio, aemb), palpate,
finger
om^axb (aK), aemb)
/n^Haxb (aio, aemb) (Par. 159 note), fall
\nacTb (ajif, enib)
(Bc)naxaTb (namy', ^meiiib) (Par. 168),
plough
nepettay (Par. 160), see nepexo6Tb
TnepexomiTb (my, 6aHmb),go through,
-j across
(nepeiiTH (eiAjif, emb)
(Ha)nHc^Tb (my, nmemb) (Par. 168), write
(BiJi)nHTb (nbio, nbemb) (Par. 162), drink
(3a)naaKaTb or (no)nMKaTb (k^y, emb)
(27 and 53), weep, bewail, lament
nji^KaxbCH, wail (intrans.)
(3a)njiaTiiTb (aiy, ^xHmb) (Par. 208), pay
noGji'feAH'feTb, see Gji-fe^H-feTb
rnoS-feHta^Tb (km, keun>) (56), conquer,
4 vanquish
l^noS-fefliiTb ("kmuf, 'l^nilmb)
/ noflMeT^Tb (aio, ^enib) (55), sweep up
\*nonMecTii (erf, emb)
{nojiHHMdxb (km, ^enib) (54), lift, raise
nojiHHTb (HHMy, Am emb) (22)
noHKHM^TbCH, rise
(nojixomixb (mf, dniraib), go up to;
-| resemble
( noHoiixH (iiy, emb)
fnojKHB^xb (km, demb) (35), live,
-] dwell
VnoHoiTb (>KHB^, emb)
/noK^3biBaTb (aio, aemb) (52), show
\n0Ka3ATb (mf, ^Htemb) (3)
{noKHH&Tb (^10, ^eiiib) (55), abandon,
leave in the lurch
noKriiiyxb (y, eim>)
noKpacirtxb, see Kpacirfexb
/noKynaxb (km, keuib) (53), buy
\Kyniixb (njiib, ynnmb) (6)
Tnojiar^xb (^10, 4eiiib) (35), suppose,
J think
l^nojioHoixb (my, dmwnh) (ofoo= put)
214
VOCABULARY OF VERBS
/nojiHBAxb (Aio, Aeim.) (43), water
i.nojiHTt (jii>K), bemt.)
nojiojKHTi. {see KJiacxt,) lay, put
/nojiyq^Tt (dio, deiiib) (52), receive
\nojiyqHTb (yiy, ^qninb) (Par. 98)
(Bc)n6MHHTi> (h), Huib), remember; cm;^
noMHHTCH, he remembers (Par.
147)
/noMoraxb (aio, 4erab) (53), help
\noM6qb (ory, 6>Kemb, 6ryTh)
{noHHM^Tb (^H), Aemb) (6), under-
stand
noHiiTb (noiiMy^, erab)
TnonaAaTb (aio, ^emb), faU upon, light
-{ upon
VnondcTb (any, emb)
(Hc)n6pTHTb (6pqy, dpxHmb) (39), spoil,
ruin
/nopbiBaxb (^H), aeim>), tear
\nopBaTb (pBy, eiiib)
nopMB^TbCH, strive for, try hard
nocji^Tb {see nocbiJiaxb), send
nocMarpHBaTb (aio, aemb) (55), look
at, observe
nOCMOTP'feTb (h), dTpHmb)
nocxaBJiHTb (hk), fieuib) (55), set, set
up, erect
nocxaBHXb (bjifo, BHinb)
rnocxynaxb (aio, Aemb) (44), behave,
-| act, enter upon
Vnocxyniixb (njiio, yoHmb) (16)
/nocbiJi^xb (4io, ^euib) (53), send
Inocji^xb (mjiib, emb) (10)
[noc-femaxb {km, aemb) (19), visit,
-| frequent
VnoctxHXb (-ferny, "fexiiuib)
nocfenjiH, see c-feaxb
/ noxpHc^xb (^K), aemb) (54), shake
l*noxpHCXH {cf, emb)
/noiHHHXb (liio, Hemb) (46), repair
InoqHHiixb (w, liHBtmb)
fnoHurkTb {Am, &ena>) (Par. 185),
I esteem, regard, consider
\noq6cxb ('ixjf, emb)
noHHX&xbCH, be considered as
nomejix>, mji& (10) {see hxx6), went
noicxb, see -fecxb
/npewnoiHx^xb {Am, aemb), prefer
\npennoHecxb (qxy, emb)
/npeHCxaBJirixb (hid, Hemb), represent
Vnpeacx^BHXb (bjiio, Bumb)
rnpH5jiH}Kaxb {km, ^emb), bring
-| nearer
VnpH5Jiii3HXb (liJKy, iiaimib)
npH6jiHH<&xbCH, approach
rnpHroxoBJiflXb (liio, lieiiib) (18), pre.
-| pare
(^npHrox6BHXb (bjiio, BHmb)
npHHaHJieH^^xb (my, ikmb) (Par.
,141), belong
/npHHHMaxb (aio, &emb), accept
\npHHrixb (npHMy, laiviemb)
rnpHHociixb (ouiy, 6cHmb) (52), bring
-j npHHCcxH (cy, emb) (52)
(npuHecx. (Par. 63), he brought
rnpHxoHiixb {my, d^nmb) (56), arrive,
J come (on foot)
j npHxxH {ujif, emb)
l^npnmejib, mji^, etc. (Par. 62), came
npiHHyx-b (Par. 160), will come, are
to come
Tnpi'feaHiaxb {km, 6eiiib), arrive (not
-| on foot)
(npi-txaxb (-fejiy, emb) (Par. 97)
rnpoBOHHXb (my, djmmb) (55), lead
-j through, spend (time)
^npoBecxii (ejiy, emb)
/npoflaB^xb (aaib, emb), sell
\npoflaxb (aMb) (Par. 231)
rnpoflojiHtaxb (^10, ^emb) (35), con-
A tinue
[npoji6ji>KHXb (6ji>Ky, 6ji>Kikmb)
npofifly, see npoxofliixb, go through
(no)npocHXb (my, 6cHiiib) (53), beg,
request
'npoxofliixb {my, 6HHiiib) (52), tra-
verse, go through
npottxii (ftAy, emb) (52)
npomejn>, mjia, 6, A (Par. 62), tra-
versed
rnpomaxb {km, ^enib) (52), pardon,
I remit
1 npocxiixb (om^, cxiimb) (52)
inpom^xbCH, bid farewell
/npiiraxb (aio, aemb) (2), jump about
\npiirHyxb (ny, emb), jump (once)
*(no)np}icxb (nay, eim.) (Par. 157),
spin
/nycK&xb {km, ^eiiib) (28), let, admit
\nycxHXb (ymy, ycxHmb) (52)
nycxb, let ! (Par. 215)
(c)n'fexb (noH), emb) (Par. 165), sing
(no)pa56xaxb (aio, aemb) (2), work
{o6)pkjioBaTb (ayio, emb) (53), delight
(o6)panoBaxbCH, rejoice, be glad
rpasroBJiflXbCH (rfioeb, liembCH) (53)
J paaroB-ixbCH (-feiocb, -tembCH), eat
1 meat for the first time after the
I. fast
VOCABULARY OF VERBS
215
rpaaa-bBaxb (km, &einb) (52), undress
J {trans. )
I paaa-fexb (iny, -tHenib) (52)
l^pasfl-feB^TbCH, undress (m<m/i5.)
/paajiHiaxb (Ah), ^eiub), distinguish
\pa3JiHqHTt (qy, hi^iiib)
fpaacK^sbiBaTb (aio, aeim.) (46), re-
-| late, tell
l^paacKaa&Ti. (m^, kmeuib) (18)
(y)pa3yM'feTi> (ifero, 'temt), understand
paayM-fecTCH (55), it is understood,
it goes without saying
*(Bii)pacTH or pocxH (cxy, euib), grow
(Ha)pHcoBaTB (cyio, euib) (19), draw
/posKji^TBCH (^locb, keuibcn), be born
\poaiiTi>CH (Htycb, niiuiBCfl) (47)
(no)pi.iTb (p6io, 6emb) (53), dig
(no)p6TbCH, stir up, rummage about in
{p-feuiaxb (^lo, aeuib) (35), solve,
resolve
p-femHTb (y, 6mt) (28)
(no)caaiiTt (JKy, kwkuib), plant
/ cajxHETbCH (jKycb, ^HiiuibCH), sit down
t.*c'fecTi> (cjiay, euib) (15)
rcGHBaxb (^K), aemb), knock off,
A lead astray
l^cSnxb (co5bK), erab)
ca-fejiaxb (see aifejiaxb), do, make
(no)cHfl'fexb ()Ky, HHUib) (15), sit
(3a)cirfxb (fiio, riemb) (16), shine
JcK^awBaxb (aio, aemb), relate
\cKaaaxb (my, antemb) (3), tell, say
TcKJi^auBaxb (aio, aemb), put to-
I gether, fold
\CKaacxb (aAy, emb)
cjiojKHXb (my, 6>KHiin>) also means
compose
/cKOjibaiixb (my, aiimb), slide, glide
\cKOJib3Hyxb (uy, emb)
CKOiiqaxbca (aiocb, dembca) (47),
die
{CKpbiBaxb (kjo, ^emb) (31), hide,
conceal
CKpbixb (p6K), 6emb) (31)
(no)cjiy}KHXb (my, ymnmb) (Par. 149),
serve
/cJiyi^xbCH (aexcH), happen
\cjiyquxbCH (-^uxcn) (16)
(no)cjiymaxb (aio, aemb) (35), listen
(y)cjibimaxb (y, umb) (29), hear
(no)cMOxp-fexb (i5, dxpumb) (Par. 149),
contemplate, look upon, consider
(no)cMtiUHXb or (Ha)cM'feinH[xb {^, limb)
(56), make laugh
(3a)cM'ferfxbCH ("feibcb, -feeuxbCH) (Par.
157), laugh
{CHHM^xb (^H), ^euib), take down,
take off
CHHXb (cHHMy', liMeim.) (Par. 98)
cojiraji-b, see Jiraxb
Tcnac^xb (Aio, Aeuib), save
-I cnacxii (cy, emb)
icnac-b (15), he saved
(no)cnAxb (cnjiib, cniimb) (2), sleep
[ cnpamHBaxb (aio, aemb) (19), ques-
-| tion, ask
[cnpociixb (my, 6cHmb) (19)
(no)cxABHXb (bjik), BHiub) (55), set,
stand
{CXaHOBHXbCfl (BJIlbCb, dSHmbCH),
become
cxaxb (16) (cxAny, emb), become,
set about, begin
(no)cxapaxbCH (aiocb, aeuibCH) (31), try,
strive, endeavour
TcxdHXb (oH), 6Him>) (9), cost, be
-! worth ; ne cxohxt., don't mention
I it
(no)cxojixb (oi5, oiimb) (9), stand
(no)cxp6HXb (6io, dumb) (10), build
'(no)cxyiAxb (qy-, limb) (54), knock
cxyKiiyxb (ny, emb)
cinxaxb (aio, aemb) (56), count,
reckon
cqecxb (eoqx^, emb)
clicKHBaxb (aio , aeiub) (Ex. 55 A (a)),
seek out
CMCK&xb (emu^, i^memb)
c-feji-b (15) (see ca^iixbcfl), he sat
down
c-fecxb (see cajnixcH), sit down
*(Bbi)c'feib or *(no)c'feHb (-feKy, -feqemb,
feKyx-b), chop up; flog
(no)c'feflxb ("feio, -feemb) (6), sow
(no)xeMH-fexb or (3a)xeMH4Tb (iio, -ieiiib)
(46), grow dark
(Ha)xK4xb or (c6)xKaxb (xny, qemb, Kyxi)
(Par. 157), weave
rxojiKaxbCH (Aiocb, AeuibCH), strike,
-! knock against
VxojiKHyxbCH (nycb, embCfl)
(Hc)xonHXb (njiib, dnumb) (46), heat,
stoke
{xp6raxb (aio, aemb) (35), touch,
move
xpdiiyxb (ny, emb)
(no)xflHyxbCH (xHHycb, jinembCH) (48),
extend (intrans.)
216
VOCABULARY OF VEEBS
/yS-fer^Tb (^lo, Aemb), run away
XyG-fewK^Tb (try, jkhiiib, ryxt) (16)
[ ynaw^TB (Aio, 4emi>), respect,
-| esteem
[ yB^HtHTJb (jKy, KHnii>)
TyroHiiTb (riio, jieuib), drive, hunt
-j away
(^yrii^Tb (roHib, dHHUib)
/ynapiiTB (rfio, jteuib), strike
\yfl^pHTB (K), HUIfc)
TyaHaB^Tb (yanaib, emi.), recognize,
-! get to know
(ysHaxB (yaiiaio, eim>) (22)
jyunpk-Tb (aio, ^erni.) (42), die
\yMep6Tb (yMpy, emt) (Par. 96)
TyMfciB^Tb (^Hj, ^emb) (52), wash
-{ (face and hands, etc.)
[ yivrfiTb (yM6io, 6emb) (52)
(c)yM'feTb (fkio, -feeuib) (35), under-
stand, know how to, be able
/ynafl^Tb (^lo, &emb), fall (off), sink
\yn&CTb (any, enib)
ynaji-b (15), he fell
r ynoxpeSJiHTb (hk), jienib) (35), use
\ynoTpe6iiTb (6jik), 6iimb)
{ycxp^HBaTb (aio, aeuib) (55),
arrange
ycxpoiixb (6io, 6Hnib)
/ ycbinaxb (^lo, &emb), fall asleep
\ycHyxb (Hy, emb)
r yxBep>K;iaxb (aio, aeuib), affirm,
-{ strengthen
t yxBcparixb (pH{()^, pHiiiiib)
{yxoanxb (>Ky, 6flHmb) (55), go
away; escape
yfiXH (iifly, eiiib)
{(Ha)yqHXb (y^y, ^HHiiib) (19), teach
(Ha)yHHXbCH (19), learn, study
yniixb Hanaycxb, learn by rote
ymeji-b.mjia, etc. (34) (see yxcjiiixb),
went away
(no)xBajiHXb (lb, ajiumb) (39), praise
xoHHxb (xoHty', xdflHmb) (2, Par.
149), go, be in the habit of
going
(3a)xox'fexb (6; Par. 222), wish
xdHeim. (46 ; Par. 222)
n^pcxBOBaxb (cxByio, emb) (48),
rule, reign
*(3a)tiBecxik (-fexy, emb), bloom
(no)qHCXHXb or (BiJi)HHCXHXb (limy,
licxHmb) (56), clean
(no)qHxaxb (aio, aeuib) (19), read
(no)iyBCXBOBaxb (BCXByio, yemb), feel
/mar^xb (aio, ^emb), step, stride
\marHyxb (ny, emb)
mejib, mjia, etc. {see iixxii), went
/(npo)menxaxb (nny, 6nqemb), whisper
\^ mennyxb (ny, emb)
mnxb (lubio, mbenib) (Par. 162),
sew
(c)mHXb (combib, euib)
fejib, past tense of -fecxb
(no)'fccxb (6 ; Par. 220), eat
(no)'fexaxb (iny, -tjiemb) (Par. 97), go
by any conveyance, not on
foot
RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Verbs are given in a special vocabulary on pp. 210-216, and do not appear in
this vocabulary.
Of nouns the nominatives singular and plural, and occasionally the genitive
plural, are given. When the noun ends in -t or when any other cause of ambiguity
is present, the gender is marked.
Otherwise nouns in -t, -ft are masculine ; nouns in -a, -h are feminine ; nouns in
-o, -e, -Mfl are neuter.
When a masculine noun ^ is printed :
I. Bt-taa-b, Bi, the accent remains throughout on the stem ;
II. rdj^h, a, the accent in the singular is on the stem and in the plural on the
termination ;
III. flBopT>, li, the accent falls throughout on the termination.
IV. b6jiki., h (dBi.), all cases of the singular and the nominative plural are
accented on stem, oblique cases in plural have accent on termination.
Of adjectives the predicative forms (see Lesson XLIX), when in common use,
are given in the lists in Par. 237. '
Regularly derived adverbs in -o (see Par. 189 (1)) are not always separately
mentioned.
The number enclosed in brackets indicates the vocabulary, paragraph, or
exercise where a phonetic transcript of the word will be found.
a (1), and, but
^BrycTT., H (47), August
6BTopi>, BI, author
636yKa, H, alphabet, ABC book
Ahcti., bi, I (37), stork
AjiBKC^HHpa, Alexandra
AjieKc^nHpi,, Alexander
aHrjiHq^HHH'b, ^ne (34), Englishman
anrjinqaHKa, h (Par. 230), Englishwoman
aHrjiIticKitt (13), English
AhfjiIh (34), England
anp-fejib, H (m.) (47), April
665a, bi (14), peasant-woman
6&6yuiKsi, H (12), grandmother,
woman
e^pHH-b, 66pe (55), master, lord
old
66cHH, H (eni) (39), fable
66TK)mKa, H (m.) (46), father, dear father
6e3npecT&HHo (36), incessantly
SeanpecT^HHbiii, continual, incessant
Seat, 5630 (4), without
Ceper-b, 6, II (10), shore, bank
6JiH>Ke, nearer
6jiiijKHifi[ {adj.) (52), neighbour
6jiH3Kift, near
6jiH3'b {gen.) (Par. 70), near
Sji-fenHbiii (31), pale
eor^TCTBo, a (50), riches, wealth
6oraTHii (5), rich
Gor^ue, richer
B6r'b, H (dB-b) (53), God
B6>Ke! (53), O God !
Sojir^pHHT,, 6pe (Par. 230), Bulgar
BojirAplH, Bulgaria
6ojirapKa, H (Par. 230), Bulgarian woman
eojibHiina, bi (27), infirmary, hospital
^ With many nouns, and especially with monosyllables, the use of the figures I, II, etc.
not necessary.
217
218
RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
6ojibH6ii (4), sick, ill
66abme (32), more; 66ai>me Bcer6 (50),
more than all, most
65jibmitt (Par. 195), greater, larger
Sojibiudtt (5), great, large, grown up
66ji-fee (40), more
Soji-fesHeHHtitt, sickly
eoji-fesHb, H (/.) (27), disease, sickness
Span, TbH (eBi) (3), brother
epHxAHCKitt (50), British
SyflexT. {impers. verb) (54), that will do,
enough
e^nymitt (Par. 128), future, coming
SyKBaJitHua, literal, exact
6yM^ra, h (19), paper
6m, 61. (Par. 199), conditional particle
diiK-b, H (49), ox
SbiJib, H (/.) (53), true story
GucTpbitt, quick, sudden
eijmocTb (/.) (17), poverty
S-fe^HbEa (5), poor
6'fe.ribitt (1), white
BAra-b, a, e, H (7), your, yours
Bflpyr-b (27), suddenly
Bcapd, epa (13), pail
Besfl-fe (56), everywhere
BejiiiKift (25), great
BejiHKOJi^nHbitt (40), splendid, magni-
ficent
BepSjiibH-b, M (48), camel
BepeBKa, h (43), rope
BepcT^, epcTM (48), verst (1067 metres)
Bepx6Mi, (Par. 48), on horseback; ixaxb
BepxdM-b, to ride
BfepxT,, H (10), top, summit
BecejiMtt (56), merry, glad, jolly
Becji6, ecjia, oar
BecM, ecHM (18), spring (season);
BecH6H), ofi, in spring
Becb, BOH, Bce, Bc-fe (Par. 106), all, entire
BecbM^, very, extremely
B^qep-b, k (18), evening; BeqepoM-b, in
the evening
B6mb, H (/.) (39), thing, affair
BsaflT. (44), backwards
B3p6cjibitt (46), grown-up, adult
Biiaubiti, visible, evident
BiiflT., M, sight, view, aspect
bhh6, -^a (43), wine
BiicfejiHua, bi, gallows
B^cfejibHHKT., H, man who has been
hanged
BKycHutt (7), nice, tasty
Bjiafl-fenie, H (48), possession, territory
BM-tcTo {gen.) (Par. 70), instead of
BM-fecT-fe (36), together
BHcsanHLili (54), sudden
BHHSb, down(stream)
BHHM^xejibHbia (19), attentive
BHyKa, H, granddaughter
BHyK-b, H (3), grandson
BHyqKa, h (14), little granddaughter
Bo^B-b, in, into
BOBce (34), at all, completely; BdBce hb,
not at all
BOH^, -^M (12), water
Bo6HHMft (56), military, warlike
Bdsji-fe {gen.) (Par. 70), beside, near
B03M6>KHbitt (Par. 41), possible
BoitHa, -M (28), war
BdiicKO, k (56), army
BOKs^ji-b, u (19), railway-station
BdjiK-b, H (dB-b) (37), wolf
BOJiH^, -bi, wave
B6jibHbili, free
Bopdxa {neut. pi.) (55), gate
B6pb, bi (oBT.) (50), thief
BoceMH^Huaxb (Par. 148), eighteen
B6ceMb (36), eight
BoceMbHecflxT, (Par. 150), eighty
BoceMbcox'b (181 (6)), eight hundred
BOCKpeceHie, resurrection, Easter
BOCKpec6Hbe, h (Par. 128), Sunday
BocxdR-b, I (48), East
BocbMHaeciixbiti, eightieth
BocbMHcdxbiii (Par. 184), eight-hundredth
BocbM6ft (Par. 166), eighth
Boxb (2), here is ! there is I there are I
BuepeA'b (44), forwards
Bparb, li (56), enemy
bp6mh, mcM {n.) (Par. 219), time
Bce (18), all, entire; always
BcerAa (18), always
Bcer6, gen. case of Bccb, etc.
Bcibay (56), everywhere
BOH, fern. sing, of Bscb
BcriKia (36), each, every
Bx6pHHK'b, H (47), Tuesday
Bxop6ft (Par. 166), second
Biep^ (16), yesterday
Bb, BO {ace. or prep.) (10), in, into
B-bisHb, M (10), entrance
Bbi (Par. 80), you
BbipajKCHie, H, expression
Bbicdidtt (30), high, tall
Bbicox^, oxu (45), height
Bbicmitt (Par. 195), higher, highest
RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
21&
Biiime Bcerd, higher than all, highest
B'hjib (41), ^y, surely
B-tKT,, H or k (48), age, century, lifetime
B-fepHo, truly ; iie B-fepno? (56), is it not
so?
B^pHtifl, true, faithful
B^Tepi., xpH or k, wind
ra* (2), where
reHep^ji-b, bi (56), general
repMaHiH (34), Germany
rep6H, H (5), hero
repoiinH, h (14), heroine
rii6ejib, h (/.) (50), ruin
rjianKiti, smooth
rjidai,, k (i.) (16), eye
rjiy66Kitt (30), deep
rjiynbrti (1), stupid
rHHJi6tt, decayed
ra-feaad, -a (43), nest
roBop^miii, the person speaking
I rdfli., k (10), year
^ rojioBd, r6;ioBu (16), head
roJioHHMa (42), hungry
rdjioc-b, ky II (29), voice
rojibitt, naked
rdnqiii (40), hunting (dog)
rop^ano (32), by far
r6pe, A (28), grief, misfortune
rdpofli,, k, II (27), town
r6pie, more bitter
r6pbKifi, bitter
ropHHiti (Par. 94), hot
rocn6b (m.) {gen. sing. r6cnoa) (54),
the Lord
rocyH^pcTBo, a (48), state, empire
rocyflapb, h (m.) (48), ruler
roTdsMii, ready
rpajKHamiHt, ^ne (Par. 230), burgher,
citizen
rpamina, m (44), frontier
rpeSeu-b, 6mi, III, rower
rpHS-b, li (49), mushroom
rpo3^, -^bi (49), thunder-storm
rpoM^aHbift (34), enormous
rpdMKift (29), loud
rpdM-b, bi (^B-b) (49), thunder
rpyjta, u, heap, lot
rpynb, H (/.), breast
rpjisHbiii (13), dirty
ryGepulH (42), a government
rycxda, thick, dense
i^cb, H (6ft) (m.) (49), goose
Ha (6), yes, and, but
aBHiS[Mi.-HaBH6 (21), long ago
flaBH6, long, long since
H^me (18), even
flajieKitt (45), far, remote
n^jibme, H^ji-fee, farther
H&Ma, bi (12), lady
H^mibiit, given
naTqaHHH-b, aiie (Par. 230), Dane
nkHSL, H, summer resort
HBa, SB-fe (7), two
flB^auaxb (36), twenty
HBepb, H (6ii) (/.) (Par. 64), door
HBop^n-b, pm^iy III (5), palace
ABop-b, li (36), court, yard; na nBop-fe
(Ex. 18, A), out of doors
HBopHmiH-b, jine (Par. 230), nobleman
(courtier)
Byxc6Tbitt (Par. 184), two-hundredth
HB-feH^nnaxb (Par. 148), twelve
HB-tcTH (Par. 155), two hundred
eBHH6cTo (Par. 150), ninety
HeBHTHc6Tbiii (Par. 184), nine -hundredth
acBHTH^nuaxB (Par. 148), nineteen
fleBHTb (36), nine
ji;eBflTbc6T'b, nine hundred
flCK^Spb, 6 (w.). Ill (47), December
HCHb, HHH (w.) (18), day
6HbrH (/. pi.) (40), money
Acp^BHH, H (6Hb) (18), hamlet (without
church) ; bt. Hep6BH'fe, in the country
n6peBo, k or cbbh (bes-b) (37), tree
HepeBHfflibiit (9), wooden
H6cHTb (36), ten
nem^BJie, cheaper
HcmeBbiit, cheap
HHB^H'b, w, couch
HiiKitt (Par. 92), wild
flHTH, n-fexH (ji.) (Par. 229), child
njiiiHHbitt (16), long
AJiH {gen.) (4), for
flHCMi. (Par. 68), by day
flHo, 6HbH (beBT.), bottom
flo {gen.) (Par. 70), up to, till, before
floGpoT^ (39), goodness, kindness
H66pbili (1), good, kind
flOBdjibHo (55), sufficiently, fairly, rather
nojKHb, li (m.) (42), rain
HOKTopi., ^, II, doctor
jl6jiritt (30), long
fldJiro {adv.) (43), long
adjimen-b, predicative of n^JimHua (42),
obliged, compelled
220
KUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
ndma (8), at home
noM^uinifl (24), domesticated, tame
ndMHKT.. H (9), little house
noMdii, home, homewards
H6MTb, & (l), house
nop6ra, H (50), way, road
Hopordii, op6}Ke (50), dear, dearer
HOCK&, -^H (19), board
jxd'iKa, H (14), little daughter
HciB, fldqepH (Par. 86), daughter
HP^Ka, H (16), fight, scrimmage
upoB^ {n. pi.) (46), firewood, timber
UpoHtdmitt (29) trembling
pyr6ft (5), other, second
Apyrt, py3b}4 (36tt) (Par. 15), friend
Hpynb, npyra (44), one another; npyrt
CB npyroM-B (46), with each other
HPj'jKdKi,, li. III (14), little friend, dear
friend
HySi,, bi (38), oak
HypHofi (18), bad, hateful
H^mHMii, close, oppressive
niBOHKa (12), little girl
nieymKa, h (37), girl (growing up)
H-feHymKa, h (eKt) (m.) (46), grandfather
H-fefli., BI (1), grandfather
H-feticTBHTejibHO (50), really, indeed
n-fejio, & (34), deed, affair, business
H-fexH {n. pi) (Par. 229), children
n^TCTBo (41), childhood
H-feHxejifcHbiii, active
jijiHH, H or Bji (b6bb) (w.) (29), uncle
er6 (2), him, of him, his, it, its
ejxB^ (43), hardly, scarcely
eateHH^BHBitt (42), daily
eMy- (Par. 21), to him
6CJ1H (34), if
ecTB (13), there is, there are
eme (16), still
eA (12), her, of her, hers
Ht&jiKitt, piteous, pitiful
jK&jiKo (49), it is a pity
Ht^pKiii (18), hot
Ht^TBa, BI (18), harvest, crops
jKe (37), for, but, yet, on the other
hand, though, too, anyway
jKCJiTBitt (23), yellow
jKeji-fesHBia (50), of iron
>Keji-fe30, a (Par. 194), iron
JKBH^, eHH (27), wife
HtfemnHiia, BI (12), woman
w6pTBa, H, victim, sacrifice
HtHB6ft, living, alive
HHBdTHoe {n. adj.) (24), animal
jKiiflKift, thin (of fluids)
H3HB (/.) (49), life
jKHJiBc, -^H (39), dwelling
JK^pHBllt, fat
jKiixejiB, H (m.) (54), inhabitant
jKiJTo, a (18), crops, com
jKyp&BJib, Tk (m.). Ill (37), crane
3a (ace, instr.) (Par. 44), behind, for,
at; HH 3^ ^xo, not at any price;
1TO 3a-? what sort of ?
3a66Ta, u, care
3^BTpa (Par. 68), to-morrow
s^BxpaK-B, H (34), breakfast, lunch
sajikna, H (36), exercise, problem
s^jia, BI, hall, drawing-room
3^MOKB, 3^MKH, Castlo
3aM6K'B, 3aMKH, III (21), lock
3&najiB, I (48), west
3aqi;MB (10), for what, why
sB-tpb, H (61i) (m.) (37), wild beast
3fl&Hie, H, I (7), building
33;op6BBiii (4), well, healthy
3Hop6Bbe, health
3Ap&BCTByttTe! (Par. 216) {imperative
mood of sHp^BCTBOBaxb (Byio, yemb),
good day ! how are you ? hail !
3Htcb (3), here
sejieHwti (16), green
3eMJiri, -^H (6nb) (21), land, earth
3hm6, -^bi (2), winter
3HM6fi (Par. 68), in winter
3Ji6ii, bad, cross, spiteful
3HaK6MBifi (41), known
BH^K-b, H (23), sign
3H^MH, ena (Par. 219), banner
sH^Hie, H (50), knowledge
ankHvu-h (pres. tense of ank^mrb) (27),
that means, that is
36JIOTO (29), gold
30JioT6tt (29), golden
30JI1., predicative form of sjioft
ap^jinme, a, sight, spectacle
H
H (1), and, also
ii6o (conj.) (36), for
Hrp6, -^Bi (Par. 60), game
H36^, -^u (42), peasant-house, hut
H3BHmiTe! (Par. 216) {imperative mood),
excuse me I
RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
221
H3BtcTHHtt (45), well-known, certain
H3o6paataiomift {pres. part.) (40), re-
presenting
Hsi., H30 (gen.) (Par. 70), out, out of, from
Hat-aa igen.), from behind
lijiH (18), or
HMnepaTopt, u (48), emperor
HMt (Par. 21) (dat.), to them
liMH, HMenA (Par. 219), name
HHor4 (18), sometimes
HHocTpAHem, HnM (34), foreigner
HHTep6cHfcitt (41), interesting
Hcn^HCKlft (50), Spanish
Hcnp^Biibifi (56), correct, exact
UxkniPL (34), Italy
HTEJibiiHCKiti, Italian
HXT, (Par. 21), them, of them, their
iiojii,, H (47), July
libHb, H (47), June
K
KaCHH^Ti,, w, I, private room
Kamaua (36), each
KaK6Bi> (2), predicative of KaKOBdii?
which ? what sort of ? ,
KaK6ii? (6), which ? what sort of ?
KaK6ii-HH6yHi (55), some or other
KaKT. (2), how, as
KaK-b paat (16), just, just as it happened
K^MeHHBift (9), of stone
K&MCHt, MHH (6ft) (W.), StOUO
KaoHxaHCKift, belonging to the captain
Kapana^m-B, h. III (Par. 67), pencil
KapxiiHa, u (37), picture
K&ma, H (56), gruel
Kaeenpa, u (19), pulpit, teacher's desk
KBapxHpa, ti (40), flat, dwelling
KB&c-b, I, kvass (beverage made with
rye-bread and malt)
KiicjiBitt (7), sour
KJikKb, M (53), treasure
KJi^ccHMft (19), class, belonging to class-
room
KJHoq-b, li (21), key
KHiira, H (18), book
KHjiat, hA (aeft) (m.) (8), prince
KO=K'b
Korn^ (2), when
Kor6? (Par. 21), whom ? whose ?
KdjKa, H (12), leather, skin
Koiak, if
K0Jibu6, K6jibna (29), ring
KOJi-tHo, a (55), knee
K6MHaTa, w (21), room
KOMy (Par. 21), to whom
KOMT. (prep, of KTo) (10), whom
KOHT6pa, bi, office
KOHibmHH, H (17), stable
Kon6eHKa, h, a little copeck
KoneftKa, h (Par. 153), copeck
Kop^Sjib, li, III (m.), ship
Kop6Ba, bi (21), cow
Kopoji6Ba, w (48), queen
Kopdjib, H, III (w.) (9), king
Kop6TKift (30), short
Kopdie, shorter
K6pnyc'b, k, II, corps (of officers)
KocA, -^bi (18), scythe
KdcTb, H (eft) (/.)* (49), bone
KOxeHOK-b, Tfixa (Ex. 16, C), kitten
KOTopbift {relat. pron. ; relat. or interrog.
adj.) (7), who, which
K6mKa, H (12), cat
KpMnift (Par. 82), extreme, last; no
Kp^ftHcft M-tpi, at least
KpacHBuft (9), beautiful
KpdcHbift (19), red; beautiful
Kpecjio, a (9), arm-chair
KpecTbfiHHn'b, jine (18), peasant
KpoB^xb, H (/.) (31), bedstead
KpdBb (/.), blood
KpbM-fe (gen.) (Par. 70), besides, except;
KpdM* Tord, besides (that)
KpdxKitt, gentle
KpyrJibift (16), round
Kpyxdft, stiflF, abrupt, thick
KpinKift (29), firm, strong
Kxo (2), who
KySiimKa, h (54), jug, pot
Kyn^ (2), whither
KyHa-xo, to somewhere or anywhere
Kyanen-b, li. III (48), smith
KyneuT., niw. III (23), merchant
KycdK-b, CKii, III (13), piece, bit
Kj^xHH, H (oHb or OH-b) (21), kitchcu
Kyqa, H (55), heap, lot
Kj^maiibe, a (7), food
KT., KG {dat.) (Par. 39), towards, to
K-feMx.? (ci.) (9) (interrog.), with whom ? '
ji^Mua, bi (35), lamp
ji^na, bi (12), paw
jiauKa, H (49), little paw
jicBT., jibBbi (37), lion
jierKitt (25), light, easy
jierne, easier
jiejK^HKa, H (55), bench by the stove
222
EUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
jiH, Jib, interrogative particle (Par. 12),
whether
(jiHc4) jiHCHita, w (37), fox
jiHu6, -^a, face; person
jidKa, H (49), boat
jion^xa, u (53), spade
ji6maHi>, H (6tt) (/.) (17), horse
jiyn>, 6 (10), meadow
jiyM, -^bi, moon
ji^qmitt (Par. 195), better, best
ji-&Hi)Bbifi (19), idle, lazy
ji-fenb (/.) (39), laziness
ji-fecTHHna, u (22), stair
Ji-fecb, ^ (1), wood, forest
ji-feTO, k (2), summer, year
ji-feroMb (2), in summer
jiK)663Hbitt (41), amiable, dear
jiio56Bb {gen. 6Bii) (/.) (39), love
jiio6oniiTCTBO, a, curiosity
nibHH (w. pl.)f 6ft (42), people
M
M&tt, H (47), May
M&jiem>Kitt (5), little, small
M^ao {adv.) (6), little
Majibiti (40), little
M&JIbHHKb, H (1), boy
M^px-b, bi (47), March
M^cKa, H (oKx), mask
M&cjio, a (9), butter
M^xepH, see Maxb, mother
MaxepHHCKifl, motherly
M^xymKa, h (bki) (46), mother, dear
mother
Maxb, Maxepii (Par. 86), mother
MamiiH&jibHO (31), mechanically, absently
M66ejib (/.) (46), furniture
McnB-fenb, H, I (8), bear
M6jiJieHHbiii (32), slow
M6mffy {instr. or gen.) (16), between,
among
M^JiKitt, small, fine
M^Hbiue, M^H-fee {adv. and adj.) (40), less ;
M^Hbme Bcer6, least
M6Hbraitt (Par. 195), smaller, less
MeHbm6ft (Par. 195), younger, youngest
MBHrf (3), me, of me
MepxBHtt (Par. 190), dead
Mex6jib,H (/.) (46), snow-storm, blizzard
MHJiJiidHT., M (Par. 155), million
MiiJiwii (40), nice, dear
M^MO {prep, with gen. ; adv.) (Par. 62),
past
MHHricxp-b, bi (9), minister
MHH^xa, bi (Par. 181 (c)), minute
Miip-b, I (55), peace
Mipx,, li (39), world; village community
MJian6ft= Moaojx6ti
MJi^amitt (19), younger, youngest
MHcJro (2), much
MHdroHHCJieHHbiii (40), numerous
MH6>KecxBo, a (40), a lot, large number
MH6ii, mh6io (9), (with etc.) me
MH-fe (Par. 21) {dat. or prep.), me
MH^Hie, H (34), opinion
Moryiitt (9), mighty
Mdatex-b-Suxb (32), may be, perhaps
MdJKHO (4), it is possible
M63rb, ri, brain, marrow
M6ii, MOH, Moe, moh (Par. 104), my, mine
Mditpbift (18), wet, damp
MOJiHXBa, M (54), prayer
MOJiofldtt (1), young
MOJIOK6 (16), milk
MOH^xa, bi (54), money, coin
M6pe, ri (7), sea
Mop63i>, bi (18), frost
MdcTh, ik (10), bridge
My>KHKb, ik. III (3), peasant
MyHiqiina, u (23), man
M^m-bj MyjKbrf (6ii), husband
Mbi (Par. 80), we
Miimb, H (6ii) (/.) (38), mouse
M-fejib, I (19), chalk
M-fepa, bi (22), measure
M-fecxo, & (16) place
M-fecHirb, bi, I (44), month, moon
M'femaHHH'b, ^He (Par. 230), small towns-
man
MriFKiii (25), soft
MHco (13), flesh, meat
H
Ha {ace. and prep.) (10), on to, on
HaBcxp-feqy, towards, to meet
Hajio (49), it is necessary; Mn-fe ukjio, I
have to, I must
Haa-b, naao {instr.) (Par. 127), over,
above
Haa^-b (21), back, ago
HaHsycxb (39), by heart
HaKOH^n-b (10), at last
HanpaBJiHie, h, direction
Hanp6xHB'b (50), but, on the contrary;
{prep, with gen.), opposite
napdwb, bi, I (27), people
nacxoriiuiii (Par. 128), present; real
HaxdflKa, H (53), a find
Hai^ao, a (28), beginning
Ham-b (7), our, ours
RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
223
He (1), not
h66o, iieSec^ (7), sky, heaven
iier6, form used for ero after prepositions
Hen^BHo (41), recently, not long since
He^-tjiH, H (43), week
H6>KejiH=q-feMTb (Par. 194), than
He3HaK6Mbitt, unknown, strange
HeKpaciiBbitt (9), ugly, not pretty
Hejifcsji (Par. 41), (it is) impossible
HeMH6ro (2), a little, not much, some-
what
HeM^=eM:(' after prep.
Henpijixejib, h (66), enemy
HenpifiTHuft (Par. 116), unpleasant
HecMOTpji Ha {ace.) (43), in spite of
HeciAcTie, h (26), misfortune
HecMdcTHbiti (28), unfortunate, unhappy
He t6 (55), if not that, or else
HeyjK^JiH (15), surely not, can it be ?
is it possible that ?
Heyq^Hie {or be) (7), ignorance
HeyqcHMii (55), ignorant
H64ero (53)=H'feT'b naqerd, qxo (qer6),
nothing of which
H^q-feM-B (53)=H'feT'b HHqer6, q'feMi.,
nothing whereby
HHrn-fe (8), nowhere
HiiJKe, lower
HH3Kitt (30), low, not high
HHKaKdit, no sort of
HHKorjii (3), never
HHKOJiatt {gen. &h), Nicholas
hhkt6 (Par. 47, E), no one
HHKyji&, to nowhere
HHM-b (ct HHMT.) (9) tnstr. of oHt, him
HiiMH (cT. HiiMH) (9) instr. of oHii, them
HHXT., see Par. 126
Hwqerd (6), gen. of Hnqxd, nothing; (^to)
HHqero (34), it does not matter
HHqT6 (Par. 47, E), nothing
HO (2), but
HOBBift (34), new
HaJK-b, li (40), knife
HocHJibmHKT., H, bearer
h6ci., ik (16), nose
Hdqb, H (ett) (/.) (17), night ; H6qbK) (Par.
68), by night
HorfSpb, li (m.). Ill (47), November
Hy (54), well
HyMKHBitt (29), necessary ; mh* HyatHo, I
need
H*MeuKiii, German
H-iMeni., Mubi, German
n-fecKOJiBKle {adj.), a few, some
H-fecKOJibKo {with gen.) (40), a few, some
H-fexTb (6), no, not, there is not
HfiHH, H (12), children's nurse
o, 66o, 061. ( 1 0),conceming, about {prep,);
against {ace.)
66a, 66* (Par. 176 {d)\ both
66jiaKo, A, cloud
66pa3'b, H (Par. 115) form, manner,
image; KaKiiM-b 66pa30M'b? in what
manner ? how ?
o6MKnoB6HHo (9), usually
o6MKHOB6HHMtt, usual, customary
66*, fern, of 66a
oe-feat, H (34), dinner; nocjit o&kjvBLy in
the afternoon
oaecTb, OBCii, III (6), oats
OBu^, -^w (21), sheep
orop6HT., M (3), kitchen -garden
oflHHHajmaxb (Par. 148), eleven
omiH-b, H^, 6, li {m. and w.), i (/.)
(Par. 107 (6)), one, a certain, sole,
alone
oHH^HtHbi (4), once
onH&KOJK'b (46), however
63epo, a or epa (48), lake
okh6, -^a (9), window
6KOJ10 (Par. 181 (c) {gen.), about, nearly
OKOHq&xejibHo, finally, definitively
OKp6cxHocxb, H (/.) (40), environs
oKxri6pb, li (m.). Ill (47), October
oji6Hb, H (m.) (5), stag
oHi., OH&, 6, li (i) (2, 12, Par. 126), he,
she, it, they
onacnbitt, dangerous
ocejix., cjiii. III (6), ass
6ceHb, H (/.) (17), autumn
ocxajibH6fl (5^, remaining
6cxpbift (40) ^^^
0x6111., xniii, r^^^, father
oxKyna (19), wheni
oxqer6 (28), wherefoT^^ ^yhy
ox-b, 6x0 {gen.) (Par. 70)VaHpfclrom, from
o(|)Hu6pT., bi or ^, I or II, 01
oqeBiiflHO (31), evidently
6qeHb (3), very
n
n^jieHTb, abnw (29), finger
nanHp6ca, w (39), cigarette
n^peHb, pHH (31), (peasant) lad
napyc-b, 6, II, sail
n&cnopx'b, M or 6 (Par. 146), passport
n6pBbiii (Par. 166), first
nep6HHH {fern, adj.) (24), ante-room, hall
224
KUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
n6pejti> (Par. 44) (ace, instr.), before,
in front of
nepcKJi^HHHa, bi, cross-beam
nep6, nepbH (10), feather, pen
nepi^TKa, h (50), glove
necT., ncbi (49), dog
n6Hb, H (6ft) (/.) (46), stove
niiBO, k (43), beer
nHCbM6, ^a (44), letter
miTbe, ri (7), drink
niima, H (35), food
nji&MH, CH^ (w.) (Par. 219), flame
nji^Tbe, H (besT.) (43), clothing
nji6MH, uenk (Par. 219), race, breed
njicM^iHHiiK'b, H (29), nephew
njiBMHHHHua, M (29), niece
nji6Ti, M, raft
nji6xo (2), badly
njiox6ft (1), bad
njidmajxb, H (/.) (50), square, (market-)
place
no (Par. 87), {dat.) on, along, according
to, etc. ; {ace. ) up to, as far as, at the
rate of (Par. 183); (Par. 69) {prep.)
after
no-^HrjiiftcKH (3), in English
noBapHxa, n (Par. 69), cook
noBepxHocTb, h (/.), surface
noBTopeHie, h (22), repetition
norojia (18), weather
n6j;ji'b {gen.), beside, near
noapiy^ra, h (14), friend (/.)
noH-b, ndflo {ace, instr.) (Par. 127), under
nom^jiyii {imperat. of noHcajiOBaxb) (Par.
216), if you like, as far as I am
concerned, perhaps
nojK^jiyficTa (Par. 216), please
ndaflHitt (24), late
n63>Ke (32), later
noaiiniH, h (ift), position
noK^, as long as ; noK^ ne, tUl, until
noKdfiHLift (48), peaceful; deceased;
(c)noK6ftHoft Hdqn! (56), good-night !
noKopHo (38), humbly, obediently
n6jie, H (18), field
nojiesHbift (48), useful
n6jiHo (54), stop, that is enough
n6jiHbiH (54), full, complete
nojiyime, better, in a better manner
nojiHaca , gen. nojiyiaca {m. ) , half -an-hour
no JIT., 6 (10), floor
nojii, H, sex
noM-feiuHKi,, n (38), land-ownei*
noHea'feabHHK'b, h (34), Monday
nop^, -^bi (52), time ; nopa, it is time
nopdn-b, H (17), vice
nopTH6ft, MH (30), taflor
no-pyecKH (3), in Russian
ndcji-b {gen.) (32), after
nocji-tnHift (36), latter, last
nocT6jib, H (/.) (15), bed
nocyna (/. coll.) (46), vessels, utensils
noTOMy, therefore
noTOMy mo (8), for, because
noTdM-b (7), thereafter, then
no-(J)paHny3CKn (5), in French
noxBajid, ii (19), praise
noxdAi, bi (56), campaign
noqeMy (6), wherefore, why
nouTH (18), almost, nearly
no^TOMy (22), therefore
npaBa (32), truth
npaBHHBocTb (39), truthfulness, upright-
ness
np^BHJiBHHtt (32), regular, correct
np^BO (32), really, truly
np^Bbift, right, just
npasflHHK-b, H (54), festival
np^3flHHimbitt (48), festival {adj.)
npaKTHHHutt, practical
npeBocxoAHbiii, excellent
npeHJiojKeHie, h, offer, proposal
npeflMexi,, h, object
npfejKfle {prep, with gen. ; adv.) (32),
before; npe;Kj;eBcer6(46),firstof all
npn {prep.) (Par. 45), at, near, in the
time of
npiiSbiJib, H (/.) (50), profit
npHK^aqHK'b, h, I (21), shop-assistant,
clerk
npHJiejKHMft (19), diligent
npHM-fep-b, bi, example; na npHM-fepi
(39), for example
npHpdfla (55), nature
npHTdK-b, H (48), confluent, tributary
npHx6>KaH (/. adj.) (55), ante-room,
corridor
npirtxejib, h (Par. 194), friend
npiflXHbift (Par. 116), pleasant
npo {ace.) (Par. 100) =o {prep.), concern-
ing, about
npocxiixe! {imperat. of npocxiixb) (Par.
216), excuse me ! pardon me !
np6cxo (55), simply
npocxoft (Par. 88 (6)), simple
upduijibiii (34), past ; last, preceding
npomattxe! {imperat. of npom^Tb) (Par.
216), farewell !
npHM6a (Par. 192), upright
npHHHKi., H, gingerbread
RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
225
nxiiixa, Bi (12), bird ^
nTiiHKa, H (43), little bird
nycxdft, empty; vain
nycTiiHH, H (48), desert, wilderness
nmemina (34), wheat
n-fecHH, H (43), song
n-fiuiKdwh (44), on foot
nHTHc6TMti (Par. 184), five-hundredth
nHTH&anaTfc (Par. 148), fifteen
n^THHna, u (47), Friday
HHTuti (Par. 166), fifth
HHTi. (36), five
HHTbHecriT-B (Par. 150), fifty
HHTbcdTi, (Par. 155), five hundred
paSdxa, bi (48), work
paSdTHHKt, H, I (5), workman
pa66Hia (48), workman; working (day)
paBHojtymHBitt, indifferent
p^BHwtt, equal
pkR-b, a, o, BI (Par. 188), glad
p^aB-fc (44), perhaps ; interrog. particle
paacKda-B, bi (56), tale, narration
p^a-B, li, time, occasion ; (adv.) (4), once
p^na, BI, wound
paneHBifl (50), wounded
P^HHitt (Par. 89), early
pdHo (32), early
p^Hbme, pka-he (32), earlier
peSeHOK-B, HKa, Grfxa (Par. 229), child
PHcynoK-B, HKH (38), sketch, drawing
p66Kili (5), timid
p6bho (46), exactly
poHH6ft (14), related, native, dear
poKHecTBd (28), Christmas
poKB (/.) (34), rye
pdaoBBiit (16), pink
Poccfa (34), Russia
pyS^mna, h (43), shirt
pySjiB, A{m.) (9), rouble
pyK^, -^H (29), hand, arm
pyccKifi (13), Russian
pyH6ii, BH (b^b-b). III (43), brook, stream
pyifceMi., pyqBHMH (43), in torrents
PMJKifi (16), tan( -coloured)
p-tHKitt (Par. 128), rare, infrequent
p-feKd, --H (16), river
pAjiOM-b c-B (31), beside, in one row with
pjia-B, 6 (31), row
c45jih, h (40), sabre
c^-B, ^ (3), garden
cdMKa, H (14), female animal; hind
caMOB^p-B, BI (55), tea-urn, lit. self-boiler
caM-B, k, 5, H (emphatic) (22), self, same
c^MBitt (Par. 186), very, same; prefixed to
adjective it has the force of extremely,
most
can6r'B, li, III (46), boot
capAfi, H (5), barn, cart-shed
CBHa^Hie, H, re-union, meeting; no
cBHH^HiH (Par. 216), au revoir
cBHii^u-B, gen. sing, nq^ (50), lead
CBHHBri, ^H (eft) (37), pig
CB6tt, A, e, A (Par. 104), one's own
cB-ixjiBiii (17), light, bright
CB-fexjioe BocKpecdHfce (53), Easter
Sunday
CB-fexT,, I (7), light ; world
cB'fe'i6, -^H, candle
CBflx6fl:, holy
ce6;i (reflex.) (Par. 103), self, of self;
cesi, to oneself
cer6jmH (8), to-day
ceBM6ft (Par. 166), seventh
cefi, ci;i, e, 6 (Par. 106), this
ceiiqac-B (27), at once
cejid, ejia (7), village (with church)
ceMHc6xBiii (Par. 184), seven-hundredth
ccMH^auaxB (Par. 148), seventeen
ceMB (36), seven
ceMBHecHxi (Par. 150), seventy
ceMBcox'B, seven hundred
ceMBji, -^H (6fl) (28), family
cenxiiepB, A, III (47), September
cepaiixBitt (21), angry, violent
c6pAue, & (44), heart
cepe5p6 (Par. 194), silver
cep65pHHBitt (54), of silver
cepeiiHa, u, middle
cepn-B, li (18), sickle
cecxpA, ecxpH (12), sister
ca&jin (adv. and prep, with gen.) (56),
from behiad
CHTdpa, BI (39), cigar
c^jiBiiBitt (1), strong
c^Hitt (7), blue
CHpox^, -^H (m. or f.) (28), orphan
CHpdxKa, H (28), Uttle orphan
CHpoxcxBo (43), orphanhood
CKasKa, H (39), fairy-tale
cKaM6ttKa, H (19), bench, seat
CKapjiaxikiia (50), scarlet fever
ck6jibko (6), how much, how many
CK6po (32), soon
ckp6mhocxb (/.) (39), modesty
cKp6MHBift (39), modest
226
RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
cKyHiiLitt, sad, wearisome
cjia6Mti (1), weak
cjiesA, e3H (43), tear
cjiiiniKOM'b (39), too
cjiyr&, -^H (w.) (65), servant
cjiywKdHKa, H (12), maid, servant
cjiy>K6a, M (56), service
cjiyqall, H (Par. 61), case, occasion, op-
portunity ; BO BCHKOM-b cay^iat (41),
in any case
cmJiraHHii, audible
cji-feflyiomitt, following
cji-fendti, Tblind
CMepxi., H (6a) (/.) (48), death
CM-fejibiii (56), bold
CMtmndit, ridiculous, laughable; eiviy
cM-femnd, he is inclined to laugh
CHa^Ajia (22), first, to begin with
CH6Ba (16), again, anew
CH-feri., & (42), snow
00=01.
ooS^Ka, H (12), dog
oo66ii, 6io, instr. case of ceQA, self
ooBo-tMi. HO (H-fext) (42), not at all
oojKaji^nie (8), regret; Kt ooHtaji-feHiio
(8), unfortunately
ooaHAHie, consciousness
cojiaaxoKiJl (56), soldierly
oojin^xx,, Bi (XT.) (36), soldier
o6jiHu;e, a (Par. 61), sun
oopoKOBdtt (Par. 171), fortieth
c6poK'b (Par. 150), forty
ooxi,, gen. of oxo, hundred
odxbiii (Par. 171), hundredth
COX&, -^H (18), Russian plough
on&jibHJi, H (em.) (38), bedroom
onoK6iiHBitt (66), quiet, still, restful
on-fejiuii (7), ripe
op^ay (49), together, at one time
opena, -^bi (47), Wednesday
cpejiHHa, bi, middle
cxaKdii-b, bi (39), glass, tumbler
oxapuK-b, li, III (3), old man
cxapHM (53), days of old
cx^pooxa, bi (m.) (39), village elder
cx&pooxB (/.), old age
oxapyxa, h (14), old woman
cxapyraKa (53), old wifie
cx4pmiit (19), elder, eldest
ox^pbitt (1), old
oxo (Par. 150), hundred
oxoJIJi^a, bi (50), capital (city)
0TOJi6Ban (/. adj.) (38), dining-room
oxDji-b, III (9), table
CTdjifcKo (40), so much
oxdH-b, M, groaning
oxopoH^, 6poHbi (56), side
oxoxbicHHHbiii, hundred-thousandth
oxpaAajieu-b, jibuu, sufferer
oxpanA, -^bi (60), country, land
oxp6MH, en^ (Par. 219), stirrup
oxp6riti, strict
cxyji-b, oxyjiBH (esi.) (Par. 60), chair
cx-fena, -^bi (37), wall
cy666xa, m (47), Saturday
oyMpaK-b, I, twilight, gloom
o^rn,, bi (26), soup
oyp6Bbiti (19), rough, severe; dark
oyx6fi (21), dry
OH^cxie (26), happiness ; no (ki) cq^cxlio,
happily
oqaoxjniBbrti (28), happy
o-b, oo (gen.) (Par. 44), from, off, since;
{ace. ) about (approximately), as ;
(instr.) with, along with
c6hx,, cbiHOBbH (6ii) (1), son
oiipi., bi (3), cheese
o-feBep-b, I (48), north
o-feiviH, cfeMOHa (Par. 219), seed
c-ipbiit (16), grey
ciojik (16), hither
xaSAK-b, A, III, tobacco
x^itjKe (10), also, likewise
xaK6ft (2), such
xaK-b (2), so; xaK-b Mki. (36), as (conj.);
He x^K-b, not so, in the wrong
way
xaM-b (3), there
xBepHHfi (23), hard
xBoit, ji, e, Tk (Par. 104), thy
xe5i {dat. or prep, o/xm) (Par. 21), thee
xe6ji (gen. or ace. of xm) (Par. 21), thee
xBKyniiii (Par. 128), current
xeMH6, (it is) dark
xeMHbiii (17), dark
xenepb (3), now
xen^nbift (17), warm
xepninie (55), patience
xexKa, H (29), aunt
xexpajib, H (/.) (17), copy-book
xAxift (30), low, soft, not loud
xo, neuter of xox-b, that; ne x6, if not
that, or else ; xo me, the same thing ;
xo . . . xo . . ., now . . . then, at one
time ... at another time
xo56k), 6tt, instr. of xm (9), the
TOB^pmm., H (9), companion
RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
227
TOB^p-b, M, wares, goods
Tord (3), then, at that time
Tord, gen. of toti., to (Par. 21)
T6)Ke=T^KH<e (10), also
TdJiCTtrtt, thick
TdJifcKo (5), only ; na h xdjibKO (44), and
that's all; xdjubKO qro (52), just
{tvith past tenses)
TOM^, dat. o/TOTt, TO (Par. 21)
TOTb, Ta, TO, T-fe (2, Par. 107), that, the
one
t6tt. jKe, same
T6qHo, as it were
TpaB^, -^Bi (21), grass
Tp6Tiii (Par. 166), third
TpexcdTHii (Par. 184), three -hundredth
Tpn (Par. 27), three
TpHAuaTB (Par. 150), thirty
TpHH^Huaxb (Par. 148), thirteen
TpAcTa (Par. 155), three hundred
Tpy6Ka, H (39), pipe
TpyflHHii (23), difficult
TpyHOJiK)6HBMtt (18), industrious
Tpyflt, li (21), trouble, labour
TpycjiHBbiii, cowardly
Tpyct, H (681.) (49), coward
TYRk (16), thither
Tyn6ii (40), blunt
TM (2), thou
TiicHqa (Par. 155), thousand
TiicOTHBiit (Par. 184), thousandth
TbMa (/.), darkness
T-fejio, a, body
T-feM-b (9), instr. of totx., with that
T-feM-b He M^Hte, none the less
T^cHMii, narrow, close
TiopbMa, -^bi (44), prison
THHtejibifl (23), heavy
y (gen.) (Par. 70), at, near, with ; y nerd,
he has
yatacHbitt (27), terrible, frightful
fa<e, narrower
yjK6 (18), already ; y}K6 aBH6, for a long
time past; ym^ He,.no longer
:^H:HH'b, bi (36), supper
yaniii (25), narrow
yjiHua, bi (21), street
yMHuii (1), intelligent
yM-fenie, understanding, capacity
yHH3iiTejibHbitt, humiliating
yp6KT., H (18), lesson
yc^jSbSa, u (38), farm ; estate
^Tpo, & (18), morning; ;^TpoM'b, in the
morning
yq^cTie, share, part, interest
yqemiK-b, 6, III (19), pupil
yqcHHua, m (19), pupil (/.)
yqeHbiit, learned man
yq6Hbe, h (7), learning, teaching, study
yiiijiraite, a (Par. 73 (a)), school
yqiijimuHbia (36), connected with the
school
yqiiTejib, Af II (19), teacher
yHHxejibHHqa, h (19), lady-teacher
yfeajj-b, H (42), circuit, district, canton
yibTHbitt (45), comfortable
<D
^cBp^jib, li (m.). Ill (47), February
Op&HulH (34), France
^paHuj^acKitt (13), French
^panuyai,, bi (53), Frenchman
xBocTi., 6 (16), tail
xiiTpMti (41), sly
xikmHbifi (41), ravenous
xji-ie-b, M (1), bread
xjrkd-b, k, com
xoB^iKH-b, xo3jieBa, host, master
xoji6pa (27), cholera
xojidAHbiti (17), cold
xopomift (4), good
xopom6 (2), (it is) well
xp46pbift (5), brave
xpHCTlamiH'b, ^iie (Par. 230), Christian
xpHCTdBT., a, o, hi (Par. 181 (6)), of Christ
xyH6ti, bad
x^nmili (Par. 195), worse, worst
x^jKe, worse
^
napiina, M (14), czarina
n^pcTBo, a (48), reign, empire
Etapb, (5), czar
nsiTi, ^ (7), colour
qB-iT-b, li, flower
n^pKOBb, KBH (6ii) (/.) (19), church
n^jiufl (28), whole
q^, Haii, II (43), tea
q&CTo (4), often
q^CTb, H (6h) (/.) (40), part
H^cb, li (Par. 128),* hour; but nsa, xpn,
qenipe qac^, 2, 3, 4 hours or o'clock ;
oHt Ha qac^x-b (56), he is on guard
228
EUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
q&mKa, h (43), cup
qer6, gen. of vlto (Far. 21)
qeii, hi>j4, e, 6 (Par. 106), whose?
qejioB-feKT. {l)fPl JiionH (42), man, people
{after the numerals 5, 6, 7, etc., in the
nom. or ace. use ^ejioB-feK'B)
qcM^, dat. of ito (Par. 21)
qeMt (10), prep, of hto
q^pea-B {ace.) (42), across, through, after
the lapse of
qepHLitt (1), black
q^cTHBiit, honest
qcTB^pn., li. III (47), Thursday
qexBepTbift (Par. 166), fourth
q^TBepTb, H (6ft) (/.) (181 (c)), quarter
qexiipe (Par. 27), four
qexiiipecTa (Par. 155), four hundred
qeTHpexc6TMfi (Par. 184), four-hundredth
qexiipnajmaTi. (Par. 148), fourteen
qHHdBHHKt, H (39), ofiSicial
qncjid, -^a (40), number
qiicTHft (13), clean
qx^Hie, H, reading
qxo {pron. and conj.) (2), which, what;
that; why
qx6, that which, what
qx66M, qxce-b (10), that, in order that
qx6-jiH5o, anything; qxo-HH6:^Hb (Par.
47, E), something or anything j qxo-
xo, something
q^BcxBo, a (31), feeling
qyAHutt, wonderful
qyjKdft (28), strange, not one's own
qyjidKt, JiKi'i, III (44), stocking
qyxb, scarcely
q-feMTb, instr. case of qxo, conj. (9), where-
with; than (Par. 194)
m
majiyH-b, li. III (55), scamp
raecxHc6xHft (Par. 184), six-hundredth
mecxiiAHuaxB (Par. 148), sixteen
mecxdft (Par. 166), sixth
luecxb (36), six
mecxBHecHxi. (Par. 150), sixty
m^Hy H (12), neck
miipe, broader
mHp6Kia (25), broad
mnant or mK^$i>, li (49), press, cup-
board
mndjia, h (18), school
m:^xKa, H (56), joke
m
mendKi., HKii or menrfxa (Ex. 16, C),
puppy
mn (/. pi.) (56), cabbage soup
acx^MHi,, M, print, engraving
^xoro, gen. of i^xoxi,, 5xo (Par. 21)
5xoMy, dat. of ^xoxi, dxo (Par. 21)
5x0X1,, i^xa, o, H (2, Par. 107), this,
that
K)
i5ri. (48), South
H (2), I
}i6jiOKO, H (7), apple
HsiiKt, A, III (23), tongue, language
Ama, u (54), pit, hole
HHB^pb, ri, III (47), January
fipKitt (21), bright-coloured
ripMapKa, H (27), a fair
jicHbift (32), bright, clear
HqM6Hb (w.). Ill (6), barley
ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY
The two preceding vocabularies give more detailed information as to forms of
verbs and nouns and to pronunciation. This vocabulary gives, quite frequently,
only one form for each verb the infinitive of the imperfective aspect ; where two
verbs are given separated only by a comma, the second form is perfective. Of
nouns the nominative, singular and plural, is given.
abandon, to, ocTaBJuiTb ; noKHn^Tb
ABC, ^36yKa
able, to be, Mca ; ywkji,
about, o {prep.); npo (ace); no {dat);
6KOJIO (gen.)
about, to be put, CeanoKdHTbCH
above, over, naHi. {instr.)
abroad, aa rpaniiny (motion); aa
rpamiueio (rest)
abrupt, Kpyxdft
absently, MamHH^jn,HO
accept, to, npHHHM&TB
according to, no (dat.)
across, q6pe3'b,^pe3i> (ace); CKBoab {ace.)
act, to, nocTynaxb
active, fl-feHxejibHwii
activity, H-feHxejibHocTb (/.)
admit, to, nycKaxb
adopt, to, B3Hxb {perf.) ki ceS-t
adult, B3p6cjiLift
affair, H-fejio, &; B6mb (/.), h
affirm, to, yxBepjKflaxb
afraid, to be, see to fear
after, ndcji-fe {gen.); no {prep.)
afternoon, ndcjit 06'jbHa
again, cndsa; onjixb
against, npdxHBt {gen.)
age, see century
age (old), cxapocTb (/.)
agitate, to, bojihob^xb
ago, xoMy Haa^H-b
Alexander, AjieKC^Ewp-b
Alexandra, A;ieKc4HHpa
alive, moBda
all, Becb, BCfl, see, Bc-fe
all, not at, ndBce nifex-b (ne); coBcfeM'b
H-fcx-b (ne)
all, that is, aa h xdjibKO
almost, noqxii
alone, oniiH'b
along, no {dat.)
along with, ex., pji^oMi. ex. {instr.)
aloud, rp6MKO
alphabet, ^36yKa
already, yHt6
also, x^KJKc ; x6jKe ; h
always, BcerHd
amiable, jiio6e3Hbift; M^Jiutt
among, m^mjiy {gen. and ivMr. )
and, h; a (=but)
angry, cepniixbift
animal, jKHBdxHoe, uh
another, npyroft; one another, npyn
Apyra; to one another, jtpyrb
P:^ry; with one another, Hpyrt
ex, np:y'roMx>
answer, to, oxB'feq&xb {dat. of person;
Ha with ace. of question)
anything, Mxo-HH6^wb
anywhere, rfl-fe-KHG^flb
appears, it, KajKcxcH
apple, hSjioko, h
approach, to, npHSjiHHt^xbCH
April, anp-tjib (w.)
arm, pyK&, -^h
arm-chair, Kp6cjio, a
army, B6ttcK0, k
arrange, to, ycxp^HBaxb
arrive, to, npHxoniixb ; npi-txaxb ; (attain
to) ocxiiraxb
arrived, he, npnmejn. ; npi-fexajix.
as, KaKx.; xaKX>KaKx>; instr. case of nouns
230
ENGLISH-KUSSIAN VOCABULARY
as it were, T6qHo
ask, to, npociixb (request) ; to ask (ques-
tions), cnp^uiHBaxb, cnpociiTb
aspect, BiiAt, m
ass, oceji-B, cjiii
at, y {gen. ) ; npn {prep. ) ; bt. ( = in, prep. ) ;
Ha (=on, prep.); aa (=for, behind,
ace.)
at once, ceHMkcb
ate, -feji-b ; Kyniajit
attentive, BHHMaxejibHHtt
audible, cjniiimuft
August, ^BrycT-b
aunt, TCTKa, h
author, aBTopb, bi; nnc^xejib (m.), h
autumn, 6ceHb (/.), h
await, to, jKn^xb
away from, ox-b {gen.)
backwards, Bsajix.
bad, HypH6it; xyA6ii; njiox611
badly, nji6xo
bank (shore), Cepen,, k
banner, sh^mh, ena
barley, H^iMeub (m.)
bam, capati, h
be, to, 6bixb ; HaxoHiixbCfl ; to be usually,
6biBaxb ; to be (of health), noatHB^xb
bear, uejua-kab (w.), h
bearer, HocikjibmHK'b, h
beast, wild, sB-fepb (w.), h
beat, to, Snxb
beautiful, KpaciiBbift; npcKp^cHbitt
because, noxoMy mo
become, to, (c)H'fejiaxbCH; cxauoBiixbCH
bed, nocxejib (/.), h
bed, to go to, see Par. 143, Voc. 46
bedroom, cnajibHH, h
bedstead, KpoB&xb (/.), h
beer, niiBO, k
before, {time) np^mjie {gen.); no {gen.);
{space) nepeab {instr. or ace.)
beg, to, npocHXb
begin, to, HaiHH^xb; cxaxb
beginning, Han^Jio, a
behave, to, nocxynaxb, nocxyraixb
behind, aa {ace. or instr.)
behind, from, c3kjm {gen.)
believe, to, B^pnxb {dat.)
belong, to, npHnaajieHtaxb
bench (seat), cKaM^fiKa, h
bench by the stove, jiem^HKa, h
bend, to, {trans.) narHC^xb; {intrans.)
HarH6^xbCfl
beside, b63Ji* {gen.); priaoMb cb {instr.)
besides, {prep.) Kp6M'fe {gen.); {adv.)
KpdM-fe xor6
best, jiy^miM; HaHJiyimitt
betake oneself, to, nanpaBJijixbCH
better, ji^imitt
better {adv.), Jiyqrae; nojiyHrae
between, Memny {instr. or gen.)
bewail, to, (no)nJi4Kaxb
beyond, see behind
big, 6ojibm6a
bird, nxHua, h; little bird, nxj^qKa, h
bit (piece), Kyc6Kb, CKJk
bitter, rdpbKiti ; more bitter, r6pHe
black, qepHHti
blacksmith, see smith
blind, cji'fen6tt
blizzard, Mex6jib (/.), h
blood, KpOBb (/.)
blow, to, ayxb
blue, chhIh
blunt, xyn61i
blush, to, KpacirfeTb
board, nocKa, -^h
boat, ji6aKa, h
body, x-fejio, &
bold, cM-tjiuti
bone, Kocxb (/.), h
book, KHiira, h
boot, candrb, li
bom, to be, po>KaxbCH, poHJiTbCH
both, 66a, 66*
bottom, AHo, H6HbH
bought, he, Kynnjib
boy, M^JIb^HKb, H
brain, M63rb, nk
brave, xpA6pbttt
bread, xji-teb, u
breakfast, a^BxpaKb, h
breakfast, to, a^BxpaKaxb
breast, rpyb (/.), h
bridge, M6cxb, ii
bright, cB-txjibiii; HCHHft; ftpKifl
bring, to, npHHocnxb {impf.); npHHecxii
bring in, to, BHociixb (carry); BBOjtHXb
(lead)
bring near, to, npuSjiuHt^xb
British, 6pHxaHCKitt
broad, inupdKiili
broader, ni^pe
brook, pyH6ft, bik
brother, ep^xb, bH
brown (tan), pi&Htia
bucket, see pail
ENGLISH-EUSSIAN VOCABULARY
231
build, to, CTp6HTb; bhtb (nest)
building, anknie, h
Bulgaria, BojirapiH
Bulgarian, Sojir^pHH-B, Ape;
(/.), SojirapKa, h
burgher, rpasKaaniiH'B, kne
burn, to, mem,
bury, to, sapuBaTB
business, ^-ijio, A
busy oneself, to, aaHHMdTtcH
but, ho; a
butter, M^cjio, &
buy, to, noKyn^TB, KymiTB
by, instr. case of noun
by far, ropAaao
cabbage soup, mn (/. pi.)
call, to, sBaTb ; HasuB^Tt
called, to be, HaabiBaxbCH
came, npnuieji-B ; npi-fexajit
camel, BepSjnoat, u
campaign, noxdat, bi
can (verb), motb; yM-fexb
candle, cB-fena, ^h
canton, see district
capital (city), cTOjiiiiia, bi
care, aaddxa, bi
carried away, he, otbcs-b
carry, to, HociiTB (indef.); aecrA {def.) ;
B036TB (in a vehicle)
cart-shed, capatt, h
case (occasion), cjiyqait, h; in that case,
b-b TaK6M'B cjiy^a-fe ; in any case, bo
BCjiKOMB cji;^qa'fe
cast off (unmoor), to, OTqdJiHBaxt
castle, a^MOKi., mkh
cat, K6mKa, h
cause, to, aacTaBJijiTB
century, b-^k-b, h or A
certain, oHto-B; HaB-fecTHBifl
chair, cxyji-B, bh; (arm-chair), Kp6cjio, a
chalk, M-feji-B
chatter, to, 6o:ixAxb
cheap, neraeBuft
cheaper, jiemeBJie
cheese, ciip-B, u
child, AHxti ; peSenoK-B {see Par. 229)
childhood, n'txexBO
children, n-fexn; peSiixa
cholera, xoji6pa
Christ, of {adj.), xphcx6b'b
Christian, xpHcxiamiH'B, Ane
Christmas, PojKflecxB6 (Xphcx6bo)
church, aepKOBB, kbh (/.)
cigar, CHr&pa, m
cigarette, nanHp6ca, m
citizen, rpajKflanAH'B, Ana
class, KJIACCB, BI
class, connected with, kjiAcchuK
clean, qncxBiii
clean, to, iiicxHXB
clear, rfcHutt; CB'jbxjiBi^t
clerk, npHKasHHR-B, h
climb, to, ji-feaxB ; to climb into, BJi-feaAxt
close (stuffy), aynraBitt
close, to, see to shut
clothing, njiaxBC, a
cloud, 66jiaKO, A
coin, MOH6xa, u
cold, xoji6HBitt
cold, with, ox-B x6jiony
colour, nB-fex-B, A
come, to, npHxoAiixB ; npi'l^aHt^xB (not on
foot)
come out, to, biIxojihxb
comfortable, cosy, yibxHutt
coming {adj.), 6yHymi
command, to, see to order
command of, to be in, KOMaHoBaxB
{instr.)
companion, xoBapHmt, h
compel, to, aacxaBjijixB
compelled (obliged), 6ji>KHBitt
complete, ndjiHBiii ; u,-hjihiii
completely, coBepra^HHo
conceal, to, CKpBiBaxB
conceive, to, aa^yiviBiBaxB {see Voc. 28)
concerned, as far as I am, nojKdJiytt
conquer, to, noS-featjiAxB
consciousness, coaHaHie
consider, to, noHHxaxB
considered, to be, no^HxaxBCH
contemplate, to, cMoxp-fexb
continual, eeanpecxAmiBiii
continue, to, npoHOJiH^AxB
contrary, on the, nanpdxHBB; naoSopdx'B
convey, to, BoaiixB ; Bcaxii; (carry),
HociixB ; iiecxrit
cook (/.), noBapiixa, h
copeck, Kon6aKa, h ; little copeck, mite,
Kon6eiKa, h
copy-book, xexpaj;B (/.), h
corn, xji-fee-B, &
corps (officers'), KopnycB, &
correct, np^BiuiBHBitt
corridor, npnxdman. {adj.)
cost, to, Cx6HXb
cosy, see comfortable
couch, jmnkwh, M
232
ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULAEY
could, he, Mort
count, to, CHHT^TI.
country, expand, -^m ; in the country, bi
course, of, see understood, it is
court(yard), Bopi., 6
cover, to, sanptiB^TB
cow, KopoBa, M
coward, tp:^ci>, m
cowardly, xpycjiiiBMii
crane (bird), wKyp&Bjit (w.), ^
crops, JK^TBa {/.), M
cross {adj.), ajiott
cry, to, KpHiaTi>; nji^Kaxb (weep)
cunning, xiixptitt
cup, q^niKa, h
cupboard, uiKani. or nm^^b, ii
curiosity, JiK)6oniixcxBO
current {adj.), xsK^mitt
czar, napB, li (m.)
czarina, napiina, bi
daily, e>Keji;H6BHbia
damp, MdKpMli
Dane, naxqaHHrn., ane; (/.), naxidHKa, h
dangerous, onacHbiii
dark, xeMHtiii ; it is dark, xeMHd
dark, to grow, xeiwH-fexb
darkness, xcmhoxA ; xbM^
daughter, ji6m,, qepn ; little daughter,
H6qKa, H
day, jteHb (m.) Hhh; by day, nneM-b;
good day ! aflp^BcxByfixel
dead, MepxBuft
dear, nopor6tt ; M^Jiuii
dearer, nopbiKe
death, cMepxb (/.)
decayed, mundn
deceased, noKdiiHbia
December, neK^6pb (m.)
deep, rjiy66Kift
defeat, to, see to conquer
delay, to, M6j(JiHXb
depict, to, H3o6paH<&xb
describe, to, oniicHBaxb
desert, nycxiiHH, h
desire, to, jKCJiaxb; xox-fexb
desk (teacher's), K^eenpa, m
did, H^jiaji-b, ca'fejiaji'b ; indicates past
die, to, yMHp^xb ; cKOHq^xbCH
died, he, ;^Mep'b
difi&cult, xpy'HHMtt
difficulty, xp^flHOcxb (/.)
dig, to, pHXb ; to dig out, BupwB&xb
diligent, npHJi6H{HbiiS
dine, to, oS'tAaxb
dining-room, cxoji6Bafl, uh
dinner, oQ-kn-b, h
direction, HanpaBJidnie
dirty, rpriaHwfi
disease, Coji'taHb (/.), h
distant, see far
distinctly, hcho
district (canton), ytafl-b, bi
do, to, fl-tjiaxb
doctor, ndRxopx, d
dog, coG^Ka, H ; necb, ncH
domesticated, nomkumiH
door, Bepb (/.) h; out of doors, na
HBop-fe
down, BKHSl.
doze, to, HpcM^xb
draw, to, pHcoB&xb
drawing (sketch), pnc^^HOK'b, hkh
drawing-room, a&jia, m; rocxIiHan, ua
dreadful, ywdcHMtt
drenched, to be, M6KHyxb
dress, to {act), oatB^xb; {neut.), on-fe-
B&xbCH, onixbCH
drink, uHXbe, h; drink, to, nnxb
drive, to (=go in a vehicle), -fexaxb ;
(= convey in a vehicle), Boaiixb;
to drive away ( = chase), yroHHXb;
oxroHriixb; ( = depart), ox-b-fesHi^xb
drove up, he, npiixajix. ; ncfexajiTb
dry, cyx6ft
dwelling, munb'e, -^h
E
each, KkmjihiPL ; each other, Hpyn. np^^ra ;
to each other, npyr-b npyry; with
each other, Hpyrx. ex. pyroMx> ; see
Par. 183
early, p^HHili ; {adv.), pkao
earn, to, sapaG^xtiBaxb
earth, aeMJia, -^h ; Mipi, li (world)
easier, jier^e
east, BocxdK'b
Easter, CB-fexjioe BocKpec6Hbe
easy, jierKifi
eat, to, -fecxb; K^maxb
eight, B6ceiMb
eighteen, BoceMHAfluaxb
eighth, BOCbMdii
eight hundred, BoceMbc6xi.
eightieth, BocbMHHeoixMii
eighty, BoceMbAecHX'b
ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY
233
either, lijin
elder, cxApmitt
elder, village, cxdpocTa, u (m.)
eleven, onikHHamxaTib
else (or), ne t6
embrace, to, oSBHB^Tb
emperor, HMnepAxopi.
empire, a^pcxBo, &
empty, nycxdii
end, KoneuT., umi
enemy, iienpi&xejib, h (m.)j Bparx., li
engage, to, see to occupy
England, AhfjiIh
English, ^HrjiiftcKiii ; in English, no-
^HrJlfttCKH
Englishman, aHrjiKHdramx., ^ne
enormous, rpoMaAHtiit
enough, hob6jh.ho ; enough! n6jiHoI
enter, to (=go in), Bxcaiixi.; (= in-
scribe), 3an6cMBaxb ; to enter upon,
nocxyn^xB
entered, he, Bomejii.
entire, i^-ijiutt; h^jihuK
entrance, BTb-fesAx., ti
entrance-hali, nep6aHHH, ia
environs, okp6cxhocxi> (/.), h
equal, p^Bii&iit
erect, to, nocxaBJiiixb
estate, yc&abSa, m
esteem, to, ysajK^xt; noHHxdxb
even, h^jkc
evening, B6Hep'i,, k; in the evening,
B^qepoM'B
every, Kkmjihiii; bcAkIH
everybody, BCjiKia qeJiOB'&K'b
everything, Bce
everywhere, Bcibay; Bean'^
evident, oneBikjiHuA
exact, Hcnp^BHutt
exactly, p6bho
example, npHiviipi, h; for example, na
npHM-fepx.
excavate, to, BLipuBdxb
excellent, npeBocxdAHMit
excuse, to, HaBHurfxi. ; excuse me !
H3BHHHXel
execute, to, Bi>mijiuBaxi>
exercise (problem), aanaqa
expect, to, jKHaxb
expression, Bupa>K6Hie
extend, to (intr.), xHHyxbCH
external, napyHtHutt
extreme, Kp^uitt
extremely, c&uhiA (adj.), d^ieni.
eye, rji^ai*, 6
fable, 6&CHH, h
face, jiHuid, -^a
fair, a, >ipMapKa, h
fairly, noB6abHO
fairy-tale, CKAsKa, h
faithful, B-^pHbiH
fall, to, ynafl^xb ; to fall into, Bnan^xb
family, ceMbii, -^u
far, jianeuiPL
far {before compar.), rop^sno
farewell ! npom^xel
farther, nkn-he, H^Jibme
fast, see quick
fat, inApHuii
father, ox^u-b, tu^; C^xiomKa, h
fear, to, GojixbCH
feast, see festival
feather, nep6, n6pbH
February, $eBp^jib (m.)
feeble, cji&6Mit
feed, to, KopMiixb
feel, to, lyBCXBOBaxb
feel a desire, to, aaxortTt (per/.)
feeling, qyBcxBO, a
fell, he, yn^Jix.
festival, np^aflmiKX., h; {adj.)^ np&a-
HHHHHMtt
few, H-tcKOJibKO {with gen.); HeMH6rie
{adj.)
field, n6jie, A
fifteen, nnxH^naxb
fifth, njixutt
fiftieth, nHXHHecrtxBitt
fifty, naxbaecfixb
fight, Hp^Ka, H
finally, oKOH^idTejibHo
find, a, Hax6HKa
find, to, iiaxoniixb
fine, see good
finger, n^Jieub, Jibqu
finish, to, KOHq&xb
fire, or6Hb, thA (m.); to keep up the
fire, to stoke, aaxonaiixb
firewood, flpoB^ {n. pi.)
firm, Kp-fenKitt
first, nepBMft ; at first, cHaq^Jia ; first of
all, np6>Kae Bcerd
five, HHXb
five hundred, nnxbcdx-b
flame, hji^mh {n.), ena
flat (a house), KBapxiipa, u
flesh, Miico
234
ENaLISH-BUSSlAN VOCABULARY
flit past, to, MejibK&Tfc
flog, to, C-tHB
floor, nojii, i^
flower, ElB'feT'B, i^
fold, to, CKJI^HMBaXB
following, cjiinyiomifi
food, nnuxa, h; K;^inaHbe, h
foot, HorA, -^h; to go on foot, HTXii
n'feniK6M'i.
for (conj.) liSo, noxoMy qxo; (prep.),
HJiH (gen.); aa (ace.) {of price);
Ha (ace.) {time) ; as lor, qxo
Kac^excH {with no and gen.)
foreigner, Hiiocxp^Hei^'b, nqw
forest, ji-t cb, a
forge, to, KOB^xB
forget, to, aaOHB^xB
form (figure, way), 66pa3Tb, bi
fortieth, copoKOBdfi
fortunately, kb (no) cq^cxiio
forty, cdpoK-B
forwards, Bnepen-B; to go backwards
and forwards, xoflrixB Bsanx. h
BnepeflB
found, to be, HaxoHri;xBCH
found, he, nameji'B
four, qex^pe
four hundred, qex^pecxa
fourteen, qexiipHaauaxB
fourth, qexBepxBiii
fox, jiHc4 ; aHCH^a, bi
France, <Dp^H^iH
free, BdjiBHBifi
French, (JpanuyacKiii ; in French, no-
4)paHuy3CKH
Frenchman, ^pamtysB, bi
Frenchwoman, ^paniiyjKeHKa, h
frequent, to, nocfem^xB
Friday, njixnana
friend, npfrh, -ysBji; noapyra (/.), h;
npiflxejiB (w.), h
frightful, yHtacHbifi
fro, to and, saaa-B h BnepeffB
from (=out of), nai. {gen.); (=away),
oxB {gen.); (=off, since), c-b {gen.);
from behind, ca^HH {gen.)
front of, in, see before
frontier, rpamiLta
frost, Mopda-B, h; hard frost, ciijiBHBifi
MOp63B
full, nbjiHBia
furniture, Me6ejiB (/.)
future {adj.), 6fRymiii
gallows, BxicfejiHi^a, h
game, nrp^, -^bi
garden, c^h-b, li; kitchen -garden, oro-
p6flB, BI
gate, Bop6x^ {n. pi.)
gave, he, najii.
gaze, to, see to look at
general, renep^jiB, bi
generally, o5fciKHOB6HHo
gentle, MiiJiBiii
German, H'tMcnx., mubi ; {adj.), u-tM^ufdA
Germany, TepM^HlH
get up, to, see to rise
ginger-bread, npjiHHKB, h
girl, fl-feBymKa, h; little girl, aiBOiKa, h
give, to, flaB^xB, naxB
given, ji^HBui
glad, paa-B
glad, to be, p&noBaxBCH
glance, to, aarjirf^BiBaxB
glass (drinking), cxaK^n-B, u
glide, to, CKOJiBBiixB
gloom, cyMpaK-B
glove, nepqaxKa, h
gnaw, to, rpBiaxB
go, to, xoh^xb; hxx6 ; -fexaxB (not on foot) ;
to go abroad, -ixaxB aa rpaniiuy ; to
go away, yxoniixB^; to go into,
BxcH^XB^; to go on, ca'fejiaxBCH (=
to take place); to go out, bbixo-
flHTB ^ ; to go through, npoxoniixB ^ ;
nepexoHHXB^; went through, npo-
mejiB; to go up to, noAxomixB^;
HoxoHiixB ^ ; to go to bed, jioH<ikxBCH
cn&xB ; Hxxii cn&xB ; to go upstairs,
Hxxi HaB6px'B
God, Bdr-b, H
gold, 36J10XO
golden, aojiox6tt
good, xop6mifi; n66pBifi
good-bye, ao cBHutelH
good-day, aflpaBCXByiixe
goodness, jio6pox^
goods, B6mb (/.), H ; xoBapB, bi
goose, rycB (?n.), h
government (administrative division of
Russia), rySepniH, h
grand-daughter, BnyiKa, h
grandfather, jt'feji'B, w ; a-feAymKa, h
grandmother, 6^GymKa, h
grandson, snyK'B, h
1 Cf. note to Par. 208.
ENGLISH-KUSSIAN VOCABULARY
235
grass, TpaB^, -^m
great, 6ojii>m6ii; Beji^nitt
greater, 66jii>miK
green, aejienufl
grey, cfepufl
grief, r6pe, A
grieve, to (intr.), ropesATb
groaning, cxdHt, u
ground, see earth
grow, to, pacxA ; Btipacx^Ti.
grown up, B3p6cjii>itt
gruel, K^ma
grumble, to, Bopq^Tt
guard, on, na qac^xi.
H
half, nojiOBiiHa, h
hall, aajia, li; (vestibule), nep6AHHH, in
halt != stand!
hamlet, Hep6BHH, h
hammer, to, kob^tb
hand, pyK^, -^h
hang, to {intr.), bhcIte*
happen, to, cjiyq&TbCH, cjiyqirrtcH ;
H-tjiaXBCH
happiness, cq^cxie
happy, cqacxjiiiBtifl
hard, xsepnuii ; see difficult
hardly, ej^sk
hard-working, xpyHOJHoS^BBiit
harvest, w^xBa, u; to harvest, jKaxi.
have, to, 6uxi> y + gen. of person; hm^xb ;
BJiaaixt; have I ? ecxb jih y Mcnii?
I have to, h HdjiateHt (hA, h6, mi)
he, oHx.
head, rojioB^, r6jioBu; to take into
one's head, see to conceive
health, snopdBBe
healthy, 3op6Bufl
heap, K^qa, h
hear, to, cjnimaxB
heart, c6pAue, k; to learn by heart,
yv&Tb HaH3;^cxi>
heat, to, Tonrixb
heaven, h66o, -6ec^
heavy, xHHtejiHft
height, Bbicox^, drui
help, to, noMor^xfc (dot.)
hence, oxcibfla
her, eA {gen.), ett (dat), ee {ace.)
here, ajifbcb; here is ! boit.!
hero, rep6il, h
heroine, repo^HH, h
hesitate, to, m^ajihtb
hide, to, cKpMB^xfc
high, Bucdrntt
higher, BumiA
highest, Biime Bcer6
him, er6 {gen. and ace.), eyif {dat.)
hind, c^MKa (oji6Hfl)
his, erd
hither, ck)h&
hold, to, HepjKdxfc
hole (=pit), AMa, u
holy, cBHx6fi[
home, at, H6Ma; home {with verbs of
motion), RoudA
honest, q^cxHMtt
hope, to, uafffeHXbCH
horse, ndmajif,, h (/.)
horseback, on, Bepx6Mt
hospital, 6ojibHuixa, bi
host (master), xosiiHH'b, -^CBa
hot, ropjiiiii ; mkpmA
hotter, rnkpne
hour, Hkcb, Tai
house, jidwh, k; little house, ndMUK-b,
H ; peasant house, H36d, -^h
how, KaK-b; KaKiiM-b dSpaaoMi; how are
you ? KaKTb BH nojKHB&exe?
however {conj.), ojmkKom'h; BcexaKH
how many, how much, CK6jibKO
huddled, to sit, see to press (themselves)
humble, noK6pHbitt
humiliating, yHH36xejn>Hbia
hundred, cxo
hundredth, c6xutt
hunt, to, roHHXb ; raaxb
hunting (used for), rdniitt
hurry along, to, Hccxiicb {used of the
river)
hurts, it, Gojiiix-b, Cojihxi.
husband, MyHt-b, bh
hut (wooden house), naQk, -^m
I, H
idle, ji-feHHBMtt
if, 6cjiH
ignorance, Heyq6Hie
ignorant, Heyneraibiti
ill, 6ojiBH6tt ; to be ill, Qoirkji, ; to fall
ill, 3a6oji'txB
illumine, to, ocB-fem^TB; oaapAvb
image, depaa-b, m
immense, see enormous
impossible, HeB03M6H<Hbiit ; it is im-
possible, iiejiB3>i
236
ENGLISH-EUSSIAN VOCABULAEY
in, BT,, BO {prep.)
incessant, nocxoHHHMii; Henpep^BHufi;
SeanpecT&HHBifi
indeed, jx-feiicxBiiTejibHO ; np^Bjta; np^BO
indifferent, paBHoayniHua
industrious, npHJi6>KHHtt; jpyAOjiioSiiBMit
infirmary, 6ojibHikna, m
inhabitant, jKj^xejiB, h (m.)
inquire, to, see to ask
inscribe, to, aanHCbiBaxs
inspect, to, ocM^xpHBaxi.
instead of, BM-tcxo (gen.)
intelligent, ;y^MHwit
interest, yn^cxie
interesting, HHxep6cHBitt
into, Bx, {ace.)
iron, meji-feao ; of iron, mejrk3iahi&
is there ? ecxb jih?
is to, jidnmewb
it, oh6 ; dxo {or masc. or fern, forms)
Italian, HxajibfiHCKitt {ad^.); in Italian,
no-HxajibjiHCKH
Italy, Hx^jiiH
its, er6, eA
J
January, hhb^pi. (w.)
jingle, to, SBeH-fexfc
joke, myxKa, h
jolly, BecejiMii
jug, KyeiimKa, h
July, iibjib (w.)
jump about, to, npiiraxb
June, iibm. (m.)
just (= right), np^BMii; just {with past
tense), x6jibKo mo; just as it
happened, KaKx. p^ax.
keep, to, nepjK^xb; 6ep6qB
key, KJiioHi, li
kind, adeptitt; jiioS^shuM
kindle, to, aajKHraxb
kindness, noSpox^
king, Kop6jib, 1^ (w.)
kitchen, k:^xhh, h; kitchen-garden,
oropoax., M
kitten, koxchokx., -Tiixa
knee, KOJi-feHO, a
knife, hojkx., 6
knit, to, BH3^xi>
knock, to, cxyi^xb
know, to, 3Haxb; to know how to,
yM-fexb; to get to know, yanaB^xi.,
yan^xb
knowledge, an^Hle
known, anaKdMbiii ; weU-known, HaaicT-
HMti
3, KBaCb
labour, see trouble
lad, MOJioA6tt qejioB-tKT.; n^penb (w.),
PHH (= peasant-lad)
lady, n^Ma, m
lake, daepo, k or epa
lament, to, (no)nji^Kaxb
lamp, jikMua, h
land, aeMJiji, -^n ; cxpaM, -^h
landed proprietor or land-owner, noM-fe-
miiKX., H
language, h3ijkx>, A
large, 6ojibm6tt
larger, 66jibmiit
largest of all, 66jibraiit Bcer6
last, nocji-feflHltt; np6mjiMtt (past)
last, at, HaKOHenx.
late, n63Hiii; ( = deceased), noK^iiHuft
late {adv.), n63AHO
later, n63me
latter, nocji^HHbitt
laugh, to, cMtAxbCH; to make laugh,
CM-feinikxb
laughable, CMtmndit
lay, to, KJiacxb
lay down, she, Jierji^
laziness, jii&m> (/.)
lazy, ji-knABhiA
lead, cBHHenx., gen. Hu,k
lead, to, BecxHi
lead astray, to, cSHB&xb
learn, to, yHHXbCH {neut.) {dat.); visyH&rh
{transitive,=to study a subject) ; to
learn by heart, yq^xb Hanaycxb ;
see to get to know
learned, yqeHMfi
learning, yq^nie
least, M^Hbmitt; at (the) least, no
Kp^Hcii M-tpt; not in the least,
COBcfeMX. (He) H'feXX>
leather, K6>Ka
leave, to, noww^xb (=to leave in the
lurch) ; to leave (school), K6HqHXb ;
to leave alone, ocxaBJijixb
left, ji-feButt
left, to be, ocxaB^xbCH
less {adj.), M^ubmiik; {adv.), M^Hbme ;
M^H-fee
lesson, yp6KX,, h; to learn a lesson,
yq]4xb ypdKb
ENGLISH-KUSSIAN VOCABULAKY
237
let, to, nycK&Tb ; let ! nycxt! ; nycK&KI ;
let us ! aaB^tt!
letter, nHci>M6, --a
lie, to (=to tell lies), Jiraxb; (=to
recline), jieat^xb; to lie down,
JIOHtHTbCH
life, HuksHbt H (/.)
lifetime, in his own, bi. cBoeMt B-feK^
lift, to, nOJXHHM^Tb
light, cB-feTi, {gen, sing, a)
light (=not heavy), jiermfl; (=not
dark), cB^xjiMii
light, to, 3aHHr&Tb; to light upon,
nonan^TB
like, to, jiK)6iiTb; Hp^BHTbcn (=to be
pleasing) ; if you like, nomknyH
lion, jieB-b, jibBbi
listen, to, cjiymaxb
literal, GyKB^jibHbcft
little (adj.), M^jieHbKift; m^jiuj^; {adv.),
M^jio ; a little, iieMndro
live, to, HtHXb ; nomHB^xb
living, HtHBdfit
lock, aaMdR-b, MKii
long, HJiHHHuli; ndjiritt {time); long
ago, aaBHiiMT.-AaBH6 ; not long since,
Hefl^BHO
look, to take a, nocMoxpikxb {perf.)
look, to, cMoxpixb ; to look at, cMOxpixb
Ha (ace); nocM&xpMBaxb; Bsrjiii-
nbiBaxb ; to look for = to seek
Lord, the, rocndAb (w.), r6cnoa {gen.
aing.)
lot, a, MH6ro; MHimecxBO, a; (=heap),
Kyqa, h
loud, rp6MKitt
love, jiK)66Bb (/.), gen. sing. 6bA
love, to, jiio6iixb
low (=not high), H^sKia; (=not loud),
tAxiH
lower, Hiiamifi, hAtkb
M
magnificent, BejiHKOJiinHuft
maid(servant), cjiyjK^HKa, h
majority, 66jimaH Hacxb, h
make, to, n^jiaxb ; see to oblige
man, qejioB-feK-b, pi. jiibnH ; Mymqiiiia, m
manner, dSpaax., w; in what manner ?
KaKiiM'b dSpaaoM-b?
many, MH6ro
March, M^px-b
market-place, n;ii6maHb, h (/.)
marrow, Mdan., 6
mask, M&cKa, h
master, xoariHH'b, jiesa
matter, ^-fejio, k; it does not matter,
HHqerd
May, M^tt
may {verb), Moqb (be able); it may be,
M6Htex-b-6brrb
me, MCHji {gen., ace), mh* {dat.)
meadow, Jiyrb, k
means, that, snainxb
measure, M-tpa, w
meat, Miico
mechanically, MaraHH^jibHO
meet, to, Bcxp-feqdxb; till we meet again,
HO CBujikain
meeting, cBiw^ie, h
mention it, don't, ne ctduTb
merchant, Kyn6itb, nmk
merry, Becejiwtt
middle, cpeikHa, m
mighty, Moryqiii; ciijibUhiA
military, Bo^HHuii
milk, MOJioKo
million, MHJiJii6H'b, h
mind, never, HHHer6
mine, Mofi, Mo>i, Moe, Moii
minister, MHHiicxpi>, m
minute, Mnnyxa, m
misfortune, Heci^cxie, a; rdpe, A
modest, cKp^MHuli
modesty, CKp6MHocxb (/.)
moment, mom6hxt., u ; MHH^xa, u
Monday, noHen'&JibHHK'b
money, 6HbrH (/. pi.)
month, M'fecHU'b, m
moon, nynk, -^u
more, SdJi-fee, 66jibme; far more, rop&sno
66jibme
morning, ^xpo, &; in the morning,
^xpoM-b
most, Sdjibrae Bcer6 ; see majority
mother, Maxb, M^xepn; M^xymKa, h
motherly, inaxepjiHCKift
mourn, to, (no)nji^Kaxb ; ropsB^xb
mouse, Miimb, h (/.)
much, MH6ro
mushroom, rpne-b, li
must, I, H fldjiHteiTb, nrnk, etc.; mh*
my, Moii, mojI, Moe, mo A
N
naked, rdjiuft
name, Amh, hmchA (w.)
narrow, :^3Kitt; TicHutt
238
ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY
native tongue, poH6ft aa^Kt
nature, npHp6Ha
near, ejinai. {gen.); 6Jiii3Ko oxi. {gen.)
nearly, ho^itA
necessary, HyHtubifi
neck, m^H, h
need to, I, mh* h^h<ho ; mh* h^o
neighbour, 6jiAKHiii {adj.)
neighbourhood, oKpecTHocxb, u
neither= also not; hh
nephew, njieMjiHHHK'B, h
nest, riitsHd, rn-ksua; to build nests,
BHTb rH-feajia (4=e)
never, HHKor4
.never mind, HHier6
nevertheless, r-hwh ne M^n-fee
new, H6Butt
next= following or future
nice, BKycHbili (to taste) ; mAjimM (dear)
Nicholas, HnKOJiAJi
niece, njieMjiHHHi;a, m
night, Hd'iB, h; by night, ndHbio; good-
night ! (c)noK6ftHofi H6qH!
nine, n^BHTB
nine hundred, neBHTbc6T'b
nineteen, jteBHTHannaxi.
ninety, HeBflH6cTO
no, H-fexi.; He
nobleman, HBopHHjiH'B, hhc
no one, hhkt6
nor, HH
north, c-feBept
nose, HdcB, li
no sort of, HHKaK6ft
not, H-fexi ; He ; hh ; not at all, coBC-feMi.
He (H'fexx>) ; BdBce ne (H'fex'b)
nothing, hhix6; HH'ierd
notice, to, saM-fei^xb
November, hohSpb, i4 (m.)
now, xen6pi>
nowhere, Hnrjrt
nowhere (nowhither), hhkyh^
number, qHCJi6, -^a ; MHomecxBO, a (=a
great many)
numerous, MHoroqiicjieHHLitt
nurse (child's), Hjinn, h
O
oak, H^6i>, ii
oar, Becji6, -a
oats, oBecb, bcbi
object, npenMext, m; B6mi>, h (/.)
oblige, to (= compel), sacxaBJirixb ; to be
obliged, 6uxb ndjuKent, hkhA, etc.
observe, to, nocM^xpHBaxb ; BaMffenaxb
occasion, cjiyqafi, h
occupy, to, saHHM^xb
o'clock, at what ? bi KoidpoMT. qac^?
October, oKxriGpb (w.)
of, H31. (out of; gen.) ; oxt, (from ; gen.)
off, ex. (away from; gen.); ox-b {gen.)
offer, npeHJioHK6Hie, a
office, K0Hx6pa, m
officer, o$HH6px>, w or ^
official, HHH6BHHK'b, H
often, q^cxo
old, cxApMti; old age, cx&pocxb (/.); old
man, cxaptiKx., li ; old woman,
exapyxa, h; days of old, cxapraia
on. Ha {prep.); on to, na {ace.)
once, oflH&Htaw; p^ax.; oflHHX. pAai;
at once, cefiq&cx.; once more, eme
pa3x>
one, onliHx>, hh^, 6, li, 4
only, xojibKO
open, to, oxKpMBaxb
opinion, MH-fenie, h; in my opinion, no
Mdejviy (MH-feHlro)
opportunity, see occasion
opposite, Hp6xHBi. {gen.)
oppressive, HynmHtt (= close)
or, ikjin; jih
order that, in, wr66hi
order, to, Bcaixb {dat.)
orphan, cHpox^, -^u; little orphan,
CHp6xKa, H
other, npyr6ii ; each other, Hpyrx. np^ra ;
to each other, Hpyrx, jipyry
our, ours, Hamx>, a, e, h
out of, H3X. {gen.); out of doors, na
HBop-fe
outside = out of doors
over, Hanx. (above; instr.); o (about;
prep.); qepeax. (through; ace.)
own, CBdft ; c66cxBeHHHrtt
own, to, HM-ixb
ox, 6l>IKX>, H
paU, BeHp6, -a
palace, ji;Bopenx>, piui
pale, Cji-tAHbift; to be (turn) pale,
Gji-feAH-txb
palpate, to, omynHBaxb
paper, 6yMara, h
pardon, to, npomaxb; H3BHH>ixb; pardon
me ! npocxiixe!
part, 'i^cxb, H (/.)
pass, to {of time), npoBOHiixb ; pass by,
Hxx6 m6mo
ENGLISH-EUSSIAN VOCABULARY
239
passed through, he, npomejii.
passport, n^cnopTT., u or k
past {adj.), np6mjibitt; (prep, time),
n^ca-fc (gen.); {adv. or prep, space),
mAmo {gen.)
patience, Tepn-feiiie
paw, Ji^a, m; little paw, Ji^Ka, h
pay, to, njiaxHTb; to pay out, buhji^-
HHBaXb
peace, uikp-b; to make peace between,
see to reconcile
peasant, myskhki,, A ; KpecTBjtiiHH'b, Aue ;
peasant-house, H36a, -^u; peasant-
woman, 645a, bi
pen, nep6, n6pBH
pencil, KapaHH^rai, A
people, jubnii (folks) ; nap^nt, h (nation ;
working-class)
perhaps, M6jKeT'b-6i.iTb
person, jiHa6, -^a
pick up, to, see to lift
picture, KapxikHa, u
piece, Kyc6K'i,, ckh[
pig, CBHHbji, -^H
pink, posoBbitt
pipe, TpyGKa, h
pit, siua, H
piteous, pitiful, mdjiKifi
pity, it is a, jk^jiko
place, MicTO, &
play, to, Hrpaxb
playground (school), yq^JiraijHbift SBopi*
pleasant, npirixnufi: ; M^jibift
please, to (to be pleasing), HpasaxbCH;
if you please, nojK&jiyiicxa
plough (Russian), cox4, -^h
plough, to, nax&xb
point, x6HKa, h
poor, e-feAHbia
position, no3iii5iH, h
possess, to, HM-fexb ; BJianixi. (=have
under command)
possession, BJian-ime, h
possible, B03M6H{Hbitt ; is it possible ?
m6jkho jih? B03M6mHO JiH? ; it is
possible, m6>kho ; is it possible, can
it be ? Hey}K6aH . . . He?
pot (jug), KySiimKa, h
pour, to, jiHXb
poverty, S-feHHOcxb (/.)
powerful, Moryiift
practical, npaKXHHHwti
praise, noxBajia, 6c
praise, to, xBaaiixb
pray, to, MOjniTb
prayer, MOJiiixBa, w ; to say one's
prayers, MoMxbCH
prefer, to, npeHnoiHx&xb
prepare, to, npHroxoBJijixb ; BbiA'^JibiBaTb
presence of, in, npn {prep.)
present {adj.), Hacxojimia
preserve, to, 6ep6Hb
press, see cupboard
press, to, jKaxb : hk&xbch (Voc. XLIII)
pretty, KpaciiBbiJi; xopdmeHbKitt
prevent, to, M-fem^xt
price, atnA, -^m; not at any price,
HH 3a qx6 Ha CB-fex*
prince, KHrfsb, bA
print, a, acx^Mnx, m
prison, xiopbM^, -^m
private, see simple
problem, sandia, h
profit, np:^6Mjn., h (/.)
proposal, npeHJioKCHie, h
proprietor, see landed proprietor
pupil, yneHiiK'b, A (m.); yqeHiii;a, m (/.)
puppy, mendK-b, hkiI or menrixa
put, to, KJiacxb (=lay); to put on,
cx^BHXb (=set, stand); to put on
(clothes), oH'feB&xb ; to put behind
(to pawn), saKJidjibiBaTb ; to put
questions, see to ask
quarrel, see fight
queen, Kopoji6Ba, u
question, Bonp6cT>, u
question, to, cnp&mnBaxi.
quick, cK6pbiit
quiet, cnoK<iiiHHfl; xAxia
R
race (stock), hji^mh, mbh^ {n.)
raft, nji6x'b, h
railway, jKeji-isHaH nop6ra, h
rain, HOjKAb, A (w.)
rains, it, aojkhb naexi.
raise, to, ^oJ^IHM4xb
rare, p-feffKlft
rarely, p-taKo
rate of, at the, no (Par. 183)
rather, cKop'fee; jiyqrae (=in preference
to) ; HOBOJibHo (= fairly)
ravenous, xiimnbili
reach, to, Hoxon:Axb (=go as far as);
HocxHraxb (=get, attain)
reachecl, he, Hom&inb (ho)
240
ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY
read, to, nwt&rb
reading, m^me
ready, roT6Bwtt
really, np^BO ; ntttCTBHTejibHO ; bi
reap, to, jKaxi.
recede, to, ox^BHr^TbCH
receive, to, nojiyq^xb, nojiyqArb
recently, Hejx^BHO
reckon, to, ciht^tb
recognize, to, ysHaB^xb
reconcile, to, mhphtb
red, Kp^cHbiit
regard, to, cMOTp-fexi. ; noiHT^jb (=
esteem); yBajK^xb (= respect)
regret, coKaji-fenie, h; to one's regret,
Kb COHtaJI-feHilO
regular, npaBHJibHHtt
reign, it&pcxBOBaHie ; itdpcxso, a (= em-
pire)
reign, to, ^apcxBOBaxb
rejoice, to, p^HOBaxbCH
relate, to, cK^auBaxb ; paacK^SHBaxb
related, closely, poH6ii
remain, to, ocxaB&xbCH
remaining, ocxajibH6tt
remember, to, n6MHHXb ; BcnoMHHaxb
remote, najicKitt
repair, to, noiHHfixb
repetition, noBxopeHie
represent, to, npeacxaBJijixb; nsoQpajK^rb
representing, HsoSpaHt^iomitt
request, to, npociixb
resolve, to, p-fem^xb, p-femiixb
resound, to, aBCHifexb
respect, to, yBaataxb
rest, to, oxfluxdxb
resurrection, B0CKpec6Hie
rich, Sor&xutt
richer, 6or&ie
riches, Gor^xcxBo
ride, to, -txaxb BepxoMX.
right, np&Bbili ; not right, ne xaKi
ring, KOJIb^6, -^a
ripe, cn-fejiuft ; sp-fejibift
rise, to, BcxaBaxb {=get up); Bocxonlixb
{of the sun) ; noHHHMdxbCH (=go up)
river, p-feK^, -^h
road, Hopdra, h ; nyxb, 6 (m.)^
room, KbMHaxa, h; (private room,
study), Ka6mi6rb, h
rope, BepeBKa, h
rouble, p^6jib, li
round, Kpyrjiuft
row (rank), pAji-h, ix
row, to, rpecxA
rower, rpeS^qb, 6u6i
ruin, riiSejib, h (/.)
rule, n^pcxBOBanie
rule, to, BJiaH-fexb (instr.)
ruler, rocyfl&pb, h (m.)
rummage, to, piixbCH
run, to, S^JK^xb ; to run away, yS-fejKfixb
Russia, PocciH
Russian, pyccKiii ; in Russian, no-p;^ccKH
rye, poHtb (/.)
sabre, c^Sjih, h
sacrifice, jK^pxBa, bi
sad, cK^qHMtt
sail, n^pycT,, &
same, caMbuK
samovar, caMoa&p'b, u
sat down, he, cfejii.
Saturday, cy666xa, h
save, to, cnac&xb
saved, he, cnaci.
say, to, roBopiixb, CKaa^xb
scamp {playfully), majiyni., i^
scarce, p'ijtKili
scarcely, e^Bd
scarlet-fever, cKapaaxrina
school, mKdJia, m; yqHJiHme, a; {adj.),
yqiijimuHbitt ; school-boy, yneHiiK-b,
li; rHMHasAcxx., h; school-girl,
ynemina, m
scrimmage, HpdKa, h
scythe, koc&, -^m
sea, M6pe, i4
season, bp6mh rdna
second, Bxop6tt ; Hpyr6ii
see, to, BiiH-fexb ; BH^^xb
seed, cfeMH, ch^
seek, to, HCKaxb ; to seek out, c:^CKHBai'b
seems, it, K^HtexcH
seldom, p-fenKo
self, ce6H (refl. pron.) ; c^Mt, &, 6, -^h
{emphatic)
sell, to, npoaaBdxb
send, to, nocujiaxb, nocji^xb
September, cenxiiGpb (m.)
servant, cjiyr^, -^h (w.); cjiyat^HKa, h
serve, to, cjiymAxb
^ Decliiie(^ as a fern, noun, but the instr. sing, is nyxeivrb.
ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY
241
service, cjiywCa, ti
set, to, cxaBHTB {trans.) ; aaxoRun, {of
the sun) ; to set about, HaHmik-n, ;
cT^Tfc {perf. verb); to set up,
nocxaBJifiTb
seven, ccmb
seven hundred, ceMBcdx-b
seventeen, ceunkjinaTi,
seventh, cejibrndA
seventy, c^MBaecHxt
severe, cyp6Bbiit ; cxp6ritt
sew, niHXb
shake, to, noxpHcAxi.
share, yq&cxie
sharp, 6cxputt
she, oHd; ^xa
shed, capdlt, h
sheep, oBu^, -bi
shine, to, ciriixb
ship, Kop^6jib, A (w.)
shirt, py6amKa, h
shop-assistant, clerk, npunksnnKb, u
shore, 6epen>, k
short, Kop6xKitt
shorter, Kop6qe
show, to, noKasuBaxb, noKas^xb
shrink, to, waxbCH
shut, to, saKpuB^xb
sick, 6ojibH6a
sickle, cepm>, ik
sickness, Soji-fesHb, h (/.)
side, cxopoH^, -^ m
sigh, to, B3HHX^Xb
sight (spectacle) 3piJ^m^e, a ; (view)
Bl^Kb, bl
sight of, to catch, yBHtH-fexb {perf.)
sign, auawh, h
silly, see stupid
silver, cepe6p6; {adj.), cep66pHHbifl
simple, npocx6ii
simply, np6cxo
since {prep.), c-b {gen.); {adv.), ex.
xtx-b nopx. ; xom^ Hasanx. ( = ago);
long since, yme flasHd; not long
since, HeH&BHo ; {conj.) xaKx> KaKx.
(=a8) ; cx> x-fexTb n6px., KaKx. {of
time)
sing, to, ntxb
sister, cecxp^, -m
sit, to (=to be seated), cnn^xb; to sit
down (=take a seat), cannxbCH
six, mecxb
six hundred, mecxbc6xx.
sixteen, mecxnafluaxb
sixth, mecxdii
sixty, mecxbHec>ixx>
sketch, pHcyHOKX., hkh '
skin, udma, h
sky, h66o, He6eca
sleep, to, cnaxb
sleep, to go to, httA cnaxb ; jioadtTbCH
enaxb ; ycbra^xb
slide, to, cKOJibsiixb
slow, MeHJieHHbrit
slumber, to, npcM^xb ; cnaxb
sly, x6xpbitt
small, M&Jibitt ; M&Jiem.Kiit ; M6jiKltt
( = fine)
smaller, M^Hbmitt
smith, Kyan^ux., i^
smoke, to, KypAxb
smooth, rji^Kitt
snow, cH-ferx., ^ ; snow, to, cH*rb
Hexx>
snow-storm, Mex6jib, h (/.)
so, xaKx,; cxdjibKo; so much, cx6jibKo;
so that, qx66bi
soft, M^rKitt (=not hard); xiixiii (=not
loud)
soldier, cojiHaxx., bi
soldierly, cojindxcKili
solve, to, p-femdxb
some, irtKoxopwtt ( = a certain); KaK6Jt-
HH6yab; H-fecKOJibKie, in (=a few) ;
H-fecKOJibKo {governs g&n.)
something, m6 - jihSo ; qxo - HH6yHb
(= anything) ; qx6-xo
sometimes, HHorH^
somewhat, H-fecKOJibKo ; neMndro
somewhere or other, to, Kyfld-xo
so much, cxdjibKO
son, CI>IHX>, HOBbril
song, n-tcHH, H
soon, cKdpo ; p^no
sooner, paiibme ; CKop-fee
sorrow, r6pe, A
sort of, no, HHKaK6ii; what sort of,
KaKOB^ft (ae^*.) ; KaK6fi
soup, cynx., h; cabbage - soup, ma
sour, KiicjiMtt
south, ibrx.
sow, to, c-inxb
spade, Jionaxa, bi
Spanish, HcnaiicKift
speak, to, roBopiixb ; M6jiBHXb
spectacle, 3pfeJIra^e, a
spend, to (time), npoBOHiixb
spin, to, npjicxb
spite of, in, necMoxpii na {ace.)
242
ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY
spiteful, 3;i6it
splendid, BejinKOJi-fenHua
spoil, to, ndpxHTfc
spring (season), bbchA, ^ti; in spring,
BecH6tt
sprout, to, BHpaCT^TB
square (in a town), njiima^b, h (/.)
stable, KOHibmHH, h
stag, oji6Hb, H (w.)
stair, jiicTHHiia, u
stand, to, cxcjiTi. (intr.); ct^bhtb
(tr.)
stand up, to, BCTaB^xB, bct^tb
start, to, Haimiaxi, ; cxaxi. (= begin);
OTh'hamk'n, (= drive away)
state (polit.), rocyn&pcxBo, a
station (railway), BOKsajit, m
stay, to, see to remain
steal, to, BopoB^xfc; Kpacxi.
stiff, Kp-iuKiti
still {adv.)f see yet; {adj.), xHxitt ;
cnoK6flHott
stirrup, cxp6mh, eM (w.)
stocking, qyjidKt, jikhi
stoke, to, 3axonji>ixb; xomixi.
stone, KaMCHb, mhh (w.); {adj.), k^mbh-
stoop, to, HarnSaxbCH
stop ! ndjiHo!
stork, ^Hcx-b, bi
story, paacKAs-b, m ; cK^SKa, h
stove, n6ib, h (jf.)
strange, cxp^HUbifi; Hymdu (=not one's
own)
stream, pyieii, bii ; p-feK^, -^h
street, yjiHua, m
strict, cxp6rift
stride, to, mardxb
strike, to, ynapaxb; Cnxb; to strike
against, xojiKAxbCH
strive, to, cxapaxbcn
strong, cHJibHwtt ; Kp-fenKiii
study, to, see to learn
stupid, rjiyuMii
such, xaKoit
sudden, BHea^nHMft
suddenly, B^pyn.
sufferer, cxpanajieux,, -^m^uhi
sufficiently, noBdjibHo ; Hocx^xcmo
summer, ji^xo, k; in summer, ji'fexoM'b;
summer (country) residence, aqa,
H
sun, c6jiHne, a
Sunday, BocKpec6m>e, h
superficial, Hapy^mnwii
supper, yjKHH-b, M
suppose, to, nojiar^xb
sure, B'fepHBia
surely, B-tpno; surely not, Heyat^JiH
surface, noB^pxHocxb, h (/.)
survey, to, ocM^xpHBaxb
sweep up, to, nomviex4xb
sweet, cji^HKiti
T
table, cxcji-b, 6 ; at (the) table, aa cto-
Jl6M'b
tail, xBocxTb, ii
tailor, nopxH6ft, lie
take, to, 6paxb; to take away (in a
conveyance), oxBoaiixb; to take off
(down), cHHMaxb; to take place,
cjiyq&xbCH ; n-fejiaxbCH ; to take
thought, 6e3noK6fixbCH
tale, paacK&a'b, m
talk, to, Sojix^xb ; roBop^xb
taU, Bbic6Kiit
tame, j^oM^mHifi
tan (colour), pbijKiitt
tasty, BKycHbdi
taught, to be, see to learn
tea, H^, ik
teach, yqiixb
teacher, yuixejib, A {m.) ; yqiixejn>HHi;a,
BI (/.)
tear, cjieaa, -u
tear, to, nopHB^xb
tea-urn, caMOB^pb, h
tell, to, CK^3HBaxb, CKaa&xb ; Bejiixb
(order)
ten, n6cHXb
terrible, yiK&cauA
territory, BJian-fenie, h
than, HtMb; H^mejiH
thank, to, ejiaronapHXb ; thank you,
cnaciiSo
that {demonstr.), xoxx., xa, xo, xt ; t^xox-b,
5xa, ^xo, ^xh; {relative), Koxopwft ;
Kxo ; ixo; {conj.), ixo ; qx66u; that
is, xo ecxb ; SH&iHXb
that is why, boxx, noqeM^
thee {ace. and gen.), xe6ji; {dat.),
xeS-fe
their, theirs, hxx.
them, HXb, HMX., etc.
then, xorfl^ (=at that time); noxdMX.
(= after that)
thence, oxxy^na
there, xamx,; there is or are, ecxb
ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY
243
therefore, noxoMiy', no^xoMy
there is ! there are ! botb!
they, ohA {m. and n.) ; oH-fe (/.)
thick, T^jicTufi
thief, Bdpt, u (dfit)
thin, T6HKitt ; HK^sKifi {of fluids)
thine, see thy
thing, B6mi>, H (/.); npeHM^xt, u;
H-fejio, &
think, to, ny'Maxi.
third, xp6xifi[
thirteen, xprni^qaxB
thirty, xpiijtqaxt
this, ^xox-B, 5xa, i5xo, ^xh
thither, xya^
thou, xM
though, xoxji 6h
thousand, xiiicH^a
three, xpn; three hundred, xpricxa
through, q^peai. (ace.) ; cKBoab (ace.)
through, went, nporaeji-B
throw, to, 6poc&xi>, 6p6cHXE.
thunder, rp^Mt, u; to thunder,
rpcM-fexb
thunderstorm, rpoa^, -^u
Thursday, qexB^prB, A
thus, xaKi.; xaKiiMt 66paaowb
thy, xB6ii, oA, oe, oik
till, o (gen.); till now, ho chxi. ndpt;
(co?y.), noK^ . . He
time, bp6mh, en^ (w.) p^s-b, iJi (=occa-
sion); it is time, nopd; at the
present time, bx, Hacxorfmee bp6mh ;
at a time (=at one stroke), cp^ay;
what time is it ? KoxdptEtt qacx,?
every time, BcriKifl: paa-b ; at times,
waoTjik
time of, in the, npn {prep.)
timid, p66Kitt
tinkle, to, 3Beirfexi>
to, Bi. {ace.) (=into); kx. {dat.) (=to-
wards); ho {gen.) (=as far as);
Ha {ace.) (=on to); hjih {gen.)
(=for) ; dative case of noun
tobacco, xaC^KT., ik
to-day, cerdHHH
together, BM-fecx*
to-morrow, a^Bxpa
tongue, HsiiKt, li
too, cjiAmKOMt; too much or many,
cji^mKOM'b MHbro; too ( = also),
X&KJKe
top (= highest part), B6pxt, 6
torment, to, Myqnxb
torrents, in, pyqteMx. ; pyqBrfMH
torture, to, m^hhxi.
touch, to, xp6raxi>
towards, kx. {dat); HaBcxp-iqy
town, rdpofl-i., k
townsman, small, Mimantoi., ^ne
traverse, to, npoxoHHxi
treasure, kji^x., u
tree, afepcBo, & or ^bbh
tremble, to, npoHt^xi.
trembling, HpojK^ift
tributary, npHx6KX>, h
trouble, xpym, ^
true, B-kpuuA
truly, Bnp4By; np^BO
truth, np^Bna
try, to, cxap&xBCH
Tuesday, bx6phhkx,
turn ill, to=to fall ill, see ill
turn pale, to, CjifeflH-fexi.
twelve, HB'feH&mtaxb
twenty, ^B^ixaxB
twice, Hsa p^aa ;
twine, to, bhxi.
two, HBa, HB-fe
two hundred, SBicxH
U
ugly, HeKpac^BMil
uncle, nfiH, h (w.)
under, hohx, {instr. or ace.)
understand, to, noHHMdxb ; yMi&xb
understanding, yM-fenie
understood, that is (=goes without say-
ing), paayM-texen
undress, to {intr.), paan-feB^xbCH
unfortunate, Hec^acxHtitt
unfortunately, kx. coHtaji'^HiH)
unhappiness, Hecq^cxie, h
unhappy, Hecq^cxHufi:
unknown, He3HaK6ivii>Ltt
unpleasant, HenpiHXHutt
until, see till
up, o {gen.) (=as far as) ; no {dat.)
(=over, along); {adv.), BBepxt;
HaBdpxx.; up and down, Baaax. h
Bnepefli.
upright, npHM6fi ; npaBmkBufi
uprightness, npaBHriBocxb
upstairs, nas^px-B {with verb of motion)
use, to, ynoxpeSjiiixb
used to, rendered simply by the Im-
perfective Past or by this tense
followed by 6mb^jio
useful, nofl63Huii
244
ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY
usual, oSblKHOB^HHbltt
usually, 06UKHOB6HHO
utensils, see vessels
utmost, Kp^Hifi
vanquish, to, noC-fejKaaTfc
verst, BcpcT^, "m
very (adj.), c^MLiii; (adv.) dqera.
vessels (= utensils), noc^aa (/. collect.)
vice, nopdR-B, h
victim, jK^pxaa, u
view, B^jTB, fci
village, ceji6, -a ; nep^BHH, h (without a
church) ; village community, Mfpt,
u
virtue (quality), K^qecxBo, a
visible, BiiaHutt ; oqeBiiflHwtt
visit, to, nocfemaxb
voice, r6jioc'b, A
W
wait, to, }KaTfc
walk, to, xoflHTb ; htth ; ryjirixb ; to go
for a walk, u-nik ryjiiixB
wall, CT^Hkf -^u
wander, to, Spo^iixi.
want, tOj see to wish, to seek
war, BOiiH^, -^m
wares, see goods
warlike, BoiiHcxBemiMJi
warm, xenjibiii ; ropriiiii (=hot)
was, SiiiJix., jia, JIG
wash (oneself), to, yMHsAxbCH
water, boa^, -bi
water, to, nojiHB^xB
wave, BojiH^, -^bi
way, Hop6ra, h ; nyxt, 6 {m.)
we, Mbi
weak, cji^Sbitt
wealth, GoraxcxBo
wearisome, CKymbiii
weather, nordfla
weave, to, xKaxb ; bhxb (wind)
Wednesday, cpcH^
week, neaijiH, h
weep, to, nji^KaxB
well, xopomd; ny; see healthy
well-known, HSBicxHbift
went, xowkrn, ; meax., nomejix>, see
to go
were, Sijjih
West, a^aax.
wet, M6KpBifi
wet through, to be, M6KHyxB
what {adj.), Koxopwii ( = which); KaK6tt
(=what sort of?); (pron.), qxo ;
(=that which) qx6 ; xo, qxo
wheat, nmeniiua
when, Korfl^ ; xorad KaKx>
whence, oxKyna ; oxHer6
where, ra-fc; nowhere, Hnrni; every-
where, noBcibHy, eeaa-fe; where-
with(al), q-feM'B
whether, jih (Par. 228)
which, Kox6pBEtt {adj. and pron.); ixo
{pron.)
whisper, to, menx^xB
white, e-fejiwtt
whither, Kya^
who, Kxo ; Kox6pbiii
whole, u'fejibitt; BecB, boh, bcc, Bcife
whom, Kor6, KOMy, etc.
whose ? nePi, hbh, iBe, hbh; whose, gen.
of KOXdpblfl
why, uo^euif ; aaq-feivix. ; oxHer6 ; qxo
wide, miip6Kifi
wider, miipe
wife, meHk, -u
wild, n^Kitt; wild beast as-tpB, h
(m.)
wind, B-txepi, xpbi or &
wind, to, BHXB
window, oitud, -^a
wine, Bmi6, -^a
winter, aHM^, -^h; in'winter, aHM6tt
wish, to, Hteji^xB ; xox-fexB
with, c-B {instr.); y {gen.); {from) on,
{gen.)
without, 6eax, {gen.)
wolf, B6aKX>, H (6bx>)
woman, jK^Hmnna, u; old woman,
cxapyxa, h
wonderful, yauBiixejiBHBEtt
wood (=fore8t), ji-fecx., a; (= timber),
n6peBo ; (=fuel), apoB^ {n. pi.)
wooden, aepeBjimibrti
work, pa66xa, bi; work, to, pa66xaxB
working (day), pa66qitt
workman, pa66xHHKB, h; pa66qitt
world, CBixT.; Mipx,, li; acMJiri, -^h
worse ^
worst /xyflmm, xyjKe
worth, to be, cxohxb; it is not worth
mentioning, ne cxduxx, ; Hii^erd
would, see Par. 199;= wished
wound, pana, bi
wounded, p^eHBifl
i
ENGLISH-EUSSIAN VOCABULARY
245
write, to, nnc^xb
wrong, Henp&Bufi; in the wrong way;
He T&Kt
yard, jtBopi, iSi
year, r6Hi,, & ; Ji-fexo, k. After 1, 2, 3, 4
use roHt, rdjia ; after 5, 6, 7, etc.
in nominative or accusative use
yellow, mernhiA
yes, a
yesterday, sqepa
yesterday, the day before, TpfexBHro
HHH
yet (adJv.), em6; {conj.)y osb&ko; hc-
cMOxpji Ha dxo
you, Bu, Bacb, e<c.
young, MOJiondtt
younger, MJi^Hiniit ; ueHbrndA
your, yours, B^mi,, a, e, h
INDEX
The figures refer to the paragraphs in the text, the Roman numerak to those
of the Introduction.
Accent, importance of, vi, xxi
Accusative, meaning of, 16
after prepositions, 60, 100, 127, 160,183
animate and inanimate, 16, 74, 84
neuter, 74, 84
in time phrases, 128, 181
Adverbs in o, e, 189, 237, 238
of quantity, Voc. XL
Adjectives :
accentuation, 6, 191, 192, 237, 238
declension, see Declension
comparative, attributive, 195
attributive, exceptional forms,
195 {a)
predicative, 192
in e, 193, 238
predicative form, 187-190, 237, 238
use of, 69 (note), 116, 189
superlative, 186, 196, 197
Animate and inanimate, see Accusative
Approximate number, 181 (c), 182
Aspects, see Verb
GbFTb, p. 34
Bccb, 106
BT., 60, 61, 128, 181 (c)
BBi (pronoun) written with
capital, 80 (note)
BH, prefix in perfective verbs,
always accented, Voc. LVI
(note)
Consonants, voiced and voiceless, v
Dash, use of, 8
Date, to express the, 181
Dative, meaning of, 20
after prepositions, 39, 87
after verb * command,' 214; * believe,'
223 (2); *help,' Voc. LIII (2);
*leam,' Voc. LVI(l)
Declension of adjectives, 88, 89, 92, 94
of predicative adjective, 187, 188
Declension of nouns :
masculine, 43, 133-136
names of young animals, 229
of peoples and classes, 230
feminine, 53, 64, 86, 151-153
in iH, PoccfH, Voc. XXXIV, 152(2)
in B, 64, 86, 136
neuter, 43, 172, 173, 219, 229
in ie, 43 (note), 173
Declension of cardinal numerals, 176,177
of ordinal numerals, 167
Declension of pronouns, see Summary,
p. 33
Dentals, xvi
HHTH, 229
HO, 99
e dropped or interpolated in
declension, 14 (note), 153,
172, 190, 237
ecTi>, ecTfc jiH, Voc. XIII
' from,' translation of, 98
3a, 44, 115, Voc. XXXIX
8a as prefix, Voc. LIII (note)
Gender, 3, 66
Genitive :
meaning, 19
after numerals, 27, 138, 179, 180
after prepositions, 70
after adverbs of quantity, 30, Voc. XL
after comparative, 194
in negative phrases, 28, 29
partitive, 31
plural masculine, 133-136
feminine, 151-153
neuter, 172, 173
ending in y, Voc. XXVII (note),
Voc. XLII, Voc. XLIII
after y with Cmtb, 24
246
INDEX
247
* go,' translation of, 40, 97, 160
Greetings, Ex. XXXV. A (13), 216
Gutturals, xv
* have,' translation of, 24
Hours of the day, 181 (c)
iii=also, Ex. XVI A (11)
Hs-b, 98
Imperative, see Verb
Instrumental case :
after prepositions, 44
after verbs, 69, 185
exceptional form in plural. 111
of means, 67
of manner, 115
in time phrases, 68
Interrogative forms, see Verb
Irregular verb, see Verb
ji interpolated in 1st singular
of verbs, 141 (note 2)
Labials, xiv
' let him (them),' 215
' let us,' 214, 231
Liquids, xx
Modification of verb stem, 141 (note),
142, 158, 169, 201, 207, 232
H prefixed in declension, 25
Ha, 60, 61, 128
Hafli,, 127
Nasals, xix
Negative, 8, note to Ex. I, 217
double, Voc. Ill and note
Nouns :
accentuation, 48-60, 54, 75, 112
declension, see Declension
plurals, 72-76
lists, 77-79, 117-119
genitive, see Genitive
fffert, 29
Numerals :
approximate number, 182
cardinals 1-10, 20, see 138, and Voc.
XXXVI
11-19, see 148
30-100, see 150
hundreds, thousands, 155
declension, see Declension
distributive, 183
ordinals, l8t-19th, 166
20th-100th, 171
200th upwards, 184
Numerals continued
time of day, 181 (c)
with genitive singular, 138, 179
with genitive plural, 138, 180
o or e dropped or interpolated,
39 (note), Voc. XIX (note),
153, 172, 190, 237
ojniH-B, 107 (6), 178
Orthography, general rule of, 91
oTb, 98
Passive voice, see Verb
Peoples, classes, names of, 230
ndpejTi., 44 (note 3), Voc. IX
Phonetic symbols, iii
transcript, 194-209
iiHTi. and n-fexb, 165
no, 87, 183
no as prefix, 207
nojri., 127
Prepositions, list of, 236
Prepositions in o or i, 39 (note)
Prepositional Case :
occurrence, 45
in time phrases, 128, 181 (6)
in^, 46
npn, 45
npH as prefix, 62, 63, 97
npo, 100
npo as prefix, 62
Pronouns, see Summary, p. 33
Pronunciation, ee Introduction, especi-
ally iv and vi
PoccfH, Voc. XXXIV
Salutations, 216
caMBitt and caMt, 107 (c), 186,
235
CBott, 104, 109
Script, pp. 190-193
ceft, 106
Sibilants, xvii, xviii
Signs, hard and soft, xiii
Suggestions for use of this book, p. 36
Summary of Regular Forms, pp. 32-35
CB, CO, 39 (note), 44, 98
* than,' 194
' they ' (indefinite), 101, 102
Time phrases in, on, at, by, 68, 128,
160, 181
date, 181
TOTB, 107 (a)
248
INDEX
Verbs :
see Summary of Regular Forms, pp.
34-35
actual and potential (or definite and
indefinite, or concrete and ab-
stract), 40, 159, 208 (note)
aspects, 199 et seq.
changes in stem, 141 (note), 142, 158,
169, 201, 207
classification, 129, 130; 202, 203;
208 (note)
conditional, 199, 223'
dative, governing, 214, 223 (2) (ex-
amples), Voc. LIII (2), LVI (1)
of fearing, 233, 234
future :
6HTb, 123
imperfective, 124
perfective, 160, 204
of hoping, 233
imperative, formation of, 210-218
first plural, 214
imperfective and perfective, 217
negative, 217
expressed by infinitive, 218
imperfective aspect, 202
imperfective aspect derived from per-
fective, 232
indefinite 3rd plural, 101, 102
indicating a state of rest and cognate
verbs describing an act or
motion, 60, 143
infinitive, 32, 33, 41
irregular forms, 158, 239
as imperative, 218
use of, 33, 41, 218
instrumental, governing, 69, 185
interrogative forms, 12, 13, 24 (c),
228, Voc. XV and XLIV
irregular, 156, 220-222, 231, 239
n interpolated in 1st singular
present, 141 (note)
in OBaxB, CBaxb, 225
omission of verb, 7
participles, see Summary, p. 35
passive voice, see Summary, p. 35, and
Pars. 80 (a), 102, 139 (6), 157 (a)
past tense :
form, 32, 57, 58, 80, 161
without ji in masculine, 96
Verbs continued
past tense :
irregular forms, 96, 239
with 6h, 199, 223
with HToG-b, 200, 233
perfective aspect, 203
formation of, 206, 207
forms of, illustrated in Vocs. LII-
LVI
illustrative passages, following
209
plural for singular, Ex. XXVII B
(note)
prefixes, effect of, 208
present tense :
in aio, aemb, 131
-fero, Hfeeuib, 131
f, -emfa, 157
bK), berab, 162
-y or -f, -^emb, 168
H), limb, 141
-^K), -^Hmb, 145
K), -^Hmb, 149
-yio, yemb, 225
irregular forms, 220, 221, 222,
231, 239
present for English past, 144, 227
reflexive verb, 37
spelling, 132
for passive, 102 (6)
scheme of Russian verb, 205
tense sequence, 144, 227
tense systems, 202, 203
of wislong, 224
m -HBaxb, 226, 232
' there is,' Voc. II, XIII
Vowels, hard and soft, iv, viii-xii
' whether,' 228
y with genitive and 6HTb=
to have, 24
Young of animals, declension of names
of, 229
XDjoiTb and HTni, 40, 159, 208
(note)
qeii, 106
^TOTb, 107
14 DAY USE
RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED
LOAN DEPT.
This book is due on the last date stamped below, or
on the date to which renewed.
Renewed books are subject to immediate recall
'9H
'^^'62KB
IN STACKS
OCT 31962
W
wETC^D LD
^B=-tt
^i^tWf
/D La
APHj.3'6/-^
gJB^SLPi
W
23'G5-lPNl
' T:C70978]0)476B
UOAN dEPT.
^
fS630
6
m 8'fi9-9Pf^
LOAM
DPT.
UiSiBI
a\98^
^
SEP
a
joeral Library
Uiffversity of California
Berkeley _a
U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES
ft- -f *
i^J290667
W
THE UNIVERSITY OF CAUFORNIA UBRARY
u